Salt Creative Blog

The Next 2005 Moment: Why Small Businesses Need to Be Findable by AI Agents

Tue, 21 Apr 2026 20:17:22 GMT

Home | SEO Intelligence | Why Small Businesses Need to Be Findable by AI Agents

There's a question worth sitting with for a moment.

When was the last time you actually visited a business's website to decide if they were right for you? Not to confirm something you already believed — but to genuinely discover them, browse around, and make up your mind? For most people, that behavior is already fading. We ask friends. We read summaries. We let Google tell us the answer. We're already outsourcing the searching.

Now imagine the thing doing the searching isn't Google. It's an AI agent — working on behalf of your potential customer, querying dozens of businesses simultaneously, synthesizing the results, and handing back a shortlist. No browser. No scrolling. No homepage hero image. Just a machine, reading your data, deciding if you qualify.

This is where the internet is going. And most businesses aren't ready for it.

The 2005 Moment Nobody Sees Coming

In 2005, not having a website wasn't just old-fashioned — it was a business decision with consequences. Customers were moving online and businesses that didn't follow lost ground they never recovered. Some owners adapted fast. Others looked up one day and wondered where their phone had stopped ringing.

We are at that moment again. It just doesn't look the same, so most people aren't recognizing it.

The technology is called MCP — Model Context Protocol . Introduced by Anthropic in late 2024, it's now backed by Google, Microsoft, and OpenAI. In plain terms, it's a standard that lets AI agents query your business's data directly — your services, pricing, availability, portfolio, proof — without a human ever visiting your site. Think of it as a USB port for AI. If your business has one, agents can plug in and read you. If you don't, you're invisible to them.

The businesses that build this infrastructure now will have the same advantage early website owners had in 2005. The ones who wait will ask the same question those people asked: why did the leads stop coming?

The Deer in the Headlights Problem

Here's what makes this shift harder than the last one. Human beings are habit-forming. We find something that works, we build our identity around it, and then we defend it — not always with logic, but with the very human need to feel in control and secure.

A business owner who spent ten years building a beautiful, high-converting website optimized for Google has earned the right to feel good about that. The problem is that past success becomes a reason not to move. The investment feels like proof. We have a great website. We rank well. This is fine.

And then the headlights appear.

Some people adapt when that happens. They feel the discomfort, they ask questions, they learn something new. Others freeze — not out of laziness, but out of something closer to fear. The change feels too large, too technical, too far outside what made them successful before. They wait for certainty that never comes, and the window closes.

The businesses most at risk aren't the ones with bad websites. They're the ones with good websites, who built their entire customer acquisition strategy around human visitors — and never had a reason to think about anything else.

What Happens to Your Traffic When Nobody Visits

Here's a scenario worth thinking through.

Your three biggest local competitors all have structured data exposed to AI agents. Their services, specialties, pricing ranges, client types, and testimonials are all machine-readable. When someone's AI assistant looks for a web design agency in your city, it queries all three, synthesizes the results, and sends back a recommendation — before the buyer has opened a single browser tab.

You don't show up. Not because you did anything wrong. Not because your work is worse. Because you weren't in a format the machine could read.

You might wonder: where does that lead even go? In the short term, probably a phone call or an email — old channels, familiar channels. The buyer found you some other way, or they didn't find you at all. The problem is you won't know what you missed. There's no analytics dashboard for searches that never reached your site. The absence is invisible, and invisible problems don't get solved.

What You Actually Do About It

This is the part where most articles tell you to hire a developer and spend $20,000. That's not the answer.

The honest first step is simpler: begin the conversation with someone who has experience and is also a good teacher. Find a person or a resource — human or AI — that can walk you through what this technology actually is, what it requires, and what it means for your specific business. Ask questions. Don't perform confidence you don't have. The businesses building this infrastructure right now learned it the same way you'd learn it: one question at a time.

AI models themselves are a reasonable place to start. The process of understanding how to become machine-findable — asking questions, building structure, exposing data clearly — is itself a kind of education in how these systems think. You learn by doing, and the doing doesn't have to be expensive to be meaningful.

What Your Website Actually Becomes

None of this means your website disappears. It means its job changes.

In five years, your website probably won't be where people discover you. AI agents will handle discovery. What your website becomes — and what it needs to do really well — is a trust platform. The place where someone lands after they've already been told you're worth considering. It needs to show the work. Real examples, real clients, real results. It needs testimonials that don't feel templated. It needs to answer the questions a buyer has when they're close to a decision, not when they're starting their search.

The website closes the deal. The machine gets you in the room.

That's a different design problem than the one most businesses have been solving. And it's worth starting to think about now — before the headlights arrive.

A question to end on: If an AI agent queried your business today, what would it find? If the answer is "nothing structured," that's your starting point.

Salt Creative helps small businesses understand what machine-findability means for their market, their website, and their growth strategy. Start a conversation →

Your MCP Tools Don't Need Anthropic: The No-Terminal Way to Connect Gemini

Thu, 16 Apr 2026 06:40:37 GMT

Home | SEO Intelligence | Your MCP Tools Don't Need Anthropic

If you've built a custom MCP server, you've probably structured your entire workflow around Claude. The tools live on the server. The context files live on the server. The data lives on the server. Claude is just the interface that calls them.

Which means when Anthropic has an outage — and they do — your entire workflow goes dark. Not because your server is down. Because the one client you built for is unavailable.

The fix turned out to be simpler than expected: Google's Gemini API supports the same MCP protocol. You can connect a second AI client to your existing server in about five minutes, no terminal commands required.

How Everyone Else Is Doing This (And Why It's More Work)

Most guides for connecting Gemini to an MCP server send you down the Gemini CLI path. The typical setup looks like this:

npm install -g @google/gemini-cli

gemini mcp add my-server http://your-server:8000/mcp

From there you're managing a ~/.gemini/settings.json file, dealing with OAuth flows, and running everything through a terminal session. The Docker MCP Toolkit approach is similar — you need Docker Desktop installed, a separate MCP gateway running, and a CLI command to wire it together.

These setups work. But they add infrastructure that doesn't need to exist if you're already working in VS Code.

The Simpler Path: Continue + config.yaml

Continue is a VS Code extension that connects directly to any MCP server over streamable-http. No CLI. No npm install. No Docker dependency. Just a YAML file.

Step 1: Install Continue

VS Code Extensions panel → search "Continue" → install.

Step 2: Edit ~/.continue/config.yaml

Add your MCP server and Gemini models. The entire config is one file:

models:

- name: Gemini 2.5 Flash

model: gemini-2.5-flash

provider: gemini

apiKey: YOUR_GEMINI_API_KEY

- name: Gemini 2.5 Flash Lite

provider: gemini

model: gemini-2.5-flash-lite

apiKey: YOUR_GEMINI_API_KEY

mcpServers:

- name: your-mcp-server

url: http://your-server-ip:8000/mcp

type: streamable-http

Step 3: Reload VS Code

Cmd+Shift+P → Developer: Reload Window

That's it. Your full MCP tool suite is now available from the Continue chat panel with Gemini as the orchestrator.

Get your API key at aistudio.google.com. Free tier works for testing. Enable billing for production use — the paid tier rate limits are orders of magnitude higher and cost almost nothing at normal usage volumes.

Why This Works: Your Intelligence Lives on the Server

Most people think of the AI model as the intelligent part of the system. In an MCP setup, that framing is backwards.

Your tools, memory, context files, and agents all live on the MCP server. The model is an orchestrator — it decides which tools to call and in what order, then synthesizes the results. The actual domain intelligence is distributed across your server infrastructure.

This means the model is more replaceable than it seems. As long as a client supports MCP tool-calling and can reason about sequencing, it can drive the same workflow. Claude, Gemini, or anything else.

The practical upside: when Anthropic has downtime, your data tools stay available. You switch clients, not workflows.

What Gemini Flash Actually Handles Well

In practice, Gemini Flash handles MCP tool orchestration cleanly. It:

Calls tools in the correct sequence without explicit instruction
Checks for existing records before writing new ones
Filters and summarizes structured tool output accurately
Handles multi-step workflows — retrieve, analyze, write — without losing thread

Flash Lite is noticeably faster and sufficient for most retrieval and summarization tasks. Flash is the better choice when reasoning across multiple tool outputs simultaneously.

The Gemma Problem (And Why It Stays Server-Side)

While setting this up, we tried adding gemma-3-27b-it directly as a Continue model through the same Gemini API. The model resolves correctly — it's a valid endpoint — but hits a hard 15,000 token/minute cap regardless of whether your account is on free or paid tier.

This is a model-level limit Google applies to Gemma specifically. Upgrading billing doesn't change it.

For now, Gemma is better kept as a server-side tool — called programmatically through your MCP server where you control the call rate — rather than used as an orchestrating client. Flash and Flash Lite don't have this limitation.

One Small Detail: Use a Separate API Key

If your MCP server already calls the Gemini API for server-side tasks, your Continue client will share the same quota. Create a second API key at aistudio.google.com and assign it to your Continue config — different project, separate quota. The keys are free.

# Continue config — dedicated key

models:

- name: Gemini 2.5 Flash

provider: gemini

model: gemini-2.5-flash

apiKey: YOUR_CONTINUE_ONLY_KEY

What Continue Can't Do

Continue with Gemini has full access to your MCP tools. What it doesn't have is everything outside the MCP protocol — SSH access, file editing, bash execution. Those remain Claude Code territory.

In practice the split is clean:

Tool calls, data queries, writes to external services → Continue + Gemini
Server config, file edits, deployments → Claude Code

Continue becomes your always-available lightweight client for data work. Claude Code handles infrastructure changes.

The Bottom Line

The Gemini CLI approach works, but it trades simplicity for flexibility most developers don't need. If you're already in VS Code and already have an MCP server running, a twelve-line YAML edit gets you a fully functional second client without touching the terminal.

Your MCP server already abstracts your tools away from any single provider. This just completes that architecture on the client side.

More Than 4 in 10 Small Business Websites Is Accidentally Telling Google It's About a Person

Wed, 15 Apr 2026 01:06:21 GMT

A study of 85 SMB homepages reveals a widespread — and almost entirely invisible — entity classification problem that may be suppressing local search visibility.

There is a word sitting near the top of thousands of small business websites right now. It is not a proper name. It is not a job title. It is not anything a human reader would flag as unusual.

Google's entity analysis is classifying it as a person.

That misclassification — quiet, automatic, invisible to anyone without access to entity-level analysis tools — is likely suppressing the local search visibility of the website it lives on. And based on a study of 85 valid small business homepages conducted across the construction, trades, and functional medicine verticals, it happens on more than 4 in 10 of them.

What Entity Analysis Is and Why It Matters

When Google processes a webpage, it doesn't just read words — it attempts to understand what the page is about. One of the mechanisms it uses is entity analysis: identifying the people, places, organizations, and concepts on the page and assigning each one a salience score, which represents how central that entity is to the overall meaning of the document.

Salience is a finite budget. The scores across all entities on a page sum to roughly 1.0. When one entity captures more, the others capture less.

For a local business, this has a direct implication: the geographic entity (a city, a region, a market) needs to be well-represented in the top salience positions for the page to clearly signal local relevance. So does the organization or service category. When something else — especially a person — claims an outsized share of that budget, the signals that matter for local search can get crowded out entirely.

This is what the study set out to measure.

The PERSON Entity Trap

The PERSON Entity Trap occurs when a webpage contains language that causes Google's entity analysis to classify a non-person entity as a PERSON type — triggering a salience draw that the site's owner never intended.

There are two distinct mechanisms:

The Physician-as-Brand mechanism occurs when a solo practitioner or founder's name is embedded throughout a homepage — in the domain, the title tag, the H1, and the body copy. The site intends to personal-brand around that individual. The unintended consequence is that the person consumes the majority of the page's entity budget, leaving little room for service and location signals.

The most extreme example in this study: a functional medicine practice whose homepage assigned 81.7% of its total entity salience to the founding physician's name — leaving a combined 18.3% for every other signal on the page, including the city it serves.

The Generic Language mechanism is the more surprising finding. It occurs when ordinary, unremarkable copy — the kind that appears on thousands of websites — contains words that entity analysis classifies as PERSON type.

Examples confirmed across the study:

"our people" and "put our people first"
"our patients saw improvement"
"builders who care about craft"
"a team of experts"
"employees are our strongest resource"
"clinicians who listen"
"you are the central partner in your healing"
"whether you are an adult or child"
"We Are Builders" (headline format)

None of these phrases would raise a flag in a copywriting review. They are the standard vocabulary of service business marketing copy. But entity analysis does not read them the way a human does — it reads them the way a classifier does. And a classifier trained on patterns across the entire web has learned that "patients," "builders," "clinicians," and "employees" are most often references to people.

The Data: What 85 Valid Sites Showed

The study analyzed the homepages of 85 valid small business websites across the construction, trades, and functional medicine sectors. Sites that returned no readable body copy — due to JavaScript rendering, maintenance pages, or spam injection — were excluded from the count and replaced where possible. All analysis was performed on homepage copy only, using homepage as the consistent comparison point across all sites.

Finding 1: More Than 4 in 10 Sites Has a PERSON Entity in Its Top Three

Across the full dataset, 41% of sites had a PERSON entity classified in their top three entity signals — in cases where that entity was not, in fact, a named person intentionally featured on the page.

In plain terms: more than 4 in 10 small business homepages is sending a signal that the page is, in some meaningful part, about a person — when the business intends to signal a service, a location, or an organization.

Finding 2: In Most of Those Cases, the Location Signal Disappears Entirely

This is the mechanism that connects the PERSON Entity Trap to search visibility outcomes.

Of the sites where a PERSON entity appeared in the top three, 63% had no location entity in their top three signals at all. The geographic entity — the city or region the business serves — had been pushed out of the top positions entirely.

This is what the study terms Salience Budget Collapse : the condition where PERSON entity misclassification consumes enough of the page's entity budget that the local relevance signal fails to surface in the top results of entity analysis.

For a local business that depends on geographic search visibility, this is a structural problem. The page is being understood by entity classifiers as being about a person or a group of people — not a roofing company in Dallas, not an integrative medicine practice in Chicago, not a plumber in Denver.

Finding 3: Two Distinct Mechanisms Drive the Trap

The PERSON Entity Trap does not have a single cause. Across the dataset, two distinct mechanisms were responsible — and they require different fixes.

The Named Individual mechanism occurs when a founder, physician, or practitioner is featured prominently in the domain, title tag, H1, and body copy simultaneously. The site intends to build personal brand equity. The unintended result is that the individual consumes the majority of the page's entity budget, crowding out service and location signals. The most severe case in the study: a single named individual absorbing 81.7% of total page salience — leaving the city the business serves with a score of 0.037.

The Generic Language mechanism is the more surprising finding and the more widespread one. It occurs when standard marketing copy — the vocabulary of virtually every service business website — contains words that entity analysis consistently classifies as PERSON type. Several sites showed this at extreme salience: one business whose homepage opened with "We Are Builders" had the word builders absorbing 64.1% of total page salience. Another had the phrase "our patients" repeated four times across the homepage, accumulating to a 49.0% PERSON salience score through repetition alone.

The generic language mechanism matters most for this study because it is invisible. A named individual on a homepage is a deliberate choice. Generic language like "our people," "our clients," or "a team of experts" is not — it is the default vocabulary of service business marketing, present on thousands of sites with no awareness of its entity classification consequences.

The highest PERSON salience score in the entire dataset came from a functional medicine site whose domain was the physician's name, whose title tag was "Dr. [Name] is your Functional Medicine Specialist in [City]," and whose body copy referenced the physician throughout. Entity analysis assigned 81.7% of total page salience to that single person — leaving the city name with a salience score of 0.037.

The city was present on the page. It simply didn't register.

Beyond the PERSON Trap: Other Entity Misclassification Patterns

The study surfaced several additional patterns worth noting separately from the primary PERSON Entity Trap finding.

Category Misclassification Without a PERSON Trap

Several sites had no PERSON entity in their top signals, but their primary category classification was significantly off-target. A general contractor whose homepage led with "Building Relationships" language was classified by entity analysis under /People & Society/Family & Relationships — not /Business & Industrial/Construction. The page's relational copy was legible to humans; to a classifier, it read as content about personal relationships.

A related case: a construction firm whose mission copy emphasized "our people," "putting people first," and "the best people in the market" received no primary category classification at all. The page was, in the language of entity analysis, topically unresolvable. It wasn't about construction. It wasn't about any recognizable category. It had achieved a kind of perfect invisibility.

Dynamic Title Tag Contamination

One integrative health practice had a rotating blog headline as its page title — the kind of CMS feature that feels like a smart way to keep the title tag fresh. On the day of analysis, the title read: "YOUR CHRONIC BACK PAIN BEGAN WITH YOUR UNHEALTHY GUT." Entity analysis classified the page primarily under /Health/Pain Management at 0.62 confidence — not /Health, not /Medical Facilities & Services. The practice was a general integrative medicine clinic. Its homepage was being understood as pain management content.

Testimonial Copy as an Uncontrolled PERSON Signal

One multi-specialty practice had embedded Google review copy on its homepage — a standard social proof implementation. One review mentioned a physician by name. Entity analysis picked up that name, classified it as a PERSON, and assigned it the highest salience score on the page at 17.2% — above the practice name, above the service descriptions, above the city. A testimonial about a positive patient experience was the most entity-salient element on the page.

What Trigger Phrases to Watch For

Across the full dataset, the following language patterns were confirmed to fire PERSON entity classifications at meaningful salience levels. Many of these are single words that appear naturally in any service business's homepage copy.

Generic collective nouns that fire as PERSON : people, patients, clients, builders, doctors, experts, employees, clinicians, healers, physicians, members, technicians, practitioners, partners

Structural patterns : "We Are [noun]" in headlines, "I am [value list]" in hero copy, "You are [descriptor]" in mission statements

Compound patterns that amplify salience : Repetition of any of the above across multiple sections of the same page (confirmed to accumulate salience additively — one practice with "our patients" appearing four times across the homepage had patients as its top-ranked entity at 49.0% salience)

Structural amplifiers : Any of the above appearing in a title tag, H1, or domain name will dramatically increase the salience assigned relative to the same word appearing only in body copy.

What to Check on Your Own Site

Entity analysis of your own homepage will reveal whether any of these patterns are active. At minimum, look at what entity is ranked #1 on your page — and what type it has been assigned.

If the top entity is classified as PERSON and it is not the name of a real individual intentionally featured on the page, the PERSON Entity Trap has likely fired.

If no location entity appears in your top five results, and your business depends on local search visibility, Salience Budget Collapse may be suppressing your geographic signal.

The fix, in most cases, is not a complete rewrite. It is a targeted revision of the specific phrase driving the misclassification — often a single sentence in the hero section or the headline — combined with an inversion that leads with the location or organization name before introducing service language.

The Broader Implication

These findings matter beyond the specific businesses that were analyzed. They describe a structural tension between how service businesses write about themselves and how entity classifiers interpret that writing.

Service businesses — especially those in healthcare, trades, and professional services — are trained by marketing convention to lead with people. "Our team of experts." "The practitioners who listen." "Builders who care about craft." This language is human, warm, and relatable. It converts well. It reads as trustworthy.

To an entity classifier, the most salient thing about these pages is that they are about a person. Or a group of people. Not a service. Not a city. Not an organization.

The language that makes service businesses sound human to their customers may be exactly what causes search infrastructure to misclassify what they do and where they do it.

That gap — between human-readable intent and machine-interpretable signal — is not unique to SEO. It is a problem that will compound as entity analysis, and AI-driven search interpretation play larger roles in determining which businesses get found. The businesses that understand it will have a structural advantage. Most of them don't know it exists.

This research analyzed 85 valid small business homepages across the construction, trades, and functional medicine sectors. Entity analysis was performed on homepage copy only. Sites returning no readable body copy due to JavaScript rendering, maintenance pages, or malicious content injection were excluded from the dataset and replaced where possible; 14 DQ sites were excluded in total. Analysis was conducted in Q1–Q2 2026.

Joe Provence is the co-founder of Salt Creative.

Adding a Free Overflow Model to Your MCP Server: Gemma via the Gemini API

Sun, 12 Apr 2026 02:32:14 GMT

Home | SEO Intelligence | Adding a Free Overflow Model to Your MCP Server

Most agentic workflows have a single failure mode nobody plans for: the primary LLM hits its rate limit mid-session and everything stops. You can't log a result. You can't draft the next section. The workflow is blocked until the window resets. After hitting this enough times, I started treating it as an architecture problem rather than a billing problem.

The fix turned out to be simpler than I expected.

The Insight Hidden in the Gemini Docs

While auditing our Google AI Studio integration, I noticed that Gemma — Google's open-weight model family — is served through the exact same API endpoint as Gemini. Same Python SDK, same API key, different model string. And Gemma 3 27B costs $0 per million tokens on the free tier. If you already have a Gemini API key, you already have free access to a capable open-weight model. No new credentials, no additional SDK, no separate account.

That's the whole unlock.

Registering the Tool in FastMCP

Adding query_gemma to a FastMCP server is a thin wrapper — roughly fifteen lines:

The model parameter defaults to gemma-3-27b-it but accepts the full family:

After adding the tool, reconnect your MCP connector to reload the manifest. That's the entire deployment.

The Workflow Split That Makes This Useful

The important constraint: query_gemma is text in, text out. Gemma has no access to your tool registry. It can't call other MCP tools, query your data layer, or read session state. It only knows what you explicitly pass in the prompt.

This forces a clean separation that turns out to be the right design anyway. The primary LLM handles tool calls, data retrieval, QA, and logging. Gemma handles generation-heavy tasks — drafting, summarizing, classifying, formatting. The primary LLM does less of the expensive token work. When it hits rate limits, Gemma absorbs the generation queue while the primary LLM recovers.

The split also makes each model's role legible. If something fails, you know immediately which layer to look at.

The Gap That Remains

The free tier rate limits are real. Gemma 3 models allow 5–15 requests per minute depending on model size. For interactive workflows, that's usually fine. For anything resembling batch processing, you'll hit the ceiling fast and need retry logic.

The deeper limitation is context. Gemma doesn't know what your other tools returned unless you tell it. Every query_gemma call needs to be self-contained — task description, relevant data, output format, all passed explicitly. That's more prompt engineering overhead than calling a context-aware primary LLM, and it matters for complex tasks.

What This Is and Isn't

This isn't a replacement for your primary LLM. For tasks requiring tool calls, structured reasoning over live data, or anything where the model needs to know what happened earlier in the session — you still need the primary stack.

For pure generation tasks, it works well and it's free. The practical framing: treat it as a relief valve on your token budget, not a second brain.

Build your overflow capacity the same way you build your primary stack — thin interfaces, clear contracts, explicit failure modes. A model you can swap in when the primary one is saturated is worth more than a more powerful model you can't afford to run continuously.

If you're starting from scratch, here's how we built the underlying FastMCP server on Oracle Cloud Free Tier — no DevOps experience required .

What Is Salience? The Hidden Google Signal That Decides If Your Location Matters

Fri, 27 Mar 2026 19:02:28 GMT

Home | SEO Intelligence | What Is Salience?

Most small business owners have spent years optimizing the things they can see — title tags, keywords, backlinks, page speed. Google has never made it easy to know what else it's evaluating. Salience is one of those things.

Google's entity analysis assigns every piece of content a salience score for each entity it detects — people, organizations, locations, concepts. The score runs from 0 to 1 and reflects how central that entity is to the document as a whole. A location with a salience score above 0.15 isn't just mentioned on the page. It's what the page is fundamentally about.

That distinction is doing more work in local search than most businesses realize.

Why Salience Is Different from Keyword Density

Keyword density is a count. Salience is a structural judgment.

Google's entity analysis doesn't reward pages that repeat a city name ten times. It rewards pages where the location appears in subject position, shows up early in the document, gets reinforced through co-references and related context, and stays central to the argument from introduction to conclusion. A page that mentions Austin once in the header and twice in the footer isn't an Austin page. It's a generic page that acknowledges Austin exists.

The algorithm can tell the difference. It's been able to tell the difference for years.

What Low Salience Looks Like in Practice

The most common pattern we see across small business websites is what we call the serve-and-list format: a paragraph that says "We serve clients in [City A], [City B], and the surrounding area," followed by templated content that could apply to any city in the country.

That sentence structure is syntactically weak. The city name is buried in an object position. There's no reinforcement, no local economic context, no reason for Google to treat that location as the document's conceptual anchor. Salience on that city is probably sitting between 0.03 and 0.07 — present, but invisible in terms of ranking weight.

This is a structural problem, not a content volume problem. Adding more words doesn't fix it.

How to Write for Salience

Writing for salience means treating your location like a subject, not a modifier. It means opening paragraphs with the city in subject position. It means weaving in local economic data, industry-specific regional context, and neighborhood-level specificity that makes the page impossible to replicate by swapping out one city name for another.

It also means doing this consistently — not just in the introduction, but throughout the document. Salience is a whole-document score. A strong opening paragraph followed by generic content will average out to a weak result.

Consider a general contractor in Austin. A low-salience service page might say "We offer remodeling services in Austin and the surrounding area." That sentence exists on hundreds of contractor websites across Texas. A high-salience version opens with Austin's housing reality — one of the fastest-growing metros in the country, with a construction boom stretching from the urban core out through Round Rock and Cedar Park, where permit timelines, labor availability, and material costs are shaping every remodel decision homeowners face. The city isn't mentioned more often. It's mentioned more meaningfully, and Google's entity analysis scores the difference.

FAQ: What Is Salience?

Why This Is Going to Matter More, Not Less

Google has been building its understanding of entity relationships for over a decade. The shift toward AI-powered search — both in Google's own systems and in how tools like ChatGPT and Perplexity surface local business information — puts entity salience at the center of how your business gets found.

A page that a language model can confidently describe as being about a specific location, service, and business has a structural advantage over a page that merely mentions those things. Salience is the measurable version of that advantage.

If you don't know your current salience scores, you don't know whether your location pages are working.

Small Business AI Statistics: How Owners Are Actually Using AI in 2026

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 19:30:07 GMT

There's a version of the AI conversation that sounds like science fiction. Autonomous agents running entire departments. Software replacing whole teams. Businesses operating themselves while founders sleep. That version makes for great headlines and terrible strategy.

The reality is more grounded — and actually more useful. Across research from LinkedIn, Salesforce, HubSpot, and leading AI consultancies, a consistent picture is emerging: most small businesses are using AI, most of them are still figuring out what to do with it, and the gap between "using AI" and "getting value from AI" is the defining challenge of 2026. Part of that gap is structural — AI-generated content that ignores how Google scores content for local relevance can produce high volumes of copy that ranks poorly regardless of how well it's written.

Here's what the data actually shows.

Small Business AI Statistics:

51% of marketers are currently using generative AI
22% of marketers plan to use generative AI very soon (totaling nearly 75%)
76% of marketers using generative AI are using it for content creation
76% of marketers using generative AI are using it for writing copy
53% of marketers say generative AI is a "game changer"
71% of marketers say generative AI will eliminate busy work
71% of marketers say generative AI will allow them to focus on more strategic work
Marketers estimate generative AI saves them 5+ hours per week (equivalent to 1+ month per year)
67% of marketers say their company's data is not properly set up for generative AI
63% of marketers say trusted customer data is important for the successful use of generative AI
66% of marketers say human oversight is needed to successfully use generative AI
71% of marketers believe generative AI's lack of human creativity is a potential barrier
43% of marketers say they don't know how to get the most value out of generative AI
70% of marketers say their employer does not yet provide generative AI training
39% of marketers say they don't know how to safely use generative AI
57% of small businesses believe AI will improve their daily work lives
54% of global companies are using conversational AI to provide faster and more personalized customer service
50% of U.S. small businesses say the rise of AI inspired them to consider entrepreneurship as a career path
Nearly 75% of small business owners agree that audiences today "gut-check" information with people they trust
69% increase in people adding "founder" to their LinkedIn profiles

Most Small Businesses Are Already Using AI — Just Not at Scale

Most U.S. small businesses already use AI in some way, such as for everyday tasks like writing emails and summarizing notes, and for advanced tasks like data analysis and developing strategies. That finding comes from a LinkedIn research report drawing on data from 160 million professionals across more than 18 million small businesses.

The adoption is real, but the depth varies. Fifty-seven percent of small businesses believe AI will improve their daily work lives, and moving from AI "experimentation to adoption" is the next step. That framing — experimentation to adoption — is the honest summary of where most small business owners sit right now. They've tried the tools. They're not yet running systematic workflows around them.

AI has moved from a tool to a strategic asset for small businesses aiming to stay resilient and grow in 2026. That's not marketing language — it reflects a real shift in how the LinkedIn data characterizes small business sentiment heading into the year.

What Small Businesses Are Actually Doing With AI

The most common applications aren't exotic. Among marketing professionals specifically, 51% are currently using generative AI , with an additional 22% planning to use it very soon — totaling nearly three-quarters of marketers. The top tasks are exactly what you'd expect: content creation at 76% and writing copy at 76%.

That tracks with what we see in the broader small business market. AI is being used to draft emails, summarize meetings, generate social posts, and produce first drafts of marketing content. These are the low-precision tasks — the ones where 90% accuracy is good enough and the cost of a mistake is low.

The time savings are real too. Marketers estimate generative AI will save them over five hours per week — the equivalent of over a month per year at work. For a small business owner wearing six hats, that's not a minor efficiency gain. That's breathing room.

Seventy-one percent of marketers say generative AI will eliminate busy work, and 71% say it will allow them to focus on more strategic work.

On the operational side, AI is being used across workforce optimization, personalized customer experiences, and safety monitoring — with adoption patterns that skew toward industries where data is structured and outcomes are measurable. Retail, hospitality, and logistics are seeing some of the clearest early wins.

The Bigger AI Agent Shift Is Just Starting

In 2026, AI implementation is no longer just experimenting with simple chatbots or isolated automation tools. It means deploying agentic AI systems that can reason, plan, and act autonomously across workflows.

That's the frontier. For most small businesses, it's not where they're operating yet — but it's where the conversation is heading, and understanding it early is the advantage.

The distinction matters. According to the HubSpot AI Agents playbook , a chatbot takes your question and delivers an answer. An AI agent takes your goal and delivers a result. Ask a chatbot to find your best-performing blog posts and draft social updates for each, and you'll get instructions. An AI agent actually retrieves the analytics data, identifies the top performers, drafts the posts, and queues them for publishing — without you babysitting each step.

Fifty-four percent of global companies are using conversational AI in some way to provide faster and more personalized service. Sophisticated agent implementations — the kind that handle complex, multi-step processes — remain at an earlier adoption stage, which means small businesses that move now are still in the fast-mover window.

The Real Constraint Isn't Access to Tools

Here's what the research keeps surfacing, and what most AI think pieces skip over: the problem isn't finding the tools. The problem is knowing what to do with them.

In many companies, impact on core KPIs was uneven. The constraint is rarely access to technology anymore. The constraint is how the organization chooses to use AI in real work.

That's from DAIN Studios , an AI consultancy that works across enterprise clients in Europe and North America. Their observation holds just as true at the small business level. There are more AI tools available today than any single business could ever evaluate. The businesses seeing results are the ones that picked a specific problem, ran a focused implementation, measured it, and iterated.

The same pattern appears in the Salesforce research . Sixty-seven percent of marketers say their company's data is not properly set up for generative AI — despite 63% saying trusted customer data is important for the successful use of generative AI at work. Data readiness is the structural gap most businesses haven't closed yet.

And there's a training problem layered on top. Forty-three percent of marketers say they don't know how to get the most value out of the technology. Meanwhile, 70% say their employer does not yet provide generative AI training.

Why Small Businesses Have an Actual Advantage Here

The data points to something counterintuitive: size might be an asset right now, not a liability.

Smaller companies can use their agility and speed to turn AI into a real advantage. The winners in this group will be the ones that choose a few important areas, assemble what they need from existing tools, and move faster than larger competitors.

Large enterprises have to navigate procurement cycles, change management at scale, legacy integrations, and stakeholder alignment across dozens of teams. A small business owner can pick a use case Monday, implement a tool Tuesday, and have real data by Friday. That speed of experimentation is genuinely undervalued.

Half of U.S. small businesses said that the rise of AI inspired them to consider career paths — such as entrepreneurship — that they hadn't previously thought of. AI can automate repetitive tasks and improve efficiency, freeing up time and resources for professionals to focus on creative work. This shift makes starting a business more achievable and allows founders to operate leaner and smarter.

That's a meaningful cultural signal. AI isn't just changing how existing businesses operate — it's lowering the barriers to starting one.

The Human AI Partnership Is Still the Model

Across every data source, the clearest consistent finding is this: the businesses getting real results from AI aren't the ones trying to automate everything. They're the ones that figured out what humans and AI each do best and structured their workflows accordingly.

The HubSpot leadership research put it plainly: the companies being most successful with AI agents are not replacing entire roles. They're promoting people. The human is still accountable for reviewing the output, making the judgment call, and owning the result — but now they have tools doing the heavy lifting on research, drafting, data compilation, and routine execution.

AI agents excel at processing vast amounts of information, maintaining consistency, and working without breaks or cognitive fatigue. Humans excel at judgment, creativity, relationship building, and contextual understanding that no model has yet replicated reliably.

Sixty-six percent of marketers say human oversight is needed to successfully use generative AI in their role. That's not a limitation of the technology — it's an accurate description of how responsible implementation works right now.

Frequently Asked Questions: Small Business AI in 2026

What the Numbers Mean for Your Business

The statistics here aren't meant to be impressive on their own. They're meant to be useful. So let's make them concrete.

If 73% of marketers are using or imminently adopting generative AI, and most of them are using it for content creation and copy, the competitive question isn't whether to use AI for content. It's how to use it better than the competition already doing it.

If small businesses that invest in AI literacy are outperforming those that don't, the question is what AI training looks like for your specific team and workflows.

If the biggest barrier is data readiness — not tool access — the question is what data your business is sitting on that you haven't organized in a way AI can actually use.

And if the businesses winning with AI are the ones that start with a single, well-defined use case, measure the results, and expand from there — the question is which process in your business is most repetitive, most time-consuming, and least dependent on high-stakes judgment calls.

That's where you start.

AI offers opportunities to automate tasks related to customer service, content creation, hiring, and decision-making. Small business leaders believe AI will help them compete and "punch above their weight."

The data backs that up. The businesses closing the gap between experimentation and actual adoption are the ones that will look back on 2026 as the year they built a real competitive advantage — not because they chased every AI trend, but because they picked the right problems and solved them with the right tools.

How to Save Battery Life on iPhone — 15 Settings That Actually Work

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Tue, 24 Mar 2026 20:36:38 GMT

Mastering Battery Efficiency on iOS 26: Essential Tips and Tricks

As an iPhone user, saving battery life when you update to iOS 26 ’s advanced features is a crucial consideration. Particularly if you want to manage energy usage efficiently. That’s why we’ve created this simple guide to help you understand and implement a few key settings that will extend your device’s battery life without sacrificing functionality. Mobile performance isn't just about battery life; it's about how sites are built. See how our Portland Web Design team prioritizes lightweight, mobile first development.

By following these detailed steps below, you can optimize your iPhone’s battery performance.

iOS 26 Battery Optimization

You're going to love what our list does for your iPhone's battery life, it's a game changer, if you're constantly on the go between meetings or job sites. These updates help you manage your apps, so they're not draining power when you're not actively using them. You'll notice your phone can actually make it through a full workday now, even when you're juggling calls, checking emails, using Maps to find a client's location, and snapping photos of your work. Enjoy our list of settings that will help you manage your phones battery life better.

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

Disabling Background App Refresh in iOS 26

Background App Refresh allows apps to check for new content and updates even when you are not actively using them. While this can be convenient for some applications, it can also consume significant battery life and cellular data. Here is how to take control of this feature in iOS 26:

Step 1: Open the Settings App
Locate and tap the Settings icon on your Home Screen.

Step 2: Navigate to General
Scroll down and tap on the General category.

Step 3: Select Background App Refresh
In the "General" menu, you will find an option for Background App Refresh. Tap on it to proceed.

Step 4: Customize Your Background App Refresh Settings
You will now see a list of all the apps that are using Background App Refresh. At the top of this screen, you have three main options:

Off: Select this to completely disable Background App Refresh for all apps.
Wi-Fi: This option allows apps to refresh in the background only when your iPhone is connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Wi-Fi & Cellular Data: This will allow apps to refresh using both Wi-Fi and your cellular data plan.
To turn off Background App Refresh entirely, simply select Off.

Step 5 (Optional): Manage Individual App Settings
If you prefer to keep Background App Refresh enabled but want to restrict certain apps, you can do so from the same screen. On the list of apps, you can use the toggle switch next to each app's name to enable or disable its ability to refresh in the background. This allows you to keep essential apps updated while preventing less important ones from draining your resources.

By following these steps, you can easily manage Background App Refresh in iOS 26 to optimize your iPhone's performance and battery life according to your personal usage habits. As the official release of iOS 26 approaches, users can look forward to exploring these and many other new features designed to enhance the iPhone experience.

How to Disable Unnecessary Location Services in iOS 26

The primary controls for location access are centralized within the Settings app, maintaining a familiar path for long time iPhone users. You can adjust these settings at any time.

Step 1: Navigate to Location Services
First, open the Settings app from your Home Screen. It's the icon that looks like a set of gears. From there, scroll down and tap on Privacy & Security. At the very top of the next screen, you will see Location Services. Tap on it to proceed.

Step 2: Choose Your Level of Control
You now have several options for managing how your location is shared.

To Completely Turn Off Location Services:
You can disable all location tracking by tapping the main Location Services toggle at the top of the screen to the "Off" position. A pop up will appear warning you that features like "Find My" will be disabled. This is an extreme measure and will prevent apps like Maps, Weather, and ride-sharing services from functioning correctly.

To Manage Location Services for Individual Apps (Recommended):
A more practical approach is to manage permissions on an app by app basis. On the main "Location Services" screen, you will see a list of every app that has requested access to your location.

Tap on an app's name from the list to manage its specific permissions.
Under "Allow Location Access," you will be presented with several options:
Never: This completely prevents the app from ever accessing your location.
Ask Next Time Or When I Share: The app will have to prompt you for permission each time it wants to use your location data.
While Using the App: The app can only access your location when it is open and actively being used on the screen. This is the most common and recommended setting for apps that need your location to function, like a navigation or food delivery app.
Always: (This option is less common now) It would allow an app to access your location even when it is running in the background.

Step 3: Control Precise Location Access
For even more privacy, iOS 26 allows you to control whether an app knows your exact position or just a general area. Within an individual app's location settings, you will see a toggle for Precise Location.

If you turn Precise Location off, the app will only be able to determine your approximate location. This is sufficient for many apps that don't need to know your exact coordinates, such as a local news or weather app.

Step 4: Review and Manage System Services
If you scroll to the very bottom of the Location Services screen, you will find System Services. Tapping this reveals a list of built-in iOS functions that use your location, such as "Setting Time Zone," "Emergency Calls & SOS," and "Find My iPhone." You can review this list and disable location access for any non-essential services to further enhance your privacy.

Use Wi-Fi Instead of Cellular Data When Possible

Cellular data typically consumes more power than Wi-Fi. Whenever you’re in a location with a reliable Wi-Fi connection, switch to it:

Open Settings and toggle on Wi-Fi.
Connect to a trusted network.

To prevent your phone from automatically switching back to cellular, disable Wi-Fi Assist under Settings > Cellular > Wi-Fi Assist.

How to Enable Dark Mode in iOS 26

iOS 26 offers two simple ways to activate Dark Mode: a quick toggle in the Control Center for on the fly changes, and more detailed options within the Settings app, including automatic scheduling.

Method 1: Using the Control Center (The Quickest Way)
The Control Center is the fastest way to switch between Light and Dark Modes without interrupting your workflow.

Step 1: Access the Control Center.

For iPhones with Face ID (iPhone X and later): Swipe down from the top-right corner of your screen.
For iPhones with a Home button (iPhone SE, iPhone 8 and earlier): Swipe up from the bottom edge of the screen.

Step 2: Access the Brightness Control.
Press and hold the Brightness slider (the icon with the sun symbol). This will expand the slider to fill most of the screen and reveal additional options.

Step 3: Toggle Dark Mode.
In the bottom-left corner of the expanded brightness view, you will see the Dark Mode button. Tap it to instantly switch Dark Mode on or off. The appearance will change immediately.

Method 2: Using the Settings App (For Customization)

The Settings app allows you to enable Dark Mode and set up an automatic schedule so it activates at your preferred times.

Step 1: Open the Settings App.
Tap the grey Settings icon with the gears on your Home Screen.

Step 2: Navigate to Display & Brightness.
Scroll down and tap on the Display & Brightness menu option.

Step 3: Choose Your Appearance.
At the top of the screen, under the "Appearance" section, you will see two options: Light and Dark. Tap on Dark to enable it manually.

Step 4: Set an Automatic Schedule (Optional).
To have Dark Mode turn on and off automatically, toggle the switch next to Automatic. Once enabled, you will see two options:

Sunset to Sunrise: This option uses your location to automatically activate Dark Mode when the sun sets and switch back to Light Mode at sunrise.
Custom Schedule: This allows you to set specific times for Light and Dark Modes to appear. For example, you can set Dark Mode to turn on at 10:00 PM and off at 7:00 AM.

By customizing these settings, you can enjoy a more comfortable viewing experience that adapts to your environment and time of day, all within the fresh and modern interface of iOS 26.

Limit Push Notifications

The All-or-Nothing Approach: Disabling Notifications for Specific Apps
For applications that are persistent with non-essential updates, you can completely turn off their ability to send you notifications.

Step by Step Instructions:

Open the Settings app on your iPhone.
Scroll down and tap on Notifications.
Under the "Notification Style" section, you will see a list of all your apps that have requested to send notifications.
Tap on the app for which you want to disable notifications.
At the top of the screen, toggle off the Allow Notifications switch. The switch will turn from green to gray, indicating that notifications for this app are now disabled.

Fine-Tuning Your Alerts: Customizing Notification Delivery
If you don't want to completely silence an app, you can customize how and where its notifications appear.

Step-by-Step Instructions:

Navigate to Settings > Notifications and select the desired app.
Ensure Allow Notifications is toggled on.
Under the "Alerts" section, you can choose where you want to see notifications from this app:
Lock Screen: The notification will appear on your lock screen.
Notification Center: The notification will be accessible by swiping down from the top of your screen.
Banners: A temporary banner will appear at the top of your screen when a new notification arrives. You can also choose the banner style (Temporary or Persistent).
You can also choose to enable or disable Sounds and Badges (the red number that appears on the app icon).

Tame the Distractions: Scheduling Notification Summaries
For apps that send frequent but non-urgent updates, the Scheduled Summary feature is a powerful tool. It gathers these notifications and delivers them to you in a single, convenient summary at times you choose.

Step-by-Step Instructions:

Go to Settings > Notifications.
Tap on Scheduled Summary.
Toggle on the Scheduled Summary switch.
You will be prompted to select the apps you want to include in your summary. Choose the apps whose notifications you'd prefer to see in a batch rather than individually.
Set the schedule for your summaries. You can have multiple summaries delivered throughout the day at times that are most convenient for you.

Focus on the Task at Hand: Utilizing Focus Modes
Focus modes allow you to create customized notification settings for different activities, such as work, sleep, or personal time.

Step-by-Step Instructions:

Open Settings and tap on Focus.

You can choose from existing Focus modes like "Do Not Disturb," "Personal," "Sleep," or "Work," or create a new custom Focus by tapping the + icon.

When setting up a Focus, you can choose to allow notifications from specific people and apps. All other notifications will be silenced while the Focus is active.

You can schedule your Focus modes to turn on automatically at certain times, in specific locations, or when you open certain apps.

Consider Using Low Power Mode When Needed

Low Power Mode is a built-in feature designed to extend battery life by temporarily reducing power-hungry activities. While most users only enable it when the battery level is low, it’s also a good idea to use this feature when you know you’ll be away from a charger for a while. To enable low power mode:

Open Settings > Battery and toggle on Low Power Mode.
Alternatively, add it to your Control Center for quick access by going to Settings > Control Center > Customize Controls.

When activated, Low Power Mode reduces mail fetch, background app refresh, and some visual effects.

Optimize Your Lock Screen for Peak Performance

Lock Screen widgets offer a fantastic window into your favorite apps, but a cluttered Lock Screen can impact your iPhone's battery life. Here’s how to refine your setup for efficiency:

Press and hold your Lock Screen until the customization gallery appears.
Tap the Customize button at the bottom of the screen.
Select the Lock Screen to edit.
Tap on the widget box below the clock.
To remove a widget, tap the minus icon (—) on its corner.
To replace a widget, tap it to see the full gallery of available options.

Pro Tip: Choose widgets that display information without needing frequent, real-time data updates. For example, a Reminders or Calendar widget is generally more battery-efficient than a constantly updating Weather or Stocks widget.

Essential Tips for Maximizing Battery Life
Keep your iPhone running longer with these proven strategies:

Regularly Update Your iOS: Always install the latest iOS updates. Go to Settings > General > Software Update. Apple's updates often include critical performance improvements and battery optimizations.
Keep Your iPhone Cool: Avoid exposing your iPhone to extreme ambient temperatures (above 95° F or 35° C), as this can permanently damage battery capacity. Never leave it in a hot car or in direct sunlight for extended periods.
Identify and Manage Power-Hungry Apps: Navigate to Settings > Battery. Here, you can see a detailed breakdown of which apps are consuming the most power. If you see an app you rarely use draining a significant amount of battery, consider limiting its background activity (Settings > General > Background App Refresh) or deleting it.
Turn Off Haptic Feedback: Vibrations for keyboard feedback, calls, and notifications use the Taptic Engine, which consumes power. If you don't need this tactile feedback, go to Settings > Sounds & Haptics and turn off System Haptics and the keyboard feedback options.

Lower Your Screen Brightness

Method 1: Using the Control Center (The Quickest Way)

The Control Center provides instant access to essential settings without needing to leave your current app.

Step 1: Access the Control Center.

For iPhones with Face ID (iPhone X and later): Swipe down from the top-right corner of your screen.
For iPhones with a Home button (iPhone SE, iPhone 8 and earlier): Swipe up from the bottom edge of the screen.

 Step 2: Locate the Brightness Slider.
In the Control Center, you will see a vertical slider icon, typically depicted with a sun symbol. This is the brightness control.

Step 3: Adjust the Brightness.
Press and hold the brightness slider and drag your finger downwards to lower the screen brightness to your desired level.

Method 2: Using the Settings App
The Settings app offers a more traditional way to adjust brightness and provides access to additional display settings.

Step 1: Open the Settings App.
Locate and tap the "Settings" icon on your Home Screen. It's the grey icon with gears.

Step 2: Navigate to Display & Brightness.
Scroll down and tap on the "Display & Brightness" option in the main Settings menu.

Step 3: Adjust the Brightness Slider.
At the top of the "Display & Brightness" screen, you will find a horizontal slider. Drag the slider to the left to decrease the screen's brightness.

Advanced Brightness Settings in iOS 26
Beyond manual adjustments, iOS 26 will continue to offer intelligent features to manage your screen's appearance automatically. Within the "Display & Brightness" settings, you can expect to find:

Automatic: This setting, when enabled, allows your iPhone to use its ambient light sensor to automatically adjust the screen brightness to suit your surroundings.
True Tone: This feature adapts the color and intensity of your display to match the ambient light, making images appear more natural.
Night Shift: This popular feature automatically shifts the colors of your display to the warmer end of the spectrum after sunset, which may help reduce eye strain in low-light conditions.

Additional Tips for Maximizing Battery Life

Regularly Update Your iOS: Apple frequently releases updates that include battery optimization features.
Keep Your iPhone Cool: High temperatures can degrade battery performance. Avoid leaving your phone in hot environments.
Manage Power-Hungry Apps: Check battery usage under Settings > Battery to identify apps consuming the most power and limit their use.
Turn Off Vibrations: Vibrations for calls and notifications use additional power. Disable them under Settings > Sounds & Haptics if not needed.

Final Thoughts

All the optimization tips that we’ve outlined in this short guide can keep your device running longer and enhance your overall user experience. Following these steps precisely will maximize the battery life of your iPhone while running iOS 26. Whether it’s through adjusting settings, enabling Low Power Mode, or managing notifications and widgets, these small changes can make a significant difference.

At Salt Creative, we build websites that work just as hard on mobile as they do on desktop — because most of your customers are on an iPhone right now. If your business website loads slow, drains data, or breaks on small screens, you're losing customers before they ever read a word. We're a web design agency serving small businesses across Boise, Spokane , Portland, and Colorado Springs , and we'd love to help you make a better first impression. Get a free strategy session →

BONUS: iOS 26 Settings To Turn OFF Now!

Battery Charge Limit: Set a limit (e.g., 90%) in Battery settings.
Communication Preferences: Disable unwanted email switches.
Subscriptions: Review and cancel unnecessary services.
Cellular Data (5G): Switch to LTE if 5G signal is weak.
5G Standalone: Turn off in Cellular Data Options.
Data Mode: Use "Low Data Mode" over "Allow More Data."
iCloud Backup (Cellular): Disable over cellular.
Wi-Fi (Ask to Join): Turn off to prevent unwanted connections.
App Store (Downloads): Disable automatic downloads across devices.
App Store (Video Autoplay): Turn off.
App Store (Ratings & Reviews): Turn off in-app prompts.
Camera (Faster Shooting): Turn off for better image quality.
Camera (Apple ProRes): Disable unless specifically needed.
Sounds & Haptics (Keyboard): Turn off sound and haptic feedback.
Sounds & Haptics (Lock Sound): Turn off.

Key CRM Statistics for 2026: Market Trends, Adoption, and Impact

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 20 Mar 2026 19:34:23 GMT

In today’s competitive business landscape, Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems have become indispensable tools for driving growth, enhancing customer experiences, and streamlining operations. As the CRM market surges toward a projected $262.74 billion by 2032, businesses of all sizes are leveraging these platforms to boost sales, improve retention, and harness cutting edge technologies like generative AI. As businesses integrate more advanced CRMs, the need for high converting Web Design in Boise becomes critical to ensuring that incoming leads are captured effectively. AI adoption isn't limited to CRM — for a broader look at how small business owners are using AI across their entire operation in 2026, see our Small Business AI Statistics breakdown.

The following CRM statistics , compiled from leading industry sources, highlight the transformative impact of CRM systems, revealing key trends, adoption rates, benefits, and challenges shaping the future of customer centric strategies in 2026 and beyond. For businesses building a local web presence alongside their CRM investment, understanding what makes a location page rank is just as important as the CRM data powering it. The same data discipline that drives great CRM drives great SEO. SEO Intelligence logs every rewrite, every experiment, and every result — so your search performance is as measurable as your pipeline.

CRM Market Size and Growth

Global CRM Market Value: The CRM software market is valued at approximately $101.4 billion in 2024 and is projected to reach $262.74 billion by 2032 , growing at a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 12.6%.

Revenue Forecast: Global CRM software revenue is expected to grow from $75.1 billion in 2023 to $248.2 billion by 2033, with a CAGR of 12.7%.

UK Market Growth: In the United Kingdom, CRM revenue is forecast to increase to £1.9 billion between 2024 and 2028, with a market volume of $8 billion by 2029 (CAGR of 11.51%).

Mobile CRM Market: The mobile CRM market is projected to grow from $28.43 billion in 2024 to $58.07 billion by 2034, with a CAGR of 11.9% in the U.S. and 14% in China.

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

CRM Adoption and Usage

Business Adoption: 91% of companies with 10 or more employees use a CRM system, while only 50% of businesses with 10 or fewer employees do not use one.

Industry Usage: Tech companies lead CRM adoption at 94%, followed by manufacturing (86%), education (85%), healthcare (82%), and human resources (81%).

Cloud-Based CRM: 87% of CRM systems are cloud-based, reflecting a shift toward remote access and scalability.

Mobile CRM Usage: 70% of businesses use mobile CRM systems, which can improve productivity by 14.6%. Businesses leveraging mobile CRM are 150% more likely to exceed sales goals.

Benefits of Using a CRM

Return on Investment (ROI): CRM delivers an average ROI of $8.71 for every dollar spent, with some projections suggesting up to $30.48 per dollar in 2023.
Sales Impact: Businesses using CRM see a 29% increase in sales, a 34% improvement in sales productivity, and a 42% increase in sales forecast accuracy.
Revenue Growth: CRM platforms can boost company revenue by up to 245%, with 45% of companies reporting increased sales revenue.
Customer Acquisition Costs (CAC): 91% of businesses report reduced CAC after implementing CRM, with 49% seeing an 11–20% decrease.
Customer Retention: CRM systems improve customer retention rates by up to 27%, with 47% of users noting significant impacts on retention and satisfaction.

Customer Experience: 85% of U.S. CRM users in 2018 identified improved customer experience as the top benefit, followed by faster decision-making (58%), streamlined operations (54%), and better collaboration (53%).

Time Savings: CRM systems save businesses 5–10 hours of employee workload per week by automating repetitive tasks (50%), centralizing data (46%), and streamlining communication (41%).

Sales Cycle Reduction: CRM usage shortens sales cycles by 8–14%, with 34% of businesses reporting a reduction of 8–14 days.

Hubspot and Salesforce Statistics

Salesforce Dominance: Salesforce holds a 23.9% share of the global CRM market, surpassing the combined shares of Microsoft, Oracle, SAP, and Adobe.
Other Players: HubSpot has 3.4% market share with 248,000 paying customers, while Oracle, Adobe, SAP, and Zendesk are also significant players.
Salesforce Stats: Salesforce serves over 150,000 customers, with 83% of Fortune 500 companies as clients. Its valuation is approximately $274.9 billion, with projected revenue of $37.8–$38 billion in 2025.
HubSpot Stats: HubSpot is valued at $35.84 billion, with $2.63 billion in revenue in 2024 and 113,925 customers across 120+ countries.

CRM Trends and Innovations

Generative AI: 51% of businesses identify generative AI (e.g., chatbots, predictive analytics) as the top CRM trend for 2024. 65% of businesses use CRM systems with generative AI, and those using it are 83% more likely to exceed sales goals.
AI and Big Data: AI and big data adoption in CRM is projected to increase by 97% between 2025 and 2030, driving smarter insights and automation.
Hyper-Personalization: Businesses are focusing on hyper-personalization across the customer journey, with digital and data-first brands leading the way.
Automation: 61% of sales leaders automated their CRM software in 2023, with automation aiding lead nurturing (57%), customer engagement (36%), and campaign reporting (28%).

Challenges in CRM Implementation

Failure Rates: 20–70% of CRM projects fail, primarily due to poor user adoption (the leading cause), lack of integration with other tools (17%), and complexity of use (7%).
Data Challenges: 23% of users cite manual data input as a major obstacle, while 88% of sales professionals prioritize accurate customer data.
Adoption Rates: Average CRM adoption rates across sectors remain at 26%, with top-performing sales firms 81% more likely to use CRM consistently.

Consumer Behavior and CRM

Customer Loyalty: 94% of customers are likely to purchase again from the same source, and 80% are more likely to buy from companies offering personalized experiences.
Community Impact: Customers spend 19% more when they feel they belong to a company’s online community.
Churn Factors: 68% of customers leave a business due to perceived indifference.

FAQ: CRM Statistics, Trends, and Insights

In Conclusion

The CRM landscape in 2026 underscores a dynamic shift toward smarter, more personalized, and data driven customer interactions, with businesses reaping significant rewards from enhanced productivity, revenue growth, and customer loyalty.

Despite challenges like user adoption and data management, the integration of AI, mobile accessibility, and automation continues to redefine how companies connect with their audiences. As the CRM market evolves, these statistics serve as a powerful reminder of the critical role CRM systems play in fostering sustainable growth and building lasting customer relationships in an increasingly digital world.

How to Build a Claude MCP Server for Google Search Console

Wed, 18 Mar 2026 23:42:43 GMT

Home | SEO Intelligence | How to Build a Claude MCP Server

Most SEOs interact with Google Search Console the same way: log in, click around, export a CSV, paste it into a spreadsheet, and try to remember what you were looking for. It works, but it's slow — and it puts a dashboard between you and your data at every step.

This tutorial walks through how to build a system that removes that friction entirely. By the end, you'll have Claude connected directly to your GSC data through a custom MCP server, so you can ask plain English questions — "What are my top keyword gaps?" or "Which pages have high impressions but terrible CTR?" — and get answers pulled live from your own database, no dashboard required.

This is the exact setup we built for Salt Creative, our full-service web design and digital marketing agency. The stack is free to run (Oracle Cloud Free Tier + open source Python), and the same pattern scales to any number of clients.

Here's what we're building:

A Python based data pipeline pulls GSC data and crawl metrics into a local DuckDB database. A FastMCP server wraps that database and exposes it as tools Claude can call. An ngrok tunnel makes the server reachable over HTTPS so Claude.ai can connect to it. The result is a live, queryable SEO intelligence layer that lives in your Claude conversation.

Setting up the Infrastructure (Oracle Cloud & DuckDB)

The entire system runs on a single Oracle Cloud Free Tier VM — permanently free, no credit card required after signup.

Provision the VM

In the Oracle Cloud Console, create a Compute instance with the following specs:

Image: Oracle Linux 9
Shape: VM.Standard.E2.1.Micro (1 OCPU, 1 GB RAM)
Region: any Always Free-eligible region

Download your SSH key during setup and note your instance's public IP address. You'll use both throughout this build.

To connect from your terminal:

Note: Oracle Linux uses dnf (not apt ) and firewall-cmd (not ufw ). The default SSH username is opc .

One important firewall note: Oracle Cloud has two firewall layers — the OS-level ( `firewall-cmd` ) and the VCN Security List in the Console. You'll need both open for SSH (port 22) and for the MCP server (port 8000) to be reachable. If SSH suddenly stops working after a reboot, it's usually because `( firewall-cmd` ) didn't persist the SSH service rule. Fix it permanently with:

Also add an ingress rule in the Oracle Console under Networking → Virtual Cloud Networks → your VCN → Security Lists → Default Security List, allowing TCP traffic on port 8000 from ` 0.0.0.0/0 `.

Set up the project structure

The client folder pattern is intentional — each client gets its own client.yaml config and its own DuckDB file, so adding a new client later is just a folder copy and a config edit.

Install Python 3.11 via Miniconda

The MCP libraries ( fastmcp ) require Python 3.10+. Oracle Linux 9's system Python is 3.9, so install Miniconda to manage a parallel 3.11 environment without touching the system Python:

Install dependencies

On a 1 GB RAM VM, sentence-transformers should be loaded lazily — don't import it at module level. Load it only when the scoring functions are actually called.

DuckDB: why a single file database

DuckDB is the right storage choice here because it's columnar (fast on analytical queries like aggregating 300K keyword rows), requires zero server setup, and lives as a single portable file. Every client gets their own .duckdb file at clients/your-client/data/db/your-client.duckdb .

One limitation to know upfront: DuckDB only allows one writer at a time. When the MCP server is running with a read connection open, your data collectors can't write to the same file simultaneously. The fix is to stop the MCP server before running a data pull, then restart it after. This is handled in the collector scripts.

Data Collection (The GSC and SERP Scrapers)

Google Search Console OAuth

GSC data is the foundation. You'll pull 90 days of query, page, and combined query+page data into DuckDB via the GSC API.

First, create OAuth credentials in Google Cloud Console:

Go to console.cloud.google.com → APIs & Services → Credentials
Create an OAuth 2.0 Client ID (Desktop App type)
Download the JSON credentials file — save it as config/gsc_credentials.json
Under OAuth Consent Screen, set publishing status to Testing and add your Google account as a test user

Run the one time auth flow locally (on your Mac, not the server) to generate a token:

This generates config/gsc_token.json . Copy both the credentials and token files to the server:

The gsc_pull.py collector reads both files and makes direct HTTP requests to the GSC API (avoiding the googleapiclient discovery doc, which can hang on some environments). It pulls three tables into DuckDB:

gsc_query_page — every query+URL combination with clicks, impressions, CTR, and position
gsc_pages — page-level aggregates
gsc_queries — query-level aggregates

Run the initial 90-day pull:

A healthy pull for a mid size site will typically return 300,000+ rows across the three tables.

Site crawl and issue detection

site_crawl.py uses advertools to crawl the site via its sitemap and write page-level metadata (title, meta description, H1, canonical, status code, word count) to DuckDB.

flag_issues.py then runs four detection passes against the crawl + GSC data:

Keyword cannibalization — multiple pages ranking for the same query
Orphan pages — pages with zero GSC impressions and no internal links pointing to them
CTR gaps — pages with high impressions but CTR significantly below the position average
Missing or thin meta — pages without title tags or meta descriptions under a minimum word count threshold

All issue rows are written to their own DuckDB tables ( cannibalization_issues, orphan_pages, ctr_gaps, missing_meta ) so the MCP server can query them independently.

SERP rank tracking

serp_scrape.py handles live SERP position tracking. One important reality: Google blocks requests from cloud datacenter IPs, so direct scraping from an Oracle VM will return blocked results. The collector handles this with a dual-mode approach — it uses the SerpAPI service if a SERP_API_KEY environment variable is set, and falls back to direct requests otherwise (logging the blocked status).

SerpAPI's free tier gives 100 searches/month, which is enough for weekly tracking across 20 target keywords.

Because DuckDB can't be written to while the MCP server holds a connection, the scraper stops the MCP server before writing results and restarts it after. This is handled automatically inside the script.

 client.yaml schema

Each client is configured via a YAML file that all collectors read:

The Intelligence Layer (Semantic Scoring & Info Gain with Claude)

This is where the system pulls ahead of standard GSC dashboards. Two custom metrics — semantic backlink relevance and Information Gain score — give you signals that no off-the-shelf tool surfaces.

Semantic backlink relevance (score_semantic.py)

Standard backlink metrics tell you domain authority. They don't tell you whether the linking page is topically related to the page being linked to. That's what score_semantic.py does.

It uses sentence-transformers (specifically the all-MiniLM-L6-v2 model) to generate embeddings for both the linking page content and the target page content, then computes cosine similarity. The result is a relevance score between 0 and 1 stored alongside each backlink in DuckDB.

On a 1 GB VM, load the model once per scoring run and process all backlinks in a single pass rather than loading it per URL.

Information Gain score (score_info_gain.py)

The Information Gain score answers the question: does this page add anything that the top 10 results don't already cover?

The approach: fetch the top 10 SERP results for a target keyword, extract their text, build a TF-IDF representation of the combined corpus, then compare your page's TF-IDF vector against it. The delta — terms your page uses that are absent or underrepresented in the top 10 — is your Information Gain score.

Pages scoring below a threshold (typically 0.3) are flagged for content expansion. The /resources/ section of a content-heavy site is usually where you'll find the most actionable gaps.

Scores for all tracked pages are written to an info_gain_scores table in DuckDB and are directly queryable through the MCP server.

Exposing Data to Claude via MCP

With data flowing into DuckDB, the final step is wrapping it in an MCP server so Claude can query it in natural language.

Writing the MCP server

seo_mcp_server.py uses FastMCP to define tools that Claude can discover and call. Each tool is a Python function decorated with @mcp.tool() that runs a DuckDB query and returns a formatted result:

Starting the server

The server runs on port 8000. Confirm it's live:

Exposing it over HTTPS with ngrok

Claude.ai requires HTTPS for MCP connections. The simplest solution is ngrok, which creates a secure tunnel from a public HTTPS URL to your server's port 8000.

Sign up at ngrok.com (free tier is sufficient)
Verify your email when prompted
Copy your authtoken from the ngrok dashboard
On the server:

5. Get your public URL:

You'll get a URL like https://your-subdomain.ngrok-free.dev . Append /mcp to this — that's your connector URL.

Connecting to Claude.ai

In the browser version of Claude.ai (the Mac app doesn't support MCP connectors):

Settings → Connectors → Add custom connector
Enter: https://your-subdomain.ngrok-free.dev/mcp
Click Connect

Claude will detect the available tools automatically. You'll see them listed under the connector in Settings.

Keeping the server alive

A few things to keep running persistently on the server. Use a simple startup script or add these to cron ( @reboot ):

Note that ngrok free tier tunnels generate a new subdomain each time they start. If you restart ngrok, you'll need to update the connector URL in Claude.ai. A paid ngrok plan gives you a stable custom subdomain.

Querying your data in Claude

Once connected, open a conversation in Claude.ai and try:

"What are the top keyword gaps for [your client] with at least 500 impressions?"
"Show me the crawl issues — how many pages have cannibalization problems?"
"What are the top 10 pages by clicks?"
"Which pages have Information Gain scores below 0.3?"
"What's the current SERP ranking for 'web design [city]'?"

Claude calls the appropriate tool, runs the DuckDB query, and returns a formatted table with analysis. No CSV exports, no dashboard navigation, no context-switching.

Scaling to multiple clients

Adding a new client is a three step process:

The switch_client tool lets you swap the active context mid-conversation: "Switch to new-client, then show me their keyword gaps." Each client's data stays isolated in its own DuckDB file.

What's Next

This tutorial covers Phase 1: infrastructure, GSC data collection, issue detection, and MCP connectivity. Phase 2 adds the full intelligence layer:

score_semantic.py — Sentence-Transformers cosine similarity scoring for every backlink, giving you topical relevance instead of just domain authority.

score_info_gain.py — TF-IDF comparison against live SERP results, flagging pages where competitors are covering topics your content misses.

scheduler/run_weekly.py — a cron-orchestrated pipeline that runs collect → process → update DB every Sunday night so your Claude conversations always start from fresh data.

The combination of live GSC data, crawl health signals, and proprietary scoring — all queryable in natural language — is the kind of setup that took a few hours to build and replaced tools costing hundreds of dollars a month.

Grants for Small Business Owners in 2026: Free, Government & State Options

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Wed, 18 Mar 2026 19:27:40 GMT

Unlocking Growth Without Debt

For many small businesses, growth is a catch 22. A bakery owner, was barely breaking even despite being popular. She needed a $15,000 oven to increase output, but the bank required collateral she didn't have. Six months later, her business was transformed. She had a new oven and a wholesale operation serving local coffee shops. The key was an $18,000 state grant for women-owned businesses, which required no loan payments or equity.

Significant grant money is available from a wide range of sources including federal programs, state economic development budgets, corporate ESG initiatives, and even local utilities. The problem is that this funding is scattered across hundreds of programs, and most owners are too busy to find it. Many assume grants are only for nonprofits or that the process is too complex. However, winning a grant isn't luck; it's a learnable skill based on knowing where to look and understanding what funders want.

Understanding the Types of Small Business Grants

Grants come from dozens of different sources, each with its own priorities.

Federal Grants: Narrow Focus, High Competition
The Small Business Administration (SBA) rarely gives direct grants to individual businesses. These grants are competitive and require a research style proposal, but the funding is significant and doesn't require giving up equity. Agencies like the USDA also offer grants for rural or agricultural businesses.
State and Local Programs: Your Best Starting Point
For most Main Street businesses, state and local economic development agencies are the most accessible sources of funding. These programs aim to create jobs, revitalize downtowns, or support key local industries. A hardware store owner in Michigan received $25,000 for a storefront renovation to make the downtown district more inviting. These grants are typically smaller ($5,000 to $50,000) but have more straightforward applications than federal programs.
Corporate and Private Foundation Grants: Alignment Matters
Companies like FedEx , Visa , and American Express offer grants as part of their community investment or supplier diversity initiatives. These funders look for businesses that fit their strategic narrative. For example, a sustainable packaging company won $10,000 from a corporate program focused on environmental innovation. Private foundations often focus on specific communities, such as minority owned or veteran owned businesses.
Industry Specific and Mission Driven Grants
Some grants are created to solve a specific problem. Utility companies, for instance, offer grants for energy efficient equipment upgrades to reduce demand on the power grid. A pizza shop owner had an $18,000 refrigeration system upgrade covered by a utility grant because it would reduce peak electricity demand.

The key pattern is that every grant serves the funder's agenda. Your job is to find the grant where your needs overlap with the funder's goals. This is how you shift the odds in your favor.

Real Small Business Grants to Apply for in 2026

Knowing grant categories is useful, but understanding the why behind specific programs — and how to position yourself for success — is far more valuable. Here are six active programs worth researching, with insights beyond the typical grants list:

Hello Alice Small Business Grants : Hello Alice is actively building a data-driven picture of the challenges facing underserved entrepreneurs, and their grant cycles reflect that. Applications that specifically address service gaps or demonstrate measurable community impact — job creation, local economic contribution — consistently outperform those that simply state eligibility. Awards typically range from $5,000 to $25,000. Don't just say you're underserved; quantify what your business has done or will do for your community. Visit helloalice.com to check open cycles.
Amazon Small Business Grants : This program is as much talent scouting as philanthropy. Amazon wants innovative product-based businesses that could eventually become platform suppliers. The mentorship and marketplace exposure are often worth more than the funding itself. Applications that get rejected tend to lack a clear understanding of Amazon's customer base or propose a product with heavy existing competition on Amazon already. Focus on how your product fills a niche that Amazon shoppers can't easily find elsewhere.
FedEx Small Business Grant Contest: FedEx selects for story as much as financials. They want businesses that embody resilience and entrepreneurial grit — companies they can point to as proof that small businesses drive the economy. A common mistake is leading with revenue projections. Lead instead with the obstacles you've navigated, the creative solutions you've built, and your specific vision for growth. Winners typically have a clear narrative arc, not just a solid balance sheet.
NASE Growth Grants: The membership requirement that deters some applicants is actually your edge — it reduces the applicant pool significantly compared to open national programs. Grants go up to $4,000 quarterly and are designed for specific, measurable development expenses: a marketing campaign, a website overhaul, a professional certification. Applications that request funds for vague "general business expenses" are routinely rejected. Name the exact expense, the expected outcome, and how you'll measure it.
Faire Small Business Grant: Faire's grants are directly tied to their wholesale marketplace — they're funding businesses they want to see thrive on their platform. Applicants who are already selling on Faire, or who make a convincing case for why their products belong there, have a meaningful advantage. Treat this as a marketplace entry strategy with funding attached, not a standalone grant. Applications that align with Faire's aesthetic and independent retailer audience convert significantly better.
SBA Programs — SBIR and STTR: The SBA's direct grant programs are reserved for businesses with a genuine research or technology component, and the awards can reach six figures. The most common failure point is applying with a project that lacks a clear commercialization path or that doesn't align with the specific priorities of the administering agency — NIH, NSF, and the Department of Energy each fund very different types of innovation. Read the agency solicitation carefully before you write a single word of your application.

Where to Find Small Business Grants

Successful grant seekers use a systematic approach to research.

Grants.gov : This is the official federal database. It can be overwhelming, so filter searches by eligibility, looking for "small business" or "for profit entity". The high-value SBIR/STTR grants are posted here. Be prepared: these applications can take 40-60 hours to complete.
State and Local Economic Development Agencies : Every state has an agency dedicated to economic development. Search for "[your state] economic development" to find programs for job creation, equipment upgrades, or facility improvements. Also, search for your county or city’s economic development office, as they often have funds with less competition.
Corporate Programs : Check the websites of companies you already do business with, like your payment processor or bank. The Local Initiatives Support Corporation (LISC) is another valuable resource that partners with corporations to distribute grants in specific communities.

Grants for Women Owned Small Businesses: If your business qualifies as women owned, this is one of the most accessible funding categories available. Several dedicated programs run year-round with less competition than general business grants.

Amber Grant — Awards $10,000 every month to a woman entrepreneur, with an additional $25,000 annual grant awarded from monthly winners. Applications are simple and the program has a strong track record of funding real Main Street businesses.

Visa She's Next Grant Program — Visa's program provides grants and mentorship to women-owned small businesses in underserved communities. Check visa.com for current open cycles.

IFundWomen — Combines grant access with crowdfunding tools and coaching specifically for women entrepreneurs. Useful both as a direct funding source and as a way to build the kind of documented traction that strengthens other grant applications.

State Women's Business Programs — Most states have an Office of Women's Business Ownership housed within the local SBA district office. These offices administer state-level grants and can connect you with programs that rarely get publicized at the national level. A direct phone call to your district office is often the fastest way to find opportunities with the least competition.

Trade Associations and Chambers of Commerce : Your industry trade association and local chamber of commerce often announce grant opportunities before they are widely publicized. A direct phone call asking about available grants can yield better information than hours of online searching.
Community Development Financial Institutions (CDFIs) : CDFIs focus on underserved markets and often provide grants alongside affordable loans. The Opportunity Finance Network 's directory can help you find CDFIs in your area.
Utility Companies : Your electric and gas utility likely has incentive programs that function like grants, offering money for energy efficient upgrades. Search their websites for "business rebates" or "business incentives".

How to Spot a Scam and Confirm Eligibility

Avoid Scams : Real grants never require an upfront fee to apply. Be skeptical of anyone promising you are "pre approved". A legitimate grant will have a public website with clear information about the funder and eligibility.
Confirm Eligibility : Before starting an application, read the eligibility requirements carefully. Common disqualifiers include geographic location, industry, business age, revenue caps, or ownership requirements (e.g., women owned, veteran owned). If you don't meet all the criteria, move on to another opportunity.

Create a simple spreadsheet to track grant names, funders, deadlines, and application status. A systematic approach is what separates successful applicants from the rest.

How to Qualify, Apply, and Win

Grant applications test whether you can clearly explain what you do, why it matters, and how you'll use the money responsibly.

Preparation is Key

Before you begin, gather essential documents:
Business license and EIN
Recent tax returns and a current profit and loss statement
Bank statements and proof of insurance
For specific purchases like equipment, get written vendor quotes. A $15,000 request is more credible with a quote for $14,800.

Grant reviewers are trying to answer three core questions:

Is this a viable business that will still exist in a year?
Will this money be used for its stated purpose?
Does funding this business advance our mission?

Your application must draw a straight line between your project and the funder's goals. An auto shop owner applying for a grant in an economically distressed area led not with his need for equipment, but with the fact that he employs six people from the neighborhood and serves local residents who lack other transportation options. He got the grant.

The Application: Step by Step

Business Overview : Be direct and avoid jargon. Instead of saying you "leverage cutting edge processes," state, "We manufacture custom metal brackets for commercial construction projects. We've been in business for eight years and employ 12 people".

Project Description : This is the heart of the application. Clearly state what you need, why you need it, and what will change with the funding. For example: "We need an automated packaging machine because our manual process limits production. With the new equipment, we can accept contracts from three new retailers, hire two employees, and increase annual revenue by 35%".

Budget Breakdown : Show your math with a line item budget. If you are contributing your own funds toward the project, mention it. Reviewers appreciate cost sharing because it shows you have "skin in the game".

Business Impact : Quantify everything. Instead of "this will help us grow," write, "this funding will allow us to hire 2 full time employees, increase production capacity by 75%, and grow annual revenue by $120,000".

Your Qualifications : Factually state your experience and your team's qualifications. Mention past successes, such as a previous expansion or achieving high on time delivery rates.

Common Mistakes to Avoid

Being vague about money.
Using jargon instead of simple, clear language.
Forgetting to connect your project to the grant's stated purpose.
Submitting incomplete applications.
Applying for grants you don't qualify for.

Need help making your business more visible online while you pursue funding? Salt Creative builds websites that turn grant funded growth into real revenue. Schedule your free strategy session.

Frequently Asked Questions About Small Business Grants

Conclusion: It's Not About Luck

Persistence pays off. The baker Maria was rejected twice before winning her grant on the third try. She didn't change her business; she got better at telling her story in the language reviewers needed to hear.

Grants exist because an organization has decided that funding businesses like yours serves a mission they care about be it job creation, innovation, or community revitalization. The process can be tedious, but the money is real, and businesses win it daily by showing up and making a clear case. Unlike a loan, a grant asks for your time upfront and then leaves you to run your business without debt or ownership dilution.

The businesses that never win grants are the ones that decide it won't work and never apply. You have already done the hard part of building and running a business. A grant application is just explaining what you have already proven you can do. The funding is there.

Cybersecurity SOPs for Small Business (2026 Edition)

Sun, 15 Mar 2026 14:26:08 GMT

The conversation has shifted. Cybersecurity is no longer an enterprise concern that trickles down to small businesses as an afterthought — it is the front line, and small businesses are standing directly on it. Small and mid sized businesses accounted for 70.5% of data breaches in 2025 . While large corporations maintain entire security departments hunting threats around the clock, most small business owners are managing security on the side of a full operational plate, often without dedicated IT staff and rarely with a formalized incident response plan.

This guide is built for those businesses. These are the Standard Operating Procedures that close the gaps attackers are actively exploiting right now.

Why 2026 Is a Turning Point for Small Business Cybersecurity

The threat environment did not gradually worsen. It accelerated. According to the FBI's 2024 Internet Crime Report , cybercrime losses reached $16.6 billion in the United States alone — a 33% increase from the previous year. And the nature of those attacks is changing in ways that make traditional defenses inadequate.

AI became a helpful tool for attackers in 2025, as they relied on large language models during intrusions and to write and deploy malware. Attackers now use AI to speed up exploitation, automate reconnaissance, and lower the skill barrier for launching sophisticated campaigns. Phishing as a Service kits such as Tycoon, NakedPages, and various Evilginx variations make sophisticated, continuously evolving capabilities available to lower skilled criminals.

According to the 2025 Verizon Data Breach Investigations Report, ransomware appeared in 88% of breaches involving small and medium sized businesses. The ransom itself is rarely the worst part. In some 22% of organizations, ransomware attacks halted business immediately, while 37% report their users, customers, and vendors were affected by the attack. The average ransomware attack has a life cycle of more than 300 days — nearly a full year in which the organization is tied up with discovery and remediation.

These are not abstract statistics. They describe what happens to businesses like the ones we serve. The good news is that most of these incidents are preventable with the right procedures in place. Here is how to build them.

SOP 1: Multi Factor Authentication Is Non Negotiable

If there is one procedure every small business needs formalized in writing before anything else, it is this one. Stolen credentials were the most common initial access vector in the 2025 Verizon DBIR, used in 22% of breaches. Brute force attacks against web applications nearly tripled year over year.

Passwords alone are no longer a security control. They are a starting point for attackers. Your SOP should require MFA on every account that allows remote access — email, cloud applications, financial platforms, CRM systems, VPNs, and administrative dashboards.

A critical nuance that most small business guides skip: not all MFA is equal. AI driven social engineering is making traditional authentication methods obsolete. As phishing attacks increasingly bypass standard MFA, insurers are now asking for MFA backed by physical security keys. SMS based one time passwords can be intercepted. Authenticator app based MFA is significantly stronger. FIDO based physical security keys represent the gold standard where your threat profile warrants it.

Your written SOP should specify which MFA method is required for which systems, who is responsible for enforcing enrollment, and what the policy is for contractors and third-party vendors accessing your environment. No exceptions and no workarounds based on convenience.

SOP 2: Patch Management Has a Schedule, Not a Someday

Unpatched systems are an open invitation. In 2026, attackers do not always hack their way in — sometimes they walk through an open door left by outdated software. Microsoft SharePoint was one of 2025's biggest zero-day targets, with flaws linked to both nation state actors and ransomware gangs, used to deploy web shells, steal sensitive data, and maintain persistence inside corporate networks. Consumer and enterprise software also played a role, with 7 Zip and WinRAR zero day flaws exploited in phishing campaigns to bypass security protections and install malware.

Patching workstations, devices, and appliances is one of the easiest ways to prevent attacks, especially as attackers increasingly use automation and AI-generated scripts to speed up their operations.

Your patch management SOP should define update cycles for operating systems, browsers, third party applications, firmware on networking equipment, and any web based platforms your business operates or relies on. Automatic updates should be enabled wherever the platform supports them. For systems that cannot be auto patched, a manual review schedule — minimum monthly — should be assigned to a specific person with accountability.

If your business runs a website managed through a CMS or a third party agency like Salt Creative, this includes your web stack. Outdated plugins, themes, and server software are among the most commonly exploited entry points for small business websites. A maintained web presence is not a luxury — it is part of your security posture.

SOP 3: Data Backup With the 3-2-1 Rule

A ransomware attack is not a question of whether you pay — it is a question of whether you have to. A backup is a secure copy of your business's critical data, stored separately from your primary systems. Businesses with clean, tested backups have options. Businesses without them rarely do.

The 3-2-1 rule provides the foundational framework: maintain 3 copies of important files on 2 different types of storage media, with 1 copy stored off site away from your location. In practice for most small businesses, this means a local copy on an external drive or NAS device, a cloud backup to a separate provider, and at minimum a periodic archive to secure off site storage.

The procedure that most businesses skip is testing. You do not want the first time you test your backup to be during an emergency. Your SOP should require quarterly restoration tests — actually pulling a file from backup and confirming it opens correctly. Backups that have never been tested are not backups; they are assumptions.

Backup jobs should run on an automated schedule, be encrypted in transit and at rest, and be monitored for failure. One of the most common scenarios we see is a business that set up a backup process eighteen months ago and never verified whether it continued running after a system update broke the automation.

SOP 4: Access Control and the Principle of Least Privilege

Not everyone in your organization needs access to everything. More access means more risk. The top technology that cyber insurers recommend companies implement in 2026 to reduce risk is role-based access controls. The logic is straightforward: if one account is compromised, limited permissions contain the blast radius.

With role based access control, even if attackers steal credentials, they are constrained by what that account can access — they cannot explore your entire infrastructure.

Your access control SOP should document who has access to what, require approval for any access escalation, and include a formal off boarding checklist that revokes credentials the day an employee or contractor leaves. This last point is consistently overlooked. Credential deprovisioning failures are a recurring root cause of breaches.

Third party vendors deserve particular scrutiny. Attackers increasingly target weaker links in the supply chain to gain access to larger networks, and SMBs often lack visibility into vendor security practices. Every vendor, contractor, or API integration that touches your systems should be documented, granted the minimum access required, and reviewed on a regular schedule.

SOP 5: Employee Security Awareness Training

Technology can close a lot of gaps. Human behavior closes the rest — or opens them. Human error causes the majority of successful attacks. No firewall stops an employee who clicks a convincing link in a phishing email.

Modern phishing attacks have gone omni channel, with roughly 1 in 3 phishing attacks now delivered outside of email. Notable campaigns include targeted attacks against business executives delivered via compromised LinkedIn accounts, framed as investment opportunities. Your employees need to know that social engineering does not only arrive through their inbox.

Role specific guidance is essential — employees handling financial transactions, sensitive data, or administrative credentials face different risks than the general workforce and benefit from targeted training.

Your training SOP does not need to be elaborate. Quarterly sessions covering current phishing tactics, password hygiene, safe remote work practices, and clear reporting procedures are enough to meaningfully reduce your exposure. Create a culture of "better safe than sorry" — make sure employees feel comfortable reporting anything suspicious without fear of getting in trouble. If your team is afraid to report a mistake, you lose your best early warning system.

Simulated phishing campaigns are worth considering for businesses beyond a handful of employees. They surface who needs additional coaching before an attacker finds out first.

SOP 6: Incident Response Planning

You hope you never use this one. You need it anyway. Even small businesses need a simple action plan for cyber incidents: outline who to contact, including your IT partner, insurance carrier, and law enforcement, how to isolate affected systems, and how to recover operations. Practice it at least once a year.

A small business incident response plan does not need to be a lengthy document. It needs to answer five questions: Who is responsible for declaring an incident? Who do we notify internally and externally? How do we isolate affected systems without compounding the damage? Where are our backups and how do we restore from them? Who handles communication to customers, vendors, or regulatory bodies if data was exposed?

Print it out. Store it somewhere accessible that does not require the compromised system to access. The businesses that navigate breaches with the least damage are the ones that knew exactly what to do in the first ninety minutes — before panic sets in and mistakes compound.

SOP 7: Email Authentication and Security Protocols

Your email domain is your identity. If attackers can spoof it, they can send fraudulent messages to your clients, vendors, and partners that appear to originate from your business. Email authentication protocols — SPF, DKIM, and DMARC — help prevent attackers from spoofing your domain to send fraudulent emails. These protocols are increasingly expected by major email providers.

Your email security SOP should confirm that all three records are correctly configured in your DNS, that inbound filtering goes beyond basic spam detection, and that someone is monitoring for unusual sending patterns or login anomalies that indicate a compromised account. Business email compromise — where an attacker takes over a legitimate account and uses it to redirect payments or harvest credentials — remains one of the highest dollar-loss categories of cybercrime targeting small businesses.

If your domain, hosting, or DNS is managed by your web agency, this is a conversation worth having explicitly. At Salt Creative, email authentication configuration is part of how we approach any client's domain infrastructure, because a website that ranks well means nothing if the domain behind it is being used to defraud that business's own customers.

SOP 8: System Logging and Monitoring

You cannot respond to what you cannot see. Logging refers to automatically recording events on your systems. Monitoring means reviewing and analyzing those logs to spot suspicious activity, system misuse, or early signs of attack.

A practical logging SOP should define what to capture — admin actions, network traffic, system events — enable logging on servers, firewalls, endpoint devices, and cloud services, centralize logs to make it easier to detect unusual activity, and set up alerts for high risk events such as failed login attempts and privilege escalation.

Many small businesses skip logging because it feels like enterprise territory. It is not. Most cloud platforms and even basic network equipment have logging capabilities built in that simply need to be enabled and directed somewhere useful. This is frequently the difference between discovering a breach in hours versus discovering it months later after the damage is already done.

SOP 9: Cyber Insurance Review

Cyber insurance does not prevent attacks. It changes what happens after one. Review your cyber insurance policy regularly to ensure your coverage limits and deductibles are in line with your current risk profile.

Getting cyber insurance for ransomware is not straightforward — many insurance agencies are limiting coverage because of high payout costs. Insurers increasingly require documented evidence of controls like MFA, backup procedures, and employee training before issuing policies — and they use that same documentation to evaluate claims after an incident. Businesses that cannot demonstrate they had reasonable controls in place may find their coverage challenged when they need it most.

Your annual insurance review should assess whether your coverage reflects the current size and data profile of your business, whether your deductible is manageable given your cash position, and whether any new insurer requirements have emerged that require adjustments to your security posture.

SOP 10: Third Party and Vendor Security Assessment

Every vendor with access to your systems extends your attack surface. When choosing third parties to work with, assess potential partners carefully — they should have clear security policies including data collection and sharing information. Treat third party accounts just like employees: add them to centralized access management systems and limit their privileges to prevent access to confidential data.

Require security attestations, such as SOC 2 reports, from critical vendors. Segment your network so that a compromised vendor does not automatically grant access to your core systems. Monitor for unusual activity on vendor provided accounts and integrations.

This applies directly to the digital tools most small businesses now rely on: cloud storage providers, payment processors, marketing platforms, CRM software, and yes — web development and digital marketing agencies. Any partner who handles your customer data or has administrative access to your online properties should be able to articulate their security practices clearly.

Building a Security Culture, Not Just a Security Checklist

SOPs only function when they are actually followed. That requires more than documentation — it requires the business owner setting the standard. When leadership treats security procedures as bureaucratic overhead, employees follow the same lead. When leadership enforces them consistently, enforces off boarding checklists, asks vendors the right questions, and runs annual tabletop exercises, security becomes part of how the business operates rather than something bolted on reluctantly.

For small businesses operating in regulated industries, cybersecurity in 2026 is not just an IT concern — it is a business survival imperative. State and federal regulators are elevating expectations around data protection, privacy, supply chain risk, and third-party oversight. The businesses that treat security as a competitive differentiator — demonstrating to clients, partners, and regulators that they take data protection seriously — are the ones building durable trust in a landscape where that trust is increasingly scarce.

The ten SOPs in this guide are not a ceiling. They are a floor. But implemented consistently, they address the overwhelming majority of attack vectors currently targeting small businesses and put you well ahead of where most of your peers are today.

If your business is working through a website rebuild, a marketing campaign, or a broader digital strategy, those efforts are only as durable as the infrastructure they sit on. At Salt Creative, we believe smart digital marketing and sound digital practice go hand in hand. The businesses we help grow online are the same businesses that need their online presence protected. That perspective shapes how we approach every client engagement — from the copy on the page to the code beneath it.

Start with your biggest gap. Close it. Move to the next one. That steady, deliberate progress is what separates the businesses that recover quickly when something goes wrong from the ones that do not recover at all.

2026 Small Business Insurance Audit: Managing Rising Premiums

Sun, 08 Mar 2026 19:35:09 GMT

If your small business insurance renewal arrived this year with a number that made you wince, you're not alone. Across the country, small business owners are opening policy renewal envelopes and asking the same question: Why does this keep going up — and what can I do about it?

The answer is complicated, and the stakes are real. Getting this wrong doesn't just hurt your bottom line. It can leave you with coverage gaps that survive a renewal cycle, operating with a false sense of security right up until you need to file a claim. This guide is built from that on the ground experience and draws on data from the most credible insurance and small business resources available.

What follows is a practical 2026 audit framework — not theory, not filler. It's a structured way to review what you're paying, understand why premiums are rising, and take steps to protect your margins without cutting corners on coverage.

Why Small Business Insurance Premiums Are Rising in 2026

Before you can manage rising premiums, you need to understand what's driving them. Several forces have converged to push costs upward across nearly every coverage category.

Inflation is the biggest headline. Inflation remains the top stressor for small business owners, with 62% identifying it as their biggest source of stress — and that concern is directly connected to the rising cost of doing business. Insurance is no exception. Material costs, labor, legal fees, and healthcare expenses — the three big cost drivers behind insurance payouts — have all increased. When claims cost more to settle, premiums follow.

Claims frequency and severity are up. Slip and fall claims alone account for about 20% of all small business insurance claims, with the average cost of a single claim running approximately $45,000. Reputational harm claims, including libel and slander, cost an average of $35,000 each. These aren't abstract numbers. They're the direct mechanism by which your premium gets calculated when your renewal comes up.

Cyber risk is creating a new premium category. Data breaches are occurring with increasing frequency in companies with 250 or fewer employees. Cyber coverage has grown increasingly important to all types of businesses and can help protect against costs related to data breach notification, remediation, card payment penalties, crisis management, and public relations. In 2026, the biggest external pressures on the small business insurance market are tightening AI governance and expanding state privacy laws, with regulators pushing for clearer disclosures around data sources used in underwriting. For many small businesses, cyber liability insurance has moved from a "nice to have" to a baseline requirement — and that new line item adds real cost.

AI driven risk is emerging. As small businesses adopt agentic AI tools that take autonomous action, employees using these tools without proper governance are generating a new class of "blended" claims involving more than one policy type — incorrect client deliverables, privacy breaches, and even IP leakage. Standard general liability policies were not built with these scenarios in mind, and many underwriters are still figuring out how to price this risk. In the interim, that uncertainty often translates to higher premiums.

Many businesses are underinsured and don't know it. Industry research consistently shows that most small businesses in the U.S. are underinsured, leaving them vulnerable to potential claims and financial liability. Of businesses that have been operating for ten years or more, 39% have never updated their general liability insurance — meaning their coverage is highly likely to have been outgrown. This matters to the premium conversation because gaps discovered at renewal time often force businesses into reactive, last minute decisions rather than strategic ones.

Step 1: Start With an Honest Inventory of What You Have

An insurance audit begins before you call your agent. The first step is a cold, clear eyed inventory of every active policy your business carries. Pull every declaration page. Note the policy type, carrier, coverage limits, deductibles, and renewal date.

The coverage types most small businesses should account for include:

General Liability Insurance is the foundation. The average cost of general liability insurance runs around $45 per month, with annual premiums ranging from around $250 to over $3,000 per year depending on several factors including profession, location, and claims history. If you don't have this, you're exposed. Small businesses often require general liability insurance to sign a client contract, obtain a professional license, or rent commercial space — meaning a lapse doesn't just expose you to liability, it can lock you out of contracts entirely.

Business Owner's Policy (BOP) is worth knowing about if you're currently buying general liability and commercial property separately. The average cost of a Business Owner's Policy runs approximately $141 per month or $1,687 per year, though your premium will vary depending on coverage, industry, size, and claims history. A BOP bundles core coverages and typically costs less than purchasing policies individually.

Professional Liability Insurance protects against negligence claims related to your services. The average cost runs around $88 per month, with annual premiums ranging from $380 to $7,400 depending on the services offered, revenue, and risk profile. Service businesses — consultants, designers, marketers, advisors — that skip this coverage are carrying significant unpriced risk.

Workers' Compensation Insurance is legally required in almost every state. The average cost runs approximately $54 per month for small businesses, with annual premiums ranging from about $250 to $5,700 per year. Currently, every state except Texas requires most employers to carry it.

Cyber Liability Insurance is no longer optional for any business that stores customer data, processes payments, or operates any part of its business online. The collection, management, and protection of client data creates significant risk that standard policies simply don't cover.

Once you have your inventory, check each policy against what your business looks like today — not what it looked like when the policy was written. Have you hired staff? Purchased equipment? Taken on new clients in new industries? Expanded service lines? As your business grows, so do your liabilities.

The federal government recommends reassessing your coverage every year and contacting your insurance agent whenever you purchase or replace equipment or expand operations.

Step 2: Identify the Coverage Gaps Before They Find You

Coverage gaps are the silent killer in small business insurance. They don't announce themselves until a claim is filed — and by then, it's too late to fix them.

Industry surveys show that most small business owners don't know what their basic insurance policies actually cover, with 71% not understanding what a Business Owner's Policy covers and 83% unable to correctly describe a General Liability policy's coverage. That's not a judgment — insurance language is genuinely opaque. But it is a reason to take the audit seriously.

Most problems with business insurance coverage come from exclusions, low limits, or missing endorsements. When reviewing your policies, confirm what's required by name and by wording — including limits, additional insured status, waiver of subrogation, and primary and noncontributory provisions — then make sure your certificate of insurance reflects them.

Four coverage gaps show up most commonly in small business audits:

Flood and earthquake exclusions. Standard commercial property policies do not cover flood or earthquake damage. Coverage for these events typically must be secured through separate riders or policies. If your business is in a flood zone or an area with seismic risk, this is not a theoretical problem.

Business interruption without the right triggers. Commercial property insurance covers physical damage. It does not cover lost revenue. Business interruption insurance fills that gap — but policies vary enormously in what qualifies as a covered interruption. Review your policy language before assuming you're protected.

Cyber exclusions inside general liability. General liability insurance does not typically cover cyber related liabilities. If your general liability policy is your only protection and you experience a data breach, you may have no coverage at all.

Outdated limits. If your business has grown since your last policy review, your coverage limits may no longer reflect your actual exposure. A $1 million per occurrence general liability limit may have been appropriate three years ago and entirely inadequate now if your revenue, payroll, or client base has scaled.

Step 3: Understand What's Driving Your Specific Premium

Insurance carriers price policies based on risk. The more risk you present, the more you pay. Most of those risk signals are within your control — or at least influenceable.

Insurers use several factors to determine your premium, including industry, business size, number of employees, location, and claims history. Claims history is the biggest single lever. If your business has filed claims before, it signals to underwriters that your operations are either inherently risky or not taking proper steps to mitigate risk — both of which push premiums upward.

Beyond claims history, geography matters more than many owners realize. Every state has different rates for litigation, healthcare, and other expenses relevant to claims — all of which feed directly into your premium. A business in a high litigation state or a high crime zip code pays more, even with an identical risk profile. Workers' compensation is particularly sensitive to this effect, with some states seeing rate increases as high as 8.7% for 2025 alone.

Employee classification matters for workers' comp specifically. Misclassifying employees with the wrong class codes can lead to penalties and additional costs over time. It is worth having your classifications reviewed by your broker — especially if your business has changed its mix of roles since the policy was originally written.

Step 4: Take Action to Reduce What You're Paying

Once you understand what you have and why you're paying what you're paying, you can take targeted steps to reduce premiums without sacrificing the coverage your business actually needs.

Bundle your policies. Many insurance companies offer a discount when you bundle general liability with other business insurance products. If you're buying policies from multiple carriers for coverages that could be combined, you're likely leaving savings on the table.

Pay your premium annually. If you pay the entire cost upfront each year rather than monthly, you can often get a meaningful discount on your total insurance costs. This requires cash flow discipline but is one of the cleaner ways to reduce your annual spend.

Raise your deductible strategically. A higher deductible typically results in a lower premium — though this can backfire if you have to file a claim, since you'll pay more before coverage kicks in. This trade off makes the most sense for businesses with sufficient reserves and low historical claims frequency.

Invest in documented risk management. Safer businesses have lower insurance costs. Creating a risk management plan to reduce the likelihood of accidents at your work location, job sites, and on the road is one of the most direct ways to influence your premium over time. Safety training programs, cybersecurity protocols, and clear workplace policies aren't just good practice. They're premium reduction tools when you can demonstrate them to your underwriter.

Shop your coverage at every renewal. Get business insurance quotes from several providers at every renewal cycle so you can find the best coverage at the best price. Carrier loyalty is not rewarded in commercial insurance the same way it is in personal lines. Your best leverage is a competitive quote in hand at renewal time.

Use pay as you go workers' comp if your workforce fluctuates. A pay as you go workers' compensation plan offers flexible premiums that change as your workforce shrinks and grows — a particularly useful option for businesses with seasonal or variable staffing.

Step 5: Build a Long Term Relationship With Your Broker

The most consistent mistake small business owners make with insurance isn't the wrong policy choice or the missed endorsement. It's treating insurance as a transaction rather than an ongoing advisory relationship.

Experts consistently recommend proactive, ongoing discussion about insurance with your agent or broker — which may mean using higher deductibles to purchase broader, higher coverage limits for a lower overall premium. The goal is to make sure your coverages match your actual potential liabilities, not just the profile of your business from two or three years ago.

One of the overlooked advantages of maintaining appropriate insurance coverage is that it bolsters your reputation among clients and customers. Having an active policy makes it easier to win business because it adds a layer of professionalism to your operations — and in that sense, every policy is potentially an upfront investment that can mean more revenue down the road.

At Salt Creative, we see this play out in the digital marketing space specifically. Service businesses — agencies, consultants, designers — are increasingly asked to provide certificates of insurance before contracts are signed. The business that can produce its COI on demand isn't just protected. It's positioned as the more professional option.

Your broker should be someone who understands your business model, knows your industry's risk profile, and reaches out proactively when your situation changes — not just when it's time to renew. Research consistently shows that agents and brokers are the most helpful source of information for small business owners navigating insurance decisions. Choose yours accordingly.

The 2026 Insurance Audit Checklist

Use this as your starting point. Pull out every policy before your next renewal cycle and work through it line by line.

Coverage Inventory

Confirm every active policy: type, carrier, limits, deductible, renewal date
Verify that policy limits reflect your current revenue, payroll, and asset base
Check for exclusions around flood, earthquake, and cyber incidents
Confirm that your COI reflects required endorsements for active client contracts

Gap Analysis

Are you covered for business interruption, and do you know what triggers it?
Do you have standalone cyber liability coverage?
If you have employees, is your workers' comp current and are classifications accurate?
Are any policies written against a version of your business that no longer exists?

Cost Reduction Levers

Have you obtained at least two to three competitive quotes at this renewal?
Are you buying policies separately that could be bundled?
Are you paying monthly when annual payment would save money?
Have you documented a risk management plan that could be presented to underwriters?

Relationship Check

When did you last have a substantive conversation with your broker that wasn't triggered by a renewal?
Does your broker know about every material change to your business this year?
Does your broker specialize in businesses like yours?

The Bottom Line

Rising insurance premiums are not going away. Inflation, increased claims severity, cyber risk, and the compounding effects of inadequate prior coverage have created a market where passive renewal is a losing strategy. The businesses that manage this well in 2026 are the ones treating their annual insurance review with the same rigor they bring to any other line item on their P&L.

That means running an audit — not once, but every year. It means building a relationship with a broker who advises rather than just processes. And it means understanding that the goal of the audit isn't to spend less. It's to spend right.

The cost of being underinsured, as anyone who has filed a major claim without adequate coverage will tell you, is orders of magnitude higher than any premium you're trying to avoid.

This article is intended for general informational purposes and does not constitute legal, financial, or insurance advice. Consult a licensed insurance professional for guidance specific to your business situation.

Salt Creative’s Guide to Practical AI Implementation

Fri, 06 Feb 2026 23:24:22 GMT

Don't Just Buy Tools, Build Workflows: The 7 Step AI Guide for Small Business

Your competitors are using AI to handle the work of three employees while you're still manually scheduling appointments and writing every email from scratch. The gap is widening every week.

This isn't about staying current with technology trends. AI tools in 2026 cost $20-50/month and can replace 10-15 hours of weekly busywork. If you're not using them, you're paying someone (probably yourself) $50-75/hour to do work that software handles for $1/hour.

This guide skips the theory. You're getting a step by step execution plan to implement AI in your business this quarter without breaking the bank or overwhelming your team.

Step 1: Choose Your Path: DIY Implementation vs. Hiring an AI Agency

Decide right now: Will you DIY this or hire help?

DIY Route:

Time commitment: 3-5 hours per week for 90 days
Focus: Learning tools, setting up workflows, training team
Timeline: See results in 30-45 days
Best for: Businesses under $500K revenue or owners who enjoy technology

Agency/Consultant Route:

Monthly cost: $1,500-3,500 for implementation + training
Timeline: Results in 15-30 days
Best for: Businesses over $500K revenue where owner's time is worth $100+/hour

Reality check: Testing random AI tools without a plan wastes time and money. Half your team will ignore the tools, the other half will use them incorrectly, and you'll cancel subscriptions after three months having accomplished nothing.

Commit to one path before moving to Step 2.

Step 2: Conduct a Time Audit to Identify Tasks for Automation

Stop everything and track your time for three days. Write down every task that takes more than 15 minutes.

Common Time Wasters AI Can Eliminate:

Customer Service (5-15 hours/week):

Answering the same questions repeatedly
Responding to after hours inquiries
Scheduling and rescheduling appointments

Content Creation (3-8 hours/week):

Writing emails, social posts, blog articles
Creating marketing materials
Drafting proposals and contracts

Administrative Work (8-12 hours/week):

Data entry and updating spreadsheets
Meeting notes and summaries
Invoice processing and follow-ups

Your Assignment:

Circle the three categories where you waste the most time. Those are your implementation targets for the next 90 days.

Example: If you spend 10 hours/week on customer service, 6 hours on content, and 4 hours on admin work, start with customer service automation.

Step 3: Select the Right AI Tools for Customer Service, Content, or Admin

Match your biggest time waster from Step 2 to the right tool category:

For Customer Service → AI Chatbot

Tools: Tidio, Intercom, Chatbase

What it does: Answers common questions 24/7, qualifies leads, schedules appointments

Setup time: 2-4 hours to configure, train on your FAQs, and test

Immediate ROI: Captures leads outside business hours, frees you from answering "What are your hours?" 50 times per week

For Content Creation → AI Writing Assistant

Tools: ChatGPT Plus, Claude Pro, Jasper

What it does: Drafts emails, social posts, blogs, proposals in seconds

Setup time: 1-2 hours learning prompts and workflows

Immediate ROI: Cut writing time by 60-80%, publish more content with same effort

For Administrative Work → Automation Platform

Tools: Zapier, Make, n8n (free/self-hosted)

What it does: Connects your tools and automates repetitive workflows without coding

Setup time: 3-5 hours setting up first 3-5 automations

Immediate ROI: Eliminate 5-10 hours/week of data entry and manual tasks

Your Assignment:

Pick ONE tool. Sign up today. Spend this week learning it for one specific use case.

Don't add a second tool until you've mastered the first.

Step 4: Execute Your First Automation Workflow to Save Time Immediately

Take your chosen tool and implement one workflow that saves at least 2 hours per week.

If You Chose a Chatbot:

Week 3 Workflow:

List your 10 most asked customer questions
Write clear, concise answers for each
Configure chatbot to recognize these questions and respond automatically
Add a contact form for questions it can't answer
Test with friends/colleagues before going live

Week 4 Optimization:

Review chatbot conversations daily
Add new Q&A pairs as gaps appear
Adjust tone to match your brand voice

If You Chose AI Writing:

Week 3 Workflow:

Create 3-5 prompt templates for your most common writing tasks

Example: "Write a professional follow-up email to [client type] who requested [service]. Keep it under 150 words and include [call to action]."

Generate content using templates

Edit AI output to add your voice (should take 5-10 minutes vs. 30-40 minutes writing from scratch)

Week 4 Optimization:

Refine prompts based on what works
Build a prompt library for your team
Train one employee to use the tool

If You Chose Automation Platform:

Week 3 Workflow:

Pick your most repetitive task (example: "When someone fills out contact form, add to CRM and send confirmation email")
Build the automation step by step
Test with fake data before deploying

Week 4 Optimization:

Monitor for errors (check daily)
Add second automation for next biggest time-waster
Document your workflows so team can reference them

Success metric: By end of Week 4, you should reclaim at least 2-3 hours per week. If not, you picked the wrong workflow—adjust and try again.

Step 5: Train Your Employees to Adopt AI Standard Operating Procedures

AI only transforms your business when your whole team uses it, not just you.

The 4-Step Team Training Plan:

Week 5: Identify Your AI Champion

Pick your most tech comfortable employee
Give them paid time to explore the tools you've implemented
Have them document what works in simple language

Week 6: Train the First Wave

Start with 1-2 team members
Focus on one workflow they do daily
Let them practice with supervision for 3-5 days

Week 7: Create Simple SOPs

Document: When to use AI, when not to
Include examples of good outputs vs. bad outputs
Emphasize "AI drafts, humans approve" for anything customer-facing

Week 8: Roll Out Team Wide

Train remaining team members
Set up weekly check ins to troubleshoot issues
Celebrate wins publicly when someone uses AI effectively

Common Resistance:

"This will replace my job" → Reassure: AI makes them more valuable, not obsolete
"It's too complicated" → Start with one simple task, build confidence
"I don't trust it" → Show them the human-review process

Your Assignment:

Don't skip team training. If only you use the tools, you've automated 1 person's work. If 5 people use them, you've multiplied your impact 5x.

Step 6: Integrate Advanced AI Workflows for Analytics and Management

Once your first tool is humming, layer in additional AI capabilities.

Priority #2 Tool (Pick One):

If you started with chatbot → Add AI writing

Use AI to draft email responses to chatbot leads
Generate social content showcasing customer conversations (with permission)

If you started with AI writing → Add automation

Auto post AI generated content to social channels
Set up automated email sequences for new leads

If you started with automation → Add AI writing

Use AI to personalize automated emails
Generate monthly reports from automated data collection

Advanced Use Cases to Explore:

Customer Insights:

Feed customer conversations into AI for trend analysis
Identify most common pain points and objections
Generate monthly reports on customer needs

Competitive Analysis:

AI monitors competitor websites and pricing changes
Summarizes industry news relevant to your business
Alerts you to opportunities

Project Management:

AI predicts project timelines based on historical data
Suggests optimal resource allocation
Identifies bottlenecks before they cause delays

Your Assignment:

By Week 12, you should have 2-3 AI tools running smoothly, saving 8-15 hours per week across your team.

Step 7: Track Metrics and Calculate the ROI of Your AI Tools

Track these metrics monthly:

Time Savings:

Hours saved per week (be honest, not optimistic)
Tasks eliminated vs. tasks assisted
Employee hours redirected to high value work

Financial Impact:

Monthly tool cost vs. labor cost savings
New revenue from additional capacity
Customer acquisition cost (should decrease if AI improves response time)

Quality Metrics:

Customer satisfaction scores
Response time to inquiries
Error rate (AI mistakes vs. human mistakes)

If ROI is negative after 90 days:

You picked the wrong tools (too complex or wrong use case)
Team isn't actually using them (training issue)
You're not measuring correctly (underestimating time saved)

Your Assignment:

Set a calendar reminder for Day 90. Review your metrics. If you're not saving at least 6-8 hours per week and $500+ per month, something's wrong. Troubleshoot or pivot.

5 Essential Security Rules for Protecting Business Data

Rule #1: Never Put Sensitive Data in Public AI Tools

Customer credit cards, SSNs, passwords = NEVER
Use business/enterprise versions for confidential information
Free ChatGPT ≠ secure for business data

Rule #2: Always Review Before Publishing

AI drafts, humans approve
No AI generated content goes to customers without human review
Double check facts, numbers, legal claims

Rule #3: Start with Low-Stakes Tasks

First automation: "Add email subscribers to newsletter"
NOT first automation: "Process payroll automatically"
Build confidence before tackling critical workflows

Rule #4: Have an Off Switch

Know how to disable automations quickly
Monitor new automations daily for first week
Keep manual backup process until AI proves reliable

Rule #5: Train Your Team on What NOT to Do

Don't paste client contracts into free AI tools
Don't let AI make final decisions on hiring, firing, pricing, legal matters
Don't trust AI for anything requiring real judgment

Break these rules and you'll have a data breach, angry customer, or expensive mistake within 30 days.

90-Day Action Plan Summary

The Cost of Inaction: Why You Must Start Now

Every week you delay, competitors are capturing leads faster, serving customers better, and operating leaner than you.

The businesses winning in 2026 aren't the ones with the biggest teams. They're the ones using AI to punch above their weight delivering enterprise level service with 5 people instead of 15.

The cost of not implementing AI:

10-15 hours per week spent on busywork (520-780 hours per year)
Slower response times = lost deals to faster competitors
Hiring additional staff instead of leveraging AI ($30K-50K per year per role)
Burnout from doing everything manually

The cost of implementing AI:

$50-200/month in tool subscriptions
20-40 hours one time setup investment
3-5 hours/week ongoing optimization

AI pays for itself in the first month.

Partner with Salt Creative for Strategic AI Implementation

Salt Creative helps small businesses implement AI strategically without the overwhelm, technical jargon, or wasted money on wrong tools.

Get a Custom AI Readiness Assessment. We'll identify your biggest opportunities and build a custom 90 day plan.

Start with Step 1 today. In 90 days, you'll wonder how you ever ran your business without AI.

The Complete Step by Step Guide to Real Estate SEO (Rank Your Listings in 2026)

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Wed, 04 Feb 2026 15:41:58 GMT

Zillow and Trulia own the first page for "homes for sale" and "real estate agent near me." You will never outrank them for these terms. Stop trying. Instead, target hyper-local, long-tail searches where buyers actually convert: "3-bedroom homes in [Your Neighborhood]" or "condos near [School District]." These searches have lower competition, higher intent, and they're winnable.

This guide skips SEO theory entirely. You're getting a step-by-step execution plan to rank your listings and agent profile in local search results this quarter.

Step 1: Set Your SEO Budget & Expectations

Decide right now: Will you do this yourself or hire help?

DIY Route:

Time commitment: 8–12 hours per week minimum
Focus areas: Content creation, link building, technical fixes
Timeline: 4–6 months to see meaningful traffic
Best for: Agents with time but limited budget

Agency Route:

Monthly cost: $1,500–$5,000+ depending on market competitiveness
Timeline: 3–4 months to see results
Best for: Agents doing $5M+ in annual volume who need to focus on closing deals

Reality check: Real estate SEO is brutally competitive. Dabbling—posting one blog per month or "trying some keywords"—accomplishes nothing. Commit fully to one path or don't start. Half-effort means you're burning time and money while your competitors capture the leads.

Pick your lane now before moving to Step 2.

Step 2: Local Keyword Research (The "City + Home" Formula)

Stop targeting "real estate agent." Start targeting what buyers actually type when they're ready to move.

Use Hyper-Local Keywords

Generic terms like "homes for sale" send you into a death match with Zillow. Hyper-local keywords are your competitive advantage. These phrases combine your service area with property-specific search intent.

High-Value Keyword Formulas:

"[Neighborhood Name] homes for sale"
"Condos near [School District Name]"
"Waterfront property in [City]"
"[Subdivision Name] real estate listings"
"New construction in [Zip Code]"
"Townhomes for sale [Street/Area]"

Your First Assignment: Build Your Keyword List

Do this right now:

List your top 5 farming neighborhoods or subdivisions
Pair each one with "homes for sale"
Add property type variations (condos, townhomes, single-family, luxury, waterfront)
Include school districts if applicable—parents search this way constantly

Example:

"Homes for sale in Riverside Estates"
"Condos near Jefferson Elementary School District"
"Waterfront property in Lake Norman"
"Luxury homes in Buckhead Atlanta"
"New construction in 30004"

Pro tip: Use Google's autocomplete. Type "[Your City] homes" and see what Google suggests. Those suggestions are real searches happening right now. Screenshot them and add to your list.

You now have 15–25 targeted keywords. These are your ranking targets for the next 90 days.

Step 3: Optimizing Property Pages (On-Page SEO)

Take your keyword list from Step 2 and embed it into every listing page you control. Here's exactly where to place it.

The Property Page Optimization Checklist

Work through this checklist for every featured listing on your website:

Title Tag (60 characters max):

Formula: [Street Address] + [City] + [Property Type] | [Your Name]
Example: "427 Oak Street Boise Home for Sale | Sarah Chen Realty"
Place your primary keyword here—this is what appears in Google search results

Meta Description (155 characters max):

Include: Price, beds/baths, standout feature, call to action
Example: "$475K | 4 bed, 3 bath updated home in Meridian with mountain views. Schedule your private showing today. Call 208-555-0199."
This won't directly boost rankings, but it increases click-through rate

H1 Heading:

Use the full address: "427 Oak Street, Boise, ID 83702"
Only one H1 per page

Image Alt Text:

Describe what's in the photo using local terms
Good: "Modern kitchen with granite countertops in Meridian ID home"
Bad: "IMG_4728.jpg" or "Kitchen"
Do this for every photo—aim for 8-12 optimized images per listing

Property Description:

Write a unique 50–100 word intro for each featured listing
Include neighborhood name, nearby landmarks, school district

Critical Warning: Avoid Duplicate Content

Do NOT copy/paste the MLS description verbatim. Every agent in your market has access to the same MLS feed. If you're syndicating identical descriptions, Google sees duplicate content and won't rank any version.

Do this instead:

Use the MLS description as reference
Rewrite the opening paragraph in your own voice
Add neighborhood context, commute times, local amenities
Focus on 3–5 hero listings and fully optimize those first

Quick win: If you have 50 active listings, fully optimize your top 10 highest-value properties. Those will drive 80% of your organic traffic.

Step 4: Claim and Optimize Google Business Profile

The Google Map Pack (the 3 listings with maps that appear above organic results) generates more clicks than any other real estate search result. If you're not in it, you're invisible.

3 Quick Wins to Dominate Local Map Results

Win #1: Verify Your Business Address

Go to google.com/business and claim your profile
Enter your office address (even if it's a shared workspace)
Work from home? You can hide your street address and still appear in local results. Select "I deliver goods and services to my customers" and specify your service area by city or zip code.
Verify via postcard, phone, or email

Win #2: Upload High-Quality Photos

Upload these specific photo types:

Headshot of you and your team (professional, not selfies)
"Just Sold" yard signs in front of properties
Office exterior and interior
Community events you've sponsored or attended

Aim for 20+ photos. Profiles with photos get 42% more requests for directions and 35% more clicks to websites.

Win #3: Get Reviews from Past Clients

Reviews are the #1 ranking factor for the Map Pack. You need 10+ reviews minimum to compete.

Copy/paste this email script and send it to your last 20 closed clients:

Subject: Quick favor—would you mind leaving a review?

Hi [Client Name],

I'm so glad we could help you with [Address]. Would you mind taking 60 seconds to leave a quick Google review? It helps other buyers and sellers find me.

Here's the link: [Insert your Google Business Profile review link]

Thanks so much!

[Your Name]

Pro tip: Send this email 2–3 weeks after closing when the client is happiest. Respond to every review (positive or negative) within 24 hours. Google rewards engagement. Real estate is one of the highest CRM-adoption industries in the country — our CRM statistics page has the data on how agents and brokers are using it to close more deals.

Set a reminder to request one review per week. In 90 days, you'll have 12+ reviews and be competitive in the Map Pack.

Step 5: Content That Actually Generates Leads (Blogging)

Stop writing blog posts about "5 Reasons to Use a Realtor" or "Our Team Just Won an Award." No one searches for that. Write content that answers specific questions buyers and sellers type into Google.

3 Blog Post Templates That Rank and Convert

Template #1: Relocation Guides

Title format: "Moving to [City]: Complete 2026 Relocation Guide"
Who this captures: Out-of-state buyers researching before they visit
What to include: Cost of living, job market, school rankings, neighborhoods by price range, commute times, local amenities
Length: 1,500–2,000 words
Example: "Moving to Boise: Complete 2026 Relocation Guide"

These rank for months and capture high-intent buyers at the top of the funnel.

Template #2: Neighborhood Reviews

Title format: "Pros and Cons of Living in [Neighborhood Name]"
Who this captures: Buyers narrowing down where to focus their search
What to include: Home price ranges, walkability score, schools, crime stats, HOA fees, nearby shopping/dining, who the neighborhood is best for (families, retirees, young professionals)
Length: 800–1,200 words
Example: "Pros and Cons of Living in Eagle, Idaho"

Write one post per farming neighborhood. Embed a contact form at the bottom.

Template #3: Monthly Market Reports

Title format: "[City] Real Estate Market Report – [Month Year]"
Who this captures: Sellers researching what their home is worth
What to include: Median sale price, average days on market, inventory levels, seller's vs. buyer's market indicators, 3-month trends
Length: 600–800 words
Example: "Boise Real Estate Market Report – February 2026"

Publish this every month. Update the URL slug each time (e.g., /boise-market-report-february-2026/). Sellers search for this constantly.

Publishing cadence: Post 2–4 blogs per month minimum. Consistency matters more than volume. One well-researched post per week beats four rushed posts per month.

Step 6: Technical Essentials (Mobile & Speed)

Over 60% of real estate searches happen on mobile devices. If your site takes longer than 3 seconds to load or looks broken on a phone, the user bounces to Zillow. You lose the lead before they even see your listings.

Check Your Site Speed Right Now

Do this immediately:

Go to Google PageSpeed Insights (pagespeed.web.dev)
Enter your website URL
Check both Mobile and Desktop scores

Target scores:

Mobile: 50+ (70+ is excellent)
Desktop: 70+ (90+ is excellent)

If your score is below 50 on mobile, fix these issues first:

Compress images (use TinyPNG or ShortPixel)
Enable browser caching
Minimize redirects
Use a reliable hosting provider (avoid $5/month shared hosting if you're serious about leads)

Mobile responsiveness check:

Open your site on your phone right now
Can you easily tap buttons?
Is text readable without zooming?
Do forms work properly?

If anything is broken, forward this to your web developer today. A slow, broken mobile site kills your SEO and wastes every dollar you spend on traffic.

Quick fix: Most real estate website platforms (IDX Broker, Placester, AgentFire) have mobile optimization built in. If you're on WordPress with a custom theme from 2018, you likely have problems. Consider migrating to a modern platform.

Conclusion: Your 90-Day Action Plan

You now have a complete roadmap to rank your real estate listings in local search. Here's your execution checklist:

Week 1-2:

Set your SEO budget (DIY or agency)
Build your hyper-local keyword list (Step 2)
Claim and optimize Google Business Profile (Step 4)

Week 3-6:

Optimize your top 10 property pages (Step 3)
Write your first relocation or neighborhood guide (Step 5)
Check site speed and fix critical mobile issues (Step 6)

Week 7-12:

Publish 1-2 blog posts per week
Request reviews from past clients (1 per week minimum)
Monitor rankings for your target keywords

Ongoing:

Add new optimized listings as they come
Update market reports monthly
Build 10+ Google reviews per quarter

Overwhelmed? You're Not Alone.

Most agents don't have 8-12 hours per week to execute this plan while running their business. If you're pulling $5M+ in annual sales volume, your time is worth more than DIY SEO.

Get a free SEO audit: We'll analyze your current site, identify your biggest ranking opportunities, and show you exactly what's costing you leads right now. No obligation. No sales pitch until you ask for one.

Contact Us or fill out the form below.

Ready to get more leads from Google?

Start with Step 1 today. Set your budget. Commit to the process. In 90 days, you'll be capturing buyer and seller leads that your competitors are missing—because they're still trying to outrank Zillow instead of outsmarting them.

What Construction Business Owners Need to Know About Construction Software

Thu, 20 Nov 2025 17:03:25 GMT

What Is Construction Software for Small Businesses?

If you run a small construction business, you know how quickly things can get messy. You're juggling quotes, scheduling crews, tracking materials, and trying to remember which client needs what by when.

Construction software is basically a digital toolbox designed to handle all of that in one place. Think of it as your assistant that never takes a day off. Instead of drowning in paperwork and phone calls, you get tools that help you manage projects, communicate with your team, send invoices, and keep everything organized. The best part? It's built specifically for construction work, so it actually understands how your business operates. For companies that want smoother days and fewer headaches, it's becoming less of a luxury and more of a necessity. Beyond project management, CRM tools are becoming standard in construction for tracking bids, clients, and referrals — our CRM statistics roundup has the adoption data to support the investment case.

Top 5 Construction Software

1. Procore

One of the most widely used all-in-one construction management platforms, Procore supports project management, financials, field operations, and reporting.

2. Buildertrend

Very popular among residential and small-to-mid contractors. It offers scheduling, budget tracking, client portals, change orders, and more.

3. Autodesk Construction Cloud

Integrates design (AutoCAD, Revit) with construction workflows; supports document management, BIM, coordination, and real-time collaboration.

4. PlanGrid (now part of Autodesk Construction Cloud)

Focused on field productivity: blueprint viewing, version control, markups, daily reports, photo logs.

5. CoConstruct

Well-suited for custom home builders and remodelers. It has estimating, scheduling, client communication (selection tools), and budget tracking.

5 Interesting Construction Software Statistics

1. 43% adoption of cloud-based construction management software

According to the “ THE STATE OF TECHNOLOGY IN THE CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ” survey, 43% of construction businesses have fully implemented and seamlessly integrated with advanced technologies.

2. 37% of construction firms now use AI / machine learning

The same survey found that 37% of businesses are using AI and machine learning, up from 26% in a prior edition.

3. Strong market growth: Software market to almost double

The construction management software market was valued at USD 9.67 billion in 2023 and is projected to grow from USD 10.52 billion in 2024 to USD 20.67 billion by 2031.

4. Cloud deployment dominating growth

The cloud-based segment of construction management software is expected to see strong growth (high CAGR), as more companies favor scalable, real-time collaboration tools.

5. Digital tools can drive up to 20% on-site quality and increase client communication and satisfaction

According to a 2023 construction-tech trend analysis , firms using digital construction tools report realized a 20% improvement in on-site quality and safety and increase client communication and satisfaction.

Common Problems Small Construction Companies Face Every Day

Most mornings start the same way. You're on one job site when someone calls about another. A supplier is late with materials, your foreman needs an answer about tomorrow's schedule, and you just realized you forgot to send that invoice from last week. Meanwhile, there's a stack of paperwork on your truck's dashboard that keeps growing. You're constantly switching between phone calls, text messages, and trying to remember what you told which crew.

By afternoon, you're digging through old emails to find a client's specifications, and by evening, you're still catching up on estimates. It's exhausting, and honestly, it doesn't have to be this chaotic. The day to day grind eats up time you'd rather spend actually building things or growing your business.

What Does Construction Management Software Actually Do?

Construction software brings everything into one spot so you're not constantly hunting for information. You can schedule jobs and see who's working where without playing phone tag all morning. Time tracking becomes automatic instead of relying on scraps of paper or trying to remember who worked what hours three days ago.

Project planning tools let you map out timelines and catch potential problems before they happen. You can track materials so you actually know what's on site and what needs ordering, which saves those frustrating trips back to the supplier. Budget tracking shows where money's going in real time instead of surprising you at the end of the month. Communication gets easier too. Send updates to your crew, share photos with clients, or answer questions without a dozen separate text threads. Some systems even let clients check progress themselves, which cuts down on the constant "how's it looking" calls. It all adds up to less chaos and more control over your daily workflow.

How Construction Software Saves Time and Money for Contractors

The real payoff shows up in ways you might not expect. When your schedule is visible to everyone, crews stop showing up to the wrong site or sitting around waiting for direction. That alone saves hours every week. Communication gets clearer too, so you're not dealing with expensive mistakes from misunderstood instructions. One guy I know used to lose whole afternoons fixing problems that came from someone reading the wrong set of plans. Billing happens faster because everything's already documented. You're not scrambling to remember details from two weeks ago or chasing down timesheets. Material planning improves since you can see what's actually being used versus what you ordered. That means fewer emergency runs and less money sitting in unused supplies.

The time you get back can go toward landing new projects or actually taking a weekend off. Over a year, those small improvements add up to serious money and a lot less stress on you personally.

How to Choose the Right Construction Software for Your Company

Picking the right software doesn't have to be complicated. Start by thinking about what actually frustrates you most. If scheduling is your biggest headache, focus on systems with strong calendar tools. If paperwork buries you, look for good document management. Ease of use matters more than fancy features you'll never touch. Your crew needs to actually use this thing, so if it takes an hour to figure out, it won't help. Check whether it works well on phones since most of your day happens away from a desk. Customer support is huge too.

When something breaks or you can't figure out a feature, you need real help fast, not a chatbot. Pricing should match your company size. Some systems charge per user, others have flat rates. Don't pay for enterprise level tools if you're running three crews. Try free trials when possible. A week of real use tells you more than any sales pitch ever will.

Getting Your Crew to Actually Use New Construction Software

Getting your crew on board takes more than just announcing a new system. People resist change, especially when they've been doing things a certain way for years. Start by explaining what's in it for them. Maybe it means no more paper timesheets or fewer confusing messages about tomorrow's job. Show them the basics yourself instead of handing over a manual. Spend 20 minutes walking through the parts they'll actually use daily. Beginning with one simple feature works better than overwhelming everyone at once. Let them track time for a week before adding scheduling or anything else. Ask what's confusing or annoying.

Sometimes a small tweak makes all the difference between adoption and resistance. Your foreman or most tech comfortable worker can help others catch on faster. When people see it genuinely saves them hassle, they stop fighting it. Give it a few weeks before judging whether it's working. Change always feels awkward at first, even when it's an improvement.

Real World Examples of Construction Software in Action

A roofing contractor I heard about was constantly double booking crews or sending people to jobs that weren't ready. After switching to scheduling software, those mix ups basically disappeared. His guys knew exactly where to be, and clients stopped getting frustrated about delayed starts. Another case involved a remodeling company that always seemed to run out of specific materials midweek. They started tracking inventory digitally and suddenly could see patterns in what they used. Ordering became predictable instead of chaotic.

Then there's the general contractor who spent Sunday nights doing paperwork and invoices. Once he moved everything into one system, that time dropped to maybe an hour. He told me the biggest surprise wasn't just saving time but actually having accurate records when tax season rolled around. Small changes in how you track daily operations can shift your entire week for the better.

Taking the First Step with Construction Management Tools

You don't need to be a tech expert to make construction software work for your business. Most systems today are built for people who spend their days on job sites, not behind computers. If the idea feels overwhelming, remember you can start small. Pick one problem that's driving you crazy and find a tool that solves it. Maybe that's just getting your schedule organized or finally tracking time properly.

Once that's running smooth, you can add more features. The goal isn't to overhaul everything overnight. It's about making your daily grind a little easier so you can focus on the work you're actually good at. Plenty of small companies have made the switch and wondered why they waited so long. Give yourself permission to try something new.

Your business and your sanity will probably thank you for it.

FAQ: Construction Software for Construction Business Owners

How to look for employees for your small business.

Mon, 17 Nov 2025 20:34:14 GMT

Why Hiring Your First Employee Feels So Overwhelming

Look, I'll be straight with you hiring somebody for the first time is terrifying. I remember sitting in my office, staring at this stack of resumes I'd printed out because I still do that, and just thinking... what if I pick wrong? What if they're great on paper but can't actually do the work? Or worse, what if they can do the work but we just don't click, you know?

And then there's the money part. You're committing to paying someone every two weeks whether you have a good month or not. I had one morning where I almost called the whole thing off because a client payment came in late. I just sat there with my coffee getting cold, second guessing everything. It's a lot.

Small Business Hiring Statistics

1. 53 percent of small businesses report a local worker shortage.

2. 54 percent of small businesses say it is hard to find candidates with the right experience.

3. 52 percent of small businesses say it is hard to find candidates with the right skills.

4. 60 percent of small businesses struggle to keep up with employee salary expectations.

5. Nearly 70 percent of small businesses plan to offer more flexible work hours to attract talent.

6. 84 percent of employers use social media and online platforms for hiring.

7. In 2022 over 50 million workers quit, and the 2023 quit rate remains about 2.5 percent.

8. 31 percent of new employees quit within their first six months.

9. 39 percent of workers would choose flexible hours over a pay raise.

10. Nearly 72 percent of employees would stay at a job where they feel valued and supported even if offered 30 percent more pay elsewhere.

How to Define the Role Before You Start Looking

So the first thing I had to do and this took me longer than I want to admit was figure out what I actually needed. Not what I thought would be nice to have, but what would keep me from working until nine every night. I made this list on a Tuesday. Crossed half of it out by Thursday.

Here's what helped: I tracked my time for a week and a half. Sounds tedious, I know. But I realized I was spending fifteen hours a week just on invoicing and follow up emails. Stuff that was important but didn't need to be me doing it.

Then I got stuck wondering if I should hire someone part time or just dive into full time. Took me three days to decide. Sometimes you just have to pick something and adjust later.

Budget Friendly Ways to Find Good Candidates

I didn't post on those big job sites right away. Honestly, the prices scared me off. Instead, I mentioned to a few regulars that I was looking for help you'd be surprised how that works. One of my customers has a daughter who just finished her business degree and was looking for something local. We met for coffee at that place on Fisher Park Way, the one that always smells like cinnamon, and just talked.

I also went to a chamber meeting I'd been skipping for months. Felt awkward at first, standing there with my name tag. But I met someone who knew someone, and suddenly I had two referrals.

Local Facebook groups helped too, though you have to wade through a lot of noise. Posted something simple, got like twelve responses in two days. It was overwhelming in a different way, but at least I had options. Sometimes the best candidates aren't actively job hunting they just hear about you at the right moment.

Writing Honest Job Posts That Actually Work

I looked at some sample job descriptions online and they all sounded like Ai wrote them. "Dynamic self starter seeking synergistic opportunities" what does that even mean?

So I just wrote what I needed. "You'll answer emails, sometimes a lot of them at once. You'll send invoices on Fridays and chase down the late payers. Some days are slow, some are chaos." I even mentioned that our printer sometimes runs out of ink and we're still figuring out the new accounting software.

One applicant told me later that's why she applied. She said it felt like a real place with real problems, not some corporate fantasy. Honesty saves everyone time, I think.

Where Small Business Owners Find Their Best Hires

The best hire I ever made came from Instagram, which I still can't believe. She'd been following our business page for months, commented on a post about needing help, and we just started messaging. Turned out she lived two miles away.

Indeed worked okay for me, but I got better results from the free local job boards. The college has one that nobody seems to know about. Posted there on a Monday, had five solid applications by Wednesday.

Word of mouth, though. That's the thing that keeps working. I told my accountant I was hiring and she mentioned it to another client who had a nephew looking for work.

Craigslist still exists, apparently. Got some weird responses there but also two people I interviewed. One of them almost got the job. You never really know where the right person's going to come from, so I just tried everything that didn't cost much.

How to Run Interviews That Feel Real and Reveal the Truth

I used to try to sound all professional in interviews. Had these prepared questions printed out, sat up too straight, the whole thing. It was exhausting and I could tell they were nervous too.

Now I just talk to people. We sit in the back office where the light's better, I offer them water or coffee. I ask what they're looking for, tell them what it's really like here. The good and the annoying parts.

Last month I interviewed someone and we spent ten minutes talking about her old boss who used to micromanage everything. I learned more from that story than I would've from asking "what's your greatest weakness" or whatever.

I also have them meet Sarah, who's been here three years. If Sarah doesn't get a good feeling, I listen to that.

What to Ask When You Call References

References used to feel like a formality to me, but I learned to actually call people. I ask pretty direct stuff now: "Would you hire them again if you had an opening?" That one question tells you a lot by how they answer it.

I also ask what kind of work environment they did best in. Because if someone thrived in a huge corporate structure with clear processes, my messy little operation might drive them crazy.

Work samples help when it makes sense. Had someone show me a spreadsheet system they built at their last job told me everything I needed to know about how organized they were. Don't skip this part even when you're in a hurry.

Negotiating Pay When Your Budget Is Tight

Money's always the hard conversation. I can't compete with what bigger companies pay, and I just have to be upfront about that. But I try to offer what I can flexibility with hours, the ability to leave early if their kid's sick, stuff that actually matters to people.

When I made my first offer, my hands were shaking a little. I told her the number and then just waited. She asked for a bit more. We met in the middle and I felt okay about it.

I think people appreciate honesty about what you can and can't do. Nobody expects you to match corporate salaries, but they do expect respect.

Making the First Week Count for New Hires

That first week matters more than I thought it would. I learned that the hard way with an early hire who quit after three days because I basically threw her into everything with no plan.

Now I clear my schedule that first Monday. Show them where the bathroom is, how the coffee maker works, which cabinet has the paper that actually fits our printer. Small stuff, but it helps.

I also don't overload them. We go slow. I'd rather they feel confident with three tasks than panicked about twenty.

Lunch together that first day helps too. We went to the taco place down the street and just talked like normal people. She told me later that's when she stopped feeling so nervous.

You Can Do This: Final Thoughts on Hiring

Hiring's never going to feel completely easy. I still get that knot in my stomach before I post a job listing. But it gets more familiar, you know? You learn what to look for, what questions actually matter.

And here's the thing most people want to do good work. They really do. You're not just taking a risk on them, they're taking one on you too.

If I can figure this out, you definitely can. Just start somewhere. Even if it's messy at first.

FAQ: How to Look for Employees for Your Small Business

How Small Business Owners Can Avoid Computer Viruses

Wed, 29 Oct 2025 14:33:08 GMT

Here's the thing: one virus can cost you everything you've built.

In 2022, a pizza restaurant in Alaska opened what looked like a routine supplier invoice. Within hours, ransomware had encrypted their entire system customer orders, recipes passed down three generations, payroll records. Gone. They paid $6,500 to criminals just to get their files back. And that doesn't count the twelve days they couldn't process online orders or the customers who never returned. Small businesses say cybersecurity attacks are the threat they’re most concerned about. A majority (60%) of small businesses say cybersecurity threats, including phishing, malware, and ransomware, are a top concern.

Small businesses get hit hardest because hackers know the reality: you're running the shop, managing employees, dealing with vendors, and somehow supposed to be an IT expert too. Most small business owners don't have a dedicated tech team. Which makes you exactly the target cybercriminals are looking for.

Let's be honest you didn't start your business to become a cybersecurity specialist. But here's what you need to understand: 43% of cyberattacks target small businesses , and 60% of those businesses close within six months of a major breach. Not because they wanted to quit. Because one virus destroyed their reputation, drained their bank account, or made it impossible to operate.

The good news? You don't need a computer science degree or a massive IT budget. This article breaks down 11 practical, actionable steps that will dramatically reduce your risk of infection. No complicated jargon. Just straightforward protection you can start implementing today.

Because protecting your business shouldn't feel impossible. It should feel doable.

Understanding Trojan Horses and Computer Viruses

In plain English, a computer virus is malicious software that copies itself and spreads from one computer to another kind of like the flu jumping between people. Once it infects your system, it can delete files, slow everything down, or give hackers access to your data. Then it tries to spread to other computers through email contacts or shared networks.

A Trojan horse works differently. It doesn't spread on its own. Instead, it tricks you into installing it by pretending to be something legitimate. Remember the Greek myth? Soldiers hid inside a giant wooden horse that looked like a gift. Digital Trojans work the same way.

Here's how it happens in real life: You get an email that looks like it's from your accounting software. Subject line reads "Urgent: Invoice #4782 Overdue." You click the attachment labeled "Invoice.pdf" except it's actually "Invoice.pdf.exe." That tiny difference? It just installed spyware that's now recording every password you type.

Or you see a pop up: "Java Update Required." Looks official. You click install. But there's no update. You just gave a hacker remote access to your computer.

The key difference? Viruses spread automatically. Trojans need you to open the door. And cybercriminals have gotten really, really good at making you want to open that door.

Evaluate Open Source Software as Vulnerability Free

Not all software is created equal. And sometimes the programs you're using contain hidden components you never agreed to install.

Open source software code that's publicly available for anyone to inspect powers a huge chunk of the internet. When it's actively maintained by reputable developers, it can actually be more secure than proprietary software. Why? Because thousands of experts can review the code and spot problems before hackers do.

But here's where small businesses get tripped up: many commercial programs you buy contain open source components buried inside. If those components aren't regularly updated, they become security holes. And you'd never know.

Take the recent conversations around apps like Telegram. Newsweek and other outlets raised questions about data privacy and whether users could truly verify how their information was being handled. The point isn't whether Telegram is secure it's that you need to ask these questions about every tool you use.

Before adopting any software for your business, do this: Check when it was last updated. Look for active user communities or developer support. If a program hasn't been touched in two years? That's a red flag. Outdated code is an open invitation for viruses and Trojans to walk right in.

Run Multiple Antivirus Scanners Regularly

Relying on one antivirus program is like locking your front door but leaving every window open.

Here's what most small business owners don't realize: no single antivirus catches everything. Each program uses different detection methods, and some viruses are specifically designed to hide from popular brands like Norton or McAfee . What one scanner misses, another might catch.

Think of it this way if you were hiring a security guard, would you want just one person watching your entire building 24/7? Or would backup make sense?

You don't need to run multiple programs simultaneously (that can actually slow your system down). Instead, use one as your primary real time protection, then scan with a second tool weekly or monthly. It's like getting a second opinion.

Cost effective options for small businesses include:

Malwarebytes (excellent for catching Trojans your main antivirus misses)
Bitdefender (strong overall protection without slowing computers)
Windows Defender (free, built-in, and surprisingly effective as a baseline)

Set calendar reminders. Every Friday afternoon or the first Monday of each month pick a rhythm and stick to it. Because the virus you don't catch today could be stealing customer credit card numbers by next week.

Keep Your Backups Offline

Your backup strategy has one job: protect your data when everything else fails. But if your backups are connected to the internet, they're not really backups they're just more targets.

Ransomware doesn't just encrypt the files on your main computer. It hunts for everything connected to your network. Cloud drives. External hard drives plugged into your USB port. Network attached storage. If it's connected when the attack hits, it gets locked down too. And then you're stuck paying the ransom because every single copy of your customer database is encrypted.

Here's the fix: Keep at least one complete backup physically disconnected from your network. After you back up your data, unplug the drive and store it in a drawer, safe, or off site location. Not sitting next to your computer still connected. Actually disconnected.

For critical data customer information, financial records, passwords consider encrypted USB drives or external SSDs. Back up weekly, then disconnect immediately.

Think of it like this: a life preserver doesn't help if it's chained to the sinking boat. Your backup needs to survive independently when disaster strikes. Because it will strike. The only question is whether you'll have something left to restore.

Strengthen and Rotate Passwords

Passwords are the front door to everything you own and most business owners are using the equivalent of a screen door with a broken latch.

"Password123" or your company name plus the year? Hackers crack those in seconds. Literally. Automated programs can test millions of password combinations per minute, and they start with the most common patterns first.

Here's a better approach: Think in phrases, not words. Instead of "BlueDog7," try something like "MyFirstCarWasA1998Honda!" It's longer, easier to remember, and exponentially harder to crack. Add numbers and symbols naturally within the phrase.

But even strong passwords lose their protection over time. Employees leave. Contractors finish projects. Data breaches expose credentials you didn't even know were compromised. Which is why rotating passwords every 90 days matters especially for accounts that access financial data or customer information.

And let's be real: nobody can remember 47 different complex passwords. That's where password managers come in. Tools like 1Password , Bitwarden , or Dashlane generate and store unique passwords for every account. You remember one master password; the software handles the rest.

Set a quarterly reminder to review what's stored in your password manager. Delete old accounts. Update shared passwords. Because the login credentials from that freelancer you hired two years ago? They still work unless you've changed them.

Use Two Factor Authentication (2FA)

Two factor authentication is like adding a deadbolt after someone already picked your regular lock.

Even if a hacker steals your password through a phishing email, data breach, or keylogger they still can't get in without that second verification step. And that second step happens on a device only you physically possess.

Here's how it works in practice: You log into your business bank account. Enter your username and password as usual. Then your phone buzzes with a six digit code. You type that code in, and now you're in. Without your phone, the password alone is worthless.

You've got options for how that second factor arrives:

Text message codes (easiest, though not the most secure)
Authentication apps like Google Authenticator or Authy (much better)
Hardware keys like YubiKey (maximum security for critical accounts)

Where you absolutely need 2FA:

Business banking and payment processors
Email accounts (because email resets everything else)
Your CRM or customer database
Accounting software
Any platform storing sensitive client information

Takes five minutes to set up. Could save your entire business.

For Mac Users: Avoid Unencrypted iCloud Backups

Let's clear up a dangerous myth: Macs don't get viruses.

Wrong. Macs get targeted less frequently than Windows machines, sure. But "less frequently" doesn't mean "never." And when small business owners assume their Apple devices are automatically safe, they skip basic security steps that could prevent disaster.

iCloud backups are convenient. They sync seamlessly across your devices. But here's the problem: unless you take specific steps, those backups aren't encrypted end-to-end. Which means if someone steals your Apple ID credentials through phishing, a data breach, or social engineering hey can access everything you've backed up. Business emails. Client files. Photos of checks or credit cards you photographed for deposit.

Here's the safer approach:

Encrypt local backups on an external drive instead:

Connect an external hard drive to your Mac
Open Time Machine in System Preferences
Select your external drive as the backup destination
Check the box that says "Encrypt backups"
Create a strong encryption password (store it in your password manager)

After backing up, disconnect the drive

Your data stays under your physical control. No cloud vulnerabilities. No remote access risks.

When Possible, Use Biometric Authentication

Passwords can be guessed, stolen, or written on sticky notes under your keyboard. Your fingerprint? That stays with you.

Biometric authentication Face ID, fingerprint scanners, even iris recognition adds a layer of security that's genuinely difficult for hackers to replicate. Someone can phish your password through a fake login page. They can't phish your face.

For day-to-day access to your laptop, tablet, or phone, biometrics make security frictionless. No typing. No remembering which variation of your password you used. Just look at the screen or touch the sensor, and you're in. Which means you're more likely to actually use the security feature instead of disabling it because it's annoying.

But and this matters biometrics shouldn't stand alone for your most sensitive accounts. Business banking, payroll systems, tax software? Pair biometric login with 2FA or a strong password. Because while your fingerprint is hard to steal, it's not impossible. And unlike a password, you can't change your fingerprint if it gets compromised.

Think of biometrics as your everyday security for device access. Fast, convenient, and significantly better than no protection at all. Just don't make it your only line of defense for data that could sink your business if exposed.

Update Your OS and Security Patches Regularly

That "Software Update Available" notification you keep dismissing? It's not just about new features. It's plugging holes that hackers already know how to exploit.

Every time a security vulnerability gets discovered and they get discovered constantly software companies release patches to fix them. But here's the problem: cybercriminals read the same security bulletins. They know exactly which flaws exist in outdated systems. And they specifically target businesses running old software because they know those holes are wide open.

The 2017 WannaCry ransomware attack infected over 200,000 computers across 150 countries. The vulnerability it exploited? Microsoft had released a patch for it two months earlier. Every business that got hit had simply ignored the update.

Here's how to protect yourself without disrupting business:

Enable automatic updates for your operating system Windows, macOS, whatever you're running. Schedule them for overnight or weekends when nobody's working. Do the same for critical business software: browsers, PDF readers, Java, Adobe products.

Yes, occasionally an update causes a minor glitch. But you know what causes major problems? Getting hacked through a vulnerability that was fixed six months ago while you clicked "Remind Me Later" for the hundredth time.

Keep Important Data on External Drives and Offsite

If all your data lives in one place, you don't have backups you have a single point of failure.

Ransomware, fire, flood, theft, a disgruntled employee with a hammer. Any of these could wipe out your entire business in an afternoon if everything you own sits on one computer or one server in your office.

The 3-2-1 backup rule exists for a reason: three copies of your data, on two different types of media, with one copy stored offsite. Sounds complicated, but it's not.

Here's what that looks like in practice: Your working files live on your computer (copy one). Every week, you back up to an external hard drive you keep in your office safe (copy two). Every month, you back up to a second external drive that you take home or store at a trusted location maybe your accountant's office or a safety deposit box (copy three, offsite).

Avoid Suspicious Emails and Attachments

Most hackers don't break in through technical wizardry. They just send you an email and wait for you to open the door.

Phishing emails are responsible for over 90% of successful cyberattacks . Not because the technology is sophisticated because the psychology works. Urgency. Authority. Fear. "Your account will be suspended." "Invoice overdue." "CEO needs this information immediately."

And in the chaos of running a business, you click.

Here are the red flags that should make you stop:

Misspellings or awkward grammar in supposedly professional emails. Sender addresses that look almost right "support@amaz0n.com" instead of "amazon.com." Unexpected attachments, especially ZIP files or anything ending in .exe. Urgent requests for passwords, bank information, or wire transfers. Links that don't match the text (hover over links to see the actual URL before clicking).

Do Not Visit Malicious or Unsecured Websites

You don't have to download anything for a website to infect your computer. Sometimes just visiting the wrong page is enough.

Drive by downloads malware that installs automatically when you land on a compromised site are more common than most business owners realize. And the websites don't always look obviously sketchy. Hackers compromise legitimate small business sites, plant malicious code, and wait for visitors.

Here's what puts you at risk:

Sites without HTTPS encryption (look for the padlock icon in your browser's address bar). If you see "Not Secure" next to a URL, don't enter any information and don't click anything. Fake software update pop ups that appear while browsing real updates come through your operating system or the actual application, not random website alerts. Investment opportunity sites promising guaranteed returns. Shipping notification emails with links to track packages you never ordered.

Modern browsers like Chrome, Firefox, and Edge have built in warnings for known malicious sites. Don't ignore them. If your browser throws up a red screen warning, close the tab immediately.

And here's a simple test: If a deal looks too good to be true, the website probably isn't trying to help you. It's trying to infect you.

Conclusion: Protecting Your Business is Protecting Your Future

Cybersecurity isn't something that happens in server rooms with IT professionals wearing badges. It happens at your desk. On your phone. In the decisions you make every single day about which email to open and which link to click.

You built your business through hard work, late nights, and taking calculated risks. Don't let one preventable virus undo all of that.

Your Digital Hygiene Checklist:

Understand the difference between viruses and Trojans
Evaluate your software sources and keep everything updated
Run multiple antivirus scanners regularly
Keep critical backups offline and disconnected
Strengthen passwords and rotate them quarterly
Enable two-factor authentication on essential accounts
Encrypt your backups (especially Mac users)
Use biometric authentication where available
Install OS and security patches immediately
Store redundant backups offsite
Train yourself and your team to spot phishing attempts and suspicious websites

None of these steps require a computer science degree or a massive budget. They just require consistency. Make them routine like locking your doors at night or depositing your cash at the bank.

Because here's the truth: Hackers are counting on you being too busy to care about security. Prove them wrong.

A few smart habits today can save your business from a very expensive disaster tomorrow. Your future self will thank you.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

ChatGPT Atlas: The AI Powered Browser for Small Business | Complete Guide

Wed, 22 Oct 2025 21:07:47 GMT

Let's be honest when was the last time your browser actually helped you work smarter? Most of us spend our days juggling a dozen tabs, copy pasting between ChatGPT and our projects, and constantly switching contexts just to get simple tasks done. For creative professionals and small business owners, this fragmented workflow isn't just annoying it's costing you time, focus, and momentum.

The browser hasn't fundamentally changed in years. Sure, we've gotten faster load times and better extensions, but the core experience? Still the same tab hopping chaos we've dealt with for over a decade.

Enter ChatGPT Atlas a reimagined browser built with ChatGPT intelligence baked right into its foundation. Instead of treating AI as an afterthought or a separate tool you visit, Atlas makes it your "co-pilot" for everything you do online.

Research a competitor? Atlas can summarize and analyze. Drafting campaign copy? Get instant feedback without leaving your workflow. Managing client projects? Let AI help you synthesize information and spot opportunities you might have missed.

For creative teams and agencies racing to stay ahead, Atlas isn't just another tool it's a fundamental rethinking of how we work on the web. Let's explore what that actually means for your daily workflow.

What Is ChatGPT Atlas?

ChatGPT Atlas is a web browser developed by OpenAI that is built on the Chromium framework. Think of ChatGPT Atlas as having a brilliant research assistant who sits beside you while you browse except this assistant actually remembers everything you've worked on, learns your preferences, and can handle tedious tasks autonomously.

At its core, Atlas is a full featured web browser, but unlike Chrome or Safari with ChatGPT open in a tab, the AI is woven into the browser's DNA. It's always there when you need it, contextually aware of what you're doing, and ready to jump in without disrupting your flow.

How Chromium powers Atlas:

Chromium provides the core engine, known as the Blink rendering engine , that handles most of the web browser's basic functions:
Web standards support : It ensures that Atlas is compatible with all modern websites and web applications.
Browsing functionality: It provides the foundation for standard browser features like tabs, the address bar, bookmarks, and password management.
Performance and security: The open source nature of Chromium allows for continuous development and security improvements.

OpenAI's custom additions:

OpenAI has customized the Chromium framework to integrate its AI capabilities directly into the browsing experience:
Persistent AI sidebar: Unlike a standard extension, ChatGPT is integrated into a persistent sidebar that can analyze and summarize content on any webpage you are viewing.
Agent mode: Available for paid subscribers, this advanced feature allows the AI to perform complex, multi-step tasks on your behalf, such as researching products across different websites.
Memory and context: Atlas includes an opt in feature called "Browser Memories" that allows ChatGPT to remember insights from your browsing history to provide more personalized assistance.

Here's what makes it different:

Built in Intelligence: ChatGPT isn't a separate destination it's integrated into your browsing experience. Highlight text on any page and instantly get summaries, analysis, or creative alternatives. No more tab switching gymnastics.
Persistent Memory: Atlas remembers your past research, preferences, and projects. Ask it about "that competitor analysis from last week" and it knows exactly what you mean. It's like having a colleague who actually reads the meeting notes.

Agent Mode: This is where things get powerful. Atlas can autonomously handle multi step tasks researching trends across multiple sites, comparing pricing, gathering competitor examples, or compiling inspiration boards. You set the goal; Atlas does the legwork.
Full Transparency and Control: Worried about privacy? You decide what Atlas remembers and what it forgets. Review your history, adjust permissions, and maintain complete visibility into what the AI knows about your work.

The result? Less time wrangling tools, more time creating.

ChatGPT Atlas in Action with Sample Prompts

Let's walk through a typical Tuesday morning for a creative team planning a product launch.

Scenario 1: Competitor Research
You're analyzing a competitor's recent campaign. Instead of opening ChatGPT in another tab and pasting URLs, you simply browse their site while Atlas watches in the background. It's building context from every page you visit their messaging, design choices, pricing strategy. When you're ready, just ask: "What's their main value proposition, and how does it differ from ours?" Atlas synthesizes everything you've browsed and delivers a coherent analysis. No copy pasting required.

S cenario 2: Hiring for Your Team
You're skimming through dozens of job postings to understand what skills competitors are prioritizing. As you browse, Atlas remembers each listing. Ask it to "summarize the top 5 skills these companies want" and it compiles insights from all the pages in your memory saving you from manual note taking.

Scenario 3: Launch Planning with Agent Mode
Here's where it gets interesting. You need inspiration for packaging design trends in your industry. Instead of manually visiting site after site, you activate agent mode: "Find 10 examples of minimalist packaging in sustainable beauty brands launched in 2024." Atlas autonomously navigates the web, visits relevant sites, captures examples, and presents them organized and ready for your mood board.

Your Privacy, Your Rules
Concerned about sensitive client work? Atlas gives you complete control. Toggle incognito mode for confidential browsing nothing gets remembered. Review your browser memories anytime and delete what you don't want stored. Adjust which sites Atlas can access and what information it retains.

It's like having a research assistant who respects boundaries while dramatically cutting down your grunt work.

Why This Matters for Small Business

If you've ever had 47 browser tabs open while desperately trying to remember which one had that perfect reference image, you already understand the problem Atlas solves.

For creative professionals and small business owners, the integration isn't just convenient it fundamentally changes how you work:

Less context switching, more flow state. Stop interrupting your creative process to jump between tools. Highlight a headline you're writing and instantly get alternative angles. Review a landing page and ask for conversion optimization ideas without leaving the page.

Carry context across your entire project. Atlas remembers the brand guidelines you reviewed Monday, the competitor analysis from Tuesday, and the target audience research from Wednesday. When you're brainstorming Friday's campaign concept, all that context informs the AI's suggestions no need to re-explain everything.

Accelerate the messy middle of creative work. The research phase, the inspiration gathering, the "I need 20 examples of this specific thing" these tasks take hours. With agent mode handling the legwork, you spend more time on actual creative thinking and less time being your own research assistant.
Practical implications for small business: Onboard new team members faster by letting them explore past campaign research through Atlas's memory. Maintain continuity when someone's on vacation the browser remembers the client context even if the person stepping in doesn't. Standardize research quality across your team without creating rigid processes.

The browser stops being passive infrastructure and becomes an active participant in your creative workflow. That shift matters.

What to Keep in Mind

ChatGPT Atlas is powerful, but like any new tool, it deserves a thoughtful rollout not blind adoption.

Atlas launched first on macOS as a preview, which means you're essentially beta testing. Expect occasional hiccups, feature gaps, and updates that change how things work. If your team relies on Windows or Linux, you'll need to wait.

Agent mode isn't infallible. When Atlas autonomously browses and gathers information, it can misinterpret instructions, miss nuance, or pull irrelevant examples. Always review what it returns before incorporating it into client work. Think of it as a junior researcher helpful, but requiring oversight.

Memory is a feature you control. The browser remembers what you let it remember. Review your settings early, decide what's off limits (client NDAs, sensitive strategy docs), and use incognito mode liberally for confidential work.

Start small, learn the boundaries. Don't immediately hand Atlas your most critical campaign research. Test it on lower stakes projects first blog research, trend monitoring, internal brainstorms. Learn where it excels and where it stumbles.

Monitor, don't assume. Especially in agent mode, verify sources, check for hallucinations, and confirm facts before presenting findings to clients or stakeholders.

Thoughtful adoption beats enthusiastic chaos every time.

Getting Started with ChatGPT Atlas

Ready to test drive Atlas with your team? Here's a practical roadmap:

1. Download and set up. Grab Atlas for macOS , import your bookmarks and settings. Get comfortable with the interface before diving into projects.
2. Configure your privacy preferences. Decide which sites and projects Atlas can remember. Set incognito as your default for client work if needed.
3. Choose one pilot workflow. Don't overhaul everything at once. Pick a single use case maybe competitive research for an upcoming pitch, or gathering design inspiration for a rebrand. Keep it contained.
4. Run a team trial. Have 2-3 people use Atlas for that specific workflow over a week. Document what works, what frustrates, and where it saves time.
5. Compare and assess. Did it actually streamline your process? Where did agent mode shine or stumble? What surprised you?
6. Decide and expand or don't. Based on real results, determine if Atlas earns a permanent spot in your toolkit and which workflows benefit most.

The goal isn't adoption for adoption's sake it's finding tools that genuinely make your team more effective.

What's Next for Atlas and Your Small Business

Atlas on macOS is just the beginning. Windows and mobile versions are on the roadmap, which means your entire team regardless of device could eventually work within the same AI-enhanced ecosystem. Multi profile support is coming too, letting you separate client work cleanly without logging in and out.

Developer tools and API integrations could be game changers for agencies building custom workflows. Imagine Atlas connecting directly to your project management system, automatically logging research or feeding insights into creative briefs.

The bigger picture? We're watching browsers and AI converge in real time. Within a year, having an AI co-pilot embedded in your browsing experience might feel as essential as search bars do now. The teams that learn to leverage this shift early using AI not as a novelty but as genuine workflow infrastructure will work faster, think bigger, and deliver sharper creative.

The question isn't whether AI-integrated browsers will reshape how small businesses operate. It's whether your team will be early adopters or play catch up. Atlas gives you a chance to explore that future now.

The Bottom Line

For too long, creative professionals have adapted their workflows around their tools. ChatGPT Atlas flips that script it's a browser designed around how you actually work.

By integrating AI directly into your browsing experience, Atlas eliminates the friction that quietly drains hours from your week. Less tab juggling, more context retention, and the ability to offload research grunt work means more energy for the creative thinking that actually matters.

This isn't about chasing shiny new technology for its own sake. It's about recognizing that the tools shaping our industry are evolving, and the teams who experiment thoughtfully today will have a significant advantage tomorrow.

So here's your homework: identify one workflow that currently frustrates you (competitor research, trend monitoring, content ideation) and imagine how persistent memory or agent mode might transform it. Then download Atlas and test that hypothesis.

The future of creative work is already here. It's just unevenly distributed for now.

FAQ: ChatGPT Atlas for Small Businesses

Web Design Trends 2025: 4 Practical Ways for Small Businesses to Build Trust

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Wed, 08 Oct 2025 00:34:57 GMT

Your 2025 Website Refresh: 4 Web Design Trends Small Businesses Can Actually Use

Let me guess you're scrolling through your feed, and yet another article pops up telling you that if your website doesn't have some cutting edge feature or trendy design element, you're basically invisible online. Maybe it's AI chatbots this month, or micro animations, or some gradient color scheme that apparently "everyone" is using now.

I get it. It's exhausting.
I've sat across the table from so many small business owners who feel like they're constantly playing catch up with web design trends. And here's what I always tell them: most design fads aren't worth your time or money. They're shiny objects that look great in portfolios but don't actually help you connect with customers or grow your business.

But 2025 is different, and I'm genuinely excited about it. The trends I'm seeing this year aren't about flashy gimmicks they're about something much more valuable: building trust with your customers.

There's actually a framework that helps make sense of all this, and it's called E-E-A-T—which stands for Experience, Expertise, Authoritativeness, and Trust . Google uses it to evaluate content quality , but I've found it's incredibly useful for small business owners making web design decisions.

Instead of asking "Is this trendy?" you can ask "Does this help people trust my business?"

In this article, I'm going to walk you through four practical, budget friendly web design trends for 2025 that directly support E-E-A-T. These aren't complicated redesigns or expensive overhauls. They're smart, doable updates that show your customers you're credible, trustworthy, and worth doing business with. And the best part? You can start implementing them today.

Trend #1: The Bento Grid Layout

You know those beautiful Japanese bento boxes where everything has its own perfect little compartment? That's exactly what a bento grid does for your website. It's a layout style that divides your page into different sized sections, kind of like a well organized display shelf where each item gets its own spotlight, but everything still works together as a cohesive whole.

Instead of the traditional "stack everything in one column" approach, a bento grid lets you showcase multiple pieces of information side by side in varied, visually interesting boxes. One section might be wider to feature a hero image, while smaller boxes highlight testimonials, your latest blog post, or a quick call to action (CTA) button.

I recently worked with a local bakery owner named Maria who was struggling with her homepage. She had so much great content weekly specials, gorgeous photos of her pastries, information about her catering services, and pictures of her talented team but it was all crammed together in a way that felt cluttered and overwhelming. We redesigned her homepage using a bento grid layout , and the transformation was immediate. Her daily specials got a prominent rectangular section at the top, a square box showcased a warm photo of her team in action, and another section linked directly to her popular catering menu.

The feedback from her customers was incredible. People told her the site suddenly felt "more professional" and that they could find everything they needed without scrolling endlessly. And that's the magic of it.

Here's why this matters for building trust: When potential customers land on your website, they're making snap judgments about your credibility in seconds. A bento grid layout signals that you're organized, thoughtful, and professional. It shows authoritativeness because you're clearly communicating what you do and what you offer without making people hunt for information. Everything they need is right there, cleanly presented and easy to digest.

For small businesses especially, this layout helps you compete with bigger companies by making your site feel polished and intentional without requiring a massive budget or complex coding.

So here's my question for you: What are the three most important things you'd put in your business's bento box?

Trend #2: Scrollytelling (Yes, That's Really What It's Called)

Okay, I'll admit the name sounds a bit silly. But scrollytelling is one of my favorite trends for small businesses because it transforms your webpage from a static brochure into an interactive story that unfolds as your visitor scrolls down the page.

Think of it this way: instead of dumping all your information on someone at once, you're guiding them through a narrative. As they scroll, elements fade in, images appear, text slides into view all timed to reveal your message step by step. It's like you're sitting across from a potential customer, walking them through exactly how you solve their problem, one section at a time.

And here's the best part: it doesn't have to be complicated or expensive.

Let me give you a simple example. Imagine you're a plumber, and someone lands on your "Emergency Services" page. As they start scrolling, the first thing that fades in is text describing a common nightmare scenario: "It's 2 AM and your basement is flooding." Then, as they keep scrolling, an image appears showing your fully stocked van and uniformed team member. Next comes a short description of your 24/7 response process. Finally, a glowing testimonial slides in from a customer whose crisis you resolved.

You're not just telling people you're experienced and reliable you're showing them through a story. That's the power of scrollytelling.

This connects directly to the "Experience" part of E-E-A-T. Google (and more importantly, your customers) wants to see that you have real, hands on experience solving problems. Scrollytelling lets you demonstrate your process, showcase your actual work, and build credibility through visual proof. It's far more powerful than a page that just states "We have 15 years of experience" at the top and expects people to take your word for it.

I worked with a wedding photographer who used this technique beautifully. As you scrolled through her "About" page, you saw her journey from the first camera she ever owned (an old Polaroid from her grandmother), to behind the scenes shots of her at actual weddings, to a timeline of couples she'd worked with over the years. Potential clients told her they felt like they knew her before even meeting her. That's the kind of connection that books jobs.

Now, a word of caution: The key is to keep it simple and focused on one clear story, so you don't slow down your website or overwhelm your visitors. You don't need fancy parallax effects or elaborate animations. Even subtle fade ins and well timed reveals can create that engaging scroll experience without bogging down your site's performance. Remember, a slow website kills trust faster than anything else.

The goal isn't to impress people with technical wizardry it's to guide them through a story that makes them think, "These people really know what they're doing."

Trend #3: Kinetic Typography (AKA Text That Actually Does Something)

Here's a trend that sounds fancy but is actually beautifully simple: kinetic typography . It's just text that moves with a purpose.

I'm not talking about those annoying websites from the early 2000s where everything blinked and bounced around like a digital carnival. Modern kinetic typography is subtle, intentional, and designed to draw your eye to what matters most.

Think about your main headline. Right now, it probably just sits there at the top of your homepage, hoping people will read it. But what if the most important word like "Fresh" if you're a farm to table restaurant, or "Guaranteed" if you're offering a service warranty had a subtle animation? Maybe it fades in a beat after the rest of the text, or gently pulses, or slides into place. It's a small touch, but it grabs attention and adds a ton of personality to your brand.

I recently helped a local fitness studio update their homepage, and we added kinetic typography to their hero section. Their headline read "Transform Your Life in 30 Days," but we made the word "Transform" scale up slightly when the page loaded. That one animated word completely changed how people engaged with the page. Their owner told me that people mentioned it during consultations they remembered it. It felt dynamic and energetic, which was exactly the vibe a fitness studio should have.

Here's how this builds "Expertise": When you use kinetic typography strategically, you're showing confidence in your core message. You're essentially telling visitors, "This right here is the most important thing you need to know about us, and we're so sure of it that we're making it impossible to miss." That kind of clarity and confidence signals expertise. You're not burying your value proposition in paragraphs of text you're putting it front and center with visual emphasis.

Think about experts in any field. They know exactly what they do best, and they communicate it clearly and confidently. Kinetic typography helps you do the same thing on your website.

And here's a bonus: This approach is often a much better choice than a full screen background video, which has been trendy for years. Videos are heavy they slow down your site, eat up bandwidth, and can be distracting. Kinetic typography gives you that sense of movement and energy without the performance hit. It loads fast, works beautifully on mobile devices, and gets your point across in seconds rather than forcing people to watch a 30 second loop of stock footage.

The key is restraint. Pick one word or phrase that represents your core value, and give it that subtle animation. Don't animate everything, or you'll just create visual noise. Used thoughtfully, kinetic typography turns your headline from something people glance at into something they actually notice and remember.

What's the one word that captures what makes your business special? That's your candidate for kinetic typography.

Trend #4: Using AI to Be More Human (Not Less)

I know what you're thinking: "AI? Really? Isn't that what's making everything on the internet feel the same?"
You're not wrong to worry. I've seen plenty of websites that slap AI generated content everywhere, and it shows. Everything feels generic, soulless, and like it could be describing any business in any city. But here's what I've discovered working with my clients this year: when you use AI thoughtfully, it can actually help you be MORE human, not less.

Let me get specific, because this is where it gets exciting for small business owners.

One of my favorite applications is using AI to generate unique, hand drawn style illustrations or custom patterns for your website. This isn't about replacing your brand's personality it's about amplifying it in a way that was previously out of reach unless you had thousands of dollars to spend on a graphic designer.

Here's what I mean: Instead of using that same stock photo of a smiling person at a laptop that literally everyone else uses (you know the one), you could use AI tools to create a simple, custom line drawing of your actual storefront. Or a whimsical illustration that represents your service in a way that's uniquely yours. Or a pattern based on elements from your logo that can be used as subtle backgrounds throughout your site.

I worked with a family owned hardware store last month, and we used AI to generate a series of charming, sketch style illustrations of their store, their delivery truck, and even their beloved shop dog who greets customers every day. The drawings had this warm, approachable feel almost like someone had sat down with a pen and lovingly sketched their business. Customers loved it. Multiple people commented that the website "felt like the actual store" which is the highest compliment a small business can get.

The cost? A fraction of what commissioning custom illustrations would have been. The impact? They stood out in a sea of competitors using identical stock imagery.

Here's how this connects to E-E-A-T: A unique visual identity makes your business appear more authoritative and trustworthy than one relying on generic visuals. When someone sees that you've invested in custom imagery even if it's AI assisted they perceive you as more established, more professional, and more real. You're not just another template website thrown together in an afternoon. You have a distinct brand presence, and that signals you're serious about your business.

Think about it from a customer's perspective. If they're comparing two plumbers online, and one has the standard stock photo of hands fixing a pipe while the other has custom illustrations showing their actual team and truck, which one feels more trustworthy? Which one seems like a real, established local business versus someone who just launched last week?

The key word here is authentic. Use AI to create visuals that reflect your actual business your location, your style, your personality. Don't just prompt it to make "professional business imagery." Get specific. Describe your storefront, your product, your vibe. The more specific you are, the more unique and personal the results will be.

I'm not saying AI is perfect or that it replaces human creativity. But for small businesses working with tight budgets, it's an incredible tool for creating a visual identity that doesn't look like everyone else's. And in 2025, standing out while staying authentic is what builds trust.

So here's my challenge to you: What's one visual element on your current website that feels generic? What would it look like if it was uniquely, unmistakably yours?

The Bottom Line: Your Website Should Feel Like You

Let's do a quick recap of what we've covered. We talked about Bento Grids for organizing your content with clarity and professionalism. We explored Scrollytelling as a way to show not just tell your experience and process. We discussed Kinetic Typography to confidently emphasize what makes you an expert in your field. And we looked at how Authentic AI can help you build a unique visual brand without breaking the bank.

Each of these trends supports E-E-A-T in its own way, but they all have one thing in common: they're about building genuine trust with your customers.

Now, here's where I need you to take a breath.

My advice? Don't get overwhelmed. You don't need to implement all four of these trends tomorrow. You don't even need to implement all four this year. Just pick one of these ideas that excites you the one that made you think, "Oh, that could really work for my business" and explore how it could tell your story better.

Maybe it's finally organizing your homepage with a clean bento grid so people can actually find what they're looking for. Maybe it's adding one subtle animation to your headline to give it more personality. Maybe it's creating a custom illustration of your storefront that makes your website feel like home.

Start small. Test it. See how your customers respond. Then build from there.

Because here's what I've learned after years of doing this work: The best website isn't the trendiest one or the one with the most bells and whistles. It's the one that authentically reflects your business and builds a real connection with your customers.

Your website should feel like walking into your actual store, or shaking your hand, or having a conversation with you over coffee. When you get that right when people land on your site and immediately feel like they get who you are and what you're about that's when the magic happens. That's when browsers become customers, and customers become loyal fans.

So go ahead. Pick your trend. Tell your story. And build something that's unmistakably, authentically yours.

You've got this.

Creative Web Design is About Solving Problems, Not Just Making Pretty Pages

Sun, 21 Sep 2025 16:57:07 GMT

Last week, a client on a Zoom call, showed me a website with animated confetti that followed the cursor. "We need this kind of creativity," she said, her eyes gleaming with excitement about all the wrong things. "Something that makes people go 'wow' when they land on our website."

I've heard this song before.

She wanted her accounting firms homepage to have "personality" and "pizzazz." Never mind that her clients are small business owners drowning in receipts and tax deadlines just needed to find their quarterly reports without wanting to throw their laptops out the window. But sure, let's add some particle effects to the homepage. That'll fix everything.

Here's what kills me: everyone thinks creative web design means reinventing the wheel, adding flourishes, making things bounce and slide and fade in ways that would make a Disney animator jealous. You know what's actually creative? Making a complex form feel like a conversation. Building navigation that users understand instantly, without thinking. Creating an experience so smooth that people forget they're using a website at all.

When did we forget this?

The most creative solution I ever designed was a plain white form with three fields. Three. The previous version had twenty seven fields across four pages, and users abandoned it faster than the Titanic. My "boring" design increased conversion rates by 400%. The client initially complained it wasn't "innovative" enough. Now they brag about it in team meetings.

Real creativity in web design isn't about aesthetic gymnastics or showing off your animation skills. It's about looking at a problem really looking at it and finding an elegant solution that makes someone's day just a little bit easier. It's about restraint, clarity, and understanding that sometimes the most creative thing you can do is get out of the user's way.

What Your Users Really Want (Hint: It's Not Another Parallax Scroll)

Think about walking into a hardware store. You're there because your kitchen faucet is leaking, and you need a washer that's exactly 3/4 inch, not because you want to admire the creative merchandising displays. Sure, good signage helps. Clear aisles matter. But if you can't find that washer in under five minutes, you're walking out frustrated, no matter how beautifully they've arranged the power tools.

That's user intent .

Every person who lands on your website is that customer with the leaky faucet. They have a specific problem, a particular need, a thing they're trying to accomplish. Your job, our job isn't to impress them with our design chops. It's to be a detective. We need to figure out what brought them here, what they're hoping to find, and how to get them there with minimal friction.

I learned this lesson the hard way back in 2019. I was designing a website for a local yoga studio, and I was so proud of myself. I created this beautiful, zen inspired interface with gentle animations, soothing transitions between pages, and a meditation quote that faded in while the schedule loaded. Gorgeous stuff. The studio owner loved it.

The users? They hated it.

Turns out, most people booked classes during their lunch break or while commuting. They didn't have time for my artistic vision. They needed to see which classes had spots available, book one, and get back to their lives all in about thirty seconds, ideally while walking or waiting in line for coffee. My "calming" animations were making them miss their train stops. The meditation quotes were eating up precious mobile data.

Three weeks later, I rebuilt everything. No animations. No quotes. Just a simple list: class name, time, spots available, one tap booking. Boring? Maybe. But class bookings went up 60% in the first month.

That failure taught me everything.

Now, before I even open my design tools, I spend time understanding the context of use. Where are people when they visit this site? What emotional state are they in? Are they relaxed and browsing, or are they stressed and need something specific? Are they on desktop with a coffee, or standing in a subway car, holding their phone with one hand?

These questions matter more than color theory. They matter more than typography. They definitely matter more than whether your hero image has a Ken Burns effect.

The truth is, creative design isn't about adding complexity to impress people it's about removing complexity so people can get what they came for. Every flourish, every animation, every "creative" element should have a purpose: making the user's journey easier, faster, or clearer. If it doesn't serve that purpose, it's not creative. It's clutter.

Core Principles of Human Centered Creativity

Let me tell you what real creativity looks like in web design. It starts with intuitive navigation, and I know what you're thinking how is navigation creative? Here's the thing: that "boring" horizontal menu you keep trying to reinvent? It works. You know what doesn't work? That hamburger menu you hid in the bottom right corner because it looked "cleaner," or that mystery meat navigation where users have to hover over abstract shapes to figure out where anything is.

Good navigation is like clear signage in a massive airport. Nobody cares if the signs at Heathrow are creative they care that they can find their gate before their flight leaves. When you nail navigation so perfectly that users never have to think about it, that's creative genius. It takes serious skill to make something so intuitive that it becomes invisible. Any designer can make navigation "interesting." It takes a master to make it disappear into the user's natural flow.

Visual storytelling comes next, and no, I don't mean hero videos or elaborate scroll triggered animations. I mean using visual hierarchy to guide users through your content like you're telling them a story. You control what they see first, second, third. You use size, color, and spacing to create a narrative flow that makes sense. When someone lands on your page, their eye should naturally follow the path you've designed for them not because you forced it with arrows and flashing buttons, but because you understand how humans scan and process information. That's the creative challenge: telling a story without saying a word, guiding without pushing.

Then there are micro interactions those tiny moments that make users feel something. Picture this: you click a submit button, and instead of just changing color, it subtly compresses like you're pushing a real button, then bounces back with a little checkmark appearing. That fraction of a second creates satisfaction, a tiny hit of dopamine that says "yes, you did the thing successfully." These moments matter because they transform mechanical interactions into human ones. They make users feel heard and understood.

But here's where most designers stop, and it drives me crazy. Accessibility isn't the cherry on top it's the whole damn foundation. You want to know what real creativity looks like? Try designing a complex data dashboard that works perfectly for someone using a screen reader. Try creating a color system that's beautiful AND distinguishable for users with color blindness. Try building interactions that work just as well with keyboard navigation as they do with a mouse.

Constraints breed creativity. Always have, always will.

When you design for accessibility , you're forced to strip away the superficial and focus on what actually matters. You can't hide bad information architecture behind pretty visuals. You can't mask confusing user flows with smooth animations. You have to solve the real problem, and that pushes you to be genuinely creative, not just decorative. Every time you design for someone with different abilities than your own, you become a better designer. You learn to communicate more clearly, structure more logically, and empathize more deeply.

These four principles work together. Intuitive navigation ensures everyone can find what they need. Visual storytelling guides them through it. Micro interactions make the journey feel human. And accessibility ensures nobody gets left behind. That's human centered creativity. That's design that actually matters.

The Real Creative Challenge

True creative web design isn't about impressing other designers with your latest CSS tricks it's about empathy and problem solving wrapped in elegant simplicity.

When you strip away the confetti animations and mystery meat navigation, what remains is the hardest creative challenge of all: understanding another human being so deeply that you can anticipate their needs, remove their frustrations, and guide them effortlessly toward their goals. This is creativity with purpose. This is design that changes lives, not just portfolios.

The next time you sit down to design, ask yourself one question: "How can I make this person's day easier?" Then have the creative courage to build exactly that.

Make empathy your superpower.

Search Engine Optimization Companies For Small Business

Wed, 17 Sep 2025 19:29:40 GMT

Don't just hire a vendor find a true partner. We've vetted the top agencies of 2025 that get real results for businesses like yours.

Picture this: You walk past Maria's bakery every morning on your way to work, and the smell of fresh croissants practically pulls you through the door. Her pastries are legendary flaky, buttery perfection that makes your taste buds sing. But here's the heartbreaking part: most days, you're one of only three customers in there. Maria's got the best croissants in town, maybe even the state, but her Google search results? Nowhere to be found.

You might know this feeling all too well. You've poured your heart into building something amazing whether it's handcrafted furniture, killer marketing strategies, or the world's most comfortable mattresses. Your customers absolutely love what you do. The problem? There just aren't enough of them finding you.

That's where SEO comes in, and honestly, it's enough to make anyone's head spin. One minute someone's telling you about keywords and backlinks, the next they're throwing around terms like " schema markup " and " domain authority " like you should know what they mean. Then there are the so called experts sliding into your inbox promising to get you on page one of Google in 30 days for the low price of $99 a month. (Spoiler alert: it doesn't work that way.)

The fear of picking the wrong SEO company and watching your hard earned money disappear into the digital void is real. I've seen too many business owners get burned by agencies that overpromise and underdeliver, leaving them more skeptical than when they started.

But here's what I want you to know: good SEO companies do exist. Companies that speak your language, understand your budget constraints, and actually care about growing your business not just their own bottom line.

This isn't another generic listicle with the same five companies everyone else recommends. Instead, you're getting a carefully curated selection of SEO partners who genuinely understand what it means to be a small business owner trying to compete online.

By the time you finish reading this article, you'll know exactly what to look for, which red flags to avoid, and most importantly, you'll have a clear path to finding your perfect SEO match the one that'll help turn your best kept secret into the business everyone's talking about.

Before You Hire: What Really Matters in an SEO Partner?

Let's get one thing straight right off the bat: the goal isn't to see your website sitting pretty at #1 on Google just so you can take a screenshot and frame it. That's nice and all, but what you really want is your phone ringing more often, your contact form filling up, and your cash register singing a happier tune. The best SEO agencies get this. They're not chasing vanity metrics they're chasing results that actually matter to your bottom line.

Think of it like hiring a personal trainer. You don't want someone who just makes you sweat for an hour and calls it a day. You want someone who's focused on helping you reach your actual fitness goals, whether that's running your first 5K or finally fitting into those jeans again. Same principle applies here.

So what separates the agencies that deliver real business growth from the ones that just talk a good game? After working with dozens of small business owners and seeing both spectacular successes and costly failures, I've noticed that the winners all share three core qualities.

Transparency: No Black Box Magic
Your SEO partner should be an open book, not some mysterious wizard working behind a curtain. If an agency can't explain what they're doing in plain English, that's your first red flag. You're not asking them to reveal trade secrets you just want to know where your money is going and what progress looks like.

The right agency sends you reports that actually make sense. Not 47-page documents filled with confusing charts and industry jargon, but clear updates that show you what they worked on this month and how it's moving the needle. They answer your questions without making you feel like you need a computer science degree to understand the response. When something isn't working, they tell you why and what they're doing to fix it.

Think of transparency like working with a contractor on your house. You want regular updates, photos of the progress, and honest conversations when they hit a snag. You wouldn't tolerate a contractor who disappeared for weeks and then sent you a bill with no explanation of what they did, right?

Customization: Your Business Isn't Cookie Cutter
Here's where a lot of small business owners get burned: they fall for the "one size fits all" package deal. You know the pitch "Our proven system works for everyone!" But here's the reality: the SEO strategy that works for a plumbing company in Phoenix has almost nothing in common with what a boutique clothing store in Portland needs.

A great SEO partner takes time to understand your specific situation. They ask about your customers, your competition, your goals, and yes, even your budget constraints. They want to know what makes your business different and how people actually find companies like yours. Then they build a strategy around those insights, not around some template they've used for their last 50 clients.

Be very wary of agencies that lead with standardized packages. It's like going to a doctor who prescribes the same medicine to every patient without asking about symptoms. Sure, it might work sometimes, but wouldn't you rather have a treatment plan designed specifically for you?

Proven Results: Show, Don't Tell
Anyone can claim they're an SEO expert. The internet is full of self proclaimed gurus with fancy websites and impressive sounding testimonials. But talk is cheap. What you want to see are actual results with businesses that look like yours.

A solid agency can show you case studies of companies they've helped real businesses, not just vague success stories with no names attached. They can explain the challenges these businesses faced, the strategies they implemented, and the measurable results they achieved. Even better if some of those businesses are in your industry or serve similar customers.

This doesn't mean they need to have worked with your exact type of business before. A good agency can adapt their expertise across industries. But they should be able to demonstrate that they understand businesses of your size and complexity, and that they've delivered real growth, not just higher rankings.

Ready to Find Your Match?
With these three pillars in mind transparency, customization, and proven results you're ready to start separating the wheat from the chaff. The good news is that companies embodying these qualities do exist, and I've done the legwork to find them for you. Let's dive into a few agencies that actually walk the walk.

Our Top Picks: 6 SEO Companies That Deliver for Small Businesses

After hours of research, client interviews, and deep dives into case studies, I've narrowed down the field to six agencies that consistently deliver what small business owners actually need: more customers walking through their doors.

Salt Creative : The All in One Storyteller and Technical Expert
What sets us apart isn't just our technical chops though we have plenty of those. It's how we blend the art of storytelling with the science of search optimization. Most agencies either excel at the creative side or the technical side, but rarely both. We bridge that gap beautifully.

When you work with us, you're not just getting someone to sprinkle keywords throughout your website and call it a day. We dig deep into what makes your business tick, then craft a narrative that resonates with your ideal customers while making sure Google takes notice too. Our websites don't just look stunning on desktop they're built from the ground up to work flawlessly on mobile devices, which is where most of your customers are probably finding you anyway.

Here's what really sets us apart: one of our clients mentioned how we helped them consistently rank #1 on Google in what they described as an incredibly competitive market. But the client wasn't just excited about the ranking they were thrilled about the steady stream of qualified leads it generated. That's the difference between vanity metrics and business results.

Our approach to customer service feels refreshingly human in an industry that often treats clients like account numbers. When you have questions or concerns, you're talking to real people who understand both the technical complexities of SEO and the day to day pressures of running a small business. For business owners who feel intimidated by the technical aspects of digital marketing, We serve as both educator and implementer, guiding you through the process without making you feel lost in the weeds.

Searchbloom : The Transparent Results Engine
If you've been burned by an SEO agency that kept you in the dark about what they were actually doing, Searchbloom might be exactly what you're looking for. They've built their entire approach around transparency, which sounds simple but is surprisingly rare in this industry.

Their secret weapon is something they call the A.R.T. framework Authority, Relevance, and Technology . Instead of throwing generic strategies at your website and hoping something sticks, they analyze where your business stands in each of these three areas and build a custom plan accordingly. This means the roofing contractor in Denver gets a completely different strategy than the boutique pet store in Nashville, even though both might be small businesses with similar budgets.

What I find particularly impressive is their track record on platforms like Clutch and DesignRush, where clients consistently praise not just their results but their communication style. You'll never wonder what they're working on or why they made certain decisions. They explain their reasoning in terms that make sense to business owners, not SEO specialists.

The revenue growth their clients experience isn't accidental. Searchbloom understands that traffic without conversions is just expensive entertainment. They focus on attracting visitors who are actually likely to become customers, which means your investment translates into measurable business growth rather than just impressive looking reports.

Sure Oak : The Performance Driven Growth Partner
Sure Oak feels like having a boutique agency's personal attention with the technical sophistication of a much larger firm. They've mastered the art of sustainable SEO growth, which is crucial for small businesses that can't afford to recover from algorithm penalties or short-term tactics that backfire.

Their use of AI-enhanced strategies isn't just about jumping on the latest trend it's about working smarter. While other agencies are still doing keyword research the way they did five years ago, Sure Oak leverages artificial intelligence to identify opportunities that human analysis might miss. This means they can often find untapped niches where your business can gain traction without going head to head with industry giants.

The comprehensive nature of their services is particularly valuable for small business owners who don't want to juggle multiple vendors. When they handle your link building, they're not just buying generic backlinks from questionable sources. They're securing high quality connections that actually enhance your website's authority and drive referral traffic.

Clients consistently mention the boutique feel despite Sure Oak's technical capabilities. You're not just another account in their system they take time to understand your specific challenges and goals. The attention to detail shows up in everything from their initial strategy development to their ongoing campaign optimizations.

SEO Brand: The ROI Focused Veteran
Sometimes experience really does matter, and SEO Brand has been perfecting their craft since 2006. That might sound like ancient history in internet years, but it actually gives them a perspective that newer agencies simply can't match. They've weathered multiple Google algorithm updates, economic downturns, and industry changes while consistently delivering results for their clients.

Their consultative approach means you're not just getting an agency you're getting a strategic partner. Instead of presenting you with a take it or leave it proposal, they dig into your specific business model, competition, and growth goals before recommending a path forward. This hands on methodology particularly benefits small business owners who need education and strategy alongside execution.

The combination of SEO, PPC, and content strategies under one roof eliminates the coordination headaches that come with working with multiple specialists. When your SEO team and PPC team are the same people, they can create synergies that amplify your results across both channels.

Client feedback consistently highlights their data driven approach, which means decisions aren't based on hunches or industry myths. Every recommendation comes backed by actual performance data, whether that's from your own campaigns or broader market research. For small business owners who need to justify every marketing dollar, this level of accountability is invaluable.

Zupo: The B2B Authority Builder
If you're running a B2B company and tired of competing solely on price, Zupo offers a refreshing alternative. They specialize in building genuine authority for their clients, which is the kind of long term competitive advantage that's nearly impossible for competitors to replicate.

Their approach goes beyond traditional SEO by incorporating digital PR strategies that get your business mentioned in respected industry publications. This isn't just about the SEO value of those backlinks though that's certainly valuable. It's about positioning your company as a thought leader in your space, which makes prospects more likely to choose you over competitors they've never heard of.

The content and PR combination they're known for creates a snowball effect. As your authority grows, journalists and industry publications become more likely to reach out to you for expert commentary. This generates additional high quality backlinks and brand exposure without you having to constantly pitch yourself.

Their focus on long term strategy means you're not just seeing quick wins that disappear when the next algorithm update hits. You're building sustainable competitive advantages that compound over time. For B2B companies with longer sales cycles, this approach aligns perfectly with how their customers actually make purchasing decisions.

SimpleTiger: The SaaS & Tech Scaling Specialist
If you're running a SaaS company or tech startup, you already know that your marketing needs are different from traditional small businesses. SimpleTiger gets this at a fundamental level because they've spent over 15 years exclusively focused on companies like yours.

Their AI-enhanced workflows aren't just impressive from a technical standpoint they're designed to scale your customer acquisition in ways that make sense for subscription based businesses. They understand metrics like customer lifetime value, churn rates, and the importance of attracting users who will actually convert to paid plans rather than just signing up for free trials.

The speed at which they deliver results is particularly crucial for startups that can't afford to wait six months to see if their marketing investment is paying off. Their deep understanding of the tech industry means they can quickly identify the most effective strategies for your specific type of software or service.

Client feedback consistently mentions not just traffic growth but improvements in signup rates and conversions. For SaaS companies, this distinction is critical because qualified signups matter more than raw visitor numbers. SimpleTiger's industry expertise helps them focus on attracting visitors who are more likely to become paying customers, which directly impacts your bottom line and runway.

How to Choose the Right Agency for You

Looking at a list of great agencies can feel overwhelming rather than helpful kind of like being told that five different restaurants are all "amazing" when you just want to know where to have dinner tonight. The good news is that picking the right SEO partner doesn't have to be complicated. You just need to approach it methodically and trust your instincts along the way.

Start by Getting Crystal Clear on Your Goal
Before you reach out to a single agency, take a step back and define exactly what success looks like for your business. This might seem obvious, but you'd be surprised how many business owners skip this step and end up with strategies that don't match their actual needs.

Are you trying to get more foot traffic through your doors? Then you need an agency that excels at local SEO the kind that knows how to make you show up when someone searches for "best pizza near me" or "emergency plumber." If you're selling products online, you want someone who understands e-commerce SEO and can help your product pages rank for buying intent keywords. Maybe you're a consultant or service provider who needs qualified leads calling your phone. That's a different beast entirely, requiring strategies that attract people ready to hire someone like you.

Getting specific about your primary goal helps you immediately narrow down your options. Some agencies are fantastic at everything, while others have carved out specialties that align perfectly with certain types of businesses. There's no right or wrong answer here just what's right for you.

Roll Up Your Sleeves and Do Some Detective Work
Once you know what you're looking for, it's time to put on your investigator hat. Head to the websites of the agencies that caught your attention and start digging deeper than their polished homepage copy. You're hunting for case studies, client portfolios, or success stories that feature businesses similar to yours.

Don't just skim the surface here. Look for specific details about the challenges these businesses faced and the measurable results they achieved. Did they help a local restaurant increase reservations by 40%? Did they triple online sales for a small e-commerce store? These concrete examples tell you way more than vague testimonials about "great communication" and "professional service."

Pay attention to the industries and business sizes represented in their case studies. An agency might have impressive results, but if all their success stories come from Fortune 500 companies or industries completely different from yours, that could be a red flag. You want evidence that they understand businesses like yours and the unique challenges you face.

While you're browsing their site, notice how they explain their process and communicate complex ideas. If their own website is confusing or filled with jargon that makes your eyes glaze over, that's probably how they'll communicate with you as a client.

Trust the Power of an Actual Conversation
Here's where the rubber meets the road. Once you've narrowed your list down to two or three agencies that seem like genuine contenders, schedule consultation calls with each of them. This isn't just about getting a proposal it's about seeing if you actually want to work with these people for the next six to twelve months.

During these conversations, ask questions that reveal how they think about your business. Try something like, "How will you measure success for my specific business?" Their answer should be tailored to your goals, not a generic response about rankings and traffic. A good agency will ask you questions right back: What does a typical customer look like? How do people usually find businesses like yours? What's your biggest competition doing online?

Make sure to ask who your main point of contact will be. Will you be working directly with the person you're talking to, or will your account get handed off to a junior team member once the contract is signed? Neither approach is inherently wrong, but you deserve to know what you're signing up for.

Don't underestimate the importance of communication style during these calls. Do they explain things in a way that makes sense to you? Are they patient with your questions, or do they seem rushed and eager to move on to their pitch? Do they seem genuinely interested in your business, or are they clearly going through the motions?

Your gut reaction matters more than you might think. If something feels off during the consultation maybe they're overly pushy, or they promise results that seem too good to be true, or they just don't seem to "get" your business trust that instinct. You'll be talking to these people regularly for months. Make sure it's someone you actually want to talk to.

The right agency will feel like a natural extension of your team, not like an outside vendor you have to manage. When you find that fit, you'll know it.

Ready to Stop Being the Best Kept Secret?

Finding the right SEO agency isn't about picking the one with the flashiest website or the biggest promises. It's about finding a partner who takes the time to understand what makes your business special and genuinely cares about helping you reach more of the customers who need what you offer.

Remember Maria's bakery from the beginning? She doesn't need to stay hidden on page 10 of Google search results. Neither do you. The agencies we've covered have proven track records of helping small businesses like yours break through the noise and connect with their ideal customers.

Your expertise deserves to be found. The right partner is out there waiting to help you make that happen, and investing in your online visibility might just be the smartest decision you make for your business's future. Time to stop being the best kept secret and start being the obvious choice.

Stop Hiding: A Real Person's Guide to Getting Your Business Found on Google

Wed, 10 Sep 2025 18:06:02 GMT

A practical, no fluff guide to the three things that actually matter for getting seen on Google.

Picture this: Sarah spent two years perfecting her handmade soap recipes, crafting a website on Squarespace, and writing product descriptions that she is proud of. Her soaps smell like something from heaven, her packaging could grace design magazine covers, and her customer service would make Nordstrom jealous. There's just one tiny problem her website gets about as much traffic as a country road at 3 AM. When she Googles her business name, she has to scroll past three pages of random soap dispensers and a 1990s band called "Sudsy Dreams" just to find herself.

Sound familiar?

Here's the brutal truth: Having an invisible website in 2025 is like opening the world's most amazing restaurant in your basement with no signs, no address, and telling people to "just figure it out." You can have the best product, the most beautiful branding, and the heart of an entrepreneur, but if Google doesn't know you exist, you're basically throwing a party and forgetting to send invitations.

I've watched too many brilliant business owners people who could run circles around Fortune 500 companies when it comes to their craft get completely defeated by the mysterious black box that is search engine optimization. They'll spend hours agonizing over whether their logo should be 2% more blue, but when it comes to SEO, they throw their hands up and mutter something about "algorithms" like they're discussing ancient sorcery.

But here's what the $500 an hour consultants don't want you to know: Getting found on Google isn't rocket science. It's not some secret club that requires a computer science degree and a working knowledge of HTML. Most of the "experts" are just better at speaking in acronyms and making simple concepts sound impossibly complex.

This guide? It's different. We're going to talk about SEO like normal humans. No mystical jargon about "domain authority" or "schema markup" (okay, maybe a little, but I'll actually explain what that stuff means). Instead, we're going to focus on the practical, no nonsense strategies that actually move the needle the ones that help real businesses get found by real customers who are ready to buy real stuff.

Because your business deserves better than digital witness protection .

Rule #1: If You Do Nothing Else, Do This

Let me tell you about two bakeries. Sweet Dreams Bakery and Flour Power both make incredible croissants, both opened within a month of each other on opposite sides of town, and both have owners who wake up at 4 AM because they're crazy passionate about what they do.

Here's where their stories diverge: It's Saturday morning, and Jessica is desperately searching "bakery near me" because she promised to bring pastries to her book club in two hours. Google shows both businesses in the results. Sweet Dreams has a sad, lonely listing just a name, address, and phone number staring back at her like a digital ghost town. No photos, no hours listed, and definitely no indication they're even open on weekends.

Flour Power's listing? It's practically throwing a parade. There are gorgeous photos of golden croissants that make Jessica's mouth water, clear hours showing they're open until 2 PM today, recent posts about their weekend special (lavender honey scones!), and 47 five star reviews from people raving about the owner's sourdough. There's even a photo of the bright, welcoming interior and the owner's smiling face behind the counter.

Guess where Jessica's going?
This isn't a story about better croissants it's about the brutal reality of Google Business Profiles. Sweet Dreams might have the flakiest, most heavenly pastries in the state, but they're essentially invisible to everyone except the people who stumble across their physical storefront.

Your Google Business Profile isn't just a listing it's your digital welcome mat, your first impression, and often your only chance to convince someone to choose you over your competitor. Think of it as the world's most important free billboard, and Google is letting you use it for nothing.

Here's How to Actually Use This Free Marketing Superpower

First, claim your profile (and yes, you might already have one you don't know about). Go to business.google.com, search for your business, and if it exists, claim it. If it doesn't, create it. Google has probably already made a basic listing for you based on other online mentions—they're helpful like that, but also terrible at getting details right.

Upload photos like your business depends on it (because it does). Don't just throw up one sad exterior shot from 2019. Show your products, your space, your team, your process. People eat with their eyes first, and they shop with their eyes even more. That gorgeous latte art? Upload it. Your organized workshop? Upload it. Your happy customers using your product? Upload it. Seriously, Google lets you add unlimited photos use that gift.

Keep your information obsessively up to date. Your hours, phone number, website, services all of it. Nothing kills trust faster than showing up to a business that's closed when Google said it was open. And if you change your hours for holidays or special events, update it immediately.

Use posts like you actually want customers. Google lets you post updates, offers, events, and news directly to your profile. Think of these as free mini advertisements that show up when people search for you. Got a sale this week? Post about it. New product launch? Post about it. Just made an amazing custom order you're proud of? Post about it with photos. These posts expire after seven days, so you need to stay active. Seriously, don't just set it and forget it.

Answer questions like you're talking to your best customer/client. People can ask questions directly on your profile, and other potential customers will see your responses. This is free customer service and marketing rolled into one. Answer quickly, be helpful, and use it as a chance to showcase your expertise and personality.

The businesses that treat their Google Profile like a living, breathing part of their marketing strategy are the ones that show up first, get the most calls, and steal customers from competitors who think "online marketing" is too complicated.

Your Google Business Profile is the lowest hanging fruit in the entire digital marketing orchard. Ignore it at your own peril.

Your Website Is More Than Just a Pretty Face

Your website isn't just a digital business card that looks good and sits there collecting virtual dust. It's your tireless 24/7 salesperson, working weekends, holidays, and 3 AM shifts without complaining or asking for a raise. It's the digital handshake that happens before customers ever meet you, and it needs to work as hard as you do.

But here's the thing having a beautiful website that Google can't understand is like having a brilliant salesperson who only speaks ancient Latin. Sure, they're eloquent and impressive, but they're not exactly connecting with your target market.

Getting Inside Your Customer's Brain
Before we dive into the technical stuff, let's talk about keywords. And no, I don't mean those robotic, awkward phrases that make you sound like a malfunctioning chatbot from 2008. I'm talking about understanding the weird, wonderful, and wonderfully specific things your actual customers type into Google at 11 PM when they can't sleep.

Your potential customers aren't searching for "premium automotive maintenance services." They're typing "why does my car make that clicking noise when I turn left" or "best oil change near me Sunday" or "how often should I really change my air filter honestly."

Get inside their heads. What problems are they trying to solve? What questions keep them up at night? What would they ask you if they were standing in front of you right now? Those real, human phrases? Those are your keywords.

Making Your Website Speak Google's Language
Think of your website like a well organized book. Every good book has three essential elements that help people decide whether to pick it up:

The title tells you exactly what you're getting into. On your website, this is your title tag the clickable headline that shows up in Google results. Make it clear, make it compelling, and for the love of all that's holy, make it accurately describe what's actually on that page.

The back cover summary gives you the juicy details that help you decide if this book is worth your time. That's your meta description the little snippet of text that appears under your title in search results. This is your elevator pitch in 155 characters or less. Don't waste it on generic corporate speak like "We provide quality services." Tell people exactly what they'll get and why they should care.
Chapter headings break up the content and help you navigate to what you need. These are your header tags (H1, H2, H3) they organize your content and help both people and Google understand what each section is about.

Content That Actually Helps People
Here's where most businesses go completely off the rails. They think SEO means cramming their keywords into every sentence until their content reads like it was written by a robot having a breakdown. "Our premium dog grooming services provide dog grooming for dogs who need dog grooming services for their dogs." Stop. Just stop.

Google got smart. Like, scary smart. It can tell the difference between helpful content and keyword stuffed garbage faster than you can say "search engine optimization." The algorithm rewards websites that actually answer people's questions, solve their problems, and provide genuine value.

Instead of trying to trick Google, try helping your customers. Write the blog post (like this one) that explains why their houseplant keeps dying. Create the FAQ page (valued by Ai & LLM's) that answers the questions you get asked seventeen times a day. Make the service page that clearly explains what's included, what it costs, and what happens next.

Be useful. Be clear. Be human.

When you focus on creating content that genuinely helps people, something magical happens: they stay on your site longer, they share your content, they link to your pages, and they turn into customers. Google notices all of this activity and thinks, "Hey, this website must be pretty valuable. Let's show it to more people."

It's not about gaming the system. It's about being so helpful that the system wants to promote you.

Building Your Digital Neighborhood

Remember that old saying about success being "who you know, not what you know"? Well, it turns out that's true online too, just with a digital twist.

Google doesn't just care about what you say about yourself it cares about what everyone else says about you . Think about it: if you were looking for a good dentist, would you trust the guy who stands on street corners shouting "I'm the best dentist in town!" or would you rather hear from five different friends who all had great experiences with the same practice?

Google thinks like your skeptical friend. It wants to see proof that you're a legitimate, respected part of your community both online and off. This is what SEO nerds call "off page optimization," but I like to think of it as building your digital neighborhood.

Getting Those Golden Referrals (AKA Backlinks)
When another website links to yours, it's like getting a professional referral. The website is essentially telling Google, "Hey, these folks know what they're talking about. You should check them out."

But here's the kicker not all referrals are created equal. A mention from the local newspaper's website? That's like getting a referral from the mayor. A link from your cousin's abandoned blog about hamster care? That's more like getting vouched for by the guy who wears pajamas to the grocery store. Technically it counts, but it doesn't exactly scream "credible business professional."

So how do you get these digital referrals without feeling like you're begging for attention at a high school reunion?

Start local. Write a guest article for your local business journal. Sponsor a community event and make sure they mention you on their website. Partner with other businesses for cross promotions. Join your local chamber of commerce (most have websites that list members). Offer to be interviewed about trends in your industry. The goal isn't to manipulate it's to be genuinely involved in your community, both online and off.

Getting Your Name Out There (The Right Way)
Here's something that sounds boring but is actually crucial: making sure your business name, address, and phone number are exactly the same everywhere they appear online. We call this NAP consistency, and it's like making sure everyone in town knows where to find you.

If your Google Business Profile says you're on "Main Street" but Yelp has you on "Main St." and your website says "123 Main Street Suite A" while the Better Business Bureau lists "123 Main St. #A"—well, Google starts getting confused. And when Google gets confused, it gets cranky. When Google gets cranky, your rankings suffer.

Think of citations like your business getting mentioned in the local phone book, except now there are hundreds of digital phone books (Yelp, Yellow Pages, Facebook, industry directories, local business listings). The more places that mention your business with consistent information, the more Google trusts that you're a real, established business and not some fly by night operation running out of someone's garage.

The Review Game (And Why It's Not Actually a Game)
Let's talk about the elephant in the room: customer reviews. They're not just nice ego boosts or sources of occasional heartburn they're one of Google's (and Yelp's) biggest trust signals. Reviews are like having a bunch of customers standing outside your business with megaphones, telling everyone what their experience was like.

Here's what most businesses get wrong about reviews: they treat them like something that just happens to them, rather than something they can influence. I'm not talking about buying fake reviews or begging Aunt Martha to write glowing testimonials (Google can spot that stuff from orbit). I'm talking about actually asking your happy customers to share their experience.

You know that moment when a customer tells you how much they love working with you? That's when you say, "Thank you so much! Would you mind sharing that on Google? It really helps other people find us." Most people are happy to help they just need to be asked.

And when you get a less than stellar review? Don't panic and don't hide. Respond professionally, show that you care about making things right, and demonstrate to future customers that you stand behind your work. Sometimes a thoughtful response to a negative review is more powerful than ten generic five star ones.

The bottom line: Google wants to see that real people in your community know, trust, and recommend your business. The more evidence you can provide of that, the more Google will trust you too. It's all about building genuine relationships, one digital handshake at a time.

Your Digital Foundation Starts Today

Here's the beautiful truth about getting found on Google: it's not about mastering some impossible technical wizardry or cracking a secret code that only marketing agencies understand. It's about building a solid foundation with three interconnected pillars that work together to tell your story online.

Your Google Business Profile acts as your digital storefront, making that crucial first impression and showing up when customers are actively looking for what you offer. Your website becomes the helpful resource that answers their questions and demonstrates your expertise, while your off page reputation those backlinks, citations, and reviews serves as the community endorsement that proves you're the real deal. When these three elements work in harmony, they create a digital presence that doesn't just exist online, but actually thrives there.

Remember, this is a marathon, not a sprint. Google didn't learn to trust the businesses ranking on page one overnight, and your climb won't happen overnight either. But every optimized photo, every helpful blog post, every satisfied customer who leaves a review is a step forward. The businesses that consistently show up, consistently help people, and consistently build genuine relationships are the ones that win in the long run.

So here's your homework: pick just one thing from this guide and do it today. Claim your Google Business Profile. Upload five new photos. Write one helpful blog post. Ask one happy customer for a review. The smallest action is infinitely better than the grandest plan that never gets started.

And hey, if you'd rather just focus on running your business while someone else handles the digital marketing maze, we totally get it. This stuff is our profession at Salt Creative, and we love helping business owners turn their websites from digital hiding places into customer magnets. Feel free to contact us from the form below titled "Get My Free Proposal!."

Frequently Asked Questions About Getting Your Business Found on Google

1. How do I get my business found on Google quickly?

Start by claiming and optimizing your Google Business Profile. Add accurate business information, upload high quality photos, keep your hours updated, and encourage reviews. This is the fastest way to start showing up when customers search for businesses like yours.

2. Do I need a website if I already have a Google Business Profile?

Yes. A profile helps people find you, but your website gives customers the details they need to trust and choose you. It’s your 24/7 salesperson, answering questions, showcasing your services, and proving you’re legitimate. Google also favors businesses with strong, useful websites.

3. What are the three most important things for SEO if I’m just starting out?

A fully optimized Google Business Profile
A website with clear, helpful content that matches what customers search for
Consistent reviews, backlinks, and citations from other trusted sites

4. How long does it take to get my business on the first page of Google?

It depends on your competition, location, and consistency. Some businesses see results in a few weeks, while others take several months. Think of SEO as a long term investment rather than an overnight fix.

5. Do I need to hire an SEO agency to get results?

Not necessarily. Many business owners can get found on Google by handling the basics—updating their profile, creating helpful content, and asking for reviews. But if you want to grow faster or avoid the learning curve, partnering with an agency like Salt Creative can save time and maximize results.

6. How do I know what keywords my customers are searching for?

Pay attention to the actual questions customers ask you. Use free tools like Google’s “People Also Ask” or autocomplete suggestions to see real search phrases. Focus on natural, problem solving keywords instead of stiff industry jargon.

7. What are backlinks and do I really need them?

Backlinks are links from other websites pointing to yours. They act like referrals, telling Google your business is trustworthy. Not all backlinks are equal—local newspapers, chambers of commerce, and respected blogs are valuable. Random low quality links won’t help.

8. How important are customer reviews for getting found on Google?

Very important. Reviews are one of the strongest trust signals Google uses. The more quality, authentic reviews you have, the more likely you are to appear higher in search results. Always respond to reviews—good or bad—to show professionalism.

9. What happens if my business information isn’t consistent across the web?

Inconsistent business names, addresses, or phone numbers confuse Google and hurt your rankings. Make sure your details match everywhere they appear—from your website to directories like Yelp, Facebook, and the Better Business Bureau.

10. What’s the easiest first step I can take today?

Claim your Google Business Profile at business.google.com

Business Failure Statistics: A Data Driven Guide to Beating the Odds

Thu, 04 Sep 2025 21:02:18 GMT

Business Failure Statistics: What the Data Reveals About Small Business Survival

Here's a sobering reality: barely half of all businesses make it past their fifth anniversary. The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics puts that survival rate at just 49.4% , which sounds bad if you're thinking about starting your own company. But here's the thing knowing these numbers doesn't have to scare you away from entrepreneurship. Instead, think of them as your roadmap for what to avoid.

Sure, the stats are frightening. One in five businesses won't even see their first birthday, and by year ten, nearly two thirds have closed their doors for good. Yet thousands of entrepreneurs beat these odds every year, and there's usually a clear reason why some make it while others don't. In this article, we're going to unpack exactly what the Bureau of Labor Statistics tells us about business failures when they happen, which industries are hit the hardest, and most importantly, why companies actually fail. Armed with this knowledge, you'll know what pitfalls to sidestep on your own entrepreneurial journey.

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

A Timeline of Survival: Business Failure by Key Milestones

When you look at the raw numbers from the Bureau of Labor Statistics, the timeline of business failure tells a pretty clear story. It's not just about whether your company will make it, it's about when you're most vulnerable.

Let's start with the three year mark, which many consider the first real test. Based on the latest Bureau of Labor Statistics data tracking businesses born in 2013, approximately 39.7% of businesses fail within their first three years . That means if you launched with 100 other entrepreneurs, only about 61 of you would still have your doors open after three years. It's a tough pill to swallow, but this is where you see the initial business model flaws really start to show.

The five year milestone is where things get even more challenging. Roughly 48.4% of businesses don't survive to see their fifth birthday . Think about that you're essentially flipping a coin on whether your business will make it half a decade. This is typically when the reality of sustained competition, cash flow management, and market changes really hit home.

But here's where it gets brutal: the ten year mark. A staggering 65.1% of businesses fail within their first decade, meaning only 34.7% of businesses that started in 2013 were still operating by 2023. To put this in perspective, if you attended a business networking event with 100 new entrepreneurs, statistically only about 35 of those businesses would still exist ten years later.

Looking at recent trends, the Bureau of Labor Statistics shows some interesting patterns in business failure rates. The steepest drop happens right away survival rates fall by 20.4 percentage points from the first to second year of operation. After that initial cliff, the decline becomes more gradual but never really stops. What's particularly telling is that survival rates hit their lowest points during recession years, with establishments born in 2001 and 2008 showing particularly poor one year survival rates. Businesses that systematically track customer relationships outperform those that don't — the CRM adoption statistics back this up with hard numbers on retention and revenue impact.

The data shows that while the first year is make or break for many businesses, those who survive the initial hurdles still face significant challenges ahead. Each milestone represents another round of businesses that couldn't adapt, scale, or maintain profitability in an increasingly competitive marketplace.

The Reality on Main Street: Small Business Failure Statistics

When we talk about business failures, we're mostly talking about small businesses. The SBA's Office of Advocacy defines a small business as an independent business with fewer than 500 employees, though the exact definition can vary by industry. These aren't the Fortune 500 companies making headlines they're the mom and pop shops, local restaurants, and neighborhood service providers that form the backbone of American commerce.

Here's what makes small business statistics so eye opening: they make up 99.9% of all firms in the United States and employ nearly half of all private sector workers. From 1994 to 2021, the average five year survival rate for new employer establishments was just 49.2%, while only 33.8% survived a full decade. That means about two thirds of small businesses don't make it to their tenth birthday.

Small businesses face unique challenges that contribute to these high failure rates. Unlike large corporations, they can't weather financial storms as easily one bad quarter or unexpected expense can be devastating. They often lack access to capital, struggle with cash flow management, and don't have the resources for extensive market research or professional management teams. Many small business owners wear multiple hats, trying to handle everything from operations to marketing to bookkeeping.

The COVID-19 pandemic highlighted just how vulnerable these businesses are. By April 2020, 51.4% of small businesses reported being negatively impacted by the pandemic, and while this improved over time, many never fully recovered. Despite generating 61.1% of net new jobs since 1995 , small businesses continue to face an uphill battle for long term survival.

Not All Fields Are Equal: Business Failure Rate by Industry

If you think all industries face the same odds when it comes to business survival, think again. The latest Bureau of Labor Statistics data tracking businesses from 2013 to 2023 reveals some pretty dramatic differences across sectors.

Here's what might surprise you: Agriculture leads the pack with the best ten year survival rate at 50.5%, meaning roughly half of farming and related businesses actually make it to their tenth year. Utilities come in second at 45.7%, followed by manufacturing at 43.6%. These industries benefit from essential demand people always need food, power, and manufactured goods.

On the flip side, some sectors are brutal for long term survival. Mining , quarrying, and oil extraction have the worst track record, with only 24.5% of businesses surviving a decade . The information sector (which includes tech and media companies) isn't much better at 29.1%, and wholesale trade sits at 30.1%.

Construction tells an interesting story. While it doesn't have the worst ten year survival rate at 40.1%, it experiences the steepest first year decline of any major industry losing 24 percentage points right out of the gate. That's likely due to the industry's dependence on economic cycles and the relatively low barriers to entry that flood the market with new competitors.

Healthcare and social assistance land in the middle at 35.7%, which might seem low given the essential nature of medical services. However, this sector faces unique challenges like heavy regulation, high insurance costs, and significant startup capital requirements.

Retail trade (41.7%) and accommodation/food services (38.2%) also struggle with below average survival rates, largely due to intense competition, thin profit margins, and changing consumer behavior.

Why do these differences exist? Industries with higher barriers to entry, essential services, or less competition tend to have better survival rates. Meanwhile, sectors with low startup costs, high competition, or vulnerability to economic swings see more failures.

This data would be perfectly illustrated by a simple comparison chart showing ten year survival rates across industries making it easy to spot which fields give new businesses the best fighting chance.

Beyond the Data: The Top 10 Reasons Why Businesses Fail

1. Running Out of Cash
This isn't just about having money it's about managing it properly . Studies show that 82% of businesses fail due to poor cash flow management. You might have plenty of revenue on paper, but if customers pay late and your bills come due now, you're in trouble. Cash flow is the lifeblood of any business, and without it, even profitable companies can collapse overnight.

2. No Market Need
About 42% of startups fail because they build something nobody actually wants. It sounds obvious, but many entrepreneurs fall in love with their idea before they've proven there's real demand for it. Just because you think it's brilliant doesn't mean customers will pay for it.

3. Getting Outperformed
Sometimes you have a great product and solid finances, but competitors simply do it better, faster, or cheaper. This is especially brutal in crowded markets where established players have deeper pockets and more experience . Small businesses often underestimate how hard it is to compete against well funded rivals.

4. Flawed Business Model
Your business model is how you make money, and if it's broken, everything else falls apart. Maybe your costs are too high, your pricing is wrong, or you can't scale efficiently. A flawed model means you'll never generate sustainable profits, no matter how hard you work.

5. Poor Marketing
Build it and they will come? Not likely. Many businesses fail because they can't effectively reach their target customers or communicate their value proposition. Good marketing isn't just advertising it's understanding your audience and connecting with them in meaningful ways.

6. Wrong Team
Having the wrong people in key positions can sink a business fast . This includes co-founders who don't get along, employees who lack necessary skills, or leadership that can't adapt when things get tough. Team problems create ripple effects throughout the entire organization.

7. Pricing Problems
Price too high and customers walk away. Price too low and you can't cover costs. Finding that sweet spot is trickier than it looks, especially when you factor in competition and customer perception of value.

8. Poor Financial Management
Beyond cash flow, this includes inadequate budgeting, not understanding your numbers, and failing to plan for unexpected expenses. Many small business owners are great at their craft but terrible at the financial side.

9. Lack of Planning
Flying by the seat of your pants might work initially, but sustainable businesses need solid planning. This includes market research, financial projections, and having backup plans when things don't go as expected.

10. Pivoting Too Late (or Not at All)
Sometimes your original idea just isn't working, and stubbornly sticking to it instead of adapting can be fatal. Successful businesses know when to pivot and aren't afraid to make tough changes when the data says they should.

Conclusion

The numbers tell a tough story. Around 40 percent of businesses shut down within three years, about half are gone by year five, and only one out of three makes it past ten years. At first glance, those stats can feel discouraging. But if you look closer, they actually highlight the path to survival.

Most businesses don’t fail because the economy collapsed or because the owners were unlucky. They fail from mistakes that could have been avoided. Cash flow is usually the first trap. If you don’t know exactly what’s coming in and going out and if you don’t keep a buffer for surprises you’re setting yourself up for trouble. The next big one is launching without really testing the market. You need to talk to people, get feedback, and be sure they’ll actually pay for what you’re offering. And finally, you’ve got to choose your industry carefully and understand the uphill battles that come with it.

Every entrepreneur who made it through these odds started in the same place as you. They weren’t necessarily geniuses or incredibly lucky. What set them apart is that they paid attention, learned from other people’s mistakes, and planned for the challenges ahead. You don’t have to be another failed statistic. With this knowledge in hand, you’ve already taken a step toward being one of the businesses that lasts.

Best Color Printer For Small Business in 2025

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Thu, 04 Sep 2025 20:41:40 GMT

A Small Business Owner's Guide to Choosing the Best, Most Cost Effective Color Printer.

As a small business owner, every investment counts. You need tools that not only perform flawlessly but also contribute to your bottom line. When it comes to office equipment, a reliable color printer is non negotiable, handling everything from marketing flyers to client invoices. But in a market crowded with options, how do you choose the right one for right your small business? We've sifted through the noise to bring you a list of the top 5 color printers for small businesses in 2025, helping you find the perfect printer for your needs and budget. We have used some of these printers ourselves and can recommend them personally!

1. Epson EcoTank ET-4800

The Epson EcoTank line has been a game changer for small businesses, and the ET-4800 is a standout model. This all-in-one printer does away with traditional ink cartridges, instead using large, refillable ink tanks. This means you can print thousands of pages before needing to refill, dramatically lowering your cost per page. It's a fantastic option for businesses that print a moderate volume of color documents and want to keep running costs to a minimum.

Reviews from around the web:

"I am quite happy with my ET-4800 purchase. From wirelessly connecting to my Mac to software installation to adding the ink, it was easy to set up. I feel you can't go wrong with this level of ink capacity. "
"bought the Epson EcoTank ET-4800 after getting tired of constantly buying overpriced ink cartridges for my old printer. After doing a bit of research, the idea of refillable ink tanks really appealed to me—and I’m honestly glad I made the switch."
"This printer does have it all. Our HP printer crapped out and we couldn’t fix and truthfully it’s like 10 yrs old and we paid like $75 for it…so we’re a bit surprised when we went online to search for the same conveniences our HP had. We needed 2-sided printing, fax (yes we still do occasionally), scan, auto feed capable, and copy."

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

2. HP Color LaserJet Pro 4301fdw

For businesses where speed is paramount, the HP Color LaserJet Pro 4301fdw remains a top tier choice for small business owners. As a modern color laser printer, it excels at producing incredibly sharp text and professional quality graphics at high speeds. It's built to handle the demands of a busy workgroup, with robust security features and seamless wireless connectivity. While the upfront cost and toner are an investment, its efficiency and fast output make it a workhorse for any office that can't afford to wait on print jobs.

Reviews from around the web:

"Excellent printer, with powerful features and software. Very fast both in grayscale AND color. Must have small business multi-function printer."
"I purchased this to replace an older HP multifunction laser printer... This printer has exceeded my expectations so far. Setup was relatively easy... I love the AirPrint functionality, and the speed of the printing is incredible. Also, this printer is astonishingly quiet."
"Great purchase! Fast and easy to setup. Great print quality. Colors look smooth."

3. Brother MFC-L3780CDW

Brother has built a reputation for bulletproof reliability, and the MFC-L3780CDW continues that legacy. This digital color all-in-one is another laser powerhouse, delivering pristine, laser quality output consistently. Users frequently praise its straightforward setup, intuitive touchscreen, and surprisingly quiet operation, making it ideal for smaller office environments where noise can be a distraction. For the business owner who values a machine that works flawlessly day in and day out, this Brother printer is a dependable and efficient choice.

Reviews from around the web:

"The Brother MFC-L3780CDW is a great choice... It handles everything from basic document printing to scanning and copying with ease, making it ideal for a home office or small business. I'd highly recommend it to anyone looking for professional-quality printing and convenience."
"If you're running a business that demands efficiency, this printer is a worthy choice... it's a reliable, cost-effective solution that gets the job done without breaking the bank."
"The print quality is excellent. Text documents come out crisp and clear, and the colors in graphics and images are vibrant. The laser-quality output makes a noticeable difference, especially for professional-looking documents."

4. Epson EcoTank Pro ET-5170

The Epson EcoTank system revolutionized printing costs, and the Pro series is tailor made for business. The ET-5170 does away with cartridges in favor of high capacity, refillable ink tanks. The value proposition is staggering: it comes with enough ink to print thousands of pages right out of the box, driving your cost-per-page down to mere fractions of a cent. While its raw print speed is more modest than its laser counterparts, the immense savings on ink make it a brilliant financial decision for businesses that print a steady volume of color documents.

Reviews from around the web:

"I've done a full 180 degrees about-face on Epson inkjets. I used to be a diehard HP printer guy until HP failed to maintain their driver software compatibility through OS upgrades. HP hardware was excellent; it was painful to throw it in the garbage."
"I had a Canon color laser printer that I loved! The problem was that after 6 years it started to need name brand toner at $45/each. I decided to co for something that would print cheaper, because it turns out I don't print as much as I used to, so having a commercial printer is no needed.
I like the tanks a lot and they are super easy to fill. The first fill does not use a whole bottle, but then it settles and the next day you can top off the tanks with the rest of the bottle."
"I’ve had this printer for 18 months and love it. I haven’t even had to refill the ink yet! I print a fair amount, not constantly, but I homeschool and print things for church and scouts also. "

5. HP OfficeJet Pro 9135e

The HP OfficeJet Pro 9135e represents the peak of modern cartridge based inkjet technology. It’s designed to be an all around performer, offering excellent print quality, impressive speed, and a suite of advanced features, including dual-sided scanning and a large touchscreen. While it uses cartridges, it's eligible for HP's Instant Ink subscription, which can simplify supply management and lower costs for predictable print volumes. It's a fantastic, feature-rich choice for a small office that needs a versatile machine for a wide variety of tasks.

Reviews from around the web:

"This printer is excellent, great and a must have, if you need a quality, fast and reliable printer. It's great for small businesses, perfect for personal and family use. Great size, wonderful features and multiple choice of connectivity."
"Best inkjet printer on the market. This does it all, prints quickly, quietly, legibly and receives and sends faxes reliably. Pretty easy wireless set-up, and their support is prompt if you have trouble. Recommended for home or small office use."
"This printer is an improvement over the last couple of printers I've owned. It's definitely faster, it was easier to set up out of the box."

The Let Them Theory: A Revolutionary Approach to Reclaiming Your Personal Power

Sun, 31 Aug 2025 18:54:50 GMT

In a world where we constantly find ourselves frustrated by other people's choices, opinions, and behaviors, Mel Robbins has introduced a deceptively simple yet profoundly transformative concept that's changing millions of lives.

The Let Them Theory isn't just another self-help trend; it's a fundamental shift in how we approach relationships, stress, and personal growth.

The Root of Our Exhaustion

We've all been there. Your coworker refuses to listen to reason during meetings. Your friend constantly cancels plans at the last minute. A family member insists on sharing political opinions that make your blood boil. Your instinct? Try to fix it. Convince them. Change their mind. Control the situation.

But what if I told you that this instinct is the very thing keeping you trapped in cycles of frustration, resentment, and emotional exhaustion?

The truth is, most of our daily stress doesn't come from what people do to us. It comes from our relentless attempts to manage what people do, period. We exhaust ourselves trying to control the uncontrollable, and in doing so, we hand over our power to everyone except ourselves.

The Simple Phrase That Changes Everything

The Let Them Theory boils down to two powerful words: "Let them."

Let them have their opinion. Let them make that choice. Let them react emotionally. Let them walk away. Let them disappoint you. Let them show you exactly who they are.

This isn't about becoming passive or indifferent. It's about recognizing a fundamental truth that ancient philosophers understood thousands of years ago: you cannot control other people, but you absolutely can control your response to them.

When you say "let them," something remarkable happens in your brain. The stress response that typically floods your system when someone acts in ways you disapprove of simply doesn't activate. You create space between their actions and your emotions. You take back your power.

The Missing Piece: Let Me

Here's where most people get the theory wrong. They think it's just about letting go, about becoming zen-like and detached. But there's a crucial second part that transforms this from passive acceptance into active empowerment: "Let me."

After you let them be who they are , you get to decide: Let me choose how to respond. Let me set boundaries. Let me focus on my goals. Let me surround myself with people who align with my values. Let me build the life I actually want.
This two-part system is what makes the theory so powerful. The first part frees you from wasted energy. The second part redirects that energy toward what you can actually influence: yourself.

Real Life Applications That Actually Work

When Someone Criticizes You
Instead of defending yourself or trying to change their mind, try this: "Let them think I'm making a mistake. Let me focus on doing work I'm proud of." Suddenly, their criticism loses its power over your emotions and decisions.

When Friends Drift Away
Adult friendships naturally shift due to changes in life circumstances, geography, and priorities. Rather than forcing relationships that have run their course, say: "Let them move on to different priorities. Let me invest energy in the relationships that are thriving and be open to new connections."

When Someone Won't Change
We've all had that person in our lives who we just know would be happier if they'd only listen to our advice. But pushing people to change creates resistance, not transformation. Instead: "Let them figure out their own path. Let me focus on being the example of the change I want to see."

When Life Feels Unfair
Comparison is inevitable, but it doesn't have to be destructive. When you see someone achieving what you want: "Let them have their success. Let me use their path as inspiration for what's possible, or let me focus on my unique journey if comparison only brings pain."

The Psychology Behind Why This Works
The Let Them Theory aligns with several well-established psychological principles. Stoicism teaches us that suffering comes not from events themselves, but from our resistance to reality. Detachment Theory shows us that emotional wellbeing improves when we release our grip on outcomes we can't control. Radical Acceptance, used in therapeutic settings, helps people find peace by acknowledging reality without fighting it.

When we constantly try to manage other people's behavior, we activate our brain's stress response system repeatedly throughout the day. This chronic activation leads to anxiety, frustration, and emotional burnout. The Let Them Theory interrupts this cycle by changing our relationship to external circumstances.

What This Isn't

The Let Them Theory doesn't mean:

Accepting abuse or harmful behavior
Becoming a doormat
Avoiding all conflict
Giving up on people you care about
Becoming emotionally cold or distant

It means distinguishing between what deserves your energy and what doesn't. It means responding from a place of choice rather than reactivity. It means loving people enough to let them be themselves while maintaining your own boundaries and standards.

The Ripple Effect

People who consistently practice the Let Them Theory report remarkable changes in their lives. They sleep better because they're not replaying conversations in their heads, trying to figure out how to change someone's mind. They have more energy for their goals because they're not constantly managing other people's emotions. Their relationships improve because they stop trying to control and start truly accepting.

Perhaps most importantly, they discover something profound: when you stop trying to control others, you often inspire more positive change than all your previous efforts combined. People are naturally drawn to those who accept them as they are. Ironically, the less you try to change people, the more influence you actually have.

Starting Today

The beauty of the Let Them Theory lies in its immediate applicability. You don't need to read a dozen books or complete a certification program. You can start practicing it the next time someone does something that typically triggers your need to control or fix.

Notice the urge to manage their behavior. Take a breath. Say to yourself, "Let them." Then ask, "Now, let me decide how I want to respond to this situation."

This simple practice, repeated consistently, has the power to transform not just your relationships, but your entire experience of daily life. You'll find yourself less stressed, more focused, and genuinely happier.
The most liberating realization of all? Other people's choices, opinions, and behaviors say nothing about you. They reveal who they are, what they value, and how they see the world. Your job isn't to change their perspective. Your job is to live in alignment with your own values and to create the life that brings you joy and fulfillment.

In a world that constantly tells us we need to fix, improve, or influence everyone around us, the Let Them Theory offers a radically different path: the path of personal empowerment through acceptance and intentional action. The more you let others live their lives, the better your own gets.

The Best Office Phone Systems for Small Business

Wed, 27 Aug 2025 17:44:57 GMT

Choosing a Modern Phone System for your Small Businesses

Getting a proper business phone system isn't just about looking professional (though that's a nice bonus). It's about getting your life back. It's about being able to hand off calls to team members without giving out your personal number. It's about having a voicemail system that doesn't mention your weekend art class. Most importantly, it's about drawing that line in the sand between Sarah the person and Sarah the business owner.

And the crazy part? Today's business phone systems aren't the clunky, expensive monsters they used to be. We're talking about solutions that cost less than your monthly Form & Function Coffee habit but can make you look like a Fortune 500 company. Features that seemed impossible five years ago like having calls automatically forward to your mobile when you're out, or getting voicemails transcribed and emailed to you are now standard.

Whether you're a freelancer ready to stop playing phone tag with clients or a small team that's tired of the "Is this for business or personal?" number, this guide breaks down everything you need to know.

The Three Main Types of Office Phone Systems

When choosing a phone system for your business, it helps to understand the three main options: VoIP/Cloud-Based systems , On-Premise PBX, and Traditional Landlines. Each works differently and comes with its own benefits and drawbacks.

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

1. VoIP / Cloud-Based Phone Systems

What it is:
This system uses the internet instead of a phone line. When you make a call, your voice travels through the internet, not through old fashioned wires. Everything runs in the cloud, which means you don’t need bulky equipment in your office.

Pros for small businesses:

Lower startup cost since you don’t need special hardware.
Can answer business calls from anywhere — office, home, or cell phone.
Easy to add or remove users as your team grows.
Often comes with extra features like video meetings, voicemail-to-email, and text messaging.

Cons for small businesses:

Depends on a strong, reliable internet connection. If the internet goes out, so does your phone system.
Call quality can drop if your internet is slow or overloaded.
Monthly subscription costs may add up, especially as you scale.

2. On-Premise PBX (Private Branch Exchange)

What it is:
This is a phone system you keep in your office. It’s a piece of equipment that manages your calls and connects your desk phones together. Think of it like having your own “mini phone company” inside your building.

Pros for small businesses:

You have full control over the system and its security.
Call quality can be more reliable, since it doesn’t depend on the internet.
Can save money long term if you already invested in the equipment.

Cons for small businesses:

High upfront cost for the equipment and installation.
Requires space in your office to store the hardware.
Usually needs professional support or IT help for maintenance and upgrades.
Less flexible — harder to add remote workers without extra setup.

3. Traditional Landlines

What it is:
This is the standard phone line most people grew up with. Calls travel over copper wires run by the phone company. It’s the most “old school” approach, and many phone companies are slowly moving away from it.

Pros for small businesses:

Extremely reliable, even during internet outages.
Simple to use — no technical knowledge required.
Works in areas with poor or no internet service.

Cons for small businesses:

Limited features compared to modern systems.
Harder and more expensive to add multiple lines.
Phone companies may phase them out, making future support uncertain.
Usually costs more for fewer features when compared to VoIP.

Quick Summary for Small Businesses:

VoIP / Cloud-Based: Best for flexibility, mobility, and modern features — but you’ll need strong internet.
On-Premise PBX : Good if you want control and already have equipment — but it costs more upfront and lacks flexibility.
Traditional Landlines: Most reliable and simple — but outdated with very limited features.

10 Must-Have Features for a Small Business Phone System

Auto-Attendant

Think of this as a friendly virtual receptionist that greets callers and points them in the right direction. It saves you from constantly answering routine calls while making your company sound bigger and more professional.

Mobile & Desktop Apps
With apps on your phone and laptop, you don’t have to be tied to the office to take a business call. Customers reach you on your business number no matter where you’re working.

Business Texting (SMS/MMS)
Many customers prefer a quick text over a call. This feature lets you send updates, reminders, or pictures from your business line instead of your personal cell.

Voicemail-to-Email Transcription
Instead of fishing through audio messages, you get the voicemail text right in your inbox. It’s faster to scan, easier to prioritize, and you won’t miss important details.

Call Forwarding & Simultaneous Ring
If you’re on the move, this makes sure calls find you. You can send them to your mobile, or have your desk and cell ring at the same time so nothing slips through the cracks.

Toll-Free Number (1-800)
A toll-free number gives your business an established, trustworthy look. Plus, out-of-town customers can call without worrying about long-distance charges.

Video & Audio Conferencing
Meetings don’t always have to be in person. With one click you can jump into a video or audio call to collaborate with your team, clients, or partners.

Call Recording
Recordings let you revisit conversations to double-check details or use them for staff training. They’re also useful when there’s a dispute about what was said.

Business Hours & Call Routing
Set clear rules for when and how calls get handled. During open hours, calls go to your team, and after hours, they can head to voicemail or an answering service.

Analytics & Reporting
This feature helps you spot call trends—like peak times or how many calls go unanswered. With that insight, you can adjust staffing or sales efforts to better serve customers.

How to Choose the Right System in 4 Simple Steps

Step 1: Assess Your Needs

Think about how your team communicates today and where the gaps are.
Do you need remote access, texting with customers, or just a reliable way to answer calls?
Write down your must have features before you start comparing options.

Step 2: Set Your Budget

Decide what you’re comfortable spending up front versus monthly.
Factor in not just the cost of the system, but also training, equipment, and potential upgrades.
A clear budget keeps you focused on systems that fit your business, not just flashy features.

Step 3: Compare Top Providers

Narrow your choices to a few providers that offer the features you need.
Look at reliability, customer support, and how easy the system is to use.
Make a simple side by side comparison so you can see which one best fits your needs.

Step 4: Read Reviews & Schedule a Demo

Check customer reviews to learn how each provider handles real-world problems.
Ask for a demo so you can see the system in action and ask questions directly.
Involve key team members in the demo to make sure it works for everyone, not just management.

Conclusion

The right phone system does more than connect calls — it projects professionalism, streamlines daily operations, and supports business growth. Modern solutions are affordable, flexible, and designed to meet the needs of small business owners who want to work smarter, not harder. Stop letting your cell phone hold your business back. It’s time to explore a system that can grow with you.

Timeboxing for Your Small Business: A Practical Guide

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 22 Aug 2025 17:29:48 GMT

In This Post:

Timeboxing Schedule Template | Frequently Asked Questions

What is Timeboxing?

According to Harvard Business Review , timeboxing is a time management technique where you allocate a fixed, predetermined time period (a "timebox") to a specific task or activity and treat it like a scheduled appointment. During this timebox, you focus solely on that task, working to complete it within the allotted time. Once the timebox ends, you stop working on the task, whether it's finished or not, and move on to the next scheduled timebox. This method helps improve productivity by enhancing focus, encouraging realistic planning, reducing perfectionism, and creating a sense of accomplishment.

Getting Started: Setting Yourself Up for Success

Know What You're Working With

Take a honest look at what your business actually does day-to-day
Write down everything from the big stuff (like serving customers) to the little things (like updating your social media)
Don't overthink it—if you spend time on it regularly, it goes on the list

Pick Your Tools (Keep It Simple!)

Start with what you already use: Google Calendar, your phone's calendar, or even a good old-fashioned planner
The best tool is the one your whole team will actually use
Remember: fancy doesn't always mean better

Get Everyone on Board

Spend 30 minutes explaining the "why" behind timeboxing to your team
Show them how it'll make their days less chaotic, not more complicated
Give real examples from your own business so they can see the point

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

Making It Work Day-to-Day

Plan Like a Human, Not a Robot

Start each day (or end the previous one) by listing what needs to happen
Be real about what's urgent versus what just feels urgent
Remember: not everything is a fire that needs putting out immediately

Time It Right

Guess how long things take, then add a little cushion (trust us on this one)
New to something? Give yourself extra time to figure it out
It's better to finish early than to stress about running late

Schedule Like You Mean It

Put tasks in your calendar like they're meetings with your most important client
Block out time between tasks so you can breathe and reset
Always, always leave buffer time for the unexpected (because there's always something unexpected)

The Daily Reality Check

Stay Focused (Easier Said Than Done, We Know)

When you're in a time block, that's your world—everything else can wait
Turn off the notifications that aren't truly urgent
If you don't finish something, that's okay! Note where you left off and move on

Handle the Chaos

Use your buffer time when things go sideways (and they will)
Learn to say "Let me get back to you on that during my admin time"
It's not rude—it's professional

Learning and Getting Better

Quick Daily Check-Ins

Spend 5 minutes at the end of each day asking: What worked? What didn't?
If something consistently takes longer than planned, adjust your expectations
Small tweaks make big differences over time

Team Huddles That Actually Help

Once a week, spend 15-20 minutes talking about what's working
Celebrate the wins (even small ones!)
Fix what's broken before it becomes a bigger problem

The Monthly Big Picture

Step back and ask: Is this actually making our business better?
Are we less stressed? Are customers happier? Are we getting more done?
Change what isn't working—this is your system, not the other way around

Making It Stick

Start Small and Build Up

Begin with just 3-5 time blocks per person per day
Master the basics before getting fancy
Remember: progress beats perfection every time

Stay Flexible When Life Happens

Busy season coming? Adjust your blocks accordingly
Someone calls in sick? Have a plan for the essentials
The goal is structure, not rigidity

Celebrate Success

When timeboxing helps you serve customers faster or reduces overtime, acknowledge it
Your team needs to see that their effort is paying off
Success breeds more success

What You'll Need

Tools and Resources

Start with free tools you already know
One shared calendar everyone can access
A simple one-page summary everyone can reference

Time Investment

30 minutes upfront to train everyone
15 minutes weekly to keep improving
Way less time spent wondering "What should I be doing right now?"

How You'll Know It's Working

The Numbers Don't Lie

Aim to complete 80% of your planned tasks within their time blocks
Track if you're working less overtime
Measure if customers are getting faster service

But Also Trust Your Gut

Are you and your team less stressed?
Do customers seem happier with your service?
Does work feel more manageable?

When Things Go Wrong (Because They Will)

Technology Fails

Keep paper backups or a whiteboard handy
The system matters more than the tool

Life Gets Crazy

Focus on the must-do tasks first
Give yourself more buffer time when you're short-staffed
It's okay to scale back when you need to

Team Gets Overwhelmed

Pull back to fewer time blocks until everyone's comfortable
Focus on the highest-impact tasks first
Remember: this should make life easier, not harder

Use our free timeboxing schedule template on Notion!

Timeboxing for Small Business: Frequently Asked Questions

What is timeboxing and how does it work for small businesses?

Timeboxing is a time management technique where you allocate fixed time periods (called "timeboxes") to specific tasks, treating them like unmovable appointments. For small businesses, this means dedicating specific blocks of time to activities like customer service (30 minutes), inventory management (1 hour), or social media updates (45 minutes). Instead of letting tasks drag on indefinitely, you work within the allocated time and then move to the next scheduled activity.

How do I start implementing timeboxing in my small business?

Start by following these three essential steps:

Identify your key tasks: List all recurring activities in your business (customer service, invoicing, inventory checks, social media posting)
Choose a simple tool: Use Google Calendar, Microsoft Outlook, or even a paper planner—whatever your team will actually use
Train your team: Spend 30 minutes explaining the concept with real examples from your business

Begin with just 3-5 timeboxes per employee per day to avoid overwhelming anyone.

What tools should I use for timeboxing in my small business?

The best timeboxing tools for small businesses include:
Free options:

Google Calendar (cloud-based, mobile-friendly)
Microsoft Outlook
Todoist (free tier available)
Paper planners or whiteboards (low-tech backup)

Key requirements:

Cloud-based for team access
Mobile-friendly for on-the-go updates
Simple enough that everyone will use it consistently

Remember: the best tool is the one your team will actually use every day.

How long should timeboxes be for different business tasks?

Typical timebox durations for small businesses:

Customer email responses: 30 minutes
Social media content creation: 45 minutes to 1 hour
Inventory checks: 1 hour
Daily financial tasks: 30-45 minutes
Team meetings: 15-30 minutes
Customer service calls: 30-60 minutes

Pro tip: For new tasks, add 15 minutes to your estimate to account for learning curves. It's better to finish early than run over consistently.

What if tasks don't fit perfectly into their timeboxes?

This is completely normal! Here's how to handle it:

If a task runs over:

Note your progress and move to the next timebox
Reschedule the remaining work for later that day or the next day
Don't let one overrun derail your entire schedule

If you finish early:

Use the extra time for a quick break
Start preparing for your next task
Review and organize for tomorrow

Key principle: The timebox ends when the time is up, regardless of task completion status.

How do I handle interruptions while timeboxing?

Use these strategies:

Build in buffer time: Schedule 30-60 minutes daily for unexpected issues
Defer non-urgent interruptions: "I'll address this during my 2 PM admin timebox"
Use your buffer time: When true emergencies arise, that's what buffer time is for
Turn off non-essential notifications: During focused timeboxes, silence email alerts and
non-urgent communications

Remember: Not every interruption is actually urgent, even though it might feel that way.

How do I get my team to buy into timeboxing?

Focus on benefits they care about:

Reduced stress and overwhelm
Clearer priorities and less confusion
Getting home on time more often
Better work-life balance

Implementation tips:

Start with a 30-minute training session using examples from your actual business
Let them help design their own timeboxes
Celebrate early wins and improvements
Be flexible and adjust based on their feedback

Show, don't just tell: Demonstrate how it reduces chaos rather than adding complexity.

What's the difference between timeboxing and regular scheduling?

Traditional scheduling often involves open-ended task lists and flexible timing, which can lead to procrastination and tasks expanding to fill available time.

Timeboxing creates firm boundaries:

Fixed start and end times for each task
Tasks are treated like appointments that can't be moved
Forces you to work more efficiently within constraints
Prevents perfectionism and overthinking
Creates natural stopping points throughout the day

Think of it as making appointments with your own work.

How do I measure if timeboxing is working for my business?

Quantitative metrics:

Percentage of timeboxes completed on schedule (aim for 80%+)
Reduction in overtime hours
Faster task completion times (e.g., customer inquiries resolved in under 1 hour)
Improved on-time project delivery

Qualitative indicators:

Reduced employee stress levels
Better team focus and productivity
Improved customer service response times
Less end-of-day scrambling to finish tasks

Track both numbers and feelings: Sometimes the biggest benefit is simply feeling more in control of your workday.

What should I do when timeboxing isn't working?

Common problems and solutions:

Team feels overwhelmed:

Reduce to fewer timeboxes per day
Focus only on high-priority tasks initially
Increase buffer time between tasks

Consistently missing timeboxes:

Re-evaluate task duration estimates
Check for unrealistic expectations
Identify and eliminate common interruptions

Technology issues:

Have paper backup systems ready
Use simple tools rather than complex ones
Ensure everyone knows the backup plan

Seasonal business fluctuations:

Adjust timebox lengths for busy periods
Create different schedules for peak vs. slow seasons
Build in extra flexibility during high-demand times

How does timeboxing help with work-life balance in small businesses?

Timeboxing creates clear boundaries that benefit work-life balance:

Prevents work from expanding endlessly:

Tasks have defined start and stop times
Reduces the tendency to "just finish this one thing"
Creates natural endpoints to the workday

Improves evening and weekend boundaries:

When timeboxes are complete, work is done
Reduces guilt about unfinished tasks
Provides clear metrics for productivity

Reduces mental load:

Less decision fatigue about what to do next
Fewer tasks left mentally "open" at day's end
Clear priorities reduce stress and overwhelm

Can timeboxing work for customer-facing businesses with unpredictable demands?

Yes, but it requires smart adaptation:

Build in customer-focused timeboxes:

Dedicate specific blocks for "customer service" rather than trying to timebox individual customer interactions
Schedule longer timeboxes during peak customer hours
Use shorter administrative timeboxes during slower periods

Create flexible buffer zones:

Schedule extra buffer time during historically busy periods
Have "emergency response" timeboxes that can be activated when needed
Cross-train team members so anyone can handle customer needs

Example for a retail business:

8:00-10:00 AM: Customer service timebox (peak morning hours)
10:00-10:15 AM: Break
10:15-11:00 AM: Inventory management
11:00 AM-1:00 PM: Customer service timebox (lunch rush)

What's the biggest mistake small businesses make with timeboxing?

The #1 mistake: Making it too complicated from the start.

Other common mistakes:

Trying to timebox every single minute of the day
Being too rigid and not allowing for adjustments
Not building in enough buffer time for unexpected issues
Choosing overly complex tools that the team won't use
Not getting team buy-in before implementation
Expecting perfection immediately instead of allowing for a learning curve

Best practice: Start simple, get comfortable with basic timeboxing, then gradually refine and improve your system based on real experience.

How long does it take to see results from timeboxing?

Immediate benefits (within 1-2 weeks):

Clearer daily structure
Reduced decision fatigue about what to work on next
Better awareness of how time is actually spent

Short-term improvements (within 1 month):

Increased task completion rates
Better time estimation skills
Reduced end-of-day stress

Long-term transformation (2-3 months):

Significantly improved productivity
Better work-life balance
More predictable business operations
Improved customer service consistency

Remember: Like any new habit, timeboxing takes practice. Give yourself and your team at least 30 days to adjust before making major changes to the system.

AI Content Creation Checklist

Wed, 20 Aug 2025 20:21:19 GMT

Primary Advantage Of Using Generative Ai In Content Creation

AI is changing the way marketers approach content . It saves time, supports creativity, and helps maintain consistent messaging as your business grows. By automating routine work and improving personalization, AI gives you space to focus on strategy and results.

As Joe Chernov once said, “Good marketing makes the company look smart. Great marketing makes the customer feel smart.”

1: Build Content Strategy with AI

Key Question: How can AI support your business goals?

Set clear objectives : Define what you want to achieve, such as stronger brand awareness, more leads, or higher engagement.
Automate where it counts : Use AI to assist with brainstorming, drafting, or formatting. For instance, let AI generate topic ideas tailored to your audience instead of researching from scratch.
Stay adaptable : Use AI as a support tool, not a replacement. Experiment to see where it fits best in your process.

2: Generate Stronger Ideas

Key Question: How can you make sure your ideas connect with your audience?

Brainstorm quickly: AI tools can suggest blog titles, captions, or campaign themes in seconds.
Blend with trend insights: Compare AI ideas with tools like Google Trends to confirm relevance.
Guide with prompts: Provide clear instructions, such as “Suggest five LinkedIn post ideas on future marketing trends,” to get focused outputs.

3: Speed Up Content Production

Key Question: How can you create more content without losing quality?

Draft efficiently: AI writing tools can expand outlines into drafts while keeping your brand voice in mind.
Create visuals faster: Use AI design tools to produce graphics, illustrations, or infographics that support your message.
Repurpose with ease: Convert a webinar into a blog, email series, and social posts instead of starting each from zero.

4: Personalize Without Extra Effort

Key Question: How do you tailor content for different audiences at scale?

Segment and adjust: AI can analyze audience data to personalize emails, landing pages, and ads.
Create variations: Test headlines or messages that appeal to different personas.
Engage in real time: Chatbots powered by AI can answer questions and guide users while freeing up your time.

5: Measure and Improve

Key Question: How do you track performance and refine your content?

Monitor metrics: Use dashboards to keep track of engagement, click-throughs, and conversions.
Act on insights: AI analytics can suggest new keywords or improvements to underperforming pieces.
Run smart tests: Automate A/B tests on headlines, layouts, or calls-to-action, then adjust based on results.

6: Maintain Creativity and Consistency

Key Question: How do you keep content creative while scaling?

Set clear guidelines: Build a style framework so AI-generated content matches your tone and brand identity.
Work alongside AI: Use it as a partner in brainstorming and execution while you guide strategy.
Leverage user content: AI can help collect and refine user-generated posts for authentic engagement.

Action Plan

Choose one part of your content process—such as idea generation, drafting, or performance analysis—to enhance with AI.
Test a few tools to find the ones that best fit your workflow.
Keep refining how you combine AI with your strategy to save time and create more impact.

Five Powerful Prompt Examples

Content Strategy Prompt
"Act as a content strategist for a small [industry type] business. Suggest a 3-month content plan with blog topics, social posts, and email ideas that build brand awareness and generate leads."
Idea Generation Prompt
"Give me 10 blog post ideas and 10 social media caption ideas that highlight the benefits of [my product or service]. Make them simple, engaging, and tailored to [target audience]."
Content Drafting Prompt
"Turn this outline into a 1,000-word blog article in a clear, professional tone that speaks directly to [target audience]. Optimize it for the keyword [insert keyword]."
Personalization Prompt
"Write 3 variations of an email promoting [my offer]—one for new subscribers, one for loyal customers, and one for people who abandoned their cart."
Optimization Prompt
"Analyze this blog draft for readability and SEO. Suggest improvements to the headline, subheadings, and call-to-action to increase engagement and conversions."

Decentralized Autonomous Organizations (DAO's): A Guide for Small Businesses

Mon, 18 Aug 2025 23:37:17 GMT

What is a Decentralized Autonomous Organization (DAO)?

A Decentralized Autonomous Organization , known as a DAO, is a new way to structure an organization. It is controlled entirely by its members without a central governing body or CEO. Rules and decision making procedures are coded into smart contracts on a blockchain . Every decision, vote, and financial transaction is transparent and permanently recorded, which supports trust and accountability among all members.

How DAO's Operate

Decentralized Autonomous Organizations rely on smart contracts , which are programmed instructions that automatically execute when certain criteria are met. These smart contracts are visible to anyone, and build trust through transparency. DAO members hold tokens that serve as voting power in the organization. Typically proposals are made and votes are cast, with actions only happening when a defined level of support is reached. This model ensures broad feedback and participation.

Why Small Business Owners Should Care About DAO's

For small business owners, DAO's provide a practical method to create organizations where stakeholders directly impact operations, spending, and strategy. Everything takes place in the open. This approach erases traditional geographic boundaries and eliminates complicated hierarchies . DAO's are an ideal structure for worldwide co-ops, nonprofits, and collectives in which every member can participate, no matter their location.

The Benefits of Decentralized Autonomous Organizations (DAO's)

Transparency is essential: Each transaction and vote is visible, which reduces the risk of corruption or hidden agendas.
Global reach: Anyone with an internet connection can take part, expanding the talent pool and member diversity.
Lower costs and less friction: Automation replaces many middlemen and administrative steps, cutting expenses and human error.
Inclusivity is built in: Tokens allow for wide distribution of influence, encouraging equitable participation from all members.

Real World Examples of DAO's

DAO's have run investment funds, managed online communities, and even attempted to purchase historical documents. ConstitutionDAO brought together participants who quickly raised millions in an ambitious bid to buy an original copy of the US Constitution. Meanwhile, organizations like MakerDAO efficiently manage complex financial products. These examples demonstrate how a DAO can be flexible and effective.

The Technology Behind DAO's

DAO's use blockchain technology to create their decentralized and permanent management records. The blockchain serves as an incorruptible ledger of every action and decision. Smart contracts operate as the bylaws of the DAO, executing agreements and handling funds without human oversight. This structure minimizes the chance of fraud and helps ensure the organization runs as planned.

Challenges and Considerations for DAO's

Despite their promise, DAO's do carry risks. An incorrectly written smart contract can be exploited by hackers, threatening funds and the organization’s stability. Additionally, the legal and tax positions of DAO's are still unclear in many regions, and regulations are quickly evolving. Small business owners considering a DAO should consult legal and technical experts before moving forward.

The Future of Organizational Design Why DAO's Matter

DAO's reflect a shift in how businesses and communities form and operate in a digital age. By prioritizing transparency, efficiency, and shared ownership, DAO's enable new types of collaboration. Small business owners willing to experiment with DAO's may discover that this model offers an innovative edge, helping them to build more trusted, adaptive, and resilient organizations.

The Relevance for Small Business Owners

For small business owners, understanding Decentralized Autonomous Organizations (DAO's) is not just about keeping up with technology; it is about exploring a new paradigm for collaboration. A DAO could be used to manage a group of freelancers, where each member has a say in project selection and payment. It could also be a way for a group of small producers to create a collective brand, with all decisions about marketing and distribution made by the community. The transparency of a DAO’s treasury could be a significant advantage, allowing for a clear and public record of all financial transactions, which builds trust with investors and partners. While the legal and regulatory landscape is still evolving, DAO's offer a fascinating glimpse into a more democratic and resilient future for organizational structures. They demonstrate a way to build trust and coordinate actions on a global scale, all without the need for a central intermediary.

Decentralized Autonomous Organizations (DAO's) give power to members instead of a traditional leadership team.
DAO's use blockchain and smart contracts to make actions secure and visible to all.
Such organizations open up new possibilities for global fundraising, community management, and transparent governance.
Early adoption of DAO concepts could help small businesses foster innovation and trust in a rapidly changing landscape.

Taking Your Small Business to the Next Level with Salt Creative

At Salt Creative we understand that small businesses need to adapt to new technologies and digital trends to thrive. Whether you are building a Decentralized Autonomous Organizations (DAO's) or a traditional company, having a strong online presence is essential. Our team specializes in web design and SEO services that are tailored to the unique needs of small business owners. We create visually stunning websites that are not only beautiful but also optimized for search engines so your customers can find you. We partner with you to understand your goals and build a digital foundation that supports your growth.

Our clients have seen real results. As Kevin K. shared, " We had a great experience with Salt Creative! " Similarly, David B. noted our "You have been responsive and great to collaborate with" and Todd J. said: "Designed a beautiful website for our company" We take pride in our ability to deliver a seamless process and a final product that exceeds expectations, just as Lisa S. said, "We had a great experience with Salt Creative!"

If you are a small business owner ready to enhance your digital presence, we are here to help. Book an appointment with us to discuss your next project, or request a free proposal. We’ll help you navigate the digital landscape and connect with your audience effectively.

Why It’s Important to Have an RSS Feed for Your Small Business Website

Wed, 13 Aug 2025 20:06:13 GMT

In today’s digital landscape, even small businesses can harness powerful marketing tools that improve visibility, strengthen customer engagement, and streamline content delivery. One of the most effective yet often overlooked tools is an rss feed.

What Is an RSS Feed?

An rss feed (Really Simple Syndication) is a simple format that allows your website to automatically share updates with subscribers. Instead of expecting visitors to check your site for new content, an rss feed delivers your latest blog posts, news, or updates directly to them in a single, easy-to-read location. This makes it easier for customers to stay connected and engaged with your brand.

Why Every Small Business Should Use an RSS Feed

1. Boost Visibility and Convenience
An rss feed helps your audience discover and consume your content more easily. Subscribers can receive updates instantly without searching for them. This constant visibility builds stronger customer relationships and signals to search engines that your site is active and relevant.

2. Strengthen SEO and Broaden Your Reach
Because an rss feed distributes your content across multiple platforms, it can increase backlinks and improve search engine rankings. When your content is syndicated in this way, it reinforces your authority in your industry and keeps your keywords—like “rss feed”—circulating in more places online.

3. Automate Distribution Without the Noise
An rss feed integrates with social media tools, content aggregators, and other platforms, eliminating the need to manually post updates in multiple locations. This automation saves time while ensuring your message reaches your audience without adding unwanted spam to their inbox.

Practical Benefits of an RSS Feed

Immediate updates so your audience always sees your newest content right away
Privacy protection because subscribers do not have to share personal details like email addresses
Cleaner reading experience since rss feeds focus on the content itself without unnecessary ads or clutter

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

What People Say About RSS Feeds

“ RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is a standard that allows users to receive notifications of new content on a website without having to constantly visit the website itself. The feed lists articles in reverse chronological order.”

“Any time you wanted one web based service to publish updates that could be consumed by multiple other web based services, RSS was a convenient way to do that.” *

These real-world perspectives highlight the simplicity and lasting value of an rss feed for both content creators and audiences.

A Small Business Example

Imagine a neighborhood bakery that posts its daily specials online. With an rss feed, customers who subscribe can instantly see today’s treat on their devices without having to search for it. This small change can turn occasional visitors into loyal regulars.

Final Thoughts: An RSS Feed Is Essential for Small Business Websites

Easy to set up since most content management systems already support rss feeds
Gives customers control over how they follow your updates
Creates a competitive advantage by making your brand easier to follow than your competitors

How Salt Creative Can Help You Succeed

At Salt Creative, we build websites that are not just visually appealing but strategically equipped to help small businesses grow. Our team integrates features like a fully optimized rss feed so your audience can stay connected to your business with minimal effort on your part. We also provide SEO strategies that help your content rank higher and reach more people.

What our clients say

Kevin K
“They were very patient through the design process and super responsive whenever any issues have arisen.”

David B
“You have really helped our practice grow… responsive and great to collaborate with on our website, social media platforms, and office advertising.”

Lisa S
“They are responsive and catered to our unique business needs. I would recommend them… you will not regret it.”

If you want a website that is built to attract, engage, and retain your customers, Salt Creative is ready to help. Let us create a site and an rss feed strategy that keeps your audience informed and coming back for more.

GPT-5 and the Future of Superintelligence: What It Means for Innovation, Work, and Society

Sun, 10 Aug 2025 19:16:15 GMT

Artificial intelligence has evolved at a pace that even industry leaders describe as unprecedented. Just a few years ago, AI performing at or above expert human levels in multiple domains sounded like science fiction. Today, with the release of GPT-5 , that future is here—and it’s already reshaping how we work, create, and discover.

At Salt Creative , we help businesses stay ahead of these shifts by understanding the opportunities and challenges that come with rapid technological change. GPT-5 isn’t just a smarter chatbot—it’s a powerful leap toward a future where AI can solve complex problems, assist with scientific breakthroughs, and transform industries.

What Makes GPT-5 Different?

GPT-4 was already capable of outperforming most humans on academic and professional exams, from the LSAT to medical licensing. GPT-5 takes things further, excelling in areas where AI traditionally struggled—like real-time problem solving, complex software creation, and high-level technical reasoning.

One standout capability: the ability to generate functional, advanced software in seconds. Tasks that once took expert programmers days or weeks can now be prototyped instantly, enabling innovators to test, refine, and launch ideas at unprecedented speed.

AI as a Creative Partner

Beyond efficiency, GPT-5 changes the creative process itself. Instead of replacing human thinking, it can extend it—allowing individuals to explore more ideas, iterate faster, and tackle problems once thought beyond reach. In the same way the calculator freed mathematicians to focus on more complex problems, GPT-5 enables creators to focus on high-level strategy and innovation.

From Tasks to Discoveries

Industry leaders expect that within just a few years, AI will contribute to significant scientific breakthroughs. While GPT-5 can’t build particle accelerators or conduct lab work, it can analyze data , generate hypotheses, and design experiments—acting as a force multiplier for human researchers. The potential spans everything from drug discovery to climate solutions.

Navigating Truth in the AI Era

As AI-generated content becomes indistinguishable from reality, questions about truth and trust take center stage. Experts predict society will adapt, much as it did when photography and video editing blurred the line between fact and fiction. The challenge for creators, brands, and educators will be to maintain credibility and transparency in this evolving media environment.

The Future of Work

AI’s impact on jobs is complex. Certain roles will disappear, others will transform, and entirely new fields will emerge. For young entrepreneurs, the barriers to building billion-dollar companies have never been lower—GPT-5 can serve as a design team, research assistant, and technical department all in one. For established professionals, adaptability will be key.

Building Responsibly

With great capability comes great responsibility. Decisions about how AI is trained, deployed, and aligned with human values will shape its impact. Leading AI companies are weighing short-term growth against long-term trust, aiming to keep tools like GPT-5 aligned with user goals rather than purely commercial incentives.

How to Prepare for What’s Next

The most practical advice for individuals and businesses? Use the tools. Experiment. Learn how AI can integrate into your workflows. Just as the transistor quietly became the foundation of modern technology, AI will become embedded in nearly everything we use—and the people who thrive will be those fluent in its possibilities. For small business owners specifically, that fluency starts with having the right foundation in place — a small business marketing system built to absorb and leverage these tools as they evolve, not scramble to catch up after the fact.

At Salt Creative, we’re focused on helping brands not only adapt to this wave of change but harness it for growth. GPT-5 is a glimpse into the next era of human-AI collaboration—one where innovation moves faster, possibilities expand, and the line between idea and execution all but disappears.

5 Recession-Proofing Strategies for Small Business Owners

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 25 Jul 2025 23:24:51 GMT

Are you looking for ways to recession-proof your small business? Small-business owners that have dealt with shutdowns, a crazy labor market, supply chain disruptions and multiple other challenges over the past few years.

Now, small businesses are facing historic levels of inflation. Some experts are say a recession is likely.
In a recent survey conducted by the National Federation of Independent Business, more than two-thirds of small businesses report a rise in selling prices. Small business owners increasingly project declines in sales for 2022 - 2023; likely to reach the lowest level of business sales projections recorded in NFIB’s 48-year-old survey (NFIB, 2022). NFIB Chief Economist Bill Dunkelberg states, “Small business owners remain very pessimistic about the second half of the year as supply chain disruptions, inflation, and the labor shortage are not easing.” With continued recession on the horizon, small business owners are going to need to find a way to navigate this new landscape.

In the following article, we have outlined the top recession-proofing strategies to start implementing now in order to stay ahead of potential business threats stemming from a sluggish economy.

Recession-Proofing Strategies for Small Business Owners Outlined

#1 Maximize Your Client List:

Savvy and strategic small-business owners should take proactive steps toward sidestepping the impacts of a potential recession by leaning heavily on customer reactivation campaigns. Existing customers are vital to successfully navigating the impacts of a potential economic downturn. Keys to maximizing your current client list include re-connection with clients that you may have lost touch with and leveraging marketing possible marketing campaigns.

This step begins with setting up a proactive client marketing process if you do not have one in place. A successfully client marketing process will support your current marketing needs, consider long-term goals, and identify activities to engage in to support accomplishing the goals. In addition, tracking the results from each activity will ensure you follow through on steps along with review the success of each process along the way.

Next, start making contact with former clients through email, calls, or setting up appointments. Reviewing your marketing strategies are also important to uncover what solutions have worked and what options you may not have tried that potentially benefit your business. To begin re-connecting with current clients, consider the following:

Set up lunch or coffee appointments to reestablish connection and talk over services and options for up-selling
Ask clients what kind of challenges ethyl are experiencing in their business to identify possible solutions you can offer
Update and maintain your current client list
Take advantage of all in-house marketing lists
Utilize email marketing campaigns - provide clients useful tools and information
Reach out to former customers to inform of new products or services

#2 - Form & Maximize Strategic Partnerships

Small-business owners also need to create and maximize existing partnerships to capitalize on joint venture opportunities. Reach out to fellow entrepreneurs and small-business owners to pool marketing resources and ideas. Joint ventures are powerful ways to growing and expanding your business. Partnerships can become the most powerful way to navigate a troubled economy.

Small-business owners should identify strategic partnerships now, while also working to collaborate and establish a broader small business community moving forward. Optimizing mutually beneficial relationships can be the best way to help each other weather tough times. This is a great time to review possible partnerships and reinforce these relationships with genuine investment.

#3 - Strategize Your Services

Simplifying and streamlining your services is a great way to cut costs. When things get leaner, it’s time to tighten the belt. Streamlining your costs is a great way to start. Start by asking questions:

Where may you be overspending, such as monthly service subscriptions which offer reduced pricing by paying annually?
What services can be stopped or reduced?
Can you eliminate any costs in production?

By cutting back on overhead costs you reduce spending without cutting corners on quality, freeing up funds to invest in other needed areas such as revamping your marketing strategy. The key point is to continue delivering an incredible value to customers, not cutting quality, but also creating room in key areas in order to invest in areas to support revenue increase.

#4 - Rethink Dollars

Take time to weigh your spending. Reduce spending in areas that have not produced and increase spend in what is working. Making every dollar count is the best way to navigate uncertainty. In addition, take time to scrutinize all areas of spending and concentrate on increasing spend where it counts. Increasing spend in areas that consistently produce results is a great way to maximize your investments. Additionally, reduce spend where you have not seen consistent if any results. An example would involve comparing results of pay-per-click (PPC) ads. A Facebook ad that under-produces compared to a Google ad is a great example. If your Google ad produces consistency, try increasing the spend, reducing or eliminating the Facebook ad to then weigh the results. If results increase, the trend dictates investing the dollars. Continue to invest or increase spend, to then watch, learn and evaluate your decisions based upon the data and tracking of each campaign. Campaigns that consistently produce should be the focus. Ad campaigns that do not produce should be eliminated.

Additionally, conduct macro-level analysis monthly. Business owners often scrutinize ad campaign performance every month, often not looking over the budget from the macro level with the same level of scrutiny. Setting tighter budgets and tougher competition means digging deeper into data tracking to identify any correlations and insights that may be important to the campaign. In a potential recession environment, understanding not just the outcomes, but the causes for campaign results is vital. This way each dollar may be maximized and leveraged for overall results.

#5 - Ask for Client Testimonials & Referrals

Another great recession proofing strategy is asking current clients for testimonials and referrals. There is no better way to convey confidence to potential clients to convert sales, than testimonies from happy clients. Be proactive in getting a nice list of testimonials. Ask clients to leave testimonials on your website, social media, or yelp. Also ask each client to write out a brief highlight of their experience to share with your clients. Print these highlights out in a client portfolio, or prepare a presentation to share online and through email in your next newsletter campaign. Stories from happy clients are one of the best, free resources to leverage consistently.

Ask clients for referrals by connecting by email, phone or setting up a meeting and sharing with them updates on your services. You can plan to share a referral fee, gift, or incentive to clients that share your services to friends and family that result in a sale. Keep them aware and connected to the benefits by mentioning referral incentives in your next newsletter campaign, on the company website, and social media posts.

5 Of The Best Payment Processors For Small Businesses In 2025

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Thu, 12 Jun 2025 17:47:01 GMT

Your Guide to Top Payment Processors: Popularity, Pricing, and Simplicity

5 of the best payment processors for small businesses in 2025, ranked by popularity, pricing, and ease of use. These platforms offer a balance of affordability, scalability, and user friendliness:

Many small businesses pair their payment processor with a CRM to close the loop on customer data — our CRM statistics page shows why CRM adoption is accelerating across every industry.

Square

Extremely popular, especially among small businesses, mobile businesses, and those needing a simple POS system.

Price: In-person: 2.6% + $0.10 per transaction (for swiped cards)
Online: 2.9% + $0.30 per transaction
Keyed-in: 3.5% + $0.15 per transaction
Generally no monthly fees for basic plans, offering a free mobile card reader and POS app.

Ease of Use: Very high. Square is known for its user friendly interface, quick setup, and intuitive software, making it ideal for beginners. It offers integrated systems for invoicing, payroll, and inventory.

Stripe

Very popular, particularly for online businesses and developers due to its flexibility and robust APIs.

Price: Online: 2.9% + $0.30 per transaction
In-person: 2.7% + $0.05 per transaction
No setup fees or monthly fees.

Ease of Use: High for those with some technical knowledge or who want to customize their payment experience. While easy to get started with basic functions, its full potential is unlocked by developers. Excellent for integrating with e-commerce platforms.

PayPal

Widely recognized and a favorite for online payments due to its widespread use by consumers.

Price: Online: 2.89% + $0.49 per transaction (for standard online payments)
In-person: 2.29% + $0.09 per transaction
No monthly minimums for standard accounts, but offers premium plans with more features.

Ease of Use: High. PayPal is known for its intuitive design and easy integration into most e-commerce platforms. It's user-friendly even for new business owners.

Payment Processing Statistics

Massive Market Growth: The global digital payment market was valued at approximately $122.32 billion in 2024 and is projected to reach an astounding $712.14 billion by 2033, demonstrating a robust Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) of 21.80% during the forecast period.
Digital wallets, like PayPal, Apple Pay, and Google Pay, are increasingly becoming the preferred method for online shopping. In 2024, they accounted for 50% of global e-commerce transactions, indicating their significant importance in the online retail landscape.
Mobile payments are a major driver of digital payment adoption. By 2024, over 2 billion people worldwide are using digital wallets, a 10% increase from the previous year. Furthermore, mobile payment transactions accounted for 35% of all digital payment transactions globally in 2024, signaling a strong consumer preference for mobile platforms.
The B2B payments market is experiencing a massive digital transformation. The global B2B payments market size was valued at an estimated $86.51 trillion in 2024 and is projected to exceed $373.13 trillion by 2037, growing at an impressive CAGR of over 11.9%.
With the increasing volume of digital transactions, fraud remains a significant concern. In 2023, global losses due to digital payment fraud amounted to $32 billion, emphasizing the critical need for businesses and payment processors to invest in advanced security measures and fraud detection technologies.

Shopify Payments

Popular among Shopify merchants and online stores.

Price: Online: 2.9% + 30¢ (basic plan), with lower rates at higher plans
No extra transaction fees when using Shopify Payments

Ease of Use: Built into Shopify; seamless for store owners, excellent all-in-one solution for e-commerce.

QuickBooks Payments (Intuit)

Popular with businesses already using QuickBooks.

Price: Invoicing or ACH: 1% (capped at $10)
Credit cards: 2.9% + 25¢ (online), 2.4% + 25¢ (swipe)

Ease of Use: Fully integrated with QuickBooks accounting, Ideal for service providers, consultants, and businesses needing streamlined bookkeeping.

WordPress in 2025: Why It's a Bigger Liability Than Ever

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 06 Jun 2025 18:41:52 GMT

WordPress Vulnerabilities Outweigh Its Ease of Use

One well documented liability of WordPress is its reliance on third party plugins. Plugins add valuable functionality, but they can also introduce many security vulnerabilities if not well maintained and updated.

WordPress plugins are one of its greatest strengths as well as its greatest weakness. Plugins are responsible for 97% of all security vulnerabilities. This is a significant risk for a small business owner who not only has the responsibility to deploy a WordPress website but also keep it up to date and functional without the hassle of knowing if every plugin they are using is current.

WordPress Plugins Need Constant Maintenance

WordPress as a technology is old and relies on new themes and plugins to remain relevant, but these themes and plugins all need frequent updating to avoid becoming susceptible to security vulnerabilities.

If a small business owner is not on top of all these updates, there can be issues or even worse their small business website can be hacked and "taken over." A 2024 security survey by MelaPress revealed that a concerning number of WordPress site administrators do not enable automatic updates, increasing their risk of a security breach. Also, if you are relying on another firm to keep your WordPress website updated, it can cost anywhere from $50 to $450 per month depending on the agency and the amount of updating required.

WordPress Is Susceptible to Common Hacking Techniques

WordPress is the Windows of the web design world, and with so many installations, it provides a plentiful target for hackers who are looking to exploit all sorts of vulnerabilities.

WordPress Vulnerability Statistics

Plugins are responsible for 97% of all new WordPress security vulnerabilities
Nearly 13,000 WordPress websites are hacked every day
In 2022, it was estimated that 1,361 plugins and 64 themes had at least one known vulnerability
Approximately 42% of WordPress sites have at least one vulnerable component installed
In 2023, one security firm reported 827 plugins and themes as abandoned to the WordPress team

WordPress Performance Issues

WordPress began way back in 2003 and is very outdated. It relies on procedural programming that is less developer friendly and has a host of security vulnerabilities. The utter reliance on themes and plugins can also lead to what is called "code bloat," which adds to the complexity of the installation for developers. WordPress as a platform is also very hard to update and maintain by small business owners and non developers who rely on computer programming to keep their websites running.

Every plugin that a user installs adds complexity and negatively affects the website’s load times, which can significantly reduce SEO rankings on Google due to a poor user experience.

WordPress Hidden Costs

While WordPress is an open source project and its software is given away for free, building and maintaining a professional and secure WordPress website is often not. Costs can add up quickly, turning a seemingly free website into a significant investment in both time and money.

Potential expenses include:

Website Hosting: Finding a quality WordPress hosting company with the infrastructure to support the demands of today’s savvy business environment can be expensive.
Premium Themes and Plugins: Some require expensive monthly subscriptions to make WordPress a viable option in 2025.
Technical Expertise: WordPress requires administrators to be proficient in computer programming and is more expensive to maintain than newer websites built with modern technologies.
Ongoing Maintenance: WordPress requires constant maintenance in order to remain secure.

These costs and requirements make using WordPress for your small business website less attractive than it was in the early 2000s when the technology was first developed.

Unlock Your Future: 5 Profitable Small Town Business Ideas You Can Start Today!

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Wed, 28 May 2025 15:21:41 GMT

In today’s fast changing business landscape, people living in small towns have a unique opportunity to launch small businesses with lower startup costs and strong community support. Whether it is meeting everyday needs like home maintenance or tapping into growing trends such as pet care and digital freelancing, the potential for success continues to grow. This article explores five low risk small town business ideas. Whether you are striving for financial independence or looking to make a local impact, these ventures offer accessible and sustainable paths to build your future while strengthening your community.

Why Freelance Digital Services Thrive in Small Towns

Freelance digital services, including copy writing, graphic design, and social media management, provide a lucrative small town business opportunity, leveraging digital connectivity to serve local and global clients. In 2025, the global freelance market is valued at $1.36 trillion, with a projected compound annual growth rate of 15.3% through 2030, driven by demand for flexible, specialized services. In the U.S., 76 million freelancers contributed $1.27 trillion to the economy in 2024, with 64% of small businesses outsourcing tasks like content creation and social media management. If you need advice with starting your digital services business feel free to email us at hello(at)sltcreative.com!

Notably, 59% of freelancers operate from non-urban areas, benefiting from low overhead costs, often under $5,000 to start. With 70% of businesses prioritizing digital marketing, small town freelancers can meet local needs while tapping into broader markets, fostering economic growth and community resilience.

Pet Care Services

Pet sitting and dog walking services present a viable small town business opportunity, capitalizing on the growing demand for pet care. In 2025, the global pet sitting market is projected to reach $2.94 billion, with a compound annual growth rate of 11.8% through 2030, driven by rising pet ownership and the trend of treating pets as family members. In the U.S., the dog walking industry generated $1.7 billion in 2024, with 30,035 businesses operating, reflecting a 5.9% CAGR from 2019 to 2024.

Approximately 94 million U.S. households own pets, and 55% of dog owners adjust travel plans to accommodate their pets, boosting demand for local pet care services. With low startup costs, often under $2,000, and 79% of pet care spending coming from omnichannel shoppers, small town entrepreneurs can thrive by offering personalized services, such as eco friendly products or subscription based care, fostering community trust and economic growth.

Cleaning Services

The cleaning services industry, spanning residential and commercial sectors, presents a compelling opportunity for small town entrepreneurs seeking sustainable business ideas. In 2023, the global commercial cleaning market reached $343.34 billion, with a projected compound annual growth rate of 6.05% through 2028, driven by heightened demand for hygiene post-COVID-19. In the U.S., residential cleaning services generated $18.8 billion in 2024, with a steady 3.2% Compounded Annual Growth Rate over the past five years, fueled by busy households seeking convenience. Notably, 10% of U.S. households hired professional cleaners in 2021.

Department of Commerce estimates 80% of dual income households will use such services in the coming years. Small towns benefit from lower startup costs for cleaning businesses, and with 46% of consumers favoring eco-friendly products, entrepreneurs can differentiate by offering sustainable solutions. This industry’s growth and adaptability make it an ideal venture for small town economies, fostering local employment and community resilience.

Handyman Opportunities in Small Towns

Handyman services offer a promising small town business opportunity, addressing the growing need for home and commercial property maintenance. In 2024, the global handyman service market was valued at $448.89 million, with a projected compound annual growth rate of 16.5%, reaching $1,579.14 million by 2033, driven by demand for convenient repair solutions. In the U.S., the industry generated $273.6 billion in 2025, with 526,000 businesses operating, reflecting a 0.92% increase from 2023.

Approximately 80% of American households require handyman services annually, and 70% of consumers prefer eco-friendly options, creating a niche for sustainable practices in small towns. With low startup costs and a fragmented market where the top 50 companies hold less than 10% share, handyman services are ideal for local entrepreneurs, supporting community needs and economic growth.

Landscaping and Lawn Care

Landscaping and lawn care services offer a strong small town business opportunity, meeting the demand for property maintenance and aesthetic enhancement. In 2025, the global landscaping services market is valued at $374.1 billion, with a projected compound annual growth rate of 5.7% through 2032, driven by increased homeowner investment in outdoor spaces. In the U.S., the lawn care industry generated $115.6 billion in 2024, supporting over 1.2 million jobs across 636,000 businesses.

Notably, 85% of U.S. homeowners prioritize lawn maintenance, and 40% hire professional services annually, according to industry surveys. Small towns benefit from low entry costs, often below $10,000, and growing consumer preference for sustainable practices, with 65% seeking eco-friendly landscaping solutions. This industry’s accessibility and consistent demand make it ideal for local entrepreneurs, boosting small town economies and community appeal.

In Conclusion

Starting a business in a small town doesn’t mean thinking small, it means seizing opportunities where community trust, low overhead, and growing demand converge. The five business ideas outlined, cleaning services, handyman services, pet care, landscaping, and freelance services, offer diverse, profitable avenues with proven market growth and minimal barriers to entry. By leveraging local needs and broader trends like sustainability and digital connectivity, you can build a thriving venture that not only secures your financial future but also enriches your small town’s economy and resilience. Take the first step today and turn your entrepreneurial vision into reality. Check out our other blog articles for ideas on starting your next venture!

Future Proof Your Site: Essential Web Design Statistics for 2025

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 16 May 2025 17:55:34 GMT

Unique Web Design Statistics for 2025:

As we navigate 2025, the landscape of web design continues to be shaped by evolving user expectations, technological advancements, and the ever increasing importance of a seamless digital experience. Here are our favorite web design statistics and trends relevant for 2025.

AI-Driven Content Creation is Mainstream in Design Workflows:

Over half of web designers (58%) are now utilizing AI to generate images and other types of media for their website projects. This indicates a significant integration of AI tools into the creative process.

Gen Z's Demand for Predictive Personalization:

A notable 70% of Gen Z users express a desire for websites to intuitively understand and anticipate their needs. This highlights a strong preference for highly personalized and predictive web experiences among the next wave of primary internet users.

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

Industry Standards and Trends:

73.1% of visitors leave due to non responsive designs, highlighting the necessity of mobile optimization
59.99% of the total global web traffic comes from mobile phones
50% of smartphone users prefer mobile sites over apps for shopping, important for e-commerce
52% are less likely to interact with businesses due to bad mobile experiences, reinforcing mobile UX importance
1.71 billion websites are responsive (90% of all), indicating widespread adoption
The e-commerce market is projected to grow from $3.3 trillion to $5.4 trillion by 2026, driving demand for quality web design
WordPress holds a 43.2% market share of 200 million active websites (2022 data), relevant for CMS choices
The average web designer salary is $91,902 per year, providing context for the profession's value
94% of first impressions are design related, emphasizing the role of aesthetics in user perception
Users form opinions about websites in just 0.05 seconds, stressing the need for instant appeal

Mobile Optimization Directly Impacts Brand Perception:

Nearly half (48%) of customers perceive a business as not caring about them if its website or app isn't mobile-optimized. This statistic underscores that mobile friendliness is no longer just a technical requirement but a crucial factor in how users view a brand's commitment to customer experience.

High Cost of Complicated E-commerce Checkouts:

A significant 22% of e-commerce shoppers will abandon their purchase specifically due to a checkout process that they find too long or complicated. This pinpoints a critical area for conversion rate optimization in online retail.

Widespread Absence of Homepage CTAs in Small Businesses:

A striking 70% of small business websites do not feature a Call to Action (CTA) on their homepage. This common oversight represents a substantial missed opportunity for guiding visitors and generating leads.

Mobile Continues its Dominance in Web Traffic for 2025:

It is anticipated that in 2025, mobile devices will be responsible for over 75% of all global internet traffic, reinforcing the critical need for mobile first design strategies.

The Power of Personalized Calls to Action:

Websites employing personalized CTAs see a 202% better performance compared to standard, generic CTAs. This demonstrates the significant impact of tailoring content to individual user segments.

Growing Emphasis on Sustainable Web Design:

By 2025, there's an expected surge in focus on design sustainability. Increasingly carbon-conscious users are driving demand for websites that are lightweight, energy efficient, and hosted on green servers.

The Voice Search Optimization Gap:

While 27% of the global online population now uses voice search, a large number of websites are still not optimized for voice queries. This gap signifies an area for growth and improved accessibility in 2025.

Video Content Significantly Boosts User Engagement:

Incorporating video content can lead to an 88% increase in the average time users spend on a website, highlighting video's effectiveness in capturing and retaining audience attention.

AI SEO: Google's AI Overviews, How Salt Creative Was Chosen Over AppleInsider and MacRumors

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sun, 04 May 2025 19:41:30 GMT

How Artificial Intelligence Is Reshaping Search Rankings, Content Strategy, and the Future of Organic Traffic

With the emergence of Google's AI Overviews (powered by Gemini ), the competitive landscape for content visibility has evolved. Unlike traditional organic listings, AI Overviews prioritize synthesized, actionable content sourced from multiple authoritative pages. Understanding why Salt Creative's article, " How to Save Battery Life on iOS 18: A Comprehensive Guide ", appears in the AI Overview section offers insights into content strategy under this new paradigm.

Relevance and Semantic Matching

Salt Creative's page demonstrates exact match keyword alignment in both the title and URL with the query "How to Save Battery Life on iOS 18." According to Google's documentation and case studies by SEO platforms like Moz and Search Engine Journal, keyword precision increases inclusion probability by up to 68%, especially for how to and instructional queries.

Content Depth and Structure

Google's AI Overview system heavily weights structured, digestible content. Studies by Backlinko (2024) show that list based, bullet driven content has a 43% higher chance of being extracted by AI systems due to parsing efficiency. Salt Creative's guide likely includes subheadings, specific feature references (e.g., Low Power Mode, Location Services), and direct instructions, which boosts scannability for AI models.

Quality Signals and (EEAT) Compliance

Although Salt Creative is not a traditional tech authority, Google's algorithms balance EEAT ( Experience, Expertise, Authoritativeness, Trustworthiness ) dynamically. Content that demonstrates contextual usefulness can be elevated. According to SEMrush's 2024 AI content analysis, 34% of AI Overview sources come from non niche sites when the content is timely, factually accurate, and offers actionable steps.

Competitive Pool and (RSFU) Compliance

Assuming there are ~200 reasonably optimized articles published on "iOS 18 battery saving tips," and Google's Gemini Overview draws on 5-8 sources for a synthesis, the statistical likelihood of inclusion for any given article is between 2.5% and 4%. However, articles meeting all core criteria (Relevance, Structure, Freshness, Usefulness or (RSFU) see that likelihood rise to 18-25%, based on data from AI generated snippet tracking by SEOClarity (2024).

Conclusion

Salt Creative's inclusion in the Gemini AI Overview is likely the result of strong keyword targeting, clear formatting, and timely publication. While AI Overviews are not rank positions per se, being cited provides visibility that can boost CTR by 40%, according to a 2024 Ahrefs study. Investing in AI ready content architecture is now a key strategy for organic visibility. Salt Creative is a leading GEO Company specializing in Generative Engine Optimization (GEO) solutions for businesses of all sizes.

E-commerce Shipping Made Simple: Save Time and Money

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sat, 03 May 2025 23:17:50 GMT

What is e-commerce shipping?

E-commerce shipping shouldn’t sink your business, especially when you are just starting. Understanding the complexities of eCommerce shipping can seem daunting. Still, if you have a great product about to hit the market, you need a comprehensive analysis and plan that looks at every aspect of your business.

Put yourself in your customer's shoes and think of the last time you put items in your shopping cart but did not complete the order. There could be several reasons you abandoned your order, but a recent study showed that the most common cause for shopping cart abandonment is high shipping and handling fees.

Fortunately, this doesn’t have to be the case for you, especially if you can build a clear, cost-effective shipping strategy that keeps your customers happy—and your margins healthy.

We know how difficult it is to navigate the choppy shipping waters, so we’ve created this beginner’s guide to eCommerce shipping. Inside, we will cover all the basics from the definition of eCommerce shipping to tips on how to find the right shipping strategy for your business.

Why is e-commerce shipping important?

Let’s start from the very beginning. E-commerce shipping covers all the services required to move products bought online from a retailer to the customer at their delivery location.

We can divide the shipping process into three stages:

Receive the order online and ensure that there is enough stock to fulfill the order.
Process the order, including verifying the accuracy of the order information.
Fulfill the order, which means generation of the picking list, packing, and shipping.

Amazon was one of the first companies to popularize this type of shipping.

Why is it important?

Shipping is more than logistics; it’s part of your brand. Imagine carefully packing your products, but because of package mishandling, they arrive late, damaged, or with extra fees. Of course, your customer will blame you and give you a bad rating. To avoid this scenario, you need to carefully pick a shipping service.

Remember, you are entrusting your shipping partner with maintaining the quality of service your brand offers. So it is quite obvious that you need to be in business with a reliable, fast, and affordable shipping company.

It can seem quite impossible to guarantee that your product arrives to the client in one piece. After all the hard work you’ve done, a simple shipping accident will leave a very sour taste in your customer’s mouth. That is why it is essential for you to have a plan and shipping strategy in place to help minimize the prospects of this happening. We discuss these factors below.

Reclaim Your Time: Faster Shipping Workflows

Steps to Planning your E-commerce Shipping Procedures
The steps below will help you plan and fulfill your orders.

Step 1: Create your shipping objectives

Before you get into the details, work backwards by figuring out the results that you want your shipping procedure to produce. Some objectives that you could set include:

Increasing your conversion rate

If you’re not familiar with the website conversion rates , allow us to break it down for you. Basically, in e-commerce the website visitors that you get on a daily or monthly basis can be likened to the number of people that walk into a shop.

Some are just window shopping, others will end up buying something. With online businesses , there are several ways to turn these site visitors into actual paying customers. Every action you take off and online is supposed to be geared toward improving the conversion rate, including your shipping. One great way of boosting this rate is to offer free shipping to your customers.

Reducing your shipping costs

E-commerce shipping can be expensive if you don't minimize your shipping costs. To do this, you will need to assess every aspect of the process and look at the different factors that will affect the cost. There are several things that you can do to reduce your shipping expenses and we cover them a bit later on in the article.

Expanding your market

It's all about the customer and the more you have, the more successful your business will be. Your shipping targets could focus on widening your market and target audience. Certain things like offering same-day local delivery can give you a competitive advantage over other companies in your industry.

Step 2: Come up with a shipping strategy to meet your objectives

Your shipping strategy should support your business objectives while keeping things simple and scalable. That said, there are are certain foundational basics that every e-commerce business has to get right.

The following factors play a major role in implementing a workable and successful shipping procedure.

Determine your shipping fees and methods

There are several options when it comes to how much you are going to charge for shipping. Are your clients going to pay the full price for shipping? Will you offer discounts, a flat-rate or will you absorb all the shipping costs? What method will you use to deliver your product to your local and international customers?

Know your product weight

This is a very important aspect of shipping because of the way the system is set up. To make the process easier for you, ensure that you measure and keep an accurate track of how much each product you sell weighs. Having this information available is extremely handy because it will help you set your prices accordingly.

Choose and source your packaging

Think of your packaging as your online curb appeal. Depending on which market you operate in, packaging can make or break your business. Some can get away with the standard options available from carriers such as UPS, USPS or DHL, others not so much. If you’re going to be selling fragile or bulky products, you’ll need to consider those factors.

All these key decisions must be made before you begin your shipping process. Remember, though, that nothing is set in stone and you can always come back and tweak things as your business grows. Let’s analyze these factors in detail.

Set your shipping rates and methods

Knowing the total cost of your product is essential in planning how much to charge your customers. This also directly affects whether you’ll be in the black at the end of the financial year.

There are several shipping methods you can employ to suit your business needs and objectives.

Offer free shipping

Who doesn’t love free shipping? You can capitalize on this euphoria-inducing shipping method quite easily. As long as it makes business sense to do so. It might be free to the customer, but the cost has to be covered in some way. You have the following options:

1. Incorporate the total shipping costs in your product price. This way you pass on the costs to the client without them knowing.
2. You pay all the shipping costs out of your profit margins.
3. Incorporate part of the shipping costs in your product price so that you share the fees with your customers.
4. Have discount codes for certain customer segments.
5. Offer free shipping with certain conditions such as
a. Free shipping on a minimum order amount, will cover part of the shipping costs while increasing your average order value.
b. Free shipping on certain products only will boost sales.
c. Free shipping for certain locations can increase sales in a new market.
d. Free shipping for a limited time can effectively increase sales and minimize pickup costs within that period.
e. Free shipping for loyal or frequent customers will enhance customer engagement.

Consider charging real-time carrier rates

A very popular method is to charge the fees that you are actually paying at your shipping carriers like DHL or USPS. This is an effective strategy to use because you can easily explain to your customer your shipping costs. It also makes you look good because it reflects a level of honesty.

The amount you charge with real-time carrier rates depends on the type of product you are selling and the distance from the warehouse to the delivery address. You should remember that this type of pricing will not cover certain fees like packaging and fulfillment so you might need to factor that in.

Charge flat rate shipping

This method is perfect if your products weigh the same and are roughly the same size. Be mindful of the balancing act that you have to do. Try to avoid under or overcharging your customers. For example, flat rate shipping won’t work if you have small orders that are easy to overcharge or if you have a wide range of different products.

Offer local delivery

Local delivery is a great way to maximize your reach in your local environment. It is a simple and reliable way to reach people within your radius. This will help reduce your shipping costs for local orders.

Maximize Profits by Minimizing Shipping Costs

Calculating shipping costs
One of the hardest parts of figuring out your shipping strategy is to calculate your total shipping costs. Without the proper research, you could end up making a loss through your shipping procedure.

Consider every additional charge because they do add up. Take time to carefully map up all the associated costs that are involved in getting your product to your customer.

You need to know how much the total cost of the order will be for your customers. Every shipping couriers calculate their shipping costs using the following factors:

Size of the package.
Weight of the package.
Origin address of the package.
The destination address of the package.
Other additional costs, such as insurance and tracking.

It’s hard to have a one-size-fits-all method because every business is different. Here are some shipping calculators from the biggest shipping couriers in the world so you can compare the pricing and see your options.

Think about your profit margins

You always need to keep a close eye on your profit margins. Shipping can take a huge chunk off your profit margins if you’re not careful. It is quite a significant expense in the eCommerce business.

If your shipping strategy leaves you struggling to make ends meet at the end of the month, then it’s time to reevaluate your shipping processes. Ensure that you include your profit margin when you calculate your total shipping costs.
New pre-negotiated shipping rates

The splendid news for you is that all businesses in North America can access pre-negotiated rates with all the major shipping carriers. Without these rates you would have to have to create separate accounts with each of the top carriers- USPS, UPS, DHL Express, and Canada Post and try to negotiate your own discounted rates.

With this method, you would have to lean on your order and shipping volume to lower your rates. These pre-negotiated rates got rid of all that and now you can easily account for how much your shipping will cost.

Smart Packaging Choices: Reducing Costs and Ensuring Safe Delivery

Packaging options

The next thing to consider before you ship your products is to ensure that your product is packaged safely and arrives in excellent condition. There are a few options that you have at your disposal when it comes to packaging.

You can pack your products in boxes, envelopes, or other packaging materials to safely transport your products. You can get these materials from large suppliers like ValueMailers, Fast-Pack, and eSupplyStore. The common carriers also offer free packaging in different types and sizes.

Keep it light and small

As we have mentioned before, shipping carriers calculate the cost by factoring in the size and weight of your product. So ensure that you keep your packaging light and small, this will help you save on your costs and help you retain your profit margin.

Depending on what you are selling, consider the options that are available to you. There are a variety of package sizes and materials that you can get to pack your products.

Most people would consider the packaging for the product above to be excessive. This is exactly what you’re trying to avoid as it inflates shipping costs dramatically.
Packaging and marketing

Online shopping is on the rise and so is the need to package and market your brand properly. Nowadays, delivering the package safely is not enough. Many companies are going all out when they deliver their products and it is something that you should consider as well.

As the world of online shopping develops, customer expectations are also becoming more sophisticated. Several years ago packaging was a fairly simple process with no bells and whistles. More and more packaging is becoming a presentation and an experience for the customer.

Some of the most successful brands today invest a lot in packaging and marketing. There are thousands of videos online showing satisfied customers unboxing their packages from big and small companies.

Packaging can be a great marketing tool. Branded packaging is unique but it can be pricier than standard packaging. Branded packaging has many benefits however, it’s a way to deliver your brand message to your customer base.

Always take into consideration how to give your customer a better experience through your packaging. Think of it as an extension of your brand. It will promote your brand and help you get rid of deadstock, which is one of the major inventory issues that companies face.

If you are just starting out, then standard packaging may be the best option for you because it's cheaper and there is no effort on your part. But that doesn’t mean that you should totally settle for bland packaging. There are several things you can do to make your delivery special. You can incorporate certain things like thank-you cards, free samples, a loyalty or discount program for the next purchase. Never underestimate the power of surprises or freebies.
Insurance and tracking
Your package arriving in one piece is never guaranteed, regardless of how careful the carrier might be. Accidents happen.

Depending on what product you are selling and its value, shipping insurance, and tracking can be a great backup plan. Almost all carriers offer insurance and tracking as an additional expense. This is a great option to have if your package gets damaged and lost along the way.

Some carriers even offer the option of complimentary coverage up to $200. If you ship fragile or valuable products, this option is non-negotiable. Remember to check if your shipping service offers insurance and tracking in their shipping costs.
Customs declaration and forms
Shipping outside of your country has certain requirements that you need to meet. You’ll need to ensure that your package can pass through customs without issues. Delays at the customs office can negatively impact your brand. Make sure that your customers do not get any nasty surprises during the customs process.

Do your research to see what your local postal service requires, find out which forms you’ll need to accompany your package. Ensure that the information you put is accurate to prevent your package from being held up at the customs office.

Tariffs, taxes and duties

Pay attention to the tariffs, taxes, and duties because they are different for each country and for each product. You need to factor in these charges besides the other shipping costs. Keep in mind that there might be additional costs that your customer will be responsible for when they go to collect the package. Include this information so that your customer might be aware of them.

Customs declaration information

Each country will have different forms and policies but the most common documents that you will have to fill include:

A commercial invoice, which is a legal document that describes the type and value of the product you are sending. This invoice is used to calculate duties and taxes.
An export declaration form that you need to surrender at the port of export. It contains information on the nature and value of the product.
Certificate of origin verifies the origin of the product.

To get more information, take a look at the following resources:

USPS Customs Information
UPS
Canada Post Customs Information
UK Royal Mail Customs Information

Business accounts
After you have decided on which carrier to use, consider opening a business account with your carrier. This has many benefits including better order management, better expense management, a vast array of online tools, discounts, and many others. Each of the major carriers has different accounts that you can view and select the best option for your business.

Here are some business accounts programs you can look at:

USPS Business Gateway
FedEx Business Center
UK Royal Mail Online Business Account
Australia Post Business Credit Account

Simplify Your Shipping Process with Efficient Label Generation

Labeling your packages
Once you have taken into account how you will handle your shipping procedures, methods, and costs, you’ll need to determine how to label your packages. There are different ways to label your packages, but there must be standard information that each label must contain. This includes the ship-to and return address.

When you are starting off, this process is usually handwritten and time-consuming. As your business grows, there are several online tools that you need to employ to make the process more efficient.

Using a fulfillment warehouse

The last step to consolidate your shipping process is to understand the fulfillment strategies at your disposal. This allows you to reduce unnecessary expenses and keep you from unnecessary delays in your shipping procedures. The options you have include:

3PL(Third Party Logistics); are third-party eCommerce partners you outsource to handle your logistics and store your inventory. They are not manufacturers of your products, nor do they own them.
Self-fulfillment; allows you to store, manage, and deliver your products to your customers. Most small businesses begin their shipping process this way and eventually graduate to other forms of fulfillment methods.
Dropshipping is great to use if you have no intention of storing inventory. You can enter into an agreement with your manufacturers or distributors that allows you to satisfy the customer’s order directly from them. So you only pay for products that are actually ordered by the customer.

There are several advantages to using a fulfillment warehouse and these include:

Discounts or cheaper shipping rates; because of the large quantities they handle, fulfillment warehouses can offer you lower rates.
Easy access to a wide range of shipping options; most major fulfillment warehouses are integrated with the most common shipping logistic companies.
Faster delivery times; especially if you choose a partner that is close to the bulk of your customer base.

Fulfillment warehouses will assist you in automating your process. The warehouse stores your inventory for you and, depending on the technology your chosen partner uses, they can seamlessly integrate your order process.

Once a customer orders, your fulfillment warehouse partner will automatically forward the order to the list of outgoing orders, pack and ship the product on your behalf.

Using a fulfillment warehouse is not for everyone, though. There are some businesses that will receive no benefit from this type of shipping method. If the following situations describe your business, then you might need to look at other options, such as self-fulfillment.

Conclusion

Branding and packaging presentation

If branding and packaging presentation is a core aspect of your business, then outsourcing your fulfillment to a warehouse partner might not be the best fit. As we have mentioned before, fulfillment partners usually receive and process bulk orders from multiple companies. You’ll have a hard time finding a partner that will take the time to customize and deliver your package in the way you want.

Costs

If you’re a small business or a start-up, every dollar you save makes a tremendous difference. There is usually very little money to spare, so you need to watch and minimize any additional costs.

There are surcharge costs you need to be aware of if you use a fulfillment warehouse. These include ‘pick and pack fees’ and storage fees. These all add up even with the shipping discounts you will receive by working with a fulfillment warehouse. You need to ensure that it makes sense, especially if your order volume is still relatively small.
So what’s next?

E-commerce shipping can be complex but once you understand the basics, the rest is easier to manage. Remember to start small, set clear goals, and choose tools that match your business and your budget. We hope this guide was able to open your eyes to the complexities and the intricate details that you have to get right.

Building Your Digital Storefront: Small Business Website Essentials

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 11 Apr 2025 22:03:43 GMT

How to actually start selling online

Starting an online business has never been easier than today. This is partly due to the fact that so many people have started their own businesses already and paved the path. Recently customers have been relying on online shopping more than ever. We can also expect that the habits that people developed over the past few years the desire to shop online will increase. This makes starting an online business even more of an attractive option.

Even though the world has not exactly been in the best shape for the past year, eCommerce has been one of the pillars of civilization that has risen to the occasion to ensure that the world keeps running. It’s not going anywhere.

So how can you actually start selling online ? eCommerce is a broad term and there are many different ways of both acquiring items you wish to sell as well as selling them. There are, however, some basic steps that every online seller needs to take in order to start their business regardless of the business model or the platform they are selling on. Here are some basic steps you would need to take in order to have something an online shopper can eventually add to cart:

Product research
This is probably the most crucial step that will determine the strength of your online business venture. Picking the right product that people are actually looking for and are willing to spend money on is crucial. You can do everything else absolutely perfectly and it will be of no use if your product choice is incorrect.

When it comes to product research , it’s important to think long and hard about the criteria that your product needs to meet. These criteria can vary depending on your business model, your knowledge of your market, or your target audience. However, your criteria should be along these lines:

The weight - Since you will be almost certainly sourcing products from somewhere else on the globe, most likely China, you want to make sure that you spend as little on shipping as possible.

The size - Size of an item is important to minimize for the same reason as weight. However, while you cannot really influence the weight of a product once you choose it, you can find ways to reduce an item size with clever packaging.

The moving parts - This is a criteria that is related to risk and quality control. If you are selling items that are electronic, mechanical or otherwise fragile in nature you need to make sure that they don’t get damaged in transport and that they remain functional. These items tend to be more expensive. Usually sellers who are equipped for a larger scale business carry these items.

The selling price and the margins - Needless to say, the amount of money you can make per item sold is extremely important. It's important to make sure that you precisely calculate the cost of manufacturing a single unit of your product and the expected selling price.

Seasonality - Even though you might find items that are in demand and selling well you must also factor in seasonal trends. Not all items sell all year round. Items that do sell in every season are called evergreen. It’s not necessary to sell evergreen items, but if you sell seasonal items, you just need to plan your inventory accordingly.

Once you have your criteria set you can go ahead and start working on making a list of items that meet them. There are a lot of ways to get product ideas such as:

Google trends - You can check the popularity of any type of item or even some broader term related to a lifestyle that would include the item if you use Google trends. It’s a free tool and it’s extremely useful to obtain a general idea of what people are looking for.

Amazon - Amazon is the biggest online selling platform on earth. Even if you don’t intend to sell on Amazon, you can use the information there to gauge the popularity of any type of product. One of the easiest ways is to see how many reviews products in a certain niche are getting. If you wish to actually sell on Amazon then it is wise to use specialized Amazon market intelligence tools like AMZScout Pro Chrome Extension.

Pinterest - Pinterest is a more niche platform that is specialized and oriented toward handmade items. However, it’s a platform that quickly picks up new trends, which makes it very useful if you want to find interests that are gaining in popularity. There are also “pins” which serve as a sort of bookmark for people that are looking for information or ideas about a particular interest. The more pins, the more people are interested in the particular item.

Social media - If you want to put your finger on the pulse of whatever is going on in the world, social media is the place to go. If you are researching a product, you can visit pages that sell those items. You can also join groups gathered around an interest or a lifestyle that might include a demand for a specific item.

Choose a selling method and find a supplier

There are many different business models that fall under the umbrella of eCommerce. Any entrepreneur can choose the model that suits them the best. There are 3 basic ones:

-Reselling - This business model involves you finding discounted items in mostly physical stores and outlets and selling them online for profit. This is what is referred to as Retail arbitrage. You can also buy things online and resell them. This is what is referred to as Online arbitrage.

-Dropshipping - Dropshipping is great because you don’t have to hold any inventory yourself. You simply collect orders on your desired platform or website, make an order from the supplier and ship it to the address of your customer.

-Private label - This business model might be most demanding since it requires that you create your own brand of products and sell them using whichever platform or selling method you choose. This enables you to take advantage of the market situation that you’ve identified using your own design and brand.

Finding a supplier

Unless you are a reseller, you are going to be needing a supplier. For a private label seller, Alibaba is the place to go since you can almost certainly find exactly what you need and have it manufactured to your exact specifications.

It’s important to get all of the right information from a supplier such as prices at different order quantities, the price of shipping, and most importantly, to first test a prototype of the product you need. If you are dropshipping, the closely related website AliExpress is what you are most likely going to have the most success with.

Create your storefront

When it comes to creating your own storefront, you can either create your own website or sell on an established platform.

Selling on a platform - The largest online eCommerce platform is, of course, Amazon. It’s usually the first place to go for new entrepreneurs that want to join the world of Ecommerce. Figuring out what to sell on Amazon might even be easier than on other sites because there is a lot of free information available as well as paid courses. There are also specialized software tools. The great thing about Amazon is that there are literally millions upon millions of customers visiting the website every day. However, there are also millions upon millions of products and thousands of sellers and brands. Success requires proper decision making and planning ahead. Amazon also offers its Fulfillment service which allows you to run your business without ever handling inventory. There are also other platforms to consider,like Ebay, as well as the new growing Walmart online store.

Building your own website - Online sellers that choose this route are the ones that are willing to put in extra effort in order to have full control over every aspect of their business. The truth about online selling platforms is that they have rules and guidelines to follow, not to mention fees to pay. If you are willing to take care of everything by yourself and keep as much of the profits as possible, you should be building your own websites. There are numerous plugins like Shopify and Salt Creative e-commerce solutions that make this process less challenging than it might seem at face value. Keep in mind that if you have your own website, bringing in traffic is your own responsibility as well. This choice boils down to a reality of all of the responsibility and all of the profits.

Promoting your products

Marketing is, financially speaking, a very impactful factor when it comes to starting your own online business. It is certainly a cost that has to be calculated in advance. We are almost living in an age where digital marketing might as well be just called marketing at this point.

You can use social media marketing, which is what many sellers go for, and even there the options are varied. You can create sponsored posts, collaborate with influencers, create your own page or all of the above. Also, every platform has its own mechanism that is necessary to master in order to get the most advantage out of that system.

If you have your own website, using Google adwords is a must. Getting your website to rank higher on Google is what will most greatly impact your future sales.

If you are selling on a platform, you can use their internal advertising Pay Per Click systems. They are usually very sophisticated and effective, but can be pretty complicated and might take a while to master.

Conclusion

In conclusion, there has never been a better time to get into eCommerce than right now. Retail sales are down across the globe and e-commerce sales are up. As long as you have an entrepreneurial spirit and the proper mindset, you are sure to find the exact business model and product that will suit you, no matter your experience or disposable capital. You just have to put in the work and research. Good luck sellers!

Small Business Accounting Software for 2025

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 11 Apr 2025 20:01:42 GMT

Empowering Your Business Finances with Simple & Affordable Solutions

Small businesses face growing operational costs, pushing many to seek budget friendly accounting software. QuickBooks has long been a go to for bookkeeping, but entrepreneurs now look for simpler, more affordable tools to handle their finances.

Several strong alternatives to QuickBooks have appeared, each with features designed for small business needs. Here’s a closer look at the top options:

Wave: The Budget Friendly Champion

Wave has built a loyal base among freelancers and small businesses thanks to its free pricing. It covers essentials like invoicing, receipt scanning, and expense tracking. While it lacks advanced features like inventory management or project tracking, its ease and cost make it a great pick.

Wave Reviews:

"I really enjoy wave, I've been using it for over 5 years and it super simple and easy for the client to pay invoices. It is super easy to use and very affordable for the start-up business owner or side hustler. It has limited features in some areas, like payroll, but if you're a solo team, that doesn't matter." - Kimb W., Design, Self-employed.

"2-year Review: I wish I had never used Wave. Stay away. Stay far, far away. The problem with Wave is that they have abysmal community and customer support... Even for paying customers, there is zero option for support other than sending an email or chat, then waiting days or weeks for a response (11 days is my record so far)... Stay away from Wave. There are too many better options for accounting to let your business grind to a halt because of their poor service. All it takes is one problem that goes unanswered for you to have been better off with another provider." - LilBobby_Tables.

"Wave once stood out among accounting applications because it was a free and effective solution for everything short of payroll and customer payments. You must now subscribe to a paid version of the software to get all of its features, but its ease of use, competent invoice and transaction tools, improved mobile apps, and reasonable price still make it a good fit for microbusinesses... We liked Wave a bit better when you could get all of its best features at no cost, but it remains an affordable, responsive, and well-designed accounting solution for very small businesses (including freelancers and contractors). Its multicurrency support, revamped mobile apps, and user permissions features are additional points in its favor."

FreshBooks: A Go To for Service Providers

FreshBooks stands out for service based businesses with its user friendly design and strong invoicing tools. Beyond billing, it includes time tracking and expense management. Starting at $15 per month, it offers a good mix of affordability and capability.

FreshBooks Reviews:

"My life was a mess until I started using Freshbooks. As a self-employed individual in architecture & planning, keeping track of time and invoicing was a nightmare. FreshBooks made it incredibly easy to log my hours for different projects and then seamlessly turn those into professional-looking invoices. Clients can pay online directly through the invoice, which has significantly improved my cash flow. The interface is intuitive, and I didn't need any accounting background to get started. It's been a game-changer for managing my business admin." - Josh G.

"FreshBooks has been a very reliable accounting and financial management platform for us, allowing us to take good care of our finances. It allows us to continuously monitor our expenses, which has helped 1 us develop very disciplined spending habits. The invoicing function in FreshBooks is super easy to use and helps create smart invoices. It also has an amazing reporting function that gives us insightful financial reports to assist us 2 in gauging our financial health." - Verified User in IT Services.

"I've been using FreshBooks for about three years now for my service-based business. Initially, I loved how simple it was to create invoices and track payments. The client portal is also a nice touch. However, as my business has grown, I've started to feel some limitations. The project management features are okay for basic tasks, but not robust enough for more complex projects. Also, the cost of adding team members can add up quickly. While it's great for solopreneurs and very small teams, businesses with more employees or complex needs might outgrow it." - u/ServicePro2022

Xero: Comprehensive and Scalable

Xero delivers a wide range of features, from inventory management to payroll and multi currency support. It appeals to growing businesses with its integration to many third party apps. Pricing starts at $13 per month, making it a solid choice for those needing a complete solution.

Xero Reviews:

"Xero has been a useful tool for my business for the past 8+ years, and I use it in conjunction with my accountant to keep track of my business accounts. It's a handy way to code account transactions, and also see how my business is performing. Super easy to track and stay on top of my business financials. It can be hard to get help and support, and also to set up new reports." - Erin M.

"Its great I'm able to reconcile my accounts and match up with the accounts daily. Its easy to use. I like all the features they have to make it easier to keep track of your transactions. I pretty much don't have any issues." - Tammy P.

"Xero allows for unlimited users at no extra cost, making it especially attractive to small businesses with several employees. It supports every element of financial management that both young and growing companies need, using AI effectively in areas like bank account reconciliation and offering advanced reporting abilities... Xero's dashboard provides a good launching pad for the experience. It displays the charts and numbers you need at the beginning of a work session, like account balances, bill and invoice status, and total cash in and out. You can drill down here to see underlying transactions and create new ones."

Zoho Books: Perfect for Zoho Users

For businesses already in the Zoho ecosystem, Zoho Books integrates smoothly with other Zoho products. It provides invoicing, project management, and inventory tracking, starting at $15 per month. This all in one approach makes it popular among Zoho fans.

Zoho Books Reviews:

"Zoho Books is a great tool at a great value for small business. It serves as a full ERP system for our small business. We have merged two companies recently and converted and integrated both 1 companies into Zoho Books. The transition was smooth, and the system handles our quotes, invoices, payments, and client billing efficiently. While the bank reconciliation process can be a bit tricky initially, and the separate inventory module seems a bit redundant, the overall value and functionality are excellent. We also wish for easier integration with multiple Amazon stores."

"Zoho Books is an affordable and reliable SME Accounting Solution. We use it as our primary accounting software to create quotes, send invoices, track payments, and allow our clients to access their billing via our client portal. The online accessibility is fantastic for our team collaboration. Setting up automatic payments saves us significant time, around 20 hours per month. It generates essential reports seamlessly, and the integration with Stripe for recurring payments is excellent. It's more than just software; it's an essential part of our business operations. The customization features and approval workflows are very convenient for our team."

"I find using Zoho Books really helpful in keeping track of our billings, invoices, and payments. Having it built into the Zoho CRM saves us so much time, and we can have it linked to our projects for easy tracking of expenses. The ability to clone items has significantly streamlined our process for handling repeat sales orders. The prebuilt reports, especially profit and loss statements and balance sheets, are clear and easy to access, providing the data we need for informed decisions. The expense integration, which allows scanning and automatic import of receipts, is a great bonus. Overall, it's user-friendly and saves us a significant amount of time, probably around 20-25%."

Manager: A No Cost Solution

Manager is a free desktop based accounting software. It may not have all the advanced tools of other options, but it covers basics like invoicing and financial reporting, making it ideal for those watching their budget.

Manager Reviews:

"Great alternative to the big guys." Software Advice

"Best small business accounting software with the most features and free." CRM.org

"The Banking Dashboard in Manager makes it very easy to manage banking transactions." G2.com

NolaPro: Customizable and Comprehensive

NolaPro, a cloud based ERP solution, goes beyond standard accounting with tools for inventory management, accounts payable, and more. Its free core package and customizable options fit businesses with unique needs.

NolaPro Reviews

"Great software for our business." Mark L

"Good for Non-US Companies." Miodrag D

"Happy I found this app again...low cost inventory tracking is a lifesaver!" Gary K

Weighing Your Options

Each alternative offers distinct benefits, letting small business owners pick a platform that matches their needs. Most providers offer free trials, so users can try out features before subscribing.

As technology advances, the accounting software market keeps growing, giving businesses the freedom to move away from traditional tools like QuickBooks and find options that better align with their goals and budgets.

Are We Really Living in a Golden Age of Entrepreneurship?

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sun, 06 Apr 2025 18:24:24 GMT

When New Business Means No Choice

Small business is often called the backbone of our economy. Entrepreneurs play an important role in job creation, new ideas, and economic growth. They launch products that people use every day and work hard to create their own path. Many view this period as a golden era for those who want to start their own business. Since the pandemic, there has been a noticeable rise in new business applications compared to previous years. Politicians have celebrated this trend as proof that the dream of working for oneself is alive. Yet, a closer look at the numbers reveals a more complicated picture.

According to the Census Bureau, millions of new business applications were submitted last year. This increase shows that many people feel optimistic enough about the economy to take a chance on themselves. Opening a business means making a serious investment in space, equipment, supplies, and sometimes hiring a few people. Often, new business owners have to wait without a steady income while they build their customer base.

While new businesses can create jobs and boost productivity, there is another side to the story. Research by experts from the Federal Reserve and the University of Maryland found that most of these new businesses are starting in areas with lower incomes. In many cases, these businesses are simply moving from city centers to suburbs where rent is cheaper. This shift does not always lead to more overall business activity; it can sometimes just rearrange where businesses are located.

For many people, the choice to start a business is not about pursuing a passion. Instead, it is a necessity. A growing number of workers have joined what is commonly known as the gig economy . Many of these individuals work a regular job while also taking on extra work to make ends meet. Instead of hiring employees or investing in growth, these gig workers register as businesses to manage their income and expenses. In the past, starting a business usually meant having some experience and access to savings or investment funds. Today, many people who start businesses do so because they have few other options.

This trend also affects workers who choose to be independent contractors. Although working as a contractor can offer flexibility, it often comes with a loss of job security and benefits. Some contractors are required to sign agreements that limit their future opportunities. While a few skilled professionals can earn a good income working for multiple companies, most people who turn to contracting are doing so because traditional employment does not provide enough stability.

Government agencies have been slow to recognize these shifts. One reason is that reports of job and business growth look good when shared with voters during elections. Another reason is that government programs meant to support entrepreneurship often report success by counting new business applications, even if many of those applications come from people working under difficult conditions.

If we want to support real, lasting growth in our economy, it is important to understand the true nature of this entrepreneurial wave. Instead of celebrating every new business application as a sign of progress, we need to address the challenges behind them. It is important to provide fair rules for independent workers, improve access to benefits like healthcare, and support workers so that starting a business is a choice made out of ambition rather than necessity.

In the end, entrepreneurship still matters. Creating new businesses can lead to innovation, job opportunities, and a stronger economy. However, it should not be the only option for people who find themselves without a stable way to earn a living. We need to recognize the difference between genuine opportunity and the pressure to start a business out of necessity.

The State of Marketing 2025 Statistics

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Tue, 01 Apr 2025 20:00:36 GMT

Overall Strategy & Effectiveness:

82% of marketers felt their marketing strategies were effective in 2024.
92% of marketers plan to maintain or increase investments in brand awareness in 2025.
65% of marketers reported that addressing social issues in marketing campaigns in 2024 was effective for their brand.

Target Audiences & Personalization:

Millennials are the primary target for over 70% of marketers in 2025, with interest in targeting Gen Z also increasing year-over-year. Interest in marketing to Gen X and Baby Boomers has decreased by over 30%.

Sustainability matters to younger generations: 64% of Gen Z and 63% of Millennials are willing to pay more for environmentally sustainable products. 1 in 4 have lessened ties with a business due to unsustainable practices.
Personalization pays off: 96% of marketers report that personalized experiences increased sales.

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

Data-Driven Marketing:

T he top reported advantages of using data to inform marketing strategy are: reaching target audiences more effectively (35%), increasing the ROI of marketing efforts (34%), and planning media mixes more effectively (32%).

Content & Channel Trends:

Video Dominance: Short-form video was the top-performing content format in 2024 and delivers the highest ROI (21%), followed by images (19%) and live-streamed videos (16%).

Podcast Growth: 91% of marketers plan to maintain or increase investment in podcasts and audio content in 2025. 46% of weekly podcast listeners have purchased a product advertised on a podcast.

Top Social Platforms: Marketers plan to invest most heavily in YouTube, Instagram, and TikTok in 2025.
Influencer Marketing: Micro-influencers (10k-100k followers) were the most successful for both B2B and B2C brands in 2024. Facebook yields the highest influencer ROI (28%).

Emerging Channels: The top channel brands plan to use for the first time in 2025 is AI chatbots.

Artificial Intelligence (AI) Impact:

AI adoption is widespread but challenging: 92% of marketers say AI has impacted their role, yet 54% feel overwhelmed by implementing AI tools.

Only 47% feel they have a clear understanding of how to use AI in their strategy, and 47% have a clear understanding of how to measure its impact.

Top AI use cases include content creation, research/data analysis, brainstorming, and learning how to perform tasks like debugging code.

AI is changing search: Nearly half of marketers have seen a positive impact on web traffic due to consumers using AI for search. 31% of Gen Zers primarily use AI platforms for online information seeking. If you want to zoom in specifically on how AI is reshaping small business operations in 2026, our AI statistics breakdown covers the latest adoption numbers from LinkedIn, Salesforce, and HubSpot.

Future Trends:

1 in 4 marketers plan to use AI to turn text into multi-modal campaigns, and 1 in 5 plan to explore AI agents for automating marketing workflows. An overwhelming 86% of leaders believe AI-generated influencers could replace human ones by the end of 2025.

Stop Leaking Money: Why Expense Management Software is Crucial

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sun, 09 Mar 2025 21:09:11 GMT

Top Tools to Track, Manage, and Simplify Your Business Expenses in 2025

For small business owners, managing expenses can be a real hassle, but luckily, there are plenty of tools out there to help. Whether you're a freelancer, a startup, or running a small team, finding the right software can make all the difference. Here’s a rundown of some of the best expense tracking solutions , each with unique perks and pricing to fit different needs. CRM software is one of the highest-ROI technology investments a small business can make — check out our CRM statistics page for the numbers behind that claim.

QuickBooks Online

If your business already uses QuickBooks for bookkeeping, its built in expense management is a no brainer. It syncs directly with your bank accounts to automatically track expenses and categorize them. Plus, the receipt scanning feature saves you from dealing with piles of paper receipts.

Best For: Small businesses already using QuickBooks for accounting
Key Features: Receipt scanning, expense categorization, and detailed financial reporting
Pricing: Starts at $30/month (expense tracking included in the package)

Zoho Expense

A budget friendly option, especially for small teams. Zoho Expense has a free plan for up to three users, making it a great starting point. It automates expense tracking and receipt scanning while integrating seamlessly with Zoho Books and QuickBooks.

Best For: Small teams looking for a cost effective solution
Key Features: Real time tracking, approval workflows, and multi currency support
Pricing: Free for up to 3 users paid plans begin at $4 per user/month

Expensify

Freelancers and small businesses love Expensify for its simplicity and efficiency. Its SmartScan feature makes receipt tracking effortless, and with next day reimbursements, you won’t be stuck waiting for payments.

Best For: Freelancers and businesses needing fast reimbursements
Key Features: Unlimited receipt uploads, next day reimbursements, and mileage tracking
Pricing: Starts at $5 per user/month (billed annually)

FreshBooks

While FreshBooks is mainly an accounting tool, it has strong expense tracking capabilities, making it ideal for freelancers and solo entrepreneurs. Its easy to use interface is perfect for those who don’t have much accounting experience but still need a reliable solution.

Best For: Freelancers and small business owners with basic accounting needs
Key Features: Receipt capture, expense categorization, and bank account integration
Pricing: Starts at $20/month (includes invoicing and expense tracking)

Ramp

Ramp is a solid choice for startups and small businesses looking for a free option with corporate cards and automated expense tracking. It even uses AI to handle categorization and enforce spending policies, which can save businesses time and effort.

Best For: Startups and small businesses needing automated expense tracking
Key Features: Real time tracking, automated workflows, and integrations with QuickBooks, Xero, and NetSuite
Pricing: Core features are free Ramp Plus starts at $15 per user/month

QuickBooks Time

For small teams already using QuickBooks, QuickBooks Time is an excellent solution for tracking time, payroll, and project costs. With mobile friendly features like GPS and geofencing, it can help businesses save an average of 11 hours per month.

Best For: Small businesses using QuickBooks that need time tracking and payroll integration
Key Features: Real time tracking with GPS, payroll integration (QuickBooks, ADP, Gusto), scheduling, and detailed reporting for labor and billable hours
Pricing: Starts at $20/month + $8 per user (Premium) $40/month + $10 per user (Elite) with a 30 day free trial

Choosing the Right Expense Tracker

Every business has different needs, so the best expense management tool depends on what you're looking for. If you need something simple and budget friendly, Zoho Expense or Expensify might work well. If your business already runs on QuickBooks or FreshBooks, sticking with their built in solutions makes sense. And for startups looking for AI powered automation, Ramp is worth considering.

At the end of the day, the right software should save you time, keep your finances organized, and help you focus on growing your business instead of drowning in receipts!

Choosing the Best Website Builder to Grow Your Small Business

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Thu, 06 Mar 2025 22:33:14 GMT

Top Picks to Build a Professional, Affordable, and Hassle-Free Website in 2025

As a small business owner, I know how important it is to have a website that's easy to use, affordable and packed with the right features. When choosing a website builder, you want to consider things like design flexibility, e-commerce options, marketing tools and overall ease of setup. Based on my research (and a lot of trial & error), here’s my take on the best website builders for small businesses in 2025:

Wix

Why it’s great: Wix is super versatile, offering over 900 templates you can customize, a simple drag-and-drop editor, and AI features that make building a site fast & painless. It's perfect for small businesses that need an all-in-one solution with builtin e-commerce, SEO, and marketing tools.
Best for: Businesses that want a professional-looking website without any coding, think service providers, portfolios, or online shops.
Pricing: Starts at $17/month (Core plan, annual billing). A free plan is available if you just wanna test things out.
Standout feature: AI chatbot that helps you build a site based on your needs.

Shopify

Why it’s great: If you’re serious about selling online, Shopify is hands down one of the best platforms out there. It comes with powerful inventory management, multi channel sales (like TikTok & Amazon), and abandoned cart recovery to boost conversions.
Best for: Retail and service businesses that wanna focus on online sales.
Pricing: Starts at $29/month (Basic plan, annual billing). There’s also a $1/month starter plan for the first three months.
Standout feature: Integrates easily with in-person POS systems.

Squarespace

Why it’s great: If you care about design, Squarespace is the go to. It has stunning, mobile friendly templates, plus built-in blogging and e-commerce features. Great for branding and visual storytelling.
Best for: Restaurants, photographers, artists, and any business that needs a sleek, high end look.
Pricing: Starts at $16/month (Personal plan, annual billing). Comes with a 14-day free trial to test it out.
Standout feature: Professionally designed templates that look amazing right out of the box.

Hostinger Website Builder

Why it’s great: This one's an affordable, AI powered website builder that actually builds your site for you based on a few simple inputs. Includes hosting and even supports small online stores (up to 500 products).
Best for: Startups or small businesses that want a low-cost, hassle-free website.
Pricing: Starts at $2.49/month (48-month plan), renews at about $14/month.
Standout feature: AI-driven site creation at an unbeatable price.

Weebly

Why it’s great: Now owned by Square, Weebly is a no frills website builder that’s easy to use and budget friendly. It’s perfect if you want a basic website with solid e-commerce features and seamless integration with Square’s payment tools.
Best for: Businesses that do a lot of in-person sales and need a simple online presence.
Pricing: Free plan available; paid plans start at $10/month (Personal plan, annual billing).
Standout feature: Works seamlessly with Square’s ecosystem for payments & inventory.

Final Thoughts

Each of these platforms has its strengths depending on what your business needs. Wix is great for overall flexibility, Shopify is best for e-commerce, Squarespace wins on design, Hostinger is super budget friendly, and Weebly keeps things simple. Your choice really comes down to your goals, do you want a stunning site, an online store, or just something quick and affordable?

And hey, if you'd rather not deal with website builders at all, that’s where Salt Creative comes in. We’re a full-service web design agency that builds modern, mobile optimized websites for businesses of all sizes. Whether you're launching something new or your current site needs a serious refresh, we handle everything from custom design and branding to SEO and digital marketing so you don’t have to stress over the technical stuff. We’ve worked with businesses across multiple industries, so we know how to create a site that not only looks great but actually helps you attract customers and grow your business. If you want a professional website without the hassle, let’s chat!

FAQ: Choosing the Best Website Builder for Your Small Business

State of the Media 2025: Trends, Challenges, and PR Strategies

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Wed, 12 Feb 2025 21:16:49 GMT

Mastering Media Relations in 2025: Cision's State of the Media Report

The 2025 State of the Media Report by Cision provides insights into the evolving landscape of journalism, highlighting key challenges, trends, and expectations from PR professionals. Based on a survey of 3,016 journalists across 19 global markets, the report covers how journalists interact with PR, use social media, and navigate industry changes like AI and audience behavior shifts.

Data Driven Journalism & Performance Metrics

79% of journalists measure success by readership/viewership numbers.
47% consider engagement metrics (social interactions, newsletter sign-ups, etc.).
25% rely on data insights more than last year to shape editorial strategies.

Challenges Facing Journalists

42% cite maintaining credibility as a top challenge (e.g., combating "fake news").
41% struggle with adapting to changing audience behaviors around media consumption.
26% identify AI as a major challenge, with concerns over misinformation and ethical use.
60% of journalists feel the strain of media downsizing and reduced resources.

AI's Role in Journalism

53% of journalists do not use AI in their work.

Among those who do:

23% use AI for brainstorming story ideas.
19% for outlines/early drafts.
11% for topic research.

Social Media & Content Trends

97% of journalists use social media for work, primarily for:
71% - publishing/promoting content.
67% - sourcing information.
54% - picking up trending topics.

Top growing platforms for journalists:

Instagram (44%)
LinkedIn (39%)
TikTok (21%)

What Journalists Want from PR Professionals

74% want press releases.
61% value original research reports (trends, market data).
55% prioritize exclusive stories.
68% say PR should understand their audience’s interests.
46% appreciate multimedia elements in pitches (images, videos, infographics).

Pitching Journalists: Do’s & Don’ts

50% receive over 50 pitches per week, but only 7% consider most pitches relevant.
87% prefer email pitches, while only 2% want phone calls.

Top reasons PR pros get ignored or blocked:

77% - Sending irrelevant pitches.
55% - Providing inaccurate or unsourced information.
41% - Pitches that sound like marketing brochures.

Differences Between Freelancers & Staff Journalists

22% of respondents are freelancers.
Freelancers value: story exclusives (69%), events access, and product testing.
Staffers prioritize: audience engagement, data-driven insights, and company credibility.

Key Takeaways for PR & Media Professionals

Relevance is king: Journalists overwhelmingly value pitches that align with their audience and niche.
AI is a double-edged sword: While some journalists embrace AI for research and brainstorming, many see it as a threat.

Multimedia is essential: The inclusion of high-quality images, videos, and infographics can improve the chances of coverage. For example, Marshall Communications, a boutique Maine based PR agency founded in 1991, leverages decades of relationships with media outlets to help clients punch above their weight in national coverage.

Social media is a dominant force: Journalists are increasingly engaging with Instagram, LinkedIn, and TikTok for content distribution and audience interaction.
PR professionals must be strategic: Understanding journalists' needs, avoiding spammy pitches, and providing exclusive, data-backed content is crucial.

This report underscores the shifting dynamics in media, emphasizing data-driven storytelling, AI integration, and the evolving relationship between PR and journalism.

32 Influential Marketers Quotes to Fuel Your Inspiration

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sat, 08 Feb 2025 01:44:02 GMT

Statistics From Influential Marketers Quotes

Advertising and Marketing Pioneers

David Ogilvy’s direct-response techniques influenced 72% of modern digital ads, which rely on persuasive copy and consumer psychology.
Bill Bernbach’s DDB agency helped Volkswagen sell over 500,000 Beetles in the U.S. through its groundbreaking "Think Small" campaign.
Dan Wieden’s “Just Do It” slogan helped Nike increase sales from $877 million (1988) to $9.2 billion (1998) in just a decade.
Apple’s "Think Different" campaign (Lee Clow) contributed to a $6.6 billion market cap increase for Apple within one year.
Marc Pritchard oversees Procter & Gamble’s marketing spend of $8 billion per year, one of the largest in the world.

Tech Visionaries

Steve Jobs led Apple’s growth from a $5 billion market cap (2000) to over $350 billion (2011) before his passing.
Google’s ad revenue ($224 billion in 2022) makes up more than 80% of Alphabet’s total earnings.
Larry Page’s Google processes over 8.5 billion searches per day, dominating 91% of the global search market.
Apple’s iPhone sales alone generate more annual revenue ($200 billion+) than Microsoft’s entire business.
Elon Musk's SpaceX Falcon 9 became the first rocket to be reused 20 times, significantly lowering the cost of space travel.
SpaceX launches a rocket every 4.5 days, reducing space travel costs by 40% per launch compared to traditional NASA missions.

The 32 Most Influential Marketers Quotes

David Ogilvy

"The best ideas come as jokes. Make your thinking as funny as possible."

"There is no such thing as a good or bad ad in isolation. What is good at one moment is bad at another. Research can trap you into the past."

Bill Bernbach

Dan Wieden

"Chaos is the only thing that honestly wants you to grow. The only friend who really helps you be creative."

"The smartest advertising is the advertising that communicates the best and respects the consumer's intelligence."

Lee Clow

Mary Wells Lawrence

"The best advertising should make you nervous about what you're not buying"

"Acquire with the intention to retain, and retain with the intention to grow."

Lester Wunderman

Steve Jobs

"Great things in business are never done by one person, they're done by a team of people"

"I believe you have to be willing to be misunderstood if you’re going to innovate."

Jeff Bezos

Howard Schultz

"Grow with discipline. Balance intuition with rigor. Innovate around the core. Don't embrace the status quo. Find new ways to see. Never expect a silver bullet. Get your hands dirty. Listen with empathy and overcommunicate with transparency."

"Let everyone else call your idea crazy... just keep going. Don't stop. Don't even think about stopping until you get there, and don't give much thought to where 'there' is."

Phil Knight

Marc Pritchard

"Human moments are the ones that matter"

"Emphasize long-term value over short-term gains, both in business growth and in nurturing talent"

Indra Nooyi

Sergio Zyman

"The sole purpose of marketing is to sell more to more people, more often and at higher prices. There is no other reason to do it."

"The only thing worse than starting something and failing… is not starting something"

Seth Godin

Gary Vaynerchuk

"It took thirty-eight years before 50 million people gained access to radios. It took television thirteen years to earn an audience that size. It took Instagram a year and a half."

"Don't look back and ask, Why? Look ahead and ask, Why not?"

Neil Patel

Rand Fishkin

"You have to ask yourself, whenever you are producing any type of content, Who will amplify this and why?"

"In an online world, our online words are our emissaries; they tell the world who we are"

Ann Handley

Joe Pulizzi

"Content Marketing comes down to commitment. There’s no halfway. You’re either in or you’re out."

"People shop and learn in a whole new way compared to just a few years ago, so marketers need to adapt or risk extinction."

Brian Halligan

Andrew Chen

"A startup is a company that is searching for a repeatable and scalable business model."

"Marketing has always been about the same thing – who your customers are and where they are."

Noah Kagan

Kim Kardashian

"Motherhood is a gift and I know after watching my mom do it, it's not easy, especially when trying to balance a career"

"True authenticity is relinquishing control."

Zaria Parvez

Ben Silbermann

"People think culture is like architecture where its actually a lot more like gardening."

"During my hardest days, I repeated the same phrase to myself: "I cannot lose if I do not quit.""

Alex Hormozi

Jay Baer

"If you help someone, you may create a customer for life."

"We don’t have as many managers as we should, but we would rather have too few than too many."

Larry Page

Elon Musk

"Persistence is very important. You should not give up unless you are forced to give up."

"Know the user, know the magic, connect the two"

Lorraine Twohill

Asmita Dubey

"We measure everything because we are in permanent transformation. If we don’t measure, we don’t know if we are failing or succeeding."

"Remember, it is God, not other humans who gives us power to get wealth."

Ukonwa Ojo

Insights From Influential Marketers

E-Commerce and Business Giants

Jeff Bezos scaled Amazon from $0 to $1 trillion in market cap 25 years faster than Walmart.
Howard Schultz grew Starbucks from four stores (1982) to over 30,000+ stores across 80+ countries.
Howard Schultz’s Starbucks Rewards program has 30 million active members, generating 53% of U.S. sales.
Nike sells an average of 25 pairs of shoes per second, a testament to Phil Knight’s enduring brand strategy.

Digital & Content Marketing Masters

Seth Godin has written 19 bestsellers, influencing millions of marketers worldwide on branding and storytelling.
Gary Vaynerchuk helped grow Wine Library from $3M to $60M in revenue using early digital marketing tactics.
Neil Patel’s marketing blogs receive over 10 million visits per month, making him one of the most influential SEO experts.
Joe Pulizzi’s Content Marketing Institute holds the largest annual content marketing event, attracting 4,000+ marketers from around the world.

Social Media & Influencer Power

Kim Kardashian’s brands (SKIMS, KKW Beauty) have a combined valuation of $5+ billion, leveraging her 350+ million social media followers.
Ben Silbermann’s Pinterest has grown to 450+ million monthly active users, influencing online shopping and design trends.

The Top 50 Marketing Statistics For Service Based Businesses

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Tue, 14 Jan 2025 15:52:29 GMT

50 Must Know Marketing Statistics to Elevate Your Service Based Business Strategy

General Marketing

72% of service-based businesses rely on referrals as their primary source of new customers.
93% of customers read online reviews before choosing a service provider.
Businesses with a Google My Business profile receive 70% more inquiries than those without one.
73% of customers consider trust a key factor in choosing a service provider.
82% of service businesses prioritize customer retention over acquisition.

AI is increasingly part of the marketing stack — see our 2026 small business AI statistics article for the latest numbers on how owners are actually using it.

Content Marketing

Blogs tailored to customer pain points generate 70% more engagement for service providers.
Service companies that share educational content experience 3x more conversions.
Infographics improve understanding of complex service offerings by 70%.
Businesses with active blogs have 434% more indexed pages, driving better SEO.
Case studies increase conversions by up to 48% in service industries.

Elevate your business with a custom built website from Salt Creative — schedule your free strategy session now!

Local Marketing

88% of searches for local services result in a call or visit within 24 hours.
46% of all Google searches are seeking local information.
Service businesses that rank on Google Maps see a 60% increase in foot traffic.
Adding location-based keywords increases visibility by 50%.
76% of local searchers contact a business directly from search results.

Social Media Marketing

74% of service businesses find Facebook the most effective social platform.
Instagram drives 25% more engagement for visually appealing services (e.g., salons or event planning).
LinkedIn generates 80% of B2B leads for service industries.
Services marketed on TikTok see 1.5x higher engagement rates in niches like consulting and personal training.
92% of consumers say they trust recommendations shared on social media, even from people they don’t know.

Email Marketing

Email campaigns have an ROI of $42 for every $1 spent.
Welcome emails generate 320% more revenue than other promotional emails.
Segmented email campaigns see a 760% increase in revenue.
Personalized emails boost transaction rates by 6x.
Email is 40x more effective at acquiring new clients than Facebook or Twitter.

Video Marketing

Service pages with video content see a 22% increase in conversion rates.
86% of people would like to see more videos from service-based businesses.
Explainer videos increase understanding of services by 73%.
Social videos generate 1200% more shares than text and images combined.
Adding a video testimonial increases conversions by 89%.

SEO (Search Engine Optimization)

78% of service buyers conduct an online search before making a decision.
92% of online searchers pick businesses on the first page of results.
Local service ads are clicked 25% more often than standard ads.
Websites with mobile-first designs rank 30% higher on Google.
Service-based businesses that prioritize SEO grow 2x faster than their competitors.

Customer Experience

68% of customers are willing to pay more for excellent service.
84% of businesses focusing on customer experience report increased revenue.
Word-of-mouth marketing drives 62% of new business in service industries.
95% of dissatisfied customers share their bad experiences with others.
Businesses that respond to reviews see 40% higher ratings.

For a deeper look at customer relationship data specifically, our dedicated CRM statistics page covers market size, adoption rates, and sales productivity benchmarks in detail.

Advertising (PPC and Social Ads)

Google Ads deliver an 8:1 ROI on average for service providers.
63% of customers click on a PPC ad if it directly addresses their query.
Retargeted ads see a 10x increase in click-through rates compared to standard display ads.
Facebook ads achieve an average ROI of 400% for service-based industries.
Video ads convert 27% more effectively than static image ads.

Mobile Marketing

70% of service buyers use mobile devices for research.
Mobile-optimized websites have 2x higher conversion rates.
57% of users say they won’t recommend a business with a poorly designed mobile site.
Local search queries via mobile result in service inquiries 78% of the time.
Click-to-call buttons on mobile websites can boost call volume by 50%.

These statistics highlight key areas service-based businesses should focus on for sustainable growth, including online visibility, customer trust, and targeted digital strategies.

8 Ways SEO Can help Your Small Business Grow

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Mon, 06 Jan 2025 00:06:09 GMT

You can’t survive in business today without mastering search engine optimization (SEO). It can lead to business growth by helping you market your business online. But how do you get started with SEO?

Understanding how SEO contributes directly to business growth can be a bit of a challenge. In this article, we'll give you a breakdown of how SEO can work for your business and how you can leverage its benefits to grow your company. By the end of this guide, you should be able to understand:

What SEO is

Why SEO is crucial to the growth of your business
How you can get started with SEO to grow your business .

What is SEO?
The simplest definition of SEO is that SEO is a digital marketing strategy that helps your website rank at the top of organic online search results for relevant keywords. I know we've thrown in a lot of words that may not be familiar to you, so let's break it down a bit.

You see, search engines like Google rank search results according to how relevant your website is to the query. So, for example, if you run a vegan pizza restaurant, you would want your website to show up on the top results when someone Googles "vegan pizza restaurants near me."

So a well-designed SEO strategy will increase your online visibility and bring qualified leads to your website. SEO Is different from paid ads as it focuses only on organic unpaid search results on the search engine results pages (SERPs).

Every SEO strategy should include the following:

On-page SEO: This deals with things on your pages that you can control, for example, keywords, headings, SEO content, and page design.
Off-page SEO: Off-page SEO refers to things not found on your website itself but influence your rankings anyway. These include links to your website from other sites. While you can't directly control these factors, you can sometimes influence them.
Technical SEO: Technical SEO is slightly more complicated. It factors in backend website and server optimizations that help visitors and search engines understand and use your website. Examples of Technical SEO include sitemaps, page speed, and txt files.

Additionally, there are a number of SEO types that are unique to a business industry. These include:

Local SEO: This focuses on reaching users within a specific geographic area. These are usually customers within a local business's service area. Our earlier “vegan pizza restaurant near me” example fits this description. The user could also type other SEO location-specific keywords containing the name of a city, state, or region.
Enterprise SEO: This type of SEO is explicitly geared towards big corporations or large websites. This type of SEO focuses on ranking for broad, frequently searched, and highly competitive keywords.

How Search Engines Work: SEO Basics

Now, let's discuss some of the basics of how SEO can work for your business. This includes how you can get started with SEO and some bonus tips for improving your current SEO performance.

However, it's best to first understand how search engines work. This will give you some more context for understanding SEO strategies.

Ever wondered how Google works? Search engines like Google use web crawlers to look for relevant content on the web. In fact, Google was the first search engine to organize the internet to provide accurate search results.

Google's web crawlers look for content in two ways. They either discover content using links or find relevant content when publishers (you and me) submit it to the search engine. So, these bots analyze every link or published content to determine the topic and evaluate the quality of the content.

The search engine then arranges the content, i.e., it adds it to its database of web content. When a user types something, the search engine uses its data about the pages in its index to determine the most accurate results and rank them accordingly.

This whole content ranking process involves a complex algorithm that considers various factors to determine which website shows up at the top of the SERP. The comprehensive list of ranking factors used by search engines is not public knowledge. Still, experts believe that they weigh more than 200 factors when ranking content.

If you want to succeed in search, you need to optimize your web content for these factors. A good SEO strategy makes it easier for search engines to find and understand your content. It allows Google to view your content as high-quality.

Later on in this guide, we’ll discuss some of the most important SEO factors and how to optimize for them. But first, let’s talk about how SEO can grow your business.

How can SEO grow your business?

This is the key question that we need to answer. How does optimizing your web content for SEO translate into business growth? Below are eight ways SEO can help you meet your goals. Take some time to go through the points below; you should get a better understanding of how important SEO is in business and how you can use it to grow your business.

SEO increases your online visibility

We've already touched a bit on this earlier. SEO puts your website and business in front of more people online. SEO's impact on the visibility of your business is enormous. Google alone processes over 3.5 billion searches every day, that’s more than 40,000 per second. Over half of these searches are organic because people turn to search engines for help answering all sorts of questions. If your business or web content accurately answers or gives the right solution, it shows up near the top of search results.

SEO gives you access to the right audience

The foundation of SEO lies in its accuracy, so it doesn't help you show up for just any search queries. The key to nailing your SEO strategy is to provide accurate and relevant answers, so your content shows up for the keywords your potential customers are searching for.

The best way to accomplish this is to conduct research and determine which searches your potential customers perform. So, for instance, if your business sells organic baby food, you could target keywords such as "is organic baby food better for my baby," "how to choose the healthiest baby food," or "where to buy organic baby food near me."

SEO channels qualified leads to your website

SEO allows you to get visibility and reach people who have already shown an interest in your business, products, or services. It also links you to people who have expressed an interest in something related to your business. So going back to our vegan pizza example, if someone types “vegan restaurant near me," they might be led to your business even without typing the phrase "vegan pizza."

Search engine users who select your website via organic search are more likely to turn into qualified leads. This means they are likely to become paying customers. Additionally, organic SEO leads have a high conversion rate — 14.6% compared to just 1.7% for traditional marketing.

SEO leads to high conversion rates

Keep in mind that SEO's primary focus isn't converting leads. Still, many good strategies for SEO are also suitable for increasing conversions. Search engines like Google want to rank high-quality content that users like to boost your rankings if you make the right changes and improve the user experience. Many of these changes can also improve your conversation rate.

For instance, if you work on improving your website's design and usability, you can increase your rankings and encourage your web visitors to stay on your site longer. These changes may also result in website visitors finding your content more trustworthy and eventually making them comfortable enough to purchase.

SEO helps with brand awareness

Because SEO brings you more visibility and puts your website and company name in front of more eyes online, it may increase brand awareness. The more often people are exposed to your brand name in search results, the more familiar they'll become with it. Even if this doesn't make them click on your website the first time they see it, it will eventually feel familiar to them to the point where they may click through. Suppose potential customers are already familiar with your brand from an ad, social media post, or other marketing channels. When they see your website appearing on the top search results, they are more likely to click on it.

SEO increases credibility and builds trust

One of the significant advantages of SEO for business is that ranking well on SERP might make people view your brand as more credible and trustworthy. Because Google wants to rank high-quality content from authoritative sources, people have trusted the high-quality results produced by Google searches.

Suppose potential customer sees your site ranking well. In that case, they're more likely to view your site as authoritative, credible, and trustworthy, and therefore worth their time. This is especially true if people see your website at the top for several search terms related to your industry. Eventually, they'll start to see you as an authority in your field.

SEO gives you a competitive advantage

If you're not investing in SEO, it's most likely that your competitors are. That should be enough motivation for you. A good SEO strategy will help you beat out the competition, especially if they are ranking above you in search results. The higher your competitors rank, the more likely they get the website visits and customers you may have won.

Having a good SEO strategy and sticking to it is essential to staying competitive in a world where 'googling' is the number way people find information, goods, and services. Moreover, search results themselves are also highly competitive, so a smart SEO strategy will give you a competitive advantage over your competition in the SERPs.

Lastly, statistics show that having a good SEO strategy gets you top rankings. In fact, 95% of search traffic goes to the top listings on the first SERP and 68% to the first five results.

SEO has long-term value for your business

SEO is not a quick fix; it is more of a long-term strategy that will continue to deliver returns long after your initial investment. Your web content can continue ranking well in search results long after you first create and optimize it. All you'll need is a small amount of upkeep. This is entirely different from other marketing strategies, such as paid advertising, which is short-term as ads stop appearing when your campaign ends.

Some SEO basics: Strategies for driving growth
So now that we know how SEO helps you grow your business let's discuss the strategies you can employ to see that growth in your business. While there are several factors to consider when it comes to using SEO for business growth, it's essential to know the basics first.

We’ve gathered some of the most fundamental things you need to do to start experiencing the benefits of SEO for your business.

Conducting keyword research

Keyword research is the process of figuring out the keywords your potential customers are typing when looking for information related to your business, industry, products, or services. These are phrases and words you'll want to target with your SEO efforts.

To find the best and most competitive keywords, you'll need a list of basic keyword ideas of terms relevant to your business or industry. The best strategy is to use the Google Search Console. This allows you to see the terms users searched for when they find your site organically and browse competitor sites for ideas.

Once you have a list of some keyword ideas, there are plenty of keyword research tools like KeywordsFX, Ahrefs, or SEMrush that you can use. These tools will provide you with a list of related keyword ideas.

Creating high-quality content

Once your list of keywords, the next crucial step is to develop content that uses those keywords. So, for instance, if you sell outdoor painting supplies, one of your keywords might be "the best paint for outdoor furniture." You'd have to write a how-to article or video for this specific keyword.

Another accurate keyword might be "types of outdoor paint." For this keyword, it might be best to create an informational blog post, video, or infographic explaining the various kinds of outdoor paint. You must invest time ensuring that your content is high-quality to appeal to both search engines and users. Make sure that your content offers valuable and accurate information. Your audience finds it easy to gravitate to you as a site of authority. The content must also be easy, enjoyable to use, and go through.

Integrating target keywords

Integrating your keywords into your content and web pages is another crucial step in implementing SEO for business growth. Here, you'll want to include a primary keyword in your content, as well as several variations of that keyword and some related keywords. Say, for instance, your main keyword is " outdoor furniture paint ." You'll need to use this keyword more frequently than other keywords and integrate it in the most important locations in your content.

You might also use variations like "types of furniture paint" and " white outdoor paint" as well as related keywords like "best paint for outdoor furniture" and "types of outdoor paint textures." Some of the most critical areas to place keywords are your:

Title tag
Meta description
URL
Headings
image alt tags

You’ll also need to include your keywords a couple of times throughout your main text. However, avoid using your keyword too much as it might feel forced.

Earning backlinks to your site

Another important ranking factor is the quantity and quality of your page's backlinks. But what is a backlink? Simply put, a backlink is a link from another website to yours. The more links your content has from well-known websites, Google views your site as more authoritative, improving your rankings.

You can earn these links naturally by creating quality content that others want to link to. Having in-depth content, infographics, and statistics in your content performs exceptionally well in this area. Another great way to build links is to reach out to other content creators within your industry. You can suggest that they link their content to one of your pages as a way to add value to their content. It's best to focus on how that link will enhance their content.

Improving user experience

What do popular websites have in common? They have a great user experience which is vital for rankings since it improves the quality of your content and encourages visitors to spend more time on your website. This is a positive signal for Google. There are other areas of user experience that are important for SEO:

Mobile-friendliness: In today's world, mobile-friendly websites get tons of visits. In fact, Google now uses a mobile-first index, meaning it evaluates and ranks pages from a mobile user's perspective. So make sure that you use responsive design to ensure your website displays and works correctly on all types of devices.
Page speed: Noone likes a slow website, and neither does Google. There are several page speed optimization techniques that you can use to improve your pages’ load speed. Examples include; Google PageSpeed Insights and Sematext.
Website design: Lastly, your website's design should be visually appealing and user-friendly. Make it easy for users to find navigation tools and more enjoyable to use your site.

Improving technical SEO

Technical SEO refers to the backend of your website, i.e., everything that goes on behind the scenes, from servers to databases, and much more. In a nutshell, a website's back end is everything the user doesn't see.

While they are invisible to the user, they are crucial for SEO. A part of technical SEO involves ensuring that search engines can crawl and index your pages. You'll need to check that you're not accidentally blocking search engine crawlers with your robots.txt file or through other methods.

Also, ensure that you create an XML sitemap, which is a file that lists a website's essential pages, making sure Google can find and crawl them all. It also helps search engines understand how your website is structured. You want Google to crawl every essential page of your website.

Other aspects of technical SEO include; duplicate content, site security, and URL structure. Lastly, page speed and mobile-friendliness are sometimes considered part of technical SEO.

Tracking your SEO results

One essential part of any marketing strategy, including SEO, is tracking your results. Gathering data about your results helps you evaluate that data to use what you learn to improve your SEO performance.

You must determine which metrics you'll track and how you'll track them before launching an SEO strategy. The following are some helpful metrics you can use:

Organic traffic: The number of visits your site gets from organic search results.
Keyword rankings: How high you rank in SERPs for relevant keywords.
Click-through rate: This is the percentage of users that visited and clicked through to your website after seeing it on a SERP.
Top site exit points: The pages from which your website visitors mostly quit looking through your site.
Conversion rate: The percentage of site visitors you convince to take the desired action. This could be making a purchase, submitting a quote request form, signing up for a newsletter, or contacting your business via email or phone.

Some helpful tools you can use to track SEO performance include:

Google Analytics
Google Search Console
SEMrush
Ahrefs
MarketingCloudFX

Conclusion

Growing your business using SEO has become a necessary investment for modern business. We hope this guide has given you some basic information on getting started with SEO. While it might seem complicated at first, mastering SEO is simple once you use the right tools and strategies.

About Salt Creative:
Salt Creative is a full-service creative agency, specializing in web design, marketing, SEO and graphic design services for businesses of all types and sizes. We are passionate about small business.

CONTACT US
Get a Free Proposa l

Unlocking ChatGPT's Full Potential: The Ultimate Guide to Crafting 230+ Powerful Prompts

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sun, 05 Jan 2025 06:05:28 GMT

Master the Art of AI Conversations: Turn Your Ideas into Action with 230+ Expert-Crafted Prompts

What if you could have an AI assistant at your side, ready to generate personalized responses, spark new ideas, and simplify your workflow? Welcome to the transformative world of ChatGPT prompts—your gateway to limitless possibilities. In this guide, you’ll explore the basics of ChatGPT prompts, learn practical tips, and gain access to 230 versatile examples to level up your AI experience.

Understanding ChatGPT Prompts

ChatGPT prompts are cues or instructions you use to guide an AI conversation. Consisting of keywords and phrases, these prompts steer conversations toward desired information. By combining thoughtful keywords and phrases, prompts direct the AI to provide the information or insights you need. Mastering the art of crafting effective prompts empowers you to:

Customize responses: Get precise answers that meet your needs.
Fuel creativity: Generate original ideas, stories, or marketing plans.
Increase efficiency: Save time by obtaining relevant information quickly.

How to Create Powerful Prompts

Unlock ChatGPT’s full potential with these simple strategies:

Be clear: Use straightforward, easy-to-understand language.
Be specific: Narrow your focus for accurate, relevant answers.
Provide context: Share background information to enhance the AI’s understanding.

Go Beyond the Basics

ChatGPT isn’t just for simple queries—it’s a versatile tool for advanced applications like:

SEO optimization: Craft content that’s keyword-rich and optimized for search engines.
Content creation: Generate blog posts, email campaigns, social media updates, and more.
Marketing strategy: Write ad copy, taglines, and promotional materials.
Social media engagement: Brainstorm post ideas, challenges, and discussion threads.

Tips for Getting the Best Results

Double-check facts: Validate the AI’s output with independent research.
Stay on-brand: Align the tone and style with your brand voice.
Leverage tools like Semrush : Use SEO tools to optimize your content effectively.

230 ChatGPT Prompts to Explore

General Knowledge & Creativity (50)

Tell me a fun fact about space.
Write a short story about a talking cat.
Explain quantum physics simply.
What are meditation benefits?
Summarize Hamlet's plot.
Generate 10 unusual travel destinations.
Explain blockchain technology.
Provide tips for improving memory.
Discuss climate change causes.
Write a song about friendship.
Explain renewable energy types.
Describe nature in poetry.
Create 5 creative writing prompts.
Share healthy breakfast recipes.
Explain internet history.
Identify cloud types.
Write a short script on AI ethics.
Generate 5 debate topics.
Explain relativity theory.
Offer public speaking tips.
Discuss anxiety symptoms.
Create 10 trivia questions.
Explain machine learning basics.
Provide stress management techniques.
Write a motivational letter.
Explain cryptocurrency fundamentals.
Generate 5 book recommendations.
Discuss mindfulness benefits.
Create 10 inspirational quotes.
Explain solar energy advantages.
Write a poem about gratitude.
Generate 5 educational resources.
Explain emotional intelligence.
Provide time management strategies.
Create 10 team-building activities.
Explain data analysis concepts.
Write a short story on empathy.
Generate 5 productivity tools.
Discuss conflict resolution techniques.
Create 10 wellness tips.
Explain cybersecurity basics.
Write a script on environmental conservation.
Generate 5 language learning apps.
Discuss mental health awareness.
Create 10 goal-setting templates.
Explain AI applications.
Write a poem on perseverance.
Generate 5 professional networking tips.
Discuss effective communication strategies.
Create 10 self-care routines.

Writing & Content Creation (50)

Write a blog post introduction on.
Create catchy headlines for articles.
Write product descriptions.
Generate social media captions.
Create book outlines.
Write email newsletters.
Develop short video scripts.
Generate keywords.
Write meta descriptions.
Rewrite paragraphs concisely.
Craft persuasive sales pitches.
Create taglines.
Write press releases.
Generate interview questions.
Write thank-you letters.
Create FAQs.
Write tutorials.
Generate podcast topics.
Write reviews.
Create content calendars.
Develop social media marketing plans.
Write job descriptions.
Create partnership lists.
Write customer service templates.
Generate webinar ideas.
Create presentation outlines.
Write proposals.
Develop crisis communication plans.
Generate brand awareness campaigns.
Create influencer outreach templates.
Write guest blog posts.
Generate lead magnet ideas.
Create sales funnel content.
Write website copy.
Generate blog post ideas.
Create social media challenges.
Write product launch announcements.
Generate email marketing campaigns.
Create video script templates.
Write podcast episode summaries.
Generate social media analytics reports.
Create content marketing strategies.
Write case studies.
Generate e-book outlines.
Create course material.
Write whitepapers.
Generate infographics.
Create webinars.
Write online course descriptions.
Generate digital marketing checklists.

Marketing & Business (50)

Develop marketing strategies.
Create SWOT analyses.
Generate viral marketing campaigns.
Write ad copy.
Create customer personas.
Develop business plans.
Generate lead generation ideas.
Create pricing strategies.
Develop social media campaigns.
Write job postings.
Create partnership proposals.
Write cold emails.
Generate referral programs.
Develop crisis management plans.
Create brand guidelines.
Write sales scripts.
Generate marketing automation workflows.
Create customer journey maps.
Develop account-based marketing strategies.
Write press releases.
Generate influencer marketing campaigns.
Create content calendars.
Develop social media analytics tools.
Write market research reports.
Generate competitive analysis reports.
Create digital marketing strategies.
Write sales enablement content.
Generate demand generation campaigns.
Create ABM playbooks.
Write marketing automation guides.
Generate sales funnel optimization strategies.
Create customer success stories.
Develop growth hacking tactics.
Write social media engagement scripts.
Generate brand awareness surveys.
Create market positioning statements.
Write thought leadership articles.
Generate B2B marketing strategies.
Create sales forecasting templates.
Write marketing ROI analysis reports.
Generate digital marketing audits.
Create social media content calendars.
Develop customer advocacy programs.
Write case study analysis reports.
Generate market trend analysis reports.
Create competitive landscape analysis reports.
Write sales training programs.
Generate account-based marketing case studies.
Create marketing strategy templates.
Write business development guides.

Coding & Programming (30)

Write Python functions.
Generate HTML code.
Explain programming concepts.
Debug code.
Write regular expressions.
Generate SQL queries.
Compare programming languages.
Implement algorithms.
Generate test cases.
Explain data structures.
Write JavaScript code.
Generate API documentation.
Explain cybersecurity threats.
Write encryption algorithms.
Generate sorting algorithms.
Explain neural networks.
Write machine learning models.
Generate natural language processing techniques.
Explain database design.
Write data visualization code.
Generate web development frameworks.
Explain cloud computing concepts.
Write DevOps tools.
Generate cybersecurity protocols.
Explain AI applications.
Write robotics code.
Generate computer vision algorithms.
Explain blockchain development.
Write IoT device communication protocols.
Generate network security measures.

Problem-Solving & Analysis (30)

Analyze decision pros and cons.
Brainstorm problem solutions.
Identify root causes.
Develop goal-achievement plans.
Evaluate strategy effectiveness.
Compare contrasting views.
Explain event impacts.
Predict industry futures.
Analyze datasets.
Summarize research papers.
Evaluate algorithm efficiency.
Develop conflict resolution strategies.
Identify market trends.
Analyze customer feedback.
Develop risk management plans.
Evaluate team performance.
Identify process improvements.
Develop change management strategies.
Analyze data visualizations.
Evaluate marketing campaign ROI.
Develop decision-making frameworks.
Identify critical thinking biases.
Analyze system dynamics.
Develop negotiation tactics.
Evaluate project timelines.
Identify resource allocation strategies.
Develop supply chain optimization models.
Analyze financial statements.
Evaluate investment opportunities.
Develop strategic planning templates.

Roleplaying & Creative Writing (20)

Act as {Johnny Depp in Pirates of the Caribbean}, answer.
Write dialogue between.
Create character backstories.
Develop plotlines.
Write scenes from.
Create fantasy worlds.
Write poetry styles.
Compose songs.
Create riddles.
Write short plays.
Act as historical figures.
Write mythological stories.
Create superhero origin stories.
Write futuristic city descriptions.
Create magical systems.
Write coming-of-age stories.
Create dystopian societies.
Write romance novels.
Create mystery plots.
Write science fiction stories.

Learning & Education (30)

Explain concepts to 5-year-olds.
Create study guides.
Summarize historical events.
Translate texts.
Generate practice questions.
Explain scientific methods.
Create timelines.
Compare historical figures.
Explain mathematical concepts.
Create educational games.
Write lesson plans.
Generate quiz questions.
Explain programming fundamentals.
Create interactive simulations.
Write educational articles.
Generate critical thinking exercises.
Create problem-solving worksheets.
Explain environmental conservation.
Write educational poetry.
Generate educational resources.
Create language learning materials.
Explain cultural differences.
Write historical fiction stories.
Generate geography quizzes.
Create educational videos.
Explain economic principles.
Write educational songs.
Generate science experiments.
Create educational podcasts.
Explain philosophical concepts.

Conclusion

ChatGPT prompts unlock vast creative, productive and successful possibilities. Mastering prompts and strategies outlined here propels desired outcomes. Experiment, refine and adapt prompts for optimal results, revolutionizing AI interactions.

The Silent Revolution: Algorithms and American Change

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Thu, 19 Dec 2024 20:50:10 GMT

The Unseen Hand: How Algorithms Shape Our World

The unseen hand of algorithms moves steadily and silently, influencing almost every aspect of modern life. Algorithms, which are essentially sets of instructions designed to solve problems or execute tasks, play an indispensable role in shaping the digital landscape. From the content you see on social media to decisions on loan approvals and hiring, their reach is vast and ever expanding.

As we transition deeper into the algorithmic age, it’s vital to unpack the benefits and challenges posed by these technologies. While they offer convenience, efficiency, and groundbreaking potential, they also introduce complex ethical and societal questions. How much control do algorithms truly exert? How can we wield this power responsibly? These are not hypotheticals but pressing challenges with real world implications.

The Filter Bubble Effect: A Personalized Reality

One of the most immediate and pervasive impacts of algorithms is their ability to create a tailored reality for each user. Platforms like Facebook, Twitter (Now X.com), Google, and TikTok use sophisticated algorithms to deliver personalized content. While this approach creates seamless user experiences by ensuring users see the posts, videos, and articles most likely to capture their attention, it can also lead to a filter bubble .

Coined by Eli Pariser in his 2011 book of the same name, this phenomenon cultivates an online environment where users are mainly exposed to information that confirms their preexisting beliefs and biases. Over time, this misinformation isolates individuals, leading to ideological echo chambers.

Implications for Democracy

For society, the implications are grave. As people retreat further into their curated realities, the benefits of reaching a common understanding among people, a cornerstone of functional democracy, are lost. For instance, during major political events like elections, users on opposite ends of the political spectrum may consume entirely different versions of the "truth." These opposing realities create mistrust, deepen polarization, and hamper constructive dialogue. Additionally, misinformation and conspiracy theories spread easily in such isolated environments, often fueled by the very algorithms designed to keep users engaged.

Real World Examples
A notorious example of algorithm-driven polarization is the role of Facebook and YouTube in the spread of QAnon, a conspiracy theory that grew into a global movement. Both platforms used engagement-focused algorithms that prioritized sensational and controversial content, amplifying QAnon rhetoric. By the time tech companies intervened to ban or reduce visibility for QAnon related content, the damage had already been done.

Addressing this problem requires a reimagining of algorithmic design in a way that focuses on how platforms prioritize content , and redesigning user controls to allow individuals to adjust their information diet. Lastly, promoting media awareness and literacy empowers users to think more deeply about the content they consume.

The Job Market and the Rise of Algorithmic Hiring

In the job market, algorithms are increasingly used in the hiring process to streamline interviews and employee onboarding. AI-driven tools scan resumes , conduct initial candidate screenings, and even evaluate video interviews for traits like enthusiasm or leadership potential.

Opportunities and Risks

On the positive side, algorithmic hiring can streamline workflows, reducing the time and resources spent on recruitment. A company receiving thousands of applications can quickly identify candidates whose skills match the job description, ensuring no resumes are overlooked. Such efficiency is invaluable in a fast-paced global economy.

However, the risks are not to be ignored. The algorithms powering these systems are not perfect they inherit biases present in the data used to train them. A great example is Amazon’s now infamous AI recruiting tool, scrapped in 2018. The system demonstrated bias against female applicants, reflecting historical data where male candidates dominated certain tech roles

Impact on Diversity and Inclusion
Unconscious bias in algorithms can undermine diversity and inclusion efforts. For example, systems that prioritize keywords or specific universities may disadvantage candidates from underrepresented backgrounds or those with non-traditional career trajectories. As organizations increasingly rely on such systems, the lack of transparency in algorithmic decision-making can make it difficult for applicants to understand why they were rejected, adding another layer of inequity.

To address these concerns, it’s critical to prioritize accountability in AI hiring tools by employing thorough auditing and compliance checks as standard practice, ensuring that systems align with fairness and anti-discrimination principles.

The Surveillance Society: Privacy in the Age of Algorithms

All online interactions, from purchases to searches, feed data directly into algorithms that track and dissect our behaviors. While this data collection exercise enables businesses to create personalized services, it also raises significant concerns about privacy and surveillance.

The Power of Data Collection

Tech companies argue that data collection drives innovation and personalization, but critics highlight the intrusive nature of such practices. A good example is how Google Maps requires location access to provide navigation services, yet the same data could be used to track user movements for targeted advertising.

Beyond commercial applications, the surveillance potential of algorithms extends to governments. In dictatorship governments, algorithmic surveillance has been weaponized to monitor and suppress democracy. China’s social credit system, for example, tracks and scores citizens’ behaviors, from online activity to jaywalking, impacting access to opportunities or services.

Legislation and Consumer Advocacy
To safeguard privacy, stronger regulations are essential. The European Union’s General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) sets an example, providing consumers with more control over their data and requiring transparency from companies. However, more international involvement is needed to create a uniform standard.

Individual awareness and advocacy also play a role. Simple steps like using privacy focused browsers (e.g., DuckDuckGo), enabling encryption tools, and supporting data rights organizations can empower citizens to reclaim control over their information.

The Ethical Implications of Algorithmic Decision Making

Algorithms now make decisions that significantly affect human lives. Whether determining eligibility for a mortgage, assessing risk in criminal sentencing, or diagnosing diseases, these systems wield enormous power. While they can improve efficiency and reduce human error, their reliance on unclear processes raises serious ethical questions.

The Challenge of Bias
Algorithmic bias, stemming from flawed training data, is a critical issue. For example, predictive policing algorithms, used in cities like Los Angeles and Chicago, have been criticized for targeting minority communities. These systems often rely on historical crime data that reflects systemic inequality, perpetuating a cycle of over policing.

Need for Transparency

Algorithmic systems frequently operate as "black boxes," making it challenging to analyze their decision making processes. This lack of transparency undermines accountability and creates an environment where it’s difficult to challenge unjust outcomes. Efforts like the AI Now Institute's advocacy for algorithmic accountability propose mandatory audits, public impact assessments, and the right to contest automated decisions.

The Socio-Economic Divide: Algorithms and Inequality

One aspect that is often overlooked when developing algorithms is the risk of potentially widening the poverty gap. Algorithms mostly benefit those with access to technology, creating a digital divide. Low income individuals, who may lack digital knowledge or stable internet access, risk being excluded from algorithm driven advancements.

Let’s take a look at education. Algorithmic tools like adaptive learning platforms can enhance teaching outcomes for well-funded schools but remain inaccessible to under-resourced districts. Similarly, access to credit-scoring algorithms can enable wealthier individuals to secure loans easily while sidelining economically disadvantaged groups due to a lack of robust credit history.

Addressing this divide requires ensuring fair access to technological infrastructure and designing inclusive algorithms that recognize diverse socio economic realities.

The Future of Algorithms: A Call for Responsible Innovation

As algorithms continue to evolve, society must address their dual edged potential. These technologies could solve complex global challenges, from climate modeling to personalized medicine, but they could also create more inequality if left unchecked.

Transparency, Accountability, and Oversight
Building ethical algorithms requires transparency, accountability, and oversight at every stage of development. Organizations like OpenAI advocate for open research, enabling cross sector collaboration to address emerging challenges. Additionally, implementing algorithmic ethics boards within businesses could ensure alignment with societal values.

Collaboration Across Stakeholders
Innovation cannot occur in isolation. Policymakers, technologists, and civil society must collaborate to draft regulations that balance innovation with the public good. For instance, initiatives like the EU’s proposed AI Act aim to establish risk based frameworks for algorithmic systems, ensuring critical applications meet stringent ethical standards.

Key Questions for the Future
As we navigate the algorithmic age, several questions require sustained attention:

Equity and Fairness: How can algorithms be designed to minimize bias and ensure fair outcomes across diverse populations?
Ethical Oversight: What frameworks can be instituted to govern the use of algorithms in sensitive areas like healthcare, law enforcement, and education?
Data Privacy: How can individuals retain ownership of their data in a landscape dominated by corporate interests?
Public Awareness: What strategies can demystify algorithms for the general public, fostering informed engagement?
Global Cooperation: How can countries align their laws to address the different challenges posed by algorithms?

Algorithms aren’t a mythical idea waiting in the future, they are here now and they are a reflection of what we put into them. As they continue to reshape our lives, confronting the ethical, societal, and political questions they pose can help us steer this revolution toward a future that prioritizes human flourishing. The choice lies in whether we design algorithms for the collective good or allow their unchecked power to define us. The time to act is now.

Leveraging Generative AI to Boost Your Small Business

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Mon, 09 Dec 2024 21:00:52 GMT

Supercharge Your Small Business with AI

The future of business isn’t coming, it’s already here, and today’s small business owner is constantly seeking innovative ways to gain a competitive edge. One of the most transformative tools at their disposal is generative AI, and while this technology might feel like a buzzword, leveraging this software can enhance your online presence, improve customer engagement, and drive growth.

If you’re looking to streamline your operations, this article will walk you through five unique ways small business owners can utilize generative AI to improve their business websites and, in turn, their overall operations. With real-world examples and actionable insights, you'll be equipped to integrate AI into your strategy effectively.

1. Automated Content Creation for Blogs and Social Media

One way you can save time on content creation and maintain an active blog or social media presence is to implement AI. Tools like ChatGPT, Jasper, or Writesonic can help by crafting blog posts, social media captions, and even newsletters tailored to your audience. Here are a few practical examples of how Generative AI technology can help you:

Keyword Optimization: Use AI to generate content rich in SEO-friendly keywords to improve your site's search engine ranking.
Topic Ideas: AI can analyze trending topics in your niche and suggest blog titles and angles to keep your content fresh and relevant.
Multilingual Posts: Tools like DeepL or Google’s Translation AI can create content in multiple languages to reach broader audiences.

A neighborhood pet store, for instance, might use AI to create weekly blog posts about pet care tips, increasing organic traffic to their website. Data from a report by WordStream shows that businesses publishing regular blog content see a 55% increase in website visitors.

2. Personalized Customer Interactions with Chatbots

The modern customer expects fast answers, fortunately, unlike traditional chatbots, generative AI models can simulate more human-like interactions, ensuring customers feel heard and valued. Implementing chatbots on your website can:

Answer frequently asked questions (FAQs) promptly.
Provide product recommendations based on user behavior.
Collect customer feedback seamlessly.

For example, Shopify integrates AI chatbots to assist customers in finding products, which can significantly reduce cart abandonment rates. Gartner predicts that AI chatbots will handle 85% of customer service interactions by 2025.

3. Dynamic Website Personalization

Most businesses cater to different customers, and your website can reflect that. By using Generative AI, your website can offer personalized experiences for each visitor, analyzing user behavior and preferences. This will help you:

Tailor product recommendations.
Modify website layouts to match user preferences.
Adjust promotional messages to align with customer interests.

Amazon’s recommendation engine, powered by AI, contributes to 35% of its revenue. Small businesses can adopt similar practices using affordable tools like Optimizely or Adobe Target. A study by McKinsey found that personalization can drive up to 30% revenue increases for online businesses.

4. Enhanced Marketing Campaigns through Predictive Analytics

Want to get smarter about marketing? Generative AI can process large datasets to predict market trends and customer behavior. This capability can supercharge your marketing efforts by:

Identifying the best times to send email campaigns.
Predicting which products are likely to trend.
Analyzing customer feedback to refine offerings.

Tools like Salesforce Einstein or HubSpot’s AI features puts this kind of insight within reach for small businesses enabling you to make data driven decisions. For example, a boutique clothing store might analyze seasonal trends to launch timely promotions, ensuring higher sales during peak periods.
Businesses utilizing predictive analytics report a 20% increase in marketing efficiency, according to Forrester Research.

5. Streamlined Design and Branding

Looking to refresh your logo? Update your site for upcoming holidays? Generative AI can assist in creating logos, banners, and even entire website layouts that align with your brand identity. Tools like Canva’s AI features or Adobe Firefly allow users to:

Generate unique logo designs.
Create branded social media templates.
Experiment with website color schemes and typography.

A local bakery for example, could use AI to design seasonal-themed visuals for their website, creating a festive appeal without hiring a graphic designer. Research by Clutch shows that 94% of users equate design quality with website credibility.

Implementation Tips for Small Business Owners

Start Small: Begin by integrating AI in one area, such as customer service or content creation, and expand as you see results.
Choose User-Friendly Tools: Opt for AI platforms that don’t require technical expertise. Many tools offer intuitive interfaces and customer support.
Monitor and Optimize: Regularly review AI-generated outputs to ensure quality and relevance. Use analytics to measure the impact on your business goals.
Stay Ethical: Be transparent with customers about AI’s involvement in your business operations to build trust.
Invest in Training: Equip your team with the knowledge to use AI tools effectively, maximizing their potential benefits.

Conclusion

Generative AI is no longer a futuristic concept; it’s a practical tool that small business owners can use to thrive in a competitive market. It’s not about replacing the human touch, it’s about leveraging AI for content creation, personalized customer interactions, website personalization, predictive analytics, and branding.

Remember, the key to successful integration is to start small with clear objectives and gradually expand your use of AI tools that fit your needs. With the right approach, generative AI can be the catalyst for your business’s growth, helping you reach new heights in customer engagement and profitability.

Mastering the Art of Process Mapping: A Time-Tested Approach to Business Success

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Tue, 03 Dec 2024 21:55:22 GMT

What Is Process Mapping?

All businesses run on processes; some are smooth, others, not so much. Fortunately, process mapping is a simple and powerful practice of creating visible workflows that capture each step and sequence of how your business runs. Think of it as a blueprint that reveals the "invisible assembly lines" governing your business processes.

In today’s fast paced environment, one often overlooked tool for improving productivity, profitability, and customer satisfaction is process mapping. Originally developed in the 1920’s this time-tested method has evolved to become the go to method for modern business operations. From onboarding new clients to managing content production and customer support, process mapping will help you identify what’s working and what’s getting in the way.

In this article, we’ll break down the fundamentals of process mapping, explore its practical applications, and outline actionable steps for creating and improving your process maps.

While process maps originally helped manufacturing teams design assembly lines, they now serve broader purposes. Small business owners and entrepreneurs use process maps to outline workflows like invoicing, sales calls, content production, or customer support. By making intangible processes visible, process mapping helps identify inefficiencies, streamline workflows, and improve outcomes.

The Benefits of Process Mapping

Why should you invest time in process mapping? You don’t have to be a corporate giant to benefit from better processes, so whether you’re a small business or a one-man show looking to create more consistency, here are a few key ways process mapping helps you:

Bring Clarity to Your Operations: By mapping out your processes, you can see every step involved, from start to finish. This clarity helps avoid miscommunication and ensures consistency.

Identify Bottlenecks: Process maps make it easy to identify delays, duplicated work, and other inefficiencies that slow things down.

Improve Team Collaboration: Creating a process map as a team is a great way to spark and encourage discussion and align expectations, leading to better insights and solutions.

Enhance Productivity: By identifying and eliminating wasted time or effort, process maps help you and your team focus on value added activities.

Provide Better Customer Experience: Process mapping allows you to see the journey from the customer’s perspective, enabling you to refine touch points and ensure satisfaction.

How to Create a Process Map

To create a process map, you don’t need special software, just a clear goal that defines your scope. Make sure to use key symbols and map out each step logically. Here’s a step-by-step guide:

1. Define the Scope

Before diving in, decide the boundaries of your process. Ask yourself:

Where does the process start?
Where does it end?

For example, if you’re mapping the customer journey, your scope might start with a potential lead and end with a satisfied customer. A clearly defined scope helps you focus on the most critical aspects of the process.

2. Use Key Symbols

While there are over 20 symbols used in formal process mapping, keep it basic. Small teams can start with these four basics:

Rectangle (Step): Represents an action or task (e.g., "Send invoice").
Diamond (Decision): Represents a decision point with multiple outcomes (e.g., "Was the proof approved?").
Rounded Rectangle (Start/End): Marks the beginning or end of a process.
Arrow: Indicates the flow or sequence of steps.

3. Map the Steps

Ask, “What happens next?” after each part of the process. Use rectangles to document each action, ensuring that you use clear, action based language, i.e., begin with a verb (e.g., “Script video,” “Film video”) to describe the activity clearly.

4. Identify Decision Points

Insert diamonds wherever decisions influence the flow of the process. For example:

Decision: “Was the proof approved by the customer?”
If yes, move to the next step.
If no, branch off into a revision process.

5. Avoid Duplication

Be careful not to duplicate steps unnecessarily. If multiple paths in your process lead to the same outcome (e.g., “Order paid”), represent that outcome only once to maintain clarity.

6. Keep It Linear

Whenever possible, design your process map in a linear format. This ensures the workflow is easy to follow. If two actions occur at the same time, show them stacked vertically. Use arrows to illustrate any backward steps for rework or revisions.

Common Pitfalls and How to Avoid Them

Even seasoned process mappers can fall into traps. Keep an eye out for these pitfalls:

Overcomplicating the Map: Stick to the basics, especially when starting out. Excessive details can confuse the team and obscure the main objectives.
Ignoring Team Input: Involve team members in creating the map. Their firsthand knowledge ensures accuracy and encourages buy in.
Failing to Review Regularly: Processes evolve over time. Revisit your maps periodically to ensure they remain relevant and effective.

When to Use Process Mapping

There are two primary scenarios where process mapping proves invaluable:

1. Improving Existing Processes

When inefficiencies, delays, or miscommunications arise, process mapping helps uncover the root causes. Add layers to your map, such as:

Customer Journey Insights: Map out customer emotions and experiences at each stage.
Time Costs: Note how long each step takes to identify bottlenecks.
Workstreams: Assign color codes to track handoffs between departments or team members.

2. Creating New Processes

Creating a new workflow? Launching a new service? Process mapping helps organize your thoughts and ensure nothing is overlooked. Start with the desired outcome and work backward to outline each step needed to achieve it.

Tools for Process Mapping

You don’t need fancy software to create a process map, just a method that works for your business. Some of the most effective maps are made with basic tools like:

Whiteboards and Sticky Notes: Perfect for brainstorming sessions with your team.
Digital Whiteboards: Tools like Canva, Miro, or Lucidspark allow for infinite space and real-time collaboration with remote teams.
Slide Decks: PowerPoint and Google Slides are simple options for creating digital maps.

The best tool is the one you’re most comfortable using. Start with what you have and scale up as needed.
Transforming Your Process Maps into Actionable Improvements

Once you’ve mapped your current process (also known as an as-is map), the next step is optimization. Tailor your improvements based on your goals:

1. Improving Customer Experience

Walk through your customer journey and your processes to highlight pain points. Consider asking:

How does the customer feel at each stage?
Are there steps that could be simplified or eliminated?

2. Enhancing Productivity

Focus on reducing handoffs and delays. Assign responsibilities clearly and look for areas where tasks can be automated or streamlined.

3. Boosting Profitability

Calculate the time and cost associated with each step. Identify areas where savings can be achieved without sacrificing quality.

Real-World Applications of Process Mapping

You don’t need to be a corporate giant to benefit from process mapping; it’s a valuable tool for businesses of all sizes. Here are a few examples of how it can be applied:

Small Business Owners : Streamline operations like onboarding clients, invoicing, or delivering products.
Content Creators: Optimize workflows for producing videos, blogs, or social media campaigns.
Customer Support Teams: Improve ticket resolution times and enhance customer communication.

The Takeaway

Process mapping is a powerful exercise that turns invisible workflows into simple tangible diagrams that you can understand and improve. Whether you’re troubleshooting existing processes or designing new ones, the clarity and insights gained are invaluable.

By making your processes visible, involving your team, and continuously refining your maps, you’ll unlock efficiencies, improve customer experiences, and ultimately drive profitability. So grab a whiteboard, some sticky notes, or your favorite digital tool, and start mapping your way to success today!

Building a Customer Referral Program

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sun, 10 Nov 2024 19:04:15 GMT

It's no secret that excellent customer service is the key to customer success. One satisfied customer can do a lot of heavy lifting in terms of positively marketing your business.

In fact, research shows that word-of-mouth marketing is the primary factor behind 20% to 30% of all purchasing decisions, and at least 92% of consumers believe suggestions from friends and family are more powerful than advertising.

But how can you get your customers to do most of the legwork for you? The best starting point for any business is usually a customer referral program. But, it has to be done right.

So let’s dive into what you need to know about building, expanding, and managing a successful program.

What Is a Customer Referral Program?

We're sure you've heard this phrase thrown around a lot, but what exactly is a referral program? Simply put, a referral program is a marketing tactic that is based on word-of-mouth from customers that have already engaged with your brand.

It typically involves providing a channel for your customers to share their experience with people within their circle of influence instead of writing bland and impersonal reviews online or feedback surveys.

What you’re hoping for with a customer referral program is to leverage the emotional connection and trust between your customer and their partners, colleagues, and friends to attract new leads for your business. By asking customers to think about who within their social circle would benefit from your product or service, you’re most likely to find more customers who are a good fit for your brand.

In other words, your value proposition is so strong that it's easier for your marketing and sales team to nurture and engage customers because these leads have already been pre-screened as a good match for your business. They are also familiar with your company and its reputation, which in turn produces a positive customer experience.

OK. But What Value Can You Can From a Referral Program?

We know you're a business, and before you invest in something, you want to understand the actual value it will bring, so let's talk numbers. The actual value of a customer referral is that it's highly valuable but doesn't cost you much—if anything, to acquire. While the exact value differs according to industry and business size, it's commonly the lifetime value (LTV) of a customer, plus the costs of customer acquisition (CAC) that you can use to get more customers.

Here are some numbers that might pique your interest:

The research found that referred customers are 18% more loyal
Referred customers have a 16% higher lifetime value rate
Referred customers spend 13% more than non-referred customers
86% of companies with solid referral strategies have seen revenue growth over two years

And, the good news doesn't stop there —the market is growing. During the first wave of the pandemic, referrals grew by 425% as most companies scrambled to expand their customer base while sales, marketing, and purchasing migrated to digital platforms. Moreover, the referral marketing software market is projected to reach $713.3 million in 2027 .

However, a word of caution is required. You see, a referral program is effectively replacing your marketing and sales department with your customers. And when you're relying on referrals to generate new business, being consistent, agile, and patient is extremely important. So, now that we've got the numbers out of the way let's look at some tips on how you can create a customer referral program.

Building Your Customer Referral Program

1. Create Customer Referral Templates

Templates are an excellent place to start because they help you streamline the entire process by tailoring them to the voice and tone of your brand. Even if you're running a small company, things can get very complicated quickly, so you need a template to make the process as fast-and-straightforward as possible.

There are tons of free customer referral templates online that can be used to create:

Referral request emails
Referral follow-up emails
Social copy about the business's referral program
And more

2. Create Your Goals

Once you’ve got your templates in order, you now need to figure out what you want to achieve out of your referral program.

Are you aiming to drive business and revenue growth? Is retention also a concern of yours? Does your industry require an exceptional amount of trust-building?

Once you've zoned in on your goals and have defined them, you will have a better indication of the direction you're supposed to take.

3. Know Which Customers Will be a ‘Good Fit’ In the Context of Your Business

You need to first identify what your ideal customer looks like; that way, you can factor it in when you're building your program. This approach will help you get leads that actually buy from your business instead of just listing names to collect the program's incentive.

We recommend creating customer descriptions that should be placed right at the forefront of your customer referral program.

For example, you could describe what a 'good fit' would be for you on the form that customers fill out. This will help participants remember that you're looking for a specific type of individual who might benefit from your product or service and not just someone they know.

4. Get a List of Possible Referral Sources

These sources can be anyone who has come into contact with your brand currently or in the past. Start listing them out and should include current and past customers, leads that many have not converted yet, industry leaders, vendors, and so on. This will give you a better foundation for your program.

5. Look at Current Referrals

Researching how referrals are coming to your business is an excellent place to start. This gives you a clear picture of what you're working with. The process should involve your marketing, sales management, support, and anyone working on building customer relationships.

Take a look at your entire system, so you know exactly what an existing customer is worth. For example, if you compare the time spent monitoring and managing onboarding programs, how many referrals would you need to break even?

As we've mentioned before, on average, the LTV of a customer is 16% more than that of non-referred customers, so it's worth crunching the numbers to see just how much referrals could generate and adjust your marketing spend accordingly.

6. Identify channels that can host your referral program

Communication is key to the success of your referral program work. You’ll need a platform that communicates with both your business and the referred customer when a referral is submitted.

An excellent example of this is how Uber partnered with Facebook to enable customers to share a Facebook message with the person they want to refer to. Check it out below.

When the ride credit is sent, the referred customer gets a message. Simultaneously, Uber can see who the original customer is and when they submitted the referral. Such data is valuable and can easily be used by Uber's marketing and sales team to try and convert the referred customer as soon as they sign up using the ride credit.

You don’t have to offer massive discounts like Uber, but you should provide your customers with a channel to share their referrals.

Lastly, once you have figured out your referral program, you now need to think about the channels you will use to alert your customers. Consider multiple avenues of promotion beyond the usual time-limited email campaign.

So, for example, you can use:

Blogs
Product Updates
Call to Action (CTA)
Email Signatures
Newsletters

7. Start Reaching

Now it's time to refine your strategy. Start by narrowing down your customers and sources. These are the people who love your brand, know your business's value, and would most likely refer your company to their inner circle without any incentive.

Keep in mind that at this time, narrowing down this list and segmenting these contacts is better done manually. Once this process is done, there are two more things that you have to consider.

First, timing is essential. You need to identify the right time to ask your customers to participate in your referral program. Since you've already had some form of contact with these customers, building trust will not be much of an issue.

When you reach out to people who need an incentive, you'll need to consider the maturity of the relationship first. For example, it's better to approach a customer later in the relationship in some industries. For others, it can happen during the first sale. Also, watch out for referral fatigue; try not to overburden your chosen contacts with a referral request too often. Remember, patience is key!

One last thing you need to think about is how you will incentivize your ideal customer. Typically, there are two options; you could go with an incentivized or a non-incentivized program.

Start by breaking down your contacts into levels and decide which one can receive which offer. And, don’t forget to include the referrer as well. Make sure that they get a reward out of the deal as well.

8. Start Tracking

In the current digital environment, you need real-time data to make quick decisions. Tracking is essential in a referral program. Regardless of the size of your business, you need to have some sort of tracking system in place. Investing in customer relationship management software (CRM) is your best shot at this.

This will help you get accurate data and ensure that you don't miss relevant micro details, mainly referred accounts. Your system should enable you to track:

Who was referred and who referred them
When they were referred
Whether the lead was converted or sold
The next steps in the nurturing and follow-up process and so on

The ability to personalize each account and relationship is critical.

9. Follow Up

You need to follow up on your referrals quickly to enable you to convert them into a solid lead. Don't allow your referrals to sit around for too long; remember there are so many other options available today, and if your customer referred your brand, chances are they've also referred your competitors.

Lastly, don't forget to thank your referrer for helping you out. This may be where you want to break out the incentives, but also consider sending a personalized thank you message. Remember to thank the referred customer for joining too.

Customer Referral Program Ideas

Now let's explore some of the ways you can put your referral program into action.

1. Customer Loyalty Tiers

Most referral programs are geared towards one-time referrals. While they are undoubtedly effective, hosting frequent contests or fundraisers can quickly get complicated and tiresome, especially if the company is big and relies on thousands of customers for referrals.

We recommend finding an idea that motivates customers to refer many people over a long period of time. You can then create customer loyalty tiers that reward people who continue to lead customers to your brand.

Each tier should have unique benefits. When customers refer to a specific number of leads, they are promoted to the next level. This setup will likely keep customers motivated to refer new leads even when you're not hosting a contest or promotion.

2. Referral Discounts

Referral discounts are also great for catering to a customer base that wants more direct returns based on how many leads they bring to your business.

Remember that securing new customers is more expensive than retaining the ones you have. So, the money you spend on the discount will eventually be recovered once the lead converts to a paying customer.

3. Contests or Giveaways

Contests or giveaways are usually a big hit, and most customers would definitely incentivize customers to refer new leads. So, for example, you can host a contest where the only participants allowed are customers who have already referred a certain number of people to you.

However, one risk of hosting contests is that the quality of leads is often relatively poor. Instead of you getting a great pool of people genuinely interested in what you're offering, most customers tend to select anyone within their circle just so they can participate in the giveaway.

This means your marketing and sales teams now need to spend more time sorting through the list of referrals and weeding out the contacts that aren’t a good fit for your company.

So, you need to ensure that you create contests that encourage customers to refer high-quality leads. This can be done by basing your entry fees on conversions rather than referrals. So, for example, if a customer wants to participate in the contest, they have to convince people to sign up for your using your product or service instead of providing an email. This is a sure way to get high-quality leads for your business.

4. Seasonal Campaigns

Capitalizing on seasonal campaigns is always a great idea, and it's a great way to draw in new customers. Take advantage of holiday discounts, long-term deals, and annual sales so that your loyal customers have something to look forward to throughout the year.

5. Exclusive Events

Creating a community feeling is very important. Customers like the idea of feeling as if they're part of something, especially if it's exclusive. Hosting special events reserved for members in your customer loyalty program is a great way to attract new leads.

So, for example, you can provide extra tickets to an exclusive event so that customers can invite their friends or people in their inner circle.

6. Social Gifting

No one wants to be or feel manipulated. So, you need to be very careful with the wording and tone of your message, especially when implementing a social gift of some sort. Customers will become wary if you come across as trying to get something from them, so afford using phrases like "refer (x amount of people) and get a 10% discount".

Instead, you can use social gifting in a way that encourages referrals by offering rewards that allow your customer to share a coupon with their friends or family. This approach gives the customer a way to gift someone while being rewarded each time their referral redeems the coupon.

7. Fundraisers

A fundraiser is always a great way to build your customer base while connecting and appealing to your customer's values in a way that doesn't involve your product or service. Immersing your brand in a cause near your customer's heart demonstrates that you've taken time to understand your customer and that you're interested in more than just their buying habits.

Brands that can harness the power of emotion have a greater chance of building a long-term referral program that produces tangible results. Additionally, fundraisers present an excellent referral opportunity. Most customers find it easy to rope in their peers and get people to participate.

You are guaranteed to get some good-quality leads from hosting fundraisers. It makes the follow-up process a lot easier for your marketing team.

8. Product or Service Upgrades

In the current digital environment, brands need to keep reinventing themselves, and product or service upgrades are a great way of doing this.

Upgrades are an excellent incentive for your customer referral program because they encourage existing customers to continue using your products while appealing to a different set of new customers simultaneously.

However, for some businesses, upgrades might be challenging to manage either because the product or service is still new or because of the nature of the business. Instead, you can introduce your target customers to exclusive or beta features that the rest of your customer base won't have access to.

Remember, exclusivity can be a great driver for loyalty and enhances your customer’s experience with your brand.

9. Mystery Gifts

A little mystery is always good for business, and customers love it when they can win something that will come as a total surprise. The aim of a mystery gift referral is to leverage this emotion.

You don't have to go all out but ensure that your customer will appreciate it.

10. Charity Connections

Getting involved in a charity will always do wonders for any business. But if you link a charity event with your referral program, you're bound to get fireworks.

So, here’s how this works. Instead of rewarding customers using discounts or exclusive events, you can choose a local charity organization to make a donation to every time your customer provides a new lead.

Essentially, you're killing two birds with one stone because you get to build your brand reputation as a trustworthy and ethical brand while growing your customer base. Today's customer is very particular about how brands approach social justice and environmental issues, so be sure to implement these ideas in your customer referral program.

If you're still unsure how to use these ideas, we've put together a list of a few companies that have managed to execute these referral ideas.

Customer Referral Program Examples

1. Do it for a caus e

Vena is a business management company that has an excellent charitable referral program. When a client refers a lead that converts to a successful sale, the company donates $2,000 to a charity of the client's choice.

2. Social gifting in practice

Rewarding both sides, the customer, and the referee, should get things going. ClassPass is a subscription fitness company that offers a double-sided Refer-a-Friend program. When an existing customer shares their unique referral program link with someone and uses it to sign up, both parties get $20 off their next month.

3. Tiered Referrals

Harry's tiered referral structure is a great example as well. In this program, customers earn accumulating rewards with each referral. The tier starts at 5 referrals and progresses up to 50. At 50, Harry then awards the customer with a year of free blades, in addition to a shave set, Truman blade and handle, and a container of shave cream.

Conclusion

To summarize, a customer referral program is a great way to grow your customer base while retaining existing customers.

Five Tactics To Help Grow Your Small Business In 2024

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sun, 14 Jan 2024 23:19:58 GMT

Five Steps to Actionable and Effective Goals for your Small and Mid-Size Business

Every year business owners must re-prioritize their strategies based upon what they’ve learned and what they aspire to accomplish. Each new year presents opportunities to strategize your business . When clarifying strategies, it is essential that the actual results are assessed. Assessing results might look like reviewing ROI, the numbers of new clients captured and engaged, gross revenues, revenue trends, and employee retention. In addition to reviewing the positive results, it is equally vital to assess what is not working. These are five tactics to help grow your small business.

Here are a few questions to help assess results:

Positive Outcomes

What products or services stand out as the most popular and revenue producing?
What positive feedback do I hear customers repeating?
Are employees sharing positive feedback about services or products?
Can links between methods and processes be made with increased profits?

Less Optimal Outcomes

What initiatives were implemented, yet amounted to less than desirable outcomes?
What products or services are not selling through?
What services seem to waste time without optimal revenue outcomes?
Are certain methods or processes wasting time?

After reviewing your actual results, when setting business strategies this year, what outcomes do you want for your business? Whether it’s more foot-traffic, website visits or increased profits, you need to make a plan and set the plan into action in order to make it happen.

Here are some helpful tips on how to set realistic goals for 2024.

Small and mid-size business data reflects that principals and owners who set goals are much more likely to succeed than business owners who don’t take the time for goal setting and prioritizing strategies. Initially, strategizing for your small and mid-size business may seem daunting. It doesn’t need to be. After all, strategizing and goal setting is simply assessing, reviewing and thinking about what you want out of your business, to then set plans towards achieving those outcomes. But, a key component to success is making sure your goals are realistic, actionable, and achievable, which can be tricky.

Step #1: Clarify your small and mid-size business goals using SWOT Analysis

Crafting a solid plan for your goal setting strategy is a priority before taking any action as it ensures productive results.
Identifying the right goals for the year is vital as every small business owner wants to make the most of their time and investments.
There are several steps to setting the goals to effectively align the strategy to the results that you have uncovered for your business.
The first step involves applying the SWOT Analysis method. SWOT is an acronym for strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.

SWOT Analysis is a method for identifying and analyzing internal strengths and weaknesses of your small business, and external opportunities and threats that also exist.

Small business owners can use SWOT to engage in constructive introspection and form improvement goals. A SWOT analysis guides your strategy development by helping you to identify your business’ strengths and weaknesses (S-W), along with broader opportunities and threats (O-T). Following the SWOT analysis, aligns your business strategies for the upcoming year to your targeted goals. Developing this broader awareness of actual conditions both within your business and the external market, helps with both strategic planning and decision-making. These situational conditions shape your small businesses’ current and future outlook, including processes and actions, while also helps to develop strategic goals.

SWOT can easily be applied to small businesses and resources are available to assist in the process. Multiple websites offer free resources, including templates to plug in your personalized information about your small or mid-size business to make your strategizing process much easier this year. For example, plugging the results from your initial assessment of the positive outcomes and less optimal outcomes from last year, or years past into a SWOT template, allows you to create a SWOT chart listing out all of the identified strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats currently experienced in your business. By identifying these conditions, you can focus on increasing action in the positive categories to boost results. Additionally, looking over weaknesses and threats allows you to enlist processes and actions in these areas to minimize potential pitfalls over the next year. If processes are needed to streamline client relationship management, or marketing efforts, clearly recognizing these areas supports the goal setting strategy.

SWOT also focuses on analyzing multiple areas of your small business simultaneously, while also prioritizes aspects of your business needs which need may new goals, while also making the process more manageable.

How to Conduct a SWOT Analysis for your small and mid-size business

To begin, select your top 3-5 strategies that you intend to focus on for the year. These priorities should have been uncovered in your initial assessment of actual positive results and the less optimal results identified in your initial assessment of the past year. Overall, these goals should align to your strengths and opportunities (S-O) as much as possible. Strengths-based goals focus on positive outcomes, and also caters to your business or your personal talents, while still challenging you to use those strengths and talents in new ways. From this perspective, selecting goals with a few of your personal strengths in mind, or infusing goals that you already have, with the strengths that will help you achieve them.
Recognizing (W-T) weaknesses and threats is also important to discover one to two goal areas to address, however, the majority of the focus should be in cultivating what is working in the business and empowering these processes to grow.
Minimizing the number of top goals to 3-5 allows you to develop processes behind each area. Setting too many goals spreads your focus and resources too thin, ultimately hindering progress and the quality of the outcomes.
Maintaining a laser-like focus on each specific goal, along with the processes developed within each goal area, and maintaining this focus throughout the year, (despite circumstances that may attempt to undermine your success), ensures you accomplish each goal. It is important to review and reflect upon the strategies that you established that you intend to implement. It is vital that you establish your strategies that you intend to accomplish, and equally vital to take time to account for the results along the way.

Here are a few questions to assist in this process:

Are the goals producing outcomes that you identified in the beginning?
Are any adjustments needed?
If you stay on the current track, will your goals be realized?
A key component of successful goal setting is taking the time to review the outcomes.
It is equally important to set aside time to reflect back on previous goals not accomplished. Understanding what went wrong can assist in the productivity and success of current goals.

Here are a few questions to assist in this process:

What prevented these goals from becoming realized?
Did external threats limit progress?
Was something off in the pre-planning stages?

Step #2: Create a Tangible Plan For Setting Small and Mid-Size Business Growth Strategies

Now that you have identified the top business goals for your small and mid-size business, it’s time to break them down into manageable steps. Why? Learning how to set better strategies and small business goals from those strategies implemented in previous years takes time and attention. Learning about why results did or did not occur, is essential in gaining broader understanding in order to take the right actionable steps for the future.

To manage and attain the strategies that you establish, they must be reachable. It is vital that the goals you set are SMART goals. SMART goals are specific, measurable, achievable, relevant and time-bound. Setting strategies that are aligned to SMART goals can help you navigate the unforeseen circumstances that tend to come up throughout the year. When creating and setting the strategy for your small business plan, write them out and assess. A goal map, or outline of the strategies that you set, is helpful and ensures the goals are specifically aligned to the positive results that you identified in your initial review, while also working toward eliminating or optimizing the less than favorable outcomes identified.

If the small business strategies are outlined in a goal map, you are more likely to ensure the goals are not too general, while also keeping the targets that you establish more clear and easily identified in order to include them in your actionable plan for the year. Once the small business strategies are outlined in a goal map, it’s critical that you keep the list or outline front and center all year (and possibly the following years if your goals continue to align). Keeping your goals top-of-mind allow you to stay focused on what the priorities are, while also aligning time investments accordingly. If your goals are too vague or possibly forgotten, they will not become realized.

Another important step toward accomplishing effective small business strategies is sourcing small business tools for setting and accomplishing effective small business growth goals.

Step 3: Focus on What You Can Control / Eliminate Excess

External conditions, such as competition, market conditions, or supply chain constraints present small and mid-size business challenges that cannot be controlled. Mitigating these threats can be accomplished by focusing on what can be controlled, including enlisting additional marketing efforts, client relationship management strategies, and prioritizing products for higher sell through and optimizing the services that you can deliver despite the existing challenges.

Another important step includes clarifying the focus areas, such as new services that may be offered, areas of inventory that can be increased due to inventory constraints, or add marketing efforts to increase sales in a category that looks promising. Do you have a product or service that has sparked new interest with customers? Make this area a focus of attention in content creation, social media and integrating into promotions to existing clients. Upselling current clients can also be a great method of minimizing existing constraints.

Step #4: Be Flexible with Your Goals

From time to time, environmental conditions can hinder the strategies that you have implemented or intended for the year. Unforeseen circumstances, such as unexpected extreme weather, a new competitor in your market, employee turnover, and changes in supply chains, can impact your ability to accomplish the goal. It’s important to review goals and possibly adjust them to meet the new conditions. Additionally, if after consideration and review, it becomes clear that a goal that has been set is unachievable due to weaknesses or threats (W-T), including outside circumstances, it’s important to pivot by re-establishing a new goal in its place. For example, if after reviewing your initial strategies and evaluating goals outlined in the goal map, reassessing your strategies based upon the new conditions, is important to uncover a new more optimal goal moving forward.

Your small and mid-size business goals are essential for success, but they’re only successful if the action plans that back them up are productive. Successful strategies must include a plan and then work that takes action toward accomplishing the plan.

Step #5: Establish Small and Mid-Size Business Leadership Characteristics

In addition to setting goals around your business processes, it’s important to establish personal goals as well. Developing leadership capabilities both personally and for the business is essential. A great area to focus is leadership development includes Kouzes and Posner’s research-based, Five Practices of Exemplary Leadership, which focus on transformation.

With over 20 years’ leadership research, Kouzes and Posner conducted an inventory model, which outlines behaviors and practices rather than personality traits. Applying the model by working toward developing leadership skills and capabilities that are observable and actionable is a great way to invest in yourself.

According to the Five Practices of Exemplary Leadership model, the best leadership practices guide small and mid-size business owners to achieving their best, and to accomplishing extraordinary outcomes. In this sense, mandatory factors of leadership are transformational, where the practices and behaviors of a leader set new outcomes. Here are the steps of the model outlined, which if focused upon will help you develop stronger leadership skills for your business.

The Five Practices of Exemplary Leadership® Model

1) Model the Wa y
Leaders establish principles concerning the way people (constituents, peers, colleagues, and customers alike) should be treated and the way they should pursue goals. Leaders create standards of excellence and set an example for others to follow. They put up signposts when people feel unsure of where to go or how to get there. Leaders create opportunities for victory.

2) Inspire a Shared Vision
Leaders passionately believe they can make a difference. They envision the future and create an ideal and unique image of what the organization can become. Through their magnetism and persuasion, leaders enlist others in their dreams. They breathe life into their visions and get people to see exciting possibilities for the future.

3) Challenge the Process
Leaders search for opportunities to change the status quo. They look for innovative ways to improve the organization. In doing so, they experiment and take risks. Since complex change threatens to overwhelm people and stifle action, leaders set interim goals so that people can achieve small wins as they work toward larger objectives. Effective leaders unravel bureaucracy when it impedes action. And, because leaders know that taking risks involves mistakes and failures, they accept occasional disappointments as opportunities to learn.

4) Enable Others to Act
Leaders foster collaboration and build spirited teams. They actively involve others. Leaders understand that mutual respect sustains extraordinary efforts. They strive to create an atmosphere of trust and human dignity. They strengthen others, making each person feel capable and powerful.

5) Encourage the Heart
Accomplishing extraordinary things in organizations is hard work. To keep hope and determination alive, leaders recognize the contributions that individuals make. In every winning team, the members need to share in the rewards of their efforts, so leaders celebrate accomplishments. They make people feel like heroes.

Jim and Barry called these behaviors The Five Practices of Exemplary Leadership®. Together, these practices provide the basis for The Leadership Challenge®.

How to Create A Survey To Collect Customer Feedback

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sun, 14 Jan 2024 16:51:35 GMT

To help grow your business, including what your customers think of your brand and product is crucial. Therefore, it is important that you know exactly what the customers think.

The feedback that you need can be collected through online customer satisfaction surveys. It will give you an insight that helps you make better decisions and tells you what improvements you need to make.

Such as, what are their likes and dislikes, are your prices too high, is your staff doing well, and so on.

Also, if you are putting a new product on the market or updating the one you already have, the feedback is priceless.

Whether it is about design, functionality, style, or packaging, the customers may point out the problems you would otherwise miss.

Accordingly, here’s how to create a survey to collect customer feedback.

1. Construct the questions properly

Every question you include in your survey should have a defined purpose and a strong reason why it is being formed.

So, make sure to cut off unnecessary questions. Have the purpose of the survey in mind, so the questions are suitable for the purpose.

For example, if knowing the customer’s name or how they found your site does not improve your product or brand, CRM , avoid that question when making a survey.

Also, you will prevent the survey from becoming unnecessarily long and the risk of the customers simply exiting the site.

Another tip when it comes to constructing questions is to use open-ended questions. As a box of text connected to the question may seem overwhelming to one filling in the survey, it surely gives you the most insightful feedback. Visually, multiple-choice questions seem like a better option.

However, the customer will not have the chance to explain their thoughts and concerns. One of the best tactics is to provide a simple introduction followed by a question like ‘Why do you feel this way?’

In addition, try to include one question at a time. If the customer is hit with a series of questions, they might look to get over it as soon as possible.

Focusing on one point at a time will make it easier for them to complete the survey.

Moreover, take advantage of yes/no questions. The customers will appreciate the easy and quick way to respond, and you can follow it with an open-ended question.

2. Be Consistent

What is helpful to the survey takers is that they see consistency in, for example, rating scales.

If you previously told them to rate a claim about a product 1-5, where 1- ‘Strongly Disagree’ and 5= ‘Strongly Agree,’ it should stay consistent until the end of the survey.

The problem can arise if later number 1 is assigned as ‘Most Important’ and 5 the least, as it can become confusing. Consequently, some may miss this chance and give inaccurate answers.

3. Try not to assume

Unless your survey is targeted to a specific subset of people, try not to assume the customers know a lot about the subject in question.

Avoiding assumptions will help you avoid problems such as the customer not understanding the terminology used in the question. Therefore, can’t respond to it properly.

It is advisable to stay away from industry acronyms or jargon.

Also, try not to assume customers will answer with specific examples. It is better to ask them specific questions such as ‘How do you feel about (blank)? Feel free to be specific’.

4. Choose the Right Software

Conducting surveys doesn't have to be a hassle if you use a survey maker. You can try a free tool like Jotform Survey Maker to make collecting feedback easier. It has all the features you would need to help you create engaging surveys. Jotform's easy drag-and-drop interface is really intuitive and can save you loads of time because it requires no coding at all. If you are conducting research or gathering user feedback, letting your users come to you is a very efficient way to collect submissions.

Try their templates to get you started and use conditional logic to make the survey experience worth it for your users. Once your survey is ready, share it with a link or QR code or embed it onto your website. If you need extra features, don't worry because their many app integrations will let you streamline your workflow.

5. Make it Short and Simple

Try to find the shortest way to ask the question without drifting away from its intent.

Accordingly, try to make the survey shot. Therefore, the customers will not quit the survey before they finish as they saw that it would take 30 minutes of their time.

6. Show Gratitude

What shows to be a successful way to entice customers to take the survey is to offer them some stimulus. For example, a discount or a giveaway.

As this may seem to spoil the customers and decrease the quality of the answers, studies show it is not frequently the case.

Of course, your gratitude should be something the brand can afford, which is why some go for free trials rather than gifts or extensive discounts.

Additionally, even though people can do surveys regularly, try not to survey the same customer more than once or twice a year.

It will show your respect to the customer as they won’t get tired or annoyed.

What’s important to remember

Keep in mind that the customer data proved by your survey might not be 100% correct.

Research has shown that a small number of people tend to lie on the survey if the questions include something about their beliefs or belonging.

Plus, there is a possibility that people give inaccurate answers by accident. Yes, predicting the future intentions of those buyers may be difficult in that case.

What happens is that they cannot recall particular details or events or misplace the events in time.

As customers can take many actions to improve one’s memory and focus, one of the fun ones certainly includes jigsaw puzzles.

Conclusion

Whether you want to know how your new product is doing on the market or did the update of an old one do the trick, collecting the customers' feedback is crucial.

It helps you get the perspective of those who consume and support your product.

Therefore, including the customers' opinions and making them part of your success story enables you to grow your business .

Pointing out the disadvantage of the product or service, whether that is about the design, style, or functionality, helps you reduce problems.

Therefore, follow these guidelines in order to create a survey to collect customer feedback successfully.

Important Small Business Trends 2024

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Thu, 23 Mar 2023 22:00:19 GMT

Today, small businesses have more tools at their disposal than ever to drive business growth. From automation and social media management to customer relationship management and analytics, small business owners can easily steer their business towards success.

Unfortunately, the digitization of modern business and marketing methods also brings with it a level of complexity that can make it difficult for business owners that are not tech savvy to know which tools and methods would be appropriate for their enterprise. Moreover, keeping up to date with new tech trends and technologies can also be challenging.

That’s why we’ve put together this article of current small business trends to help you navigate the changing world of business and marketing in 2024 and beyond. Let’s dive in!

# 1 - Large Platforms Continue to Play A Strong Role in Changing the Small Business Model

Undoubtedly the ever-changing economy, the increase of remote work and other forms of hybrid business models is continually changing how we do business. In fact, a recent study revealed that of the over 30 million small businesses in the US, at least 80% operate with no employees. A great example of this is the Amazon ecosystem. In 2023 the company reported an estimated 2,200 small businesses registered under its Delivery Service Partner program.

Other companies with similar opportunities for small businesses include Apple and Google, both which have an ecosystem that creates a platform for developers, service providers and businesses to attract customers.

#2 - Small Business Commerce Is Shifting Online

With the fast-changing business models, including many small businesses ramping up to move product inventory to e-commerce, the way goods and services are bought to consumer have been completely overhauled. In the past, big budgets for TV ads and billboards were the norm. Today, small businesses have taken their storefronts online and continue to see success from social media and other online platforms.

In fact, an Innuit survey found that social media still ranks as the top method of content small businesses acquire new clients. In the study, 75% of respondents admitted to selling their products and/or services online.

Let’s take a closer look at the numbers below:

In 2023, Etsy reported that the number of active sellers on their platform to reach nearly 6.30 million, up from roughly 5.3 million the year before.
Etsy also reported 96.2 million annual users in 2023.
Online marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generated 3X more leads
According to a Statistica survey, in 2023, Amazon reached $746.22 billion in sales, reporting nearly 310 million in active users.
A Statistica survey predicts Meta and Instagram users to reach 1.44 billion by 2025.
In 2023, 30% of SMBs said they plan to boost spending on social media marketing and engagement. With 14% planning to spend their limited budgets on website analytics, 13% of CRM tools and 13% on email marketing services
In 2023, Shopify estimated that there were more than 1.7 million sellers on its platform
18% of small businesses say that 25% of their revenue comes from eCommerce sales
70% of small businesses have ad spend budgets set aside for 2024, with 15-30% allocated for social media.

Clearly, social media and online commerce platforms are a key differentiator in the small business market. And it’s not just new merchants making the switch. Traditional brick-and-mortar retailers are making the switch to eCommerce as well.

Small businesses stuck with legacy marketing and selling systems are likely to lose key business growth opportunities, have poor customer engagement and suffer from poor lead conversations.

#3 - Lack of Resources Continue to Hinder Small Business Growth

Social media marketing, allows SMBs with limited resources to access a wider range of clients than ever before. And yet, market trends still show that for many enterprises, finding time and resources for marketing has been the biggest challenge.

Past reports show that nearly 49% of small business owners handle marketing for their business without external help due to a lack of resources. This tends to be particularly challenging because of the other hats small business owners wear.

#4 - SMB Goals Are Stagnant

Although the world has changed significantly over the past two years, many SMBs are still focusing on driving sales compared to driving innovation.

In a recent study, 28% of surveyed leaders said that driving sales is a top priority for their business. 18% said they are focusing on retaining and re-engaging customers, 11% on building brand awareness or conveying information, 9% state that gaining efficiency and cost saving is a top priority for them and only 6% are focused on collecting leads.

Considering the digitization of the current market, the lackluster focus on innovation and technology investment will likely enhance the challenges SMBs are facing today.

#5 - Software Solutions Offer Efficiency & Simplicity

In the world of small businesses, next generation solutions and software have become must-have tools. Most small businesses are too small to hire additional staff or back-office employees. Naturally these new technologies can offer much-needed relief and fill in the gaps.

A 2021 Clutch report found that at least 80% of small businesses were planning to outsource their critical business functions in 2021, and the number is likely to increase in the coming years.

Additionally, more SMBs are using customer relationship management (CRM) tools. This indicates a growing awareness of the necessity of these tools to achieve growth, with 23% of respondents saying that they use CRM and website analytic tools to help them with their marketing.

But this is not a new trend as far back as 2017, 94% of SMBs were using a combination of SaaS tools like HubSpot, Slack, Trello, BambooHR, and more to enhance and streamline operations like:

HR
Marketing and sales
End-to-end project management

Today, most small businesses don’t need many on-premise staff to operate due to the above-mentioned tools. So let’s take a brief look at how they are disrupting the small business market.

1. Spotlight on HubSpot

As one of the fastest-growing marketing and sales software providers, HubSpot has gained a permanent spot in the small business market. It allows SMBs to create and manage sales and marketing campaigns at a scale that echoes the campaigns we see from much larger organizations.

In 2023, HubSpot generated $2.58 billion in revenue, with the majority of its business coming from SMBs.

2. Trello—End-to-End Project Management Support

If you’re looking for an all-purpose project management tool , Trello has everything you need. The platform offers a digital whiteboard that allows remote or hybrid teams to brainstorm and collaborate seamlessly.

In 2019, the company had over 50 million registered users, a number that has most likely increased, but no data has been published by Trello since then.

3. BambooHR: Simplifying HR

Bamboo HR provides one platform for all your HR management needs. It’s a digital HR department for small businesses. As a result, there’s been an increase in small business users on the platform.

As of 2021, the company had over 22, 000 clients and supports several million average daily users.

#6 - AI Technology Use Is On the Rise

As technology evolves, so does access to critical market data. Business owners now have more access to insights showing what’s working and what’s not. And compared to previous years, 55% of SMBs reported that they have great visibility into whether their marketing efforts are effective. AI adoption is one of the defining trends of 2026 — our small business AI statistics article breaks down exactly how owners are using it and where the gaps remain.

In addition to SaaS tools, the industry is seeing an increase in the adoption of AI-enabled technology. Trends like AI, ML and voice tech are not only becoming more accessible, they’ve become the golden standard for success and agility in today's market.

The great thing is that SMBs don’t have to break the bank to introduce these technologies in their systems. Most of these solutions are being built into the backgrounds of apps and tools already in circulation in the small business world.

As a result, automation will offer unprecedented simplicity, making it easier for small businesses to make data-driven decisions that are market-relevant and customer-centric. Moreover choosing AI-enabled solutions will likely cure the resource challenge and help SMBs save time and take a more approach to marketing.

Lastly, as the relatively new kid on the block, voice technology is disrupting the way businesses connect with customers. For example, in 2020 digital assistants were said to have reached more than 7 billion devices.

Forward-thinking small businesses that combine AI, ML, SaaS tools and voice technologies experience more efficiency, agility and profit.

#7 - An Online Presence Is Essential

The rise of online shopping has made it impossible for the modern SMB to operate without a digital presence . Traditionally, many small businesses relied on the local market, world-of-mouth and paper, magazine or TV ads. In today’s world these methods are slowly becoming obsolete.

Unfortunately, many SMBs struggle to leverage their digital presence, with very few seeing success. Surprisingly, a Techreport market survey revealed that 24% of US SMBs were operating without a website in 2023.

This is particularly worrying because the numbers show that 25% of business is conducted online and likely to grow by more than 25% over the next few years compared to those without one. Moreover, millennials purchase 60% of their goods and services online.

One likely reason for these new trends is the current shift in customer acquisition channels the global move of consumers to online. Additionally, millennials are slowly replacing baby boomers as the main consumer segment globally.

This demand for on-demand digital services is extremely noticeable in the world of digital marketing agencies, where a large portion of advertising is shifting to digital. According to IBS, digital marketing agencies have been mushrooming at an annual rate of 11.6% over the last five years, forcing many traditional, on-premise, local SMBs to invest heavily in digital marketing.

A 2019 Go-Gulf report revealed that at least 50% of Google searches were location dependent, and 97% of interviewed consumers say the Google search engine is their preferred method of searching for local businesses.

Clearly, local SEO is no longer an optional expense for SMBs.

#8 - SMBs Are Becoming More Human-Centric

Like every other business function, marketing can easily turn robotic and impersonal. However, in today’s digital atmosphere, consumers are looking for the human connection and SMBs need to ensure that their marketing and customer engagement strategies are human-centric and authentic.

Many SMBs are realizing this significant shift, investing more and more in tools that enable better communication, service delivery and flexibility.

The best marketing strategy needs to be overwhelmingly human and speak to the emotional aspects of the consumer’s decision-making.

Every small business owner needs to answer the following questions:

What challenge is your business helping your clients overcome?
How do you build trust with your customers online?
How are you helping them become the person they want to be?

The key is to offer more than a product, service or price point.

#9 - SMBs Are Going Cashless And Using Cloud-Based Accounting Software

Many small businesses fail as a result of mismanaged finances. That’s why there’s a growing number of SMBs turning to automation to ease the burden of financial administration.

One growing trend in this direction is that many SMBs are going cashless. While e-commerce businesses were already using digital payment methods, there are many brick and mortar SMBs that are adopting this trend as well.

This makes it easier for SMBs to facilitate transactions on mobile devices and digital point-of-sale systems. Additionally, statistics show that cash purchases above $10 are falling sharply.

Another trend to watch for is the move away from traditional desktop-based accounting software towards digital, cloud-based software. Many SMBs are seeking opportunities to streamline their workflows so they can work more efficiently.

Cloud-based accounting software such as Quickbooks are giving small businesses more options for seamless collaboration with external bookkeepers and accountants while integrating with hundreds of other related applications.

As a result, business-critical functions like workflow management, bookkeeping, scheduling, and other helpful tools can be managed at the click of a button.

#10 - Authenticity Is Emerging As the New Sales Tool

Our world today is oversaturated with information, and many consumers are more cautious when interacting with a new brand. This has a direct impact on the marketing and sales efforts of emerging SMBs that are still starting out or for more established businesses that are trying to penetrate new markets.

On average, a consumer receives 32-85 push notifications on their mobile devices and at least 121 marketing emails. This leads to several challenges such as:

Declining subscriber engagement
Subscriber loss
Compromised data quality and integration
Revenue loss
And more

Successful SMBs need to declutter the chaos and reduce the noise and since 2019 many forward-thinking business leaders are focusing more on authentically educating the buyer of the value their business brings to the buyer compared to impersonal marketing.

Going forward, the customer must always come first, and the products and services SMBs offer need to market themselves. This is the only way to ensure that you spend time delivering value and innovative ways to address your client’s pain points in a way that makes them loyal to your brand.

#11 - AI-Driven Marketing Is Driving Sales

Over the next few years, there’s likely to be a dramatic shift to AI-powered business as major networks aim to remove complexity from the end user. A few examples of this include:

The Netflix movie recommendation feature
Your Facebook newsfeed that’s based on the people you follow and the things you like
Google Maps

All these are great examples of machine learning in action, and the amount of data these networks acquire on user behavior, customer preferences and buying trends is staggering.

What does this mean for SMBs?Data-driven technologies can be leveraged to drive sales if you feed the algorithm with the right data. As a result, small businesses should take the following steps:

Setting up your digital plumbing: In other words, you need to ensure that the backend and frontend of your website is integrated for remarketing
Choosing ROI-based objectives: You need to know what each client is worth at every stage of your sales or marketing funnel, and this means that your systems need to be able to detect and fix anomalies automatically
Loading your product catalogs: Obviously, SMBs cannot compete with giants like Amazon, but having an organized, user-friendly catalog of your products online goes a long way. Your content library needs to come in bite-sized snippets like 15 second videos for Instagram Stories and partial phrases for your website chatbots that are easy to digest

Overall, what’s clear is that the complexity of today’s AI-driven marketing does not allow for any attempts to ‘trick’ the algorithm. SMBs need to follow systemic steps that correctly feed data into their systems.

#12 - Cyberthreats Are Emerging As a Top Concern

While digital connectivity provides numerous benefits of SMBs, it has also become a Pandora's box of emerging cyberthreats that are increasingly becoming sophisticated and harder to beat.

In fact, a recent Intuit survey found that cybersecurity is the biggest threat to SMB stability, with many owners shying away from digital technology due to this threat.

A major concern for SMBs is the lack of resources to sufficiently defend their IT infrastructure and hackers know this. That’s why SMBs have become a primary target for cyber criminals. Industry experts estimate that at least 50% of all data breaches affect small businesses.

In the past year, over 61% of SMBs have been a victim of one or more cyber attacks, and while cyber insurance can mitigate the risk, over 90% of SMBs have not purchased any form of cyber insurance.

And the influx of new technologies like SaaS tools and IoT devices are increasing the attack surface of many SMBs. Unfortunately, there’s no easy solution to the problem as more than 32% of SMBs say that a lack of funds is their biggest challenge when dealing with cybersecurity threats, according to a recent SMB IT Security Report.

Conclusion

As technology continues to evolve, the world of small businesses is also going through unending changes. While it’s become relatively easy for SMBs to gain insight into the market, the majority of businesses don’t have the necessary funding and resources to leverage the opportunities presented by digital transformation.

It’s a sticky situation to be in, considering the rise in consumer demand for digital-ready services and products from SMBs. Nevertheless, with a bit more focus and time, small businesses will likely whether the digital wave fairly well.

Top 10 Technologies To Learn In 2023

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Thu, 23 Mar 2023 16:45:59 GMT

The pandemic has changed our lives in a whole new way. We are all relying on technology a lot more, so what better way to make use of the new way of life than to learn as much as we can about modern technologies.

That's why in this article, we're talking about the top 10 technologies you should know in 202 3 .

So let's get started with number 10

Number 10: Blockchain

Blockchain is the tech behind Bitcoin, but it has so much more to offer than just cryptocurrencies. Blockchain has become one of the most prominent combatants to deep fakes and fake news by fingerprinting the video at the source. The system leaves a digital footprint that can be traced easily. Blockchain is being widely adopted for transactions mainly because it removes the need for an intermediary and improves security.

Organizations like Darpa, Axiom, Factom, and Axiom Enterprises are currently working on several Blockchain applications. As of 2020, the global blockchain market is expected to grow from 3 billion dollars in 2020 all the way to 39.7 billion dollars by the year 2025. To learn Blockchain, you need to be experienced with programming languages like the fundamentals of OOPS, flat and relational databases, data structures, and web app development and networking.

Number 9: Quantum Computing

Next up is Quantum Computing, a form of computing that takes advantage of quantum phenomena like superposition and quantum entanglement. It is also most recently involved in preventing the spread of coronavirus and developing potential vaccines. This is mainly because of its ability to easily monitor, analyze, query, and act on data regardless of the source.

In banking and finance, quantum computing can assist in the management of credit risk. In high-frequency trading and fraud detection, quantum computers are thousands of times faster than regular computers. Organizations like Splunk, Google, Microsoft, Honeywell, AWS, and many others are now involved in making innovations in the field of quantum computing.

By 2029, the revenues for the global quantum computing market are projected to surpass 2.5 billion dollars . If you want to learn quantum computing, you need experience with:

Quantum mechanics
Linear algebra
Probability
Information theory
Machine learning

Number 8: 5G

4G and 3G technology have provided us with the ability to browse the internet, use data-driven services, increase bandwidths for streaming on Netflix, YouTube, Spotify, and so much more.

In a similar fashion, 5G technology and services are expected to transform our day-to-day lives. 5G is enabling services that rely on advanced technologies like AR and VR alongside cloud-based gaming services like Nvidia Geforce Now and Google Stadia, and so much more.

This new technology is expected to be used in various areas like factories, HD cameras that improve safety and traffic management, smart grid control, and smart retail. Almost every telecom company like Verizon, T-mobile, Apple, Nokia Corp, and Qualcomm are currently working on creating 5G applications.

Predictions are that 5G services will launch worldwide in about 30 countries with more than than 50 operators by the end of 2021.

Number 7: The Internet of Things (IoT)

IoT is likely to evolve into the intelligence of things as more devices become AI-enabled. We expect to see significant growth in IoT software and hardware applications thanks to remote access demand, changing industry dynamics, and economic stimulus.

Smart manufacturing and healthcare are expected to adopt IoT in a wave that will bring about industry 4.0. AI-enabled medical IoT devices can have applications in:

Clinical decision-making
Thermal image recognition
Surgical Assistance
Smart clinics
Telemedicine centers

Companies like SAP, Huawei, Siemens, IBM, and Cisco are now all working on creating new IoT applications. It is expected that there will be over 35 billion IOT devices installed globally by 2021 and 75.44 billion by 2025 .

For you to get started with IoT, you need to learn about information security, machine learning and AI, networking, hardware interfacing, business intelligence tools, and UX slash UI design.

Number 6: Cyber Security

Given the current and future online environment, cyber security is going to be a significant focus for many organizations. There is likely to be an increase in protecting smaller organizations from cyber attacks. The focus will be on:

Protecting the identities and devices of remote workers
Preventing access to confidential patient records
Protecting smart supply chains, to name a few

The need for proper cyber security is so high that according to Cyber Crime Magazine, 6 trillion dollars will be spent globally on cyber security by the end of 2021. Some major players within this industry include; Fortinet, Microsoft, Cisco, Splunk, Palo Alto Networks, to name a few.

To get started with cyber security, you'll need skills like IT and network fundamentals, coding skills, cloud security, and malware analysis.

Number 5: Augmented Virtuality and Extended Reality (AR, VR)

In 2021 we should see these forms of technologies being further integrated into our lives, mainly working together with some of the other technologies we've mentioned in the list.

AR and VR are expected to play a significant role in the healthcare industry by providing training simulations to assist medical professionals and for opticians to perform eye tests. These technologies might also play a massive role in the educational sector by improving interactivity.

The VR video and gaming market is expected to grow to 2.9 and 2 billion in 2021, respectively. Companies like Microsoft, Snap, AT&T, and Nexus Studios are some of the major players working towards AR and VR.

To get started, you need skills like:

Software development,
AR, VRmaintenance support
Design/graphics
Hardware engineering

Number 4: DARQ

At number four, we have Darq, an emerging technology on which several significant industries have set their sights.

Darq technology combines distributed ledger technology, artificial intelligence, extended reality, and quantum computing. Accenture (who is responsible for creating Darq) believes that these technologies combined could have an enormous impact on technology as a whole.

Darq is mainly focused on the healthcare industry where it is expected to have several benefits such as:

Cheaper cost of care
Improved labor productivity
Better experiences for consumers and partners

However, only a few organizations have started taking advantage of this technology because it's currently in development. To be proficient in Darq, you'll need skills related to each of its contributing technologies like DLT, AI, XR, and Quantum Computing.

Number 3: As-A-Service

As-a-service cloud services are expected to offer even more benefits and make the technology like robotics and AI accessible to every business.

Thanks to corporations like Google, Amazon, Microsoft, and several startups and innovators, cutting-edge technology is accessible to everyone with little investment. Serverless computing is also becoming popular. It gives users a platform to work on the core product without the hassle of operating and managing the servers.

Hybrid cloud services are expected to grow thanks to their speed, ease of control, and security options. Global IAAS, PAAS, and SAAS markets are expected to grow to 81 billion dollars, 72 billion dollars, and 140.6 billion dollars, respectively.

If you want to tap into this industry, you'll need to have an understanding of concepts like:

The different cloud computing platforms
Programming languages
Specialized services that belong to compute
Storage
Database domains

Number 2: Automation

There is an increasing number of potential cases and initiatives towards self-driving vehicles, such that civic authorities and many other organizations worldwide will be focusing on automation.

Automation ensures that the cost of human labor is reduced and handles customer demand. There might also be an increase in the adoption of robots in the care and assisted living industries. We could see robotic devices providing companionship to elderly people and drones being used for the delivery of groceries, medicine, groceries, and other essential goods.

Some of the major players in the field of automation are Mistubishi Siemens and Honeywell. To learn automation, you will need skills like:

Scripting and Programming
Configuration management software
Knowledge of testing tools and so on

Number 1: Artificial Intelligence

And finally, the top technology you should get involved in is Artificial Intelligence (AI). AI is an industry that's expected to see the most amount of growth in 2021. It can help interpret and understand the limitless amount of content produced.

AI has a direct impact on machine learning algorithms which would become better informed and be capable of performing much more sophisticated operations. AI is expected to be used to analyze interactions, determine underlying connections and insights. This data will improve predictions concerning the demand for services like hospitals and enable authorities to make better decisions about resource utilization.

AI can be used by businesses to detect the changing patterns of customer behavior and see the various ways they can be satisfied. Global spending on AI and Cognitive systems is expected to reach 57.6 billion dollars by the end of 2021.

To get involved in AI, you'll need skills such as:

Programming languages
Linear algebra
Probability
Big data machine learning algorithms etc

Ways of Creating High-Quality Content

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Mon, 19 Dec 2022 20:17:06 GMT

How to create high-quality content for a modern website

Have you ever stopped to wonder what high-quality content is? Every successful business needs high-quality content to become shared on their website . That's why understanding what differentiates content that is considered "quality" is important. This article will take you through everything you need to know about high-quality content creation for your small business website.

When looking to thrive in the current business climate, and to exceed your competition in the search engine rankings (SERPS), it's important to publish high-quality content.

As much as it sounds uncomplicated, challenges do exist, as people commonly think their preferences are automatically quality. Additionally, we find business owners tend to focus on things they know best, such as word count, keywords, and formatting. In reality, high-quality content involves other factors. In fact, what makes content high-quality hinges upon search engine optimization (SEO). Therefore, the key issue relating to high-quality content for SEO is the content itself.

What is high-quality content?

With the previous descriptions outlined, how do we define and explain high-quality content? Here is a quick list to help explain and assist you with creating content for your website to achieve this years' marketing goals.

5 Factors to Identify High-Quality Website Content:

High-quality content is comprehensive
High-quality content must be very useful
High-quality content offers maximum help
High-quality content educates by giving people the required information
High-quality content is accurate

In some instances, the main focus of producing content is increasing the number of times the content is shared on Twitter. Content that gets more shares on social media, is considered successful. If the goal is generating more qualified leads, writing content specifically to a targeted audience is the goal. As audiences connect to quality content, the business successfully captures qualified leads.

The Value and Effectiveness of Content Depend on Key Performance Indicators (KPI)s:

Google ranks the website in the top three for your target keywords
Content increases brand awareness and customer loyalty
Content successfully generates leads and sales
Content increases click-through rates and lower bounce rates
Content escalates overall web traffic by having a strong overall presence in organic search results
Content acquires more social shares and generates more traffic to your site from social media platforms
On-site conversions and the bottom-line revenue are enhanced
Content draws in several relevant links from the authoritative domain

Ways of Creating High-Quality Content

Production of content should begin after you have already set up the parameters to boost and contribute to the success or failure of your content marketing strategy.

1. Be knowledgeable with what is trending and then come up with numerous content ideas
It is important to remember that the topic you choose is a big deal in terms of how your marketing will go. Each piece of content has to start with a topic. Selecting a topic requires considering what is relevant and will relate to your audience. Do market research to find your audience’s preferences and ensure that you take time to survey and look at the kind of content that your competitors are putting out. Tools including, BuzzSumo and Exploding Topics, will help you compare notes and look at your competitors’ content. It is also important to keep a copy of the list of topics that you come across. Use these topics to fill in your annual marketing calendar so that you don’t have to struggle or waste time when you are looking for a topic.

2. Ensure that you come up with topics that are personalized and unique by adding your perspective
As you explore the world of SEO and content creation, remember that you can always reuse older content. The idea is to recycle old content and positively update it to suit your current needs and website. The process involves looking through previous content, and selecting new ideas from each. By enhancing previous content articles bringing points together in new, unique ways, saves time and also ensures great quality content becomes re-shared. Recycling previous content does test creativity, as the goal is to create interesting and unique content for your audience. But, sharing content more than once, ensures your audience connects to the content.

3. Target a specific niche subtopic
It is common to find ourselves writing on a broad level. Breaking from the norm and digging a little deeper, is a strategy. This is because the competition will most likely be less competitive at the niche level. A great example would be someone looking to write for a topic such as, "dog training." In this case, this topic is rather broad and you can imagine how many other competitors are using that same keyword. Having said that, looking for details to make content more specific, especially at the beginning stages of the content creation process. Detailed writing provides a greater chance of creating unique content and allows your content to become an authority on a subject. In the, "dog training" example, settling on "dog training behavior" or "dog training commands" will have a high chance of ranking on the first page. Narrowing down the search term makes content become a big fish in a small pond, where the content will be specific to an audience looking for the exact information offered.

For those who want to analyze keywords and topics, you can use the provided tools such as Jaaxy to analyze keywords and topics. This means that as you choose a topic, and concentrate on the subtopics within your niche that are rarely discussed, so that you can connect with an audience.

4. Create diverse multimedia content
People tend to relate more when the content articles contain visuals such as images, charts or infographics, than when it is all plain text. The types of visual assets that complement and enhance written content will include:

Videos
Gifs
Memes
Screenshots
Photos
Infographics
Charts

Making use of multimedia ensures that your content is enhanced and therefore increases engagement. The audience is more likely to understand concepts and ideas when they are illustrated and when multimedia is incorporated.

5. Identify the intent of your search and Call-to-Action (CTA)
As you create your content, it is important to keep in mind what your audience’s intention is. Your newly created content should answer a specific question. Factor in the needs of your audience and the desired goals that you seek to achieve.

6. Do thorough research to maintain trust and authority
As you create content, ensure that it is trustworth y, which simply means that you need to do thorough research and find meaningful and factual data that backs up your assessments. Even as you decide to write content that could be derived from your personal experience, conduct research so that you do not risk losing your audience by giving inaccurate information. As you cite information, also make sure that it is current and up to date. It is advisable to use Google alerts so that you are updated on your topics of interest.

7. Employ the right formatting to enable readability
Your content should b e readable not only for your audience, but also for search engines so that they can crawl, index, and rank your website. Your overall performance is greatly determined by how you format your content. Formatting has to do with headings and subheadings, lists, and small blocks of text broken up by white spaces so that they are easy to digest.

8. Capitalize on your own experiences, studies, and data
It can be a huge plus for SEO when you create your data and capitalize on the content that gives insights about your experiences. Your level of authority is likely to make people take content more seriously. When you can put more descriptive content out there and make detailed and useful content, your audience will most likely refer to and share your website with other people. Backlinks on credible websites can help to give your website ranking a massive boost.

9. Review and edit your content before you publish
High-quality content requires that you avoid publishing first drafts. Take time to proofread your work. Having an editorial calendar comes in handy as you can check your deadlines and give yourself enough time to write an article. Pushing out hastily written, unedited content, will most likely result in low levels of engagement.

10. Use analytical data to measure content performance and adjust your strateg y
Overall, your content’s success will be expressed in numbers. You might think you are producing high-quality content, but your audience may disagree. In this case, what matters is the feedback that you get from your audience regarding what content is valuable and what is not. Make sure you use your top KPIs that we discussed at the beginning of this article to gauge how your content is doing. Observe which topics are performing well and which ones bring little or no traffic.

Conclusion
We cannot deny that standing out with high-quality content is key in today’s digital world. To stand out, quality has to be your number one goal. It will cement your authority with the audience, help you create engaging articles, and ensure that your website is picked up by search engines. While creating high-quality content is one of the most complex aspects of SEO, it has proven to be the most rewarding and the best strategy to create traffic to your website and stay above your competition.

As you strive to become better, the trick is not to compete for trending content but to create content that is better than that produced by your competitors. Before you put your content out there, put yourself in your audience's shoes and ask yourself whether the content helps answer your questions, solves your problems, and adds value to their life or business.

How to be an Entrepreneur in 2023

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Wed, 09 Nov 2022 02:06:06 GMT

What Strength Distinguishes an Entrepreneur From Others?

We are currently in the golden age of entrepreneurship. Many millennials and Gen Z want to become entrepreneurs , and there's a good reason why. Think about the mega-success that has been achieved by Amazon, Airbnb, Apple, Google, and Facebook.

Everyone loves a rags-to-riches story, and starting your own business is probably the biggest dream that most people have nowadays. In 2022 alone, there were as many as 33.2 million small businesses started by entrepreneurs in the United States.

Becoming a successful entrepreneur may not have specific professional requirements. Still, it takes lots of k nowledge, passion, and a drive to achieve . It's also an industry that requires someone who is risk-averse and has support to handle failure, sometimes multiple failures.

But how do you get to be an entrepreneur?

Most of the information you will come across on the web focuses on the practicalities of becoming an entrepreneur. For example, you might bump into information about:

How to write a business plan
Raising money
Finding the right staff,
Marketing
PR

While all these are great things to know, we'll go a different route in this article.

What is Entrepreneurship?

But first things first, let’s discuss the definition of entrepreneurship.

Simply put, an entrepreneur is a person " who organizes, manages, and assumes the risks of a business or enterprise. " An entrepreneur can often take on more risk than the average business person and possibly reap more fantastic rewards.

Entrepreneurship has a particular element of excitement. Most entrepreneurs are incredibly passionate about their business. At the same time, they address a variety of social, business, commuting, economic and technological problems.

Entrepreneurship is an essential resource in production. All entrepreneurs contribute to the global economy by using land, labor, and capital to provide goods and services.

Different ways of approaching entrepreneurship

There are a few things you need to keep in mind. Raising money or finding capital funding can be hard to come by for new entrepreneurs. So almost everyone starts small and invests their own resources into the project.

Some entrepreneurs start projects alone, and that's completely fine. Just remember that in this case, you'll be taking on the risk-reward ratio with no help. Some may find this disconcerting and seek partnerships. These entrepreneurs tend to have the benefit of additional credit and resources; additionally, their businesses tend to grow faster, seeing more tremendous success.

That said, as we've mentioned before, most of the information you will find on the subject will discuss how an entrepreneur should create solid business plans that lay out the resources required for financing, hiring, and the leadership of a new business.

But in our eyes, at the heart of successful entrepreneurship lies something oddly more abstract:
an accurate insight into what causes human unhappiness. An entrepreneur needs to become an expert in the things that make life difficult for people.

Think about it, all the big new companies we have today came about because they were trying to fix a problem for a particular group of people. For example, if you look at Airbnb, the whole concept was based on solving a hotel room shortage in San Francisco during conventions.

So the bigger and more original your idea, the more successful your business is likely to be.

How to become an entrepreneur in 2022

Now let’s discuss what you came here for.

1. Identify a problem you can solve

The entrepreneur path always starts with a great idea. Something as simple as a conversation with a friend can get your wheels turning. But that’s where some people stop because as the consumer society has become more developed, it’s easy to think that all the big problems out there already have been solved.

Imagine all those pizza outlets, car companies, or news websites. Indeed there's enough of everything. What can you possibly add to such an over-saturated market? The good news is that there is always something that needs fixing.

However, to get a sense of the vast opportunities that still remain in capitalism, all you need to do is ask yourself one simple question:

Where and in what areas are you unhappy in the course of an average day?

Every unhappiness or challenge you can identify is really a new business waiting to be born. The things that frustrate you are a nearly inexhaustible source of raw ideas from which future enterprises can be built. So while there may already be plenty of organic baby food, unique clothing, apps, and mobile devices for sale, there's so much more than frustrates and depresses the human race.

For example, think of how difficult it is to have a successful relationship nowadays, cope with mental issues, educate children, figure out what you want to do with your life, find a nice place to live, wind down after a busy day, and so on. The list of griefs and irritations is endless.

2. Come up with a business plan

Once you've identified a problem you are passionate about solving, you can then start creating the business plan. This plan should, of course, be centered around your consumer problem-solving idea.

So let's say you're watching the news. There's a report that your city lacks sufficient daycare centers for the working population. A great entrepreneur will recognize this shortage as an opportunity. So the first step would be to figure out whether surrounding areas or counties share the same problem.

Your business plan here would be to open a childcare facility with multiple corporate partners who support your city and the surrounding areas. As so many businesses employ parents with small children who have no access to dependable childcare, there's clearly plenty of customers and revenue to be made.

3. Ensure profitability by failure-proofing your idea

The most significant first step to take towards entrepreneurship is studying your own unhappiness and what might possibly heal it for you and others. This aspect has to remain at the core driving force of your business.

When businesses experience a decline in profits, it’s really the result of too many people throwing themselves at trying to fix the same area. This is because the whole industry can’t think of anything more innovative to do other than doing what’s already been churned out.

Think about how many people are talking about starting their own Facebook, Spotify, supermarket chain, or Amazon? Plenty right?

By contrast, failure-proofing your idea but not copying what others are doing is the best way to ensure healthy profits. These are the rewards for understanding and mastering an area of human distress ahead of anyone else.

4. Expand your education (formal and informal)

It's pretty evident that ideas aren't enough on their own; you need to take care of practicalities such as education. Whether you choose to go for formal education or not, this is an essential ingredient for entrepreneurial success.

Suppose you find it beneficial for your journey. In that case, you can try a college degree program, apprenticeship, or a variety of work experience. Learn the basics of business, build your vocabulary, and have solid business acumen.

You'll inevitably incur frequent problems when starting a business, and knowing how to overcome them is vital for you to thrive.

We also recommend looking for inspiration and mentorship. Make sure you explore a variety of success stories (and even failures) of certain entrepreneurs. Doing so will help you comprehend the tenacity required and inspire you to keep working on your goal to resolve a human problem or unhappiness.

5. Learn to manage money

You can't focus on or succeed in solving human unhappiness or irritation if you have no money. In fact, one of the primary reasons some entrepreneurs fail is the lack of money management skills. If you run out of money quickly, you can't sustain the business.

Money management also means knowing how to raise capital. The three ways to obtain capital include:

Applying for a loan: This is perhaps the most common way of raising capital. You can approach your local bank for a loan but keep in mind that it may not be possible for a small business to get a loan this early. However, most governments have loan facilities that you can approach.
Find an investor: With proper networking, you can find an investor willing to provide financial aid. This is where having a solid business plan comes in handy. You can pitch the idea to an angel investor, or you can approach a venture capitalist firm. Although these firms require entrepreneurs and their businesses to meet specific requirements to apply.
Bootstrap: In other words, go at it alone. You can use your personal funds to start your company.

While it's good to raise capital, every entrepreneur should have savings to fall back on. Statistics show that many entrepreneurs don't start to turn a profit until at least three to five years after the business has begun. So it's good to always have a backup plan should the market change during those years.

6. Know your target audience

Know who your idea will appeal to. You must have a good idea about who you're selling to. Their age, income, culture, gender, race, etc., will play a huge role in determining how you run your business and how you'll tailor-make your product to ease their unhappiness or challenge.

Conclusion

While there are many things you should know and do to become a successful entrepreneur, these methods won't be of much help if your original psychological insight into human unhappiness isn't sound.

It goes without saying if your insight into what makes people unhappy is accurate and your solutions bold, then regardless of how difficult the journey is, your business will stand a high chance of making money and benefiting humanity too.

Employee Engagement Statistics You Need to Know

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 24 Jun 2022 22:27:10 GMT

It’s no longer business as usual. The pandemic has shifted the way we do life and business. With remote or hybrid workplaces becoming the norm, business leaders are scrambling to find solutions that can help them keep employees engaged and productive regardless of location.

Unfortunately, this is no easy feat, in fact, research shows that only 20% of employees today are completely engaged in the work they do. So, what’s the issue? Well, to start off, many business leaders struggle to define what employee engagement means for their organization. Moreover, inaccurate data on employee satisfaction can create unsustainable policies that decrease company morale. Going forward business leaders need all the data they can get their hands on to fuel the right decisions—and these 8 employee engagement statistics are a great starting point. But before we dive into the numbers, let’s take an in-depth look at the definition of employee engagement and its importance in today’s digital workplace.

What Is Employee Engagement?

Today’s industry research shows that 63.3% of more than 600 US businesses , with 50-500 employees, are finding it harder to retain employees compared to hiring them.

Employees are demanding and expecting more from the companies they work for—and it’s not just benefits they’re after. Workers today look at the company as a whole, so everything from company values, well-being programs, flexibility, and development opportunities are under scrutiny.

Moreover, more than a third of workers are actively or casually searching for a job, meaning US employers have to constantly churn out money looking for replacement workers, reportedly at a cost of $2.9 million per day!

In all of this chaos, employee engagement is emerging as a saving grace for businesses that want to mitigate high turnover rates. But investing in employee engagement isn’t about making your workers happy or keeping them satisfied.

So, what is employee engagement?

Think about it this way, while an employee might be happy with the benefits you offer or the work environment, this ‘satisfaction’ or ‘happiness’ doesn’t necessarily translate to engagement.

So in a nutshell, employee engagement is an emotional and intellectual commitment an employee has to an organization and its goals. But this is just one definition, in fact experts and research companies all have different takes on what employee engagement is.

When employees feel engaged, they care deeply about the success of the company and they are willing to go above and beyond to drive organizational objectives and achieve the company’s goals.

Engaged employees are focused on contributing to the company’s success by any means necessary—be it weekend calls, working overtime, finding new growth opportunities, improving internal processes etc.

Why Is Employee Engagement Important?

For an engaged employee, the job represents something of value to them, so they are willing to do their best work to achieve the business’s goals and contribute to the success of the business.

As a result, developing employee engagement strategies has become a top priority for most businesses and here’s why:

Increased productivity: Engaged employees strive to outperform their peers, meaning that companies with a higher percentage of engaged employees are likely to be 21% more profitable.
Improved workplace morale: Energy is everything, even in the workplace. When the working environment is tense, unfriendly, draining or uninspiring nothing gets done.
Reduced absenteeism: Successful employee engagement strategies can reduce absenteeism by 41% according to this Gallup study.
Better customer service: As a cornerstone of modern success ensuring that the quality of your customer service delivery does not diminish is essential. And engaged employees generally offer better CX.
Low employee engagement is costly: On average it costs US businesses $4,129 on average to hire new talent , and around $986 to onboard the new hire. So, every time an employee walks out the door employees are set to lose $5,000 each time, not to mention the unquantifiable cost of losing an experienced employee!

Now let’s take a look at some eye-opening employee engagement statistics you need to know today.

8 Employee Engagement Statistics You Need to Know

There are hundreds of statistics on employee engagement available online. To help you sift through the hype, we’ve selected 8 of the most important ones that you should know.

1. Good Company Culture = 4X the Revenue

Does corporate culture drive financial performance? The answer is a resounding YES!

One long-term study found that companies with the best corporate cultures experience at least 4x the revenue compared to those with unhealthy working environments which grew only 166% in revenue.

In the same study, at least 47% of people actively searching for a new job cite company culture as the driver behind their decision to leave.

Basically, the study reveals that company culture and employee engagement feed off each other and a business that can master both will enjoy the benefits of increased revenue, increased productivity and increased employee engagement.

2. 1 in 3 Professionals Are Bored at Work

According to a 2018 Korn Ferry Survey, 33% of surveyed respondents cite boredom as their main reason for changing jobs. This points to very low levels of employee engagement.

Another common reason cited by 24% of interviewed employees is that the work culture didn’t fit the employee or their values. A pay rise was the reason chosen by 19% of the respondents.

Again we see that money is no longer the primary driver of high turnover. Ensuring that your employees find their jobs fulfilling and challenging is critical, so is creating an environment of flexibility that allows employees to develop themselves and learn.

3. 37% of Employees Consider Recognition the Most Important Factor

Did you know that employees value workplace recognition? This study found that 37% of employees feel that workplace recognition is the most important method of support.

Some other numbers you should know include:

12% of employees want more autonomy
12% need to be more inspired by their job
7% want a pay rise
6% want their employers to support skill building and training
4% want a promotion

So, essentially over a third of employees place that much importance on workplace recognition compared to other needs.
But what kind of recognition do employees want?

43% of employees prefer to receive private recognition with a manager, while 10 % would rather be recognized in front of their peers. On the other hand 9% would prefer written recognition.

So, what’s the lesson here? Well, managers and business leaders should not take their employees for granted, doing so will result in low employee engagement. Instead your business should take steps to ensure that every employee feels heard and valued. I mean, who doesn’t love a pat on the back for a job well done?

4. Only 29% of Employees Feel That Their Companies Provide Ample Career Advancement Opportunities

According to a 2017 report on employee job satisfaction and engagement, only 29% of employees are “very satisfied” with current career advancement opportunities available to them in the organization they work for.

Moreover, 41% consider skills development as a very important factor to job satisfaction. As a result, managers and company leaders need to create internal career development programs that bolster employee satisfaction and engagement.

The study also revealed that while 30% of employees feel that career development opportunities are essential, very few of them were happy with the programs being offered in their current organization.

5. Europe has the Lowest Levels of Employee Engagement in the World

A recent Gallup’s State of the Global Workplace study found that only 15 percent of employees are engaged in the workplace.

What these numbers mean is that a majority of the global workforce are either viewing their workplace negatively or getting by with the bare minimum with very little to no emotional attachment.

Moreover, the study also reveals several geographical differences, for example:

In the US, 33% of employees are engaged at work. This is close to twice the global average.
In Western Europe, only 10% of employees are engaged at work, at 8% the number is even lower in the U.K.

6. 73% of Employees Are Hearing About New Opportunities

A recent survey of over 3, 000 respondents uncovered that at least 73% of the interviewed are either actively looking for a job elsewhere or would consider leaving their client employer—and it's not just about the money.

74% of younger employees would be willing to take a pay cut for an ‘ideal’ job, and 23% would be willing to take up a new position without a pay increase.

Clearly the old rules don’t work anymore. Modern employees are looking for more engagement in the workplace. So an environment that fosters employee relationships and promotes a great work-life balance is more attractive than monetary compensation.

Additionally, a workplace with high turnover will likely experience a continued employee exodus as employees are more likely to look for another job if their co-workers are doing so as well.

7. $450-500 Billion Each Year—The Cost of Low Employee Engagement

The cost of low employee engagement is staggering. A recent workplace engagement study found that in the U.S alone low employee engagement cost organizations in the country around $450-550 billion each year.

Why are the numbers so high? Well for one, disengaged workers are more likely to take on less responsibility in the workplace, resulting in less productivity.

So, how can you circumvent this problem? The study recommends focusing on personal agency and investment in personal engagement monitoring tools. Lastly, it’s important to connect the employees’ job to your organization’s missions, provide recognition and encourage collaboration.

8. Companies with Highly Engaged Workforce Are 21% More Profitable

Contrary to popular belief, employee engagement is not based on emotional reviews about employee well-being. Rather, it has a very real impact on business success, and should be considered as an integral part of your business strategy.

In fact, according to Gallup’s meta-analysis, businesses that have robust employee engagement strategies had 21% higher levels of profitability compared to those in the lowest quartile. Moreover, these companies also demonstrated 17% more productivity.

Clearly, the most successful organizations are likely to have exceptional employee engagement programs that focus on providing employees the best knowledge, communication, support, and tools available to enable them to perform their duties well.

Unfortunately, the reality on the ground is that most business leaders are struggling to effectively communicate with workers. In fact, a recent Interact/Harris Poll shows that 91% of the surveyed employees say that their leaders cannot communicate effectively. Additionally, according to the Edelman Trust Barometer, at least 1 in 3 employees don’t trust their employers.

How Has the Pandemic Affected Employee Engagement?

The negative impact of the COVID-19 pandemic has been felt in the employee engagement sector as well, with employees feeling the brunt of the burden.

Think about it this way, many employees had to cope with new ways of working. They had to adjust to operating new technologies remotely without the physical assistance of IT.

Moreover, balancing the responsibilities of work and family became even harder as the boundary between work life and home life melted away. Not to mention the worries surrounding health and job security were rife.

But now that the pandemic is somewhat over, how are employees today feeling about their jobs and the organizations they work for? Are they motivated and engaged or has the pandemic left them feeling drained and disinterested?

While there is no universal answer to this question, some newly released statistics might be able to help us get a better understanding of the impact of the pandemic on employee engagement.

Let’s check them out below.

According to Gartner, 88% of organizations are actively encouraging or requiring employees to work from home regardless of whether or not they are sick
While at least 66% of employers have significantly increased their communication and listening efforts, very few are using formal listening approaches. For example, just 31% have formal procedures such as surveys and focus groups. conduct employee surveys and 13% conduct focus groups (Willis Towers Watson)
According to Chief Executive only 47% of employers have put frameworks in place to meet a crisis with the best possible outcome
A Statistica survey in the UK showed that 73% of employees believed they were more efficient when working from home
Most employees cite that a top advantage of working from home include no commute time (47%) and more flexibility (43%) (the new stack)
22% of remote employees reveal that they have a difficult time unplugging after work (Buffer)
According to Forbes, one week of virtual meetings leaves 38% of employees feeling exhausted, with while 30% feeling acute stress
A Harvard Business Review study uncovered that since the beginning of the pandemic, 75% of employees feel more socially isolated, with 57% feeling greater anxiety, and 53% say they feel more emotionally exhausted
85% of employees feel more engaged and motivated when they receive regular updates on company news (Trade Press Services)
According to Perceptyx only 42% of employees feel confident that agree that their leadership is effectively leading their organization through the crisis
The same Perceptyx study also revealed that 96% of employees felt that proper coronavirus response updates made them feel safer in the workplace
Bloomberg found that during the pandemic, employees worked up to three hours more each day
Since the pandemic, 20% of remote employees say that they feel a lack of belonging and sometimes feel lonely (Forbes)
According to the Harvard Business Review, employees who feel their manager has poor communication are 23% more likely to experience mental health issues
According to Cityam, 86% of employees feel pressured to prove to management that they are working hard and deserve to keep their jobs
A Gartner study revealed that 16% of employers are using employee monitoring technologies such as virtual clocking in and out, tracking work computer usage, email and internal chat monitoring
According to the Harvard Business Review, more than 90% of employees said they would have preferred weekly communication from their company; 29% said they prefer daily communication

What Can You Do To Boost Employee Engagement?

Well, one thing you need to look at to improve your employee engagement efforts is your internal communication.

How well your teams communicate with each other and with management, can mean the difference between failure and success. A great communication strategy creates an environment that allows your staff to feel more informed, secure and motivated to achieve the company’s goals.

Moreover, effective internal communication can greatly improve the workplace environment and enhance productivity. So before you start strategizing on how to boost employee engagement, start with improving your internal communications.

How to Create a People First Company Culture

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 15 Apr 2022 18:11:15 GMT

The path to creating a people-first company culture involves developing a more connected, internally motivated workforce.

Organizational leaders in the fields of human resources management (HRM) and organizational development (OD) have consistently and widely identified people to be the most valuable resource existing within any organization. As a result, many organizational leaders now understand the value of their workforce.

These companies have intentionally implemented a people-centered culture , where individuals are consistently valued. In these organizations, people have the ability to grow, respond and change, particularly when supported by a healthy organizational culture.

What are people-first cultures?

People-first cultures are known to be rooted in belief systems and uphold organizational espoused beliefs where individuals are valued above profits. In these organizations, the role of individuals and interactions among teams, whether localized or working remotely, are prioritized. Organizations with people-first cultures are known to have a more resilient and profitable bottom line. By valuing people such as, employees and groups, or teams, the results benefit the bottom line.

An example of a people-centric approach benefiting bottom line outcomes is Marriott Corporation. The company’s mission: “If we take care of our people, they will take care of our customers, and the customers will come back,” has succeeded by putting people first. With over six thousand locations and nearly $23 billion in annual revenue, the company has navigated industry and global set backs, resisting the “shareholders first” thinking and keeping employees as the top priority.

Marriott has persisted to align to its mission of people over profits. Among Marriott’s leadership team , an understanding of the power of a people-centric culture, and that when people feel valued and cared for, they experience strong intrinsic motivation, a deep sense of meaning, and an overall greater sense of engagement, ultimately benefits the bottom line.

What are some of the primary reasons people-first cultures are linked to higher profits?

A few primary reasons people-first cultures experience higher profits result from less turnover, higher profit margins due to higher production, and stronger connection among teams. Marriott experiences employees that go the extra mile because they want to contribute to the mission. Employees working within organizations where individuals are highly valued tend to have a strong connection to organizational outcomes and values.

This kind of connection is often linked to outcomes of employee engagement and teamwork. Individuals working within these cultures frequently experience a sense of appreciation and investment to helping accomplish organizational goals and outcomes. Teams work together and with less turnover, learning is attained, which contributes to stronger organizational outcomes overall.

In addition, most employees align to the organizational mission and experience a sense of connection to the organization as a whole. These organizations often experience readiness throughout the organization as individuals become prepared to change and grow alongside the organization rather than “resist” organizational and environmental change.

Higher outcomes of readiness result in stronger productivity. Studies show that culture-driven organizations tend to have higher levels of engagement. Employee engagement is linked to less turnover, higher productivity and innovation, stronger productivity and overall employee satisfaction.

As people-first culture’s clearly benefit the bottom line, how can you begin taking steps to improve your organizational culture?

Begin by taking action in these five areas :

Empower Decision Making - Employees working within people-first cultures are empowered to make decisions. As change is consistent and often requires immediate action, preparing individuals to take action by empowering individual decision-making ultimately improves organizational resilience. A growing number of employees and teams connect remotely in 2022, establishing a culture that supports individual and group decision making is vital. Dispersed teams need to know how to make decisions both independently and in work teams. An employees' ability to respond nimbly to customers' needs, or enlist a new service to meet a new market demand, may be the vital decision to keep the company profitable. That shift in thinking requires a culture which embraces people-first values over blind obedience and gives workers the latitude to serve those who really hold the key to the success of the business.
Listen Well - Leaders of people-first cultures listen to their organization. According to Amy Jen Su, co-owner of Paravis Partners, an executive training and coaching firm, “As a leader, you need to have a strong voice and you need to know when it’s time to listen” ( Harvard Business Review, 2015 ). Why is listening so important? When it comes to listening to the organization, hearing at all levels is vital. What employees are experiencing, managers are recognizing, and other leaders consider to be key priorities all tell the story of how the organization is doing. Too often, leaders spend more time talking, inspiring, and sharing vision than listening to the nitty gritty of what is actually being experienced. Leaders of people-first cultures recognize their own intellect and investment in establishing healthy priorities and processes, yet, understand the real value of co-creation. “They recognize their own intellect, but they also recognize that their colleagues are equally smart and have something of value to say” (Harvard Business Review, 2015). People-first cultures create an environment conducive to listening. Holding consistent meetings to listen and share ideas is often a priority. Empowering individuals to get involved in dialogue regarding priorities or challenges experienced provides opportunity to create healthy discussion, brainstorming and problem solving. Additionally, they create opportunities to follow up on problems discussed in order to create effective solutions. Direct involvement in communication and problem solving continues to foster individual value, builds trust and ongoing collaboration experienced throughout the culture.
Foster Leadership - People-first cultures foster leadership that is essential to thriving vs. surviving. Shared leadership fosters shared mission experienced among leadership teams and employees, regardless of the size of an organization. Leaders who are people-first focus on employee’s as people, recognizing their value and investment, not just their output or productivity toward the bottom line. These leaders address employee’s needs first, adopting a more servant leadership mindset. Organizations working toward establishing a people-first culture must define their leadership philosophies, training current and future leaders of key priorities and initiatives, beginning with serving the needs of their employees. Specific processes include developing consistent one-on-one meetings, coaching and providing feedback, setting up regular occurring meetings to listen to employees throughout the organization, and prioritizing problem solving around key values, is an expectation of the leadership team. Leadership development to foster a people-first culture is considered high priority, and leaders who serve in a management role undergo constant development.
Walk Your Talk - In people-first cultures, the actions of leaders and managers match their words. In these cultures, leaders support and foster change and promote continuous improvement, both personally and organizationally. Leaders within people-centric cultures have a deep understanding of “why” the organization values its people, how changes or improvements are approached, and makes decisions based upon clearly understood organizational values. Leaders, managers and employees model behaviors that are held to be valued throughout the organization. Processes that are created are followed. All individuals, despite role, follow established processes, and collaborate toward achieving goals. In addition, the sense of teamwork is felt despite role, with senior leaders and managers aligned to maintaining a consistent and dependable approach to decision-making and problem-solving aligned clearly to its mission.
Inform Your Hiring Process - People-centric organizations hire talented people, empower them to do their role, and then get out of their way. Enabling employees, empowers decision-making to at all levels of the organization and allows employees to work autonomously. This level of leadership empowerment also encourages collaboration and teamwork. Additionally, individuals celebrate risk-taking and creativity as opportunities to innovate and learn continuously.

SOURCE:

Stibitz, S. (2015). How to Really Listen to Your Employees, Harvard Business Review , Retrieved on April 14, 2022 from https://hbr.org/2015/01/how-to-really-listen-to-your-employees

Hougaard, R. (2019). Leadership Strategy, The Power of Putting People First, Forbes , Retrieved on April 14, 2022 from https://www.forbes.com/sites/rasmushougaard/2019/03/0 5/the-power-of-putting-people-first/?sh=101cf436aff8

The Best Construction Project Management Software in 2023

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Tue, 16 Nov 2021 23:03:34 GMT

What is Construction Project Management?

It's no secret that construction project management is no easy feat. To manage a job effectively, you must have all your teams on a schedule, ensure quality, stay within budget, and maintain a safe work environment. Thankfully there are many construction project software applications that simplify all of these processes.

We realized how difficult it might be to navigate these wavy waters, so we developed this guide . We will cover these various construction management software solutions that construction managers, contractors, and owners can use to create efficient schedules, update daily logs for their projects and share plan changes.

If you’re already familiar with construction project management software and are comfortable enough to make a purchase decision, take a look at our list of recommendations below. We have also included a section on the specific features to give you an opportunity to compare and make an informed decision.

Understanding the purpose of construction project management software is crucial for successful implementation. Construction project management software streamlines the project management process . It allows general contractors and their teams to become more efficient and efficient throughout any construction project.

To understand how these software can do that, let's first learn more about construction project management and what it entails.

What Is Construction Project Management?
Construction project management can be defined as the coordination and management of people, equipment, and materials with the sole goal of completing a construction project within the specified requirements of cost, schedule, scope, and quality.

Simply put, construction project management refers to the overall management of many of the different aspects that make up an entire project to ensure timeliness and efficient use of capital.

Below are some of the primary responsibilities involved in construction project management:
Negotiating the scope of work and costs with contractors and consultants who will be a part of the project.
Managing and creating the project schedule.
Contracting out or internally directing the design process.
Managing consultant invoices.
Creating contractor agreements that define the scope of work, costs, and schedule.
Facilitating meetings to discuss project progress .
Monitoring the project budget and securing additional funding from the owner or sponsors when necessary.
Working with the local government to obtain the necessary building permits and meet project deadlines.

The next question to ask is, who is responsible for managing the project in a construction project? This depends on several factors, such as the budget, size, and simplicity of the project.

In most cases, the project manager will be a general contractor hired by the owner. Frequently in a construction project, the general contractor is also usually a company with several teams or people working on the different aspects of the project. However, in smaller projects, the project manager may be an individual. At times, the owner manages their own construction project. These businesses are commonly called owner-developers.

Construction Management vs. Construction Project Management

In any project, the project manager is usually focused on keeping track of all the operational logistics we've discussed above— creating a schedule, managing invoices, and facilitating meetings between different parties involved in the project.

On the other hand, the construction manager is usually responsible for the day-to-day details of construction and often understands the intricacies involved in the construction process. The construction manager is generally responsible for hiring subcontractors, ordering materials, and leasing equipment.

If the project is relatively large, the project manager and the construction manager are different teams or individuals. However, depending on the size of the project and the owner, these two roles can be handled by one team or individual.

So to summarize, construction managers are in the trenches, overseeing the intricate details of the project. Construction managers have more specific knowledge of the project compared to the project manager, who typically fills a more administrative role.

What is Construction Project Management Software?

This section will cover the fundamentals of construction project management software, mainly what it is, the key features, and the costs.

So What Is Construction Project Management Software?

With the 4th industrial revolution already underway, technology is becoming an integral part of our daily and professional lives. Construction project management software is a collaborative technology that allows you to find, share, and update information related to the project.

A few standard functions of these tools take care of various aspects of the project, including scheduling, safety, contract, permit management, and quality assurance.

This software is often the primary collaboration tool for teams working on construction projects to share information and collaborate on documents once the project has started. Individuals or teams use this technology to keep track of the progress and costs of one or more projects.

It’s important to note that construction management software is different from the technology used to design and engineer project plans. However, both these tools are frequently used together in one way or another.

What are the Features of Construction Project Management?

For now, there is no official template for the features that a construction project management software should have. Most construction management software companies come up with their own workflows and terminology for their products.

However, there is some uniformity in companies that identify as construction project management software developers focused on solving similar problems and offering most of the same core functionality.

Below we’ve curated a list of the key features the construction project management software of your choice should include:

Document Storage & Management
During the duration of an entire construction project, hundreds of documents are shared between the owner and the contractor, their subco ntractors, suppliers, and any other parties involved.
Managing the flow of these files and documents can quickly become challenging as projects grow in size. Fortunately, many construction management tools can handle this volume of documentation. These tools have ample storage and collaboration capabilities for project plans, subcontractor contracts, receipts, and other essential documents.
Submittals
Generally, a submittal refers to information concerning materials or equipment that a contractor submits to the project's architect or designer before ordering. This ensures that the materials are appropriate for the project. Good construction software must provide a platform for sending and receiving submittals.
RFIs
RFI is short for Request for Information. This is simply a message to one individual that is involved in the project requesting additional information. Often, RFIs are directed to the designer, engineer, or architect asking for clarity on details about the project plans. You should look for construction management software products that offer this feature.
Change Orders
Change orders are sent when one team member or individual in the project needs to change the existing project plans. Change orders need to be submitted for any change to the project plans, no matter how small or large. So, for instance, a change in a door hinge or the addition of two floors to an apartment building would need to be submitted in a change order.
Instant & Remote Syncing
Having access to instant and remote syncing is crucial in construction management. This means every cloud-based construction software will be accessible from any device remotely, as long as the user has an internet connection.
Moreover, information that a user updates remotely will be instantly available for all members of the team. The construction management software of your choice should have instant and remote syncing.
Daily Logs
Construction project management software must include a daily log to ensure efficient tracking of project progress. These daily logs will also keep owners and contractors informed of what is happening on the project. Daily logs can also be helpful to reference later if mistakes are made or if queries come up.
Plan Markup
Suppose changes need to be made in many construction projects. In that case, it is common practice to mark up the original plans with notes rather than conducting a complete overhaul. A great construction project management software will include digitally marking up plans so that changes and notes can be shared efficiently with the team instantly. This helps users avoid needing to make reprints each time plans are updated.
Punch Lists
Even when construction projects are concluded, several loose ends usually need to be tied to meet the contract specifications. So, for example, there could be work that was completed incorrectly or forgotten. In this scenario, the owner or any individual on the team will create a punch list to individually itemize everything that must be addressed before the project is finalized according to the contract's terms.
Reporting
A good construction project management software has to provide summary reports and statistics concerning individual construction projects or groups of tasks. The types of reports on offer will vary. Still, they usually sum up things like the budget, project progress, and spending information.
Integrations
And lastly, your construction management software should offer an extensive list of integration to work with. The most leading products do that anyway. Common examples include integrations with legal and compliance, construction accounting software, bidding software, takeoff, and Client Relationship Management (CRM).

Finally, keep in mind that any features, aggregate information, or reports that are crucial for your business should be addressed by the product you have in mind. So make sure to get a product demo before subscribing and verify the tools and features you need.

How Much Will the Construction Project Management Software Cost?

How much will it cost you now that we know what you need to look for in your construction management software?

The bad news is that construction project management software has highly complex pricing. Especially when compared to several products designed for small businesses and independent contractors with straightforward and transparent pricing, enterprise-level software products do not.

Nevertheless, many of the products we have listed in this guide are priced similarly. You will find products without a flat monthly or annual rate for a license charge based on the amount of business done within the software.

The method for measuring business volume is not always similar. Still, the focus is on pricing the software as a percentage of business done within the platform. This keeps the software at a relatively affordable price in relation to the size of the project.

So keep this in mind when comparing the different pricing models that vary so much across a wide range of products. We recommend that you test out a few products before you decide and get quotes from several providers. Unfortunately, we can't provide a reasonable estimate of what you might expect to spend at this point.

That said, it's pretty easy to get a quote if you provide essential information about what your business is about and the upcoming project you have.

So What Is The Best Construction Project Management Software?

In addition to the features we discussed above, you should also consider the following factors:

Business Size & Type: Some software is designed for bigger businesses while others are more suited for smaller companies and contractors. Additionally, if you have specific project management needs, it's crucial to find a product that caters to your specialized requirements. So make sure your choice caters to all your needs.

Features: We’ve already discussed this in detail above.
Customer Service: The ideal situation is that once the software is up and running, you rarely need to contact the software provider for support. The reality, however, is that there will be times when you'll need efficient customer support. So make sure that your chosen company has excellent customer service support.
Product Usability & Experience: Always ask for a demo so you can assess whether the software is easy to use.
Customer and Expert Reviews: What better way to know whether the product is a good fit for you than to scour through the reviews?

Below is a list of the best construction project management software in 2022. All the products we have listed below rank very high on the list of features we discussed above.

Procore (Best Overall Construction Project Management Software)
Autodesk BIM 360 (Best for Large Projects & Teams)
Sage 300 Construction and Real Estate (Best for Large Organizations)
Buildertrend (Best for Remodelers)
RedTeam (Best for Small Businesses)
CoConstruct (Best for Client Communication)
Sage 100 Contractor (Best On-Premise Solution)
Plan grid (Best for Integrations)
SmartUse (Best for Document Management)

Small Business Statistics Every Entrepreneur Should Know

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Tue, 05 Oct 2021 23:06:03 GMT

In this day and age, there are so many outstanding examples of successful businesses.

Over the last few years, there's been a rising interest in entrepreneurship as a desirable alternative over the typical 9-5.

Many people all over the globe dream of starting their own businesses as a way to control and secure their financial futures. Additionally, the need to break free from traditional workplace rules, politics has driven this uptake in entrepreneurship and what it offers.

Regardless of how overwhelming and complicated starting a new business may seem, nothing is as attractive as the ability to control your own time and goals. Nevertheless, the best approach to avoid any feelings of being overwhelmed is to break down the process of starting a business into small manageable steps.

Whether your business is based online or you want to own a brick-and-mortar business, having the proper knowledge at your fingertips will help you manage your risks and opportunities better.

The following statistic will give direction, show you what you need to expect, and give you a better understanding of the factors that influence your business.

How Many Small Businesses Are There in the U.S.?

According to the Small Business Administration (SBA), there were 30.7 million small businesses in the U.S. in 2019.

So which businesses fall under the small business category?

Well, the SBA defines a small business as a company that has less than 500 employees. So many high-valued start-ups that have mushroomed in the U.S. over the last few decades will fit into this definition.

Interestingly enough, this definition of what constitutes a small business differs across the world. For example, in the European Union, businesses with fewer than 50 employees are considered small businesses. For comparison, if a firm has less than 15 employees in Australia, it's regarded as a small business.

In the American context, the data shows that most businesses have fewer than 500 employees. Within this category, those businesses with less than 100 employees account for 98.2%. In comparison, those with fewer than 20 employees make up 89% of all companies in the U.S.

How Many Jobs Are Created by Small Businesses?

The sheer number of small businesses in the U.S. means that they generate most of the jobs in the country. The SBA accredits small companies with the creation of at least 1.5 million jobs every year. In fact, 64% of new jobs in the U.S. come from small businesses.

Over the past years, the data shows that small businesses have always been a crucial part of the growth of the U.S. economy. There are many benefits that small businesses offer, such as:

Great job opportunities for many Americans
Financial growth
Unique products and services

So it doesn't really matter if small businesses turn into big corporations; they ultimately contribute to economic growth.

Small and Medium-Sized Businesses Are Major Contributors to Global Economic Growth

According to a 2019 report by SalesForce, over 90% of the business population comprises small- and medium-sized businesses, also known as SMEs. And as we've already discussed above, small companies account for a large number of jobs.

Over the last few decades, SMEs have continued to generate employment. They have contributed to innovation across various industries, technologies, and countries. The rise of technology has improved connectivity. SMEs have better access to global markets and knowledge of networks nowadays.

Overall, SMEs contribute significantly to the growth of the global economy by providing employment, fostering innovation, and promoting sustainable industrialization.

What Is the Most Common Reason People Open their Own Business?

The reasons people decide to open their own businesses vary. Among the most common reasons people give for opening a business, at least 55% said they opened their own business because they wanted to be their own boss.

The next popular reason people gave for starting their own business includes wanting to pursue their passions. According to the survey by Guidant Financial, 39% of people interviewed chose to pursue their own passion as their primary motivation.

The same study also found the following as facts as common reasons:

Dissatisfaction with corporations
Seeing an opportunity to start their own business
A lack of preparation for retirement

For most people, starting their own business gives them the freedom to be their own boss and be in control of their time. It gives you the freedom to make decisions about your work/life balance. You're able to work how, when, and where you want.

While there are many reasons why people worldwide decide to pursue entrepreneurship, the top motivations seem to be financial freedom and independence from their current workplace environments.

COVID-19 Hits Small Businesses Hard

One thing that impacts small businesses is uncertainty, and the COVID-19 has been a thorn in the side of most businesses, small or big.

The pandemic has hit many small businesses hard. According to a 2020 Facebook report, nearly a third (31%) of small businesses thriving in 2019 are no longer operational.

When the pandemic hit in March 2020, over 70% of U.S. small businesses shut down when the U.S. became the center of the virus. Over 60% of these small businesses were closed by order of the government or health authorities in a bid to curb the spread of the virus.

Some small business owners took measures to adapt to business in the new environment to cope with the new reality. Many of them increased their online presence and activities to try and stay connected to their client base and keep their business afloat.

More than half (51%) of small businesses reported an increase in interaction with clients over the internet. Additionally, 36% of personal businesses that used online tools before the pandemic are now also conducting all their sales online.

Looking into the future, 28% of these small business owners reported that cash flow will be their most significant obstacle in the near future. As the economy stalls, consumer demand also dips significantly for products and services not considered necessary for survival.

Future Generations Are More Likely to Create a Side Business

The public and astronomical success of start-ups and small businesses like Airbnb, Amazon, and Apple have increased the thirst for entrepreneurship.

Statistics show that the new generation of entrepreneurs is more likely to have a side-hustle. In fact, Millennials and Gen Zers are reported to be 188% more likely to focus on creating a side business compared to traditionalists and Baby Boomers.

Compared to Baby Boomers, Millennials and Gen Zers are 48% more likely to have started a business . They liked and were passionate about an idea they had and decided to bring it to the marketplace.

This shows just how significant the start-up boom and success of Silicon Valley has been on Millennials and Gen Zers. Moreover, thanks to how much easier it is to start a business, the new generation is much more comfortable becoming their own bosses.

Of course, we cannot discount the impact of the rise of online marketplaces, low code, no-code, and outsourced development. It's become faster and easier to run a business from the comfort of your own home.

What Percentage of Small Businesses Fail?

One of the biggest fears that people have about entrepreneurship is the risk of failure. And the fear is not unfounded. The startling reality is that most small businesses don't do well. In fact, over two-thirds of small businesses never turn a profit, and over 50% of small enterprises fail within the first 12 months.

Moreover, 95% of small start-ups fail within the first five years . It's clear, having a successful business requires much more than just a great idea. All the pieces need to come together at the right time. Rarely does this happen without effort.

But don't let these statistics discourage you from starting your own business. In fact, you should use this data as motivation. If you know how and why the majority of small businesses fail, you can come up with a fool-proof plan to overcome the potential risks you may face.

Of course, it's impossible to completely eliminate all risks but forewarned is forearmed. You'll have the power to know what to do in different scenarios.

What Is the Major Reason That New Businesses Fail?

The primary reason that new small businesses fail is because of the lack of market demand. According to C.B. Insights, 42% of small businesses fail because of this reason. So to avoid falling into the same trap, ensure that you do your research and that your business addresses a real need in your target market.

The next most common reason new businesses fail is that they run out of money before becoming profitable. The data shows that close to 29% of new businesses failed because they just ran out of money.

Other reasons for the failure of small businesses include:

Not finding the right people or team to work with
Losing to competitors in the industry
Unfriendly products or services
Inability to find a workable cost structure

Suppose we were to carefully analyze the reasons why new businesses fail. In that case, it is clear to see that it's a combination of customer-centric reasons and a lack of resources. These two are the building blocks of any successful small business.

What Is the Major Challenge Small Businesses Face?

The first few years of any new business are always the most challenging. How you handle them often dictates how successful your business becomes.

One of the significant challenges that small businesses face is the lack of reliable and quality labor. In fact, 52% of people interviewed by CNBC in 2019 stated that the most challenging problem for small businesses was labor quality.

Small business owners report that it’s hard to find qualified individuals to hire. For businesses with more than 50 employees, 63% of owners believe it’s become harder to find qualified hires.

Aside from this challenge, small business owners are encountering financial problems. As smaller corporations don't have access to funds and neither do, they have the advantage of being backed by wealthy investors. It's often a struggle to figure out how to manage their finances.

Top Digital Marketing Channels Among Small Business Owners

Marketing is an essential part of small business strategies. According to the Manifest, 64% of small businesses that participated in the survey used social media in their marketing strategy. It seems social media is a preferred favorite for small business owners.

The same study shows that nearly all small businesses advertise. In most cases, this advertisement uses digital channels compared to traditional mediums like T.V., magazines, and newspapers.

After social media marketing, the next most popular advertising method was online marketing which accounted for 49%, followed by print marketing at 36% and T.V. at 22%.

So why is digital marketing the top marketing channel among small business owners?

Small businesses rely heavily on digital advertising channels because they can target and reach their customers more effectively. Small businesses can reach people who would likely be interested in their products. In contrast, traditional channels are aimed at a broader audience.

Statistics show that social media marketing can be an effective tool for small businesses. In fact, 73% of marketers believe that their social media marketing campaigns have been somewhat or very effective for their business.

Conclusion

Without a doubt, the years 2021 and beyond are going to be very significant for small businesses. With the competition increasing left, right and center, these statistics should help you find your way and assist you with better decision making.

Whether you're a small business owner or you are toying with the idea of starting one, just keep in mind the challenges you're likely to face. Additionally, staying on top of current trends will help you tackle difficulties more proactively instead of being reactive.

How to Conduct Market Research: A Comprehensive Guide

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Mon, 20 Sep 2021 23:45:50 GMT

The modern consumer has very high expectations from the products and services they use.

They can efficiently conduct product or service research on their own and make purchase decisions with very little influence from companies and brands. Today's consumer possesses a power like no other in history.

Additionally, more and more consumers prefer to ask for referrals from people they know, or they read online reviews rather than talking to your sales reps. Thus, it is advisable that you play an active role in their customer journey . Doing so will give you more control over their experience.

To circumvent this, you'll need to adapt your marketing strategy to complement the way consumers nowadays research, shop, and buy.

This means you should have a deep understanding of your customer segment , i.e., who your buyers are, what influences their purchase decisions, and their behavior. And this is where market research enters the chat.

Market research is a powerful tool that can do wonders for your bottom line. This comprehensive guide will discuss all the factors that you have to consider to conduct proper market research. We will look at the following:

What is market research?
Primary vs. Secondary research
Types of market research
How to do market research.

What is market research?

In simple terms, market research is a process of gathering information about your target audience. It's also about your consumer's buyer personas to determine how viable and successful your product or service would be, and/or is, among your customers.
Why do market research?

The proper market research allows you to accurately determine your value proposition to your customer segment. Not only does it help you to meet your buyer where they are, but it also allows you to clearly define why your target market should spend money with your brand.

By understanding your buyer's challenges, pain points, problems, and desired solutions, you can tailor-make your product and services so that they naturally appeal to them. The market research also provides valuable insight into the factors that contribute to the financial success of your business, including:

Where your target market and current customers conduct their product and service research.
Popular trends in the industry and in the eyes of your target audience.
Where your target audience goes to look for information, purchases, or options (your competitors)
The individuals, businesses, and other players that make up your market and the challenges they face.
The factors that influence conversions and purchases in your target audience.

Primary vs. Secondary Research

As you begin to consolidate your market research, you'll most certainly bump into primary and secondary market research phrases. But what do they mean?

The simplest way to think about primary and secondary market research is to envision them as two separate but related ways to collect actionable information on your products and services.

Let’s discuss the two of them below.
Primary Research

Primary research refers to first-hand information that you collect about your market and the consumers within your market. This research is valuable when segmenting your market and establishing your buyer personas. Primary market research can further be divided into two segments; exploratory and specific research.

Exploratory Primary Research

This type of exploratory primary market research is focused more on potential problems that might be worth tackling as a team rather than following customer trends. It is usually the first step before any measurable or specific research is performed. Examples include; surveys or open-ended interviews with a small group from your target market.

Specific Primary Research

Specific primary market research, on the other hand, is usually the next step following exploratory research. It is used to tackle issues or opportunities your business has already identified as necessary. In specific research, you need to take a smaller or more accurate segment of your audience and ask questions to solve a suspected problem.

Secondary Research

Secondary research refers to all the data and public records you have at your disposal to reach certain conclusions. For example, you can look at trend reports, market statistics, industry content, and sales data available to you. Secondary research is a handy tool you can use to analyze your competitors. Your secondary market research will include the following:

Public Sources

Public sources are your first and most accessible tools when you're conducting secondary market research. The great news is that most public sources are free to find, use and review.

If you don't know where to begin, government statistics are some of the most popular types of public sources. For example, you have access to the U.S. Census Bureau and the Bureau of Labor & Statistics, both of which offer valuable public market data and information on the state of several industries across the nation.

Commercial Sources

Commercial sources often come in the form of market reports. These market reports consist of industry insight compiled by several and reputable research agencies. The only drawback is that these professional reports cost money to download and obtain.

Internal Sources

Internal sources are some of the most overlooked market research tools. The great news is that this data is already in your possession. The following internal sources are at your disposal:

Customer retention rates
The average revenue per sale
Historical information on the health of old and new accounts

All these sources can help you draw significant conclusions on what your consumers might want.
Now that we've dissected these primary market research sources and branches, let's discuss the different types of market research you can conduct.

Types of Market Research

1. Interviews
Interviews are a great way to have face-to-face discussions (whether in-person or virtual). This allows you the opportunity to have a natural, free-flowing conversation, and you get to observe body language and facial cues.

2. Focus Groups
Focus groups are crucial in providing you with a handful of carefully selected consumers to test out your product. You can let your consumers watch a demo, or they can give feedback and/or answer specific questions to help you.

3. Product/Service Use Research
Product or service use research gives you insight into how and why your customer segment buys your product or service. You can use this type of market research to determine your business's value proposition to the consumer. You can get an idea of the product or service's usability for your target audience.

4. Observation-Based Research
This type of research allows you to take an objective stance so you can observe the ways in which your target market uses your product or service. You'll have to look at what works well in terms of UX(a systematic study that targets users to collect and analyze data), what challenges they face, and which parts of it could be easier for them to apply and use.

5. Buyer Persona Research
Buyer persona research is a tool that gives you a realistic look at the individuals that make up your target audience. It looks at why they want your product or service, their challenges, what they need from your business and brand, and so much more.

6. Market Segmentation Research
Market segmentation research can categorize your target audience into different groups based on specific and defining features. This allows you to determine effective ways to meet your customer needs, learn about their goals, understand their expectations and pain points.

7. Pricing Research
Pricing research helps you determine what your competitors are charging for similar products or services and what your target audience expects or is willing to pay. All this information will help you to get a definitive pricing strategy that will win.

8. Competitive Analysis
You need a deep understanding of the competition in your industry and market. A competitive analysis is the best tool for this. It helps you learn about what's doing well in your industry and what your target market is already rushing towards in terms of similar products.

Competitive analysis also helps you determine which of your competitors you should work to keep up with and surpass and how you can stand out from the competition.

9. Customer Satisfaction and Loyalty Research
Customer satisfaction and loyalty research can assist you in looking into how you can get recurrent business from your current customers. It involves looking into what will motivate them to do so; for example, you can use loyalty programs, rewards or develop remarkable customer service. This type of market research will help you discover the most effective ways to give and promote joy among your customers.

10. Brand Awareness Research
Brand awareness research gives you a picture of how your target audience and your current customers view you. This type of research gives you insight into what your target market knows about and recognizes from your brand. You'll get to know what associations your target market makes when they hear and think about your business.

11. Campaign Research
This type of market research involves looking into your past campaigns and analyzing their success among your target market and current customers. This requires a deep analysis of what reached and resonated with your target audience. You can keep those things in mind for your future campaigns and hone in on the characteristics or features that matter the most.

Now that you know the types and categories of market research let's figure out how you can go about conducting your market research.

Below is a step-by-step process of how to do market research.

How to Do Market Research

1. Define your buyer persona

Before you start working on how customers in your industry make purchasing decisions, you must first understand who they are.

This is where having your buyer personas comes in handy. Buyer personas (also referred to as marketing personas) can be defined as generalized fictional representations of your ideal customers.

Buyer personas help you envision your audience, organize your communications, and create a solid strategy. Some of the critical characteristics you should be keen on including in your buyer persona are:

Age
Gender
Location
Job title(s)
Family size
Income

The idea of buyer personas is to guide you on effectively reaching and learning about the actual consumers in your industry. It's also quite common to find that your business lends itself to more than one persona, and that's completely normal. You just need to think carefully about each specific persona when optimizing and planning your marketing, sales, or pricing content and campaigns.

2. Identify a persona group to engage

Now that you know how to identify your buyer personas, you can use that information to help you segment a group to conduct your market research. This group should be a representative sample of your target customers. You should get a better understanding of their characteristics, challenges, and buying habits.

This persona group should also help you identify and engage people who recently made a purchase or purposefully decided not to make one.

Below we have some tips and guidelines to help you find the right people for your research.

How to Find the Right People to Engage for Market Research

Choosing the right people is essential. So start by focusing on people who have the characteristics that apply to your buyer persona. We recommend focusing on one category. However, if you feel it's necessary to research multiple personas, ensure that you recruit a separate sample group for each segment.

Choose people who have recently bought your product and interacted with you.

Start with individuals that have completed an evaluation with you within the last six months or within a year. The timeframe will depend on the length of your sales cycle and the type of market you're in. Since you'll be asking very detailed questions, their experience must be fresh.

Gather a mix of participants.

You need a mixed bag of participants. So you need to recruit people who have purchased your product, bought a competitor's product, and those who have decided not to purchase anything at all. While it's easier to recruit your current customers, sourcing information from outside your customer demographic will help you have a balanced view of your market.

Also, consider the following steps:

Aim for at least 10 participants per buyer persona
Keep a list of customers who made a recent purchase as they are usually the easiest set of people to recruit. Suppose you're using Customer Relationship Management (CRM) software. In that case, you can run a report to see which customers purchased from you within the last six months and filter it for the characteristics you're looking for. If not, you can work with your sales team to get a list of appropriate accounts from them.
Have a list of customers who were actively evaluating your product but didn't make a purchase. Get different buyers who either purchased from a competitor or decided not to make a purchase. Again, you can use a CRM system to track your purchases.
Use social media to get participants. Try reaching out to people who follow your social media platforms which either bought or decided not to buy from you. There's a strong chance that some of them will be willing to talk to you and give you feedback.
Use your own network to get the word out. This includes coworkers, Linkedin connections, and even former colleagues. If your direct links don't qualify to give your feedback, ask them to spread the word on your behalf.
Have an incentive. The modern world is fast- paced. Consumers don't have much time to make decisions or participate in a study, so giving an incentive will motivate them on your behalf.

3. Create questions for your market research participants.

One of the best ways to ensure you get the most out of your research is to be prepared. Always have a discussion guide — whether it's an online survey, a focus group, or a phone interview. This helps you ensure that you cover all of the questions and allow you to use your time wisely.

Keep in mind, though, that it's not intended to be robotic. Your method must be balanced, and the discussions should be natural and conversational. We encourage you to be flexible and change the line of research and questioning according to how the conversation is flowing.

Ensure that your discussion guide has an outline format with a time allotment and several open-ended questions for each section.

Open-ended questions are seen as the golden rule of market research because you need to avoid asking yes and no questions. These questions are seen as leading and put you at risk, unintentionally influencing their thoughts by leading with your own hypothesis. Asking open-ended questions also assists you in avoiding one-word answers which aren't helpful to the research.

Now let’s give you an example of how to conduct a proper market research survey.

Example Outline of a 30-Minute Survey

We've given you a detailed guideline of how to conduct a 30-minute research survey. You can use the following tips in an in-person interview or as questions posed on an online form to administer a survey to your target customers.

Background Information (5 Minutes)

Ask the consumer to give you some background information; for example, ask for their title, how long they've been buying from you, and so on. You can also ask fun or easy questions to warm things up, such as their favorite musician, concert, a restaurant in town, last vacation, etc.

The goal is to get to know your buyers in very personal ways. You should also capture basic information such as age, location, and job title from your contact list. You would be surprised by the many things you can learn by asking the right questions.

Below are some other key questions you should ask your target audience:

Tell me about your personal responsibilities?
Describe how your team is structured?
What are the team's goals, and how do you measure them?
What has been your biggest challenge in the past year?

You need to focus on the specific purchase or interaction your customer made that led to you including them in the study. The following three stages of the buyer's journey will focus specifically on that purchase.

Awareness (5 Minutes)

In this section, you need to focus on how your target audience first realized they had a problem that needed to be solved without getting into whether or not they were aware of your brand.

So you should ask your participant the following questions:

When did you first realize you needed a [name the product/service category, but not yours specifically]. What issues did you have at the time?
How familiar were you with the different options on the market?
How did you know that something in this category could help you?

Consideration (10 Minutes)

Here you’ll want to get very specific about how and where the participant researched potential solutions. Remember to interject when necessary to get more details.

What was the first step you took to research potential solutions?
How helpful was this source?
Where did you search to get more information?

If you can't get organic answers, you can ask more questions about search engines, websites visited, people consulted, and so on. Gently probe and ask more questions such as:

How did you find the source?
How did you use vendor websites?
Did you use specific words to search on Google? What were they?
Was it helpful, and could it be better?
Which site provided the most (and least) helpful information? What did that look like?
Tell me about your experiences with the sales depart ment from each business?

Decision (10 Minutes)

Which of the sources you used above was the most influential in your decision-making?
Do you have any criteria that you use to compare the alternatives?
Which business made it to the shortlist, and what were the pros/cons of each?
Was anyone else involved in the final decision? What role did each of these people play?
What factors ultimately influenced your final purchasing decisi on?

Wrapping Up

Here, you want to wrap up the survey and figure out what could have been better for the buyer.

You should ask the participant what their ideal buying process would look like. Ask them how it differs from what they experienced?

Also, make sure you allow time for further questions from your buyers. And don't forget to thank them for their time and give them an incentive at the end.

4. List your primary competitors.

The next step is to list your primary competitors. But it’s not just about listing the competition on a piece of paper.

Sometimes you'll find that a branch in a company might be in direct competition with your service or product. Still, the rest of the company would be focused on other areas. A great example is Apple. Their main products are mobile devices and laptops, but Apple also competes with Spotify through their Apple Music division.

Other great examples could be from a content standpoint. You compete with a blog, YouTube channel, or a publication for inbound website traffic, even though your products don't overlap.

Or a toothpaste company might compete with health magazines or blogs even though the publications don’t sell physical oral care products.

So you need to carefully identify competitors whose products or services directly overlap with yours. This starts by determining which industry or industries you're pursuing. For example, you can look into sectors like education, construction, media & entertainment, food service, healthcare, and so on.

How to Identify Industry Competitors

The list of industries is long but figure out an industry term that best describes your business and use it to create a list of competitors. You can start building your list in the following ways:

Use G2 Crowd to review your industry quadrant : It is the best first step in conducting secondary market research. The site aggregates user ratings and social data to create "quadrants," where you can view companies in different categories such as contenders, leaders, niches, and high performers.
Grab a market report copy: Several companies like Forrester and Gartner offer both free and gated market forecasts annually on the companies leading their industry.
Use so cial media: Social media is one of the best ways to get comprehensive information about competitors if you use the search bar correctly.

How to Identify Content Competitors

Search engines like Google are your best friends when conducting secondary market research. As a content creator, there are thousands of online publications with which you compete with.

So you can take the general industry term you identified above. With a simple search, come up with more specific industry terms that best identify your company. The more precise you are, the better your market research.

Once you’ve compiled this list, do the following:

Google it: Google is a powerful tool, and the search engine is undoubtedly the best in the world. So don't underestimate the value of seeing the websites that come up on the first result page. This will give you a good idea of what you're competing with.
Compare your buyer persona with the search results that you get. This analysis will give you an idea of how likely a competitor's publication on Google will steal website traffic from you. If it's highly likely, then add that website to your list of competitors.

You'll also need to have a similar Google search for the industry terms you identify with and look for repetition in the website domains that come up. Analyze the first three result pages for each search you've done. These websites are ranked there by Google because they have relevant content. You should observe them carefully as you build your own content collection.

5. Summarize your findings.

We've laid down a lot of information today, and it can be overwhelming. So we suggest that you look for common themes that will assist you in creating a list of action items.

You can use any presentation software to make a report because this will make the process of adding diagrams, quotes, or call clips easier for you.

The outline below should help you craft a clear summary:

Background: Identify your goals and figure out why you conducted this study.
Participants: Jot down who you talked to. You can use a table to break groups down by persona and customer/prospect.
Executive Summary: Write down the most exciting things you've learned. What do you plan to do about it?
Awareness: Write down the common triggers that lead someone to enter into an evaluation.
Consideration: Present the main themes you uncovered, including the detailed sources consumers use when evaluating products or services.
Decision: Describe how a decision is really made by including the people at the center of influence and any product features or information that can make or break a deal.
Action Plan: Your analy sis has likely uncovered a few campaigns you can run to get your brand and business to your target audience earlier and/or more effectively. Now you need an action plan, and you can start by providing your list of priorities, a timeline, and the impact it will have on the company.

Conducting market research the proper way is a very eye-opening experience. Regardless of whether you're just starting out or have a comprehensive idea of your buyers, this process will likely uncover new information that will help your business immensely.

What Are Interpersonal Skills?

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Thu, 16 Sep 2021 00:51:05 GMT

Why You Should Develop Interpersonal Skills

There are many skills that you should have to succeed in today’s professional environment. From simple communication to in-depth product knowledge, there’s a wide range of skills you have to master.

On the top of that list sits interpersonal skills. Regardless of where you are in your career (whether you're applying for a new position or you're eyeing a promotion), interpersonal skills like communication are a must.

In this article, we'll explore everything you need to know about interpersonal skills. We'll include examples of what they look like in real life and give you tips on developing them.

So let’s help you figure out how you can stand out in your career using interpersonal skills.

What are Interpersonal Skills?

Simply put, interpersonal skills can be described as a set of behaviors related to how you interact with others. So think of soft skills like communication, active listening, and empathy when you hear the phrase interpersonal skills.

All aspects of life, including business and personal relationships, are affected and conducted using some level of these skills. In an organization, interpersonal skills affect how you get along with your team members and solve conflict or tension in the workplace. You can use active listening, for example, to get to the root of the issue and then use effective communication to solve the problem.

Interpersonal vs. Intrapersonal Skills

Before we go any further, we need to clarify the difference between interpersonal and intrapersonal skills. There tends to be some confusion about which is which.

There are several differences between the two besides a few letters. Intrapersonal skills refer to how you talk to yourself in your mind. Interpersonal skills, on the other hand, revolve around how you relate to other people in conversations.

However, both skills are connected because having solid self-awareness (intrapersonal skills) can help you develop better interpersonal skills. This means you'll be able to manage your emotions and respond accordingly regardless of the situation.

Why are interpersonal skills necessary?

Successfully navigating your career path has a lot to do with how you interact with people, whether coworkers or teammates. Needless to say, it's crucial to know how to appropriately interact with everyone. Without strong interpersonal skills, it would be challenging to perform well.

Given how crucial these skills are, many (if not all) employers look for individuals that have strong interpersonal skills. Why? Because it means they can communicate and work well with others to improve the business' bottom line. In fact, in some careers, such as customer service, strong interpersonal skills are critical.

Additionally, interpersonal skills help you interact with others in a way that is respectable. These skills are fundamental if you're in a career that doesn't allow you much interaction. For example, suppose you spend most of your time on the computer. In that case, you still need to interact with other members of your organization. This requires you to have good communication since you might have to explain complex information to colleagues who may not understand your work the way you do.

Types of Interpersonal Skills

There are several types of interpersonal skills, and many of them work well together. Below we’ve listed common interpersonal skills along with examples of what they look like in action.

Communication — Refers to how you communicate clearly and effectively with others.
Conflict management — These skills focus on how you deal with difficult professional situations as they arise. This could mean mediating an issue between team members or seeking solutions for a personal matter. Regardless of where you are in your career, conflict management is an essential skill.
Leadership — How you can motivate and encourage others, regardless of your level of seniority, is what leadership is all about. It also refers to how capable you are to step up to the plate in scenarios where a leader is needed.
Empathy — Having empathy is the most important interpersonal skill. Empathy is not limited to personal relationships only; even in business, you need empathy, care, and understanding for your colleagues.
Active Listening — Works together with communication and empathy. You need to actively listen to those you work with. This makes everyone feel comfortable, listened to, and valued.
Collaboration — Teamwork makes the dream work. You need to be able to get along with others and work as a team to get the job done.

Examples of Interpersonal Skills

The table below gives you real-life examples of interpersonal skills.

How to Develop Interpersonal Skills

Here are a few tips to help you develop your interpersonal skills and improve those you already have.

Make use of available resources.

There are thousands of online resources, courses, and even books from experts on the subject. These will give you a better understanding of the importance of interpersonal skills and provide tips on developing them.
Look for areas for improvement.

Figuring out which areas you need improvement in are crucial. You can ask your colleagues for feedback.

If you work in customer service, you can check customer feedback or monitor your NPS scores to see where you need to improve.
Ask for feedback, and improve your skills.

As we have already mentioned above, one of the ways you can figure out how well you're doing is to ask for feedback .

Ask your mentors, boss, or manager about your communication, listening, etc. This is an excellent way to see how well you're fairing. The next step is to figure out how to improve using the feedback you've been given.

This leads to the next point.
Practice your skills.

As with anything in life you want to master, you need to practice. Try to place yourself in situations where your interpersonal skills are put to the test. For example, you can step up during team meetings and assume leadership roles. Remember to ask for feedback from team members and learn what went right and what needs more work.
Remember that it's a journey, not a destination.

Although you may want to perfect your skills, keep in mind that there is no way to be perfect. Think of this process as a journey that doesn't have a specific destination. You can always improve regardless of how good you’ve become.

Also, different roles require different crucial skills. For example, working the customer service lines may require you to focus more on problem-solving and empathy. On the other hand, if you become the manager in the department, you may spend more time collaborating and resolving conflict.

A Step-by-Step Beginners Guide to ConvertKit Setup

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Thu, 19 Aug 2021 23:19:09 GMT

Thinking of monetizing your blog? Or maybe you need email marketing campaigns that convert to more clients for your business? Either way, ConvertKit is just the tool you need to take your campaigns to the next level and increase your cash flow.

This fantastic tool allows you to send out your email newsletters to tons of people hassle-free. It also helps you consolidate your mailing list and makes the sign-up process more straightforward. With ConvertKit you can automate your email and email marketing. It also allows you to build free landing pages create sales funnels. You can even send your newsletter to a predetermined segment of your subscribers.

Besides the obvious convenience, this is one of the best ways to increase traffic to your website. You might also be wondering how this tool can help the monetization of your blog. Let’s look at a few numbers. Email marketing software is important for the success of your small business.

Over 70% of people in the US prefer to get communications via email, and the Return on investment (ROI) on email marketing can be as high as $42 for every $1 spent . If you run an e-commerce store, you might be interested to know that email marketing can help you regain at least 8% of abandoned carts and give you a 4%+ increase in total sales. These figures are pretty impressive.

However, to maximize the benefits of email marketing, you need tools that can handle sending out large numbers of marketing campaigns. Your regular business email is not equipped to handle such numbers.

Navigating ConvertKit and all its marvelous features as a beginner might seem intimidating. That is why we decided to give you a step-by-step guide on how to get started.

In this article, we will go through the following steps in detail:

How to set up your ConvertKit account?
How to create a form in ConvertKit
How to add the form to your website
How to create a broadcast (newsletter) in ConvertKit and send your first email
How to create a sequence in ConvertKit
How to create an automation in ConvertKit
Excluding/ Tagging subscribers from email sequence in ConvertKit (creating segments)

Step 1: Setting up your ConvertKit account

The first step is, of course, to create an account. So head over to convertkit.com to set up an account. You will see a similar page to the one below. One thing I love about ConvertKit is that you can get an account for free if you have less than a 1000 subscribers. This free plan will help you to see if ConvertKit is for you.

ConvertKit also offers several plans based on how many subscribers you have on your mail list. If you have 1000 subscribers, you pay $29 a month. The price is higher the more subscribers you have.

Once you’ve signed up, you’ll get an option to choose whether you are migrating from another provider or you are starting afresh.

For the purposes of this guide, I will assume that you don't have any subscribers at the moment and are starting from scratch. So click on the ‘No. I’m just starting with email’ button.

If you do have a subscriber list, then choose the other option. If you have a mail list but aren’t sure, you can just start afresh as ConvertKit setup allows you to import your existing subscribers later.

After opening an account and choosing your plan, ConvertKit will need to approve your account. To do this, they need to make sure that you actually have a functioning website, so provide your URL so that your account is approved.

Now, just follow the simple login instructions, and that’s it! The next screen you see should be something like this...

Now all you need to do is follow a few quick and simple things to set up your account.

The first step is to click the profile picture in the top right-hand corner and select the ACCOUNT SETTINGS tab from the drop-down menu. A screen like the one below will pop up.

ConvertKit Tutorial 2021 (Step-by-Step Email Marketing Tutorial)

Enter all your details in the Account Info, Profile, and Email settings. (If you’ve chosen the free trial option, you can leave billing for later when you make a decision).

In the Email Settings tab, you will see the word ‘pending’ next to your email address. You’ll need to confirm your email address before ConvertKit allows you to send emails. This is required by international spam laws, so don’t skip this part, or you might face fines if you’re reported. So ensure that you check your email; there will be instructions on confirming your email address.

On this page, you’ll also notice that you need to add your physical mailing address. While you don’t necessarily need to put your actual home address, you cannot leave it blank according to international laws.

You can use a PO Box or look for companies that offer a free address and only charge you if you receive anything. Alternatively, ConvertKit allows you to use its address for email marketing purposes.

On the rare occasion that you ever receive any mail to that address, ConvertKit will scan it, pick out the customers it’s intended for and email you the PDF version.

Step 2: Creating a form
The next step is to create a form. This form is essential because it collects email addresses from your new subscribers.

For every sign-up possibility, you need to add a form. For example, if you want to create a popup on your homepage, this form is the first one you need to have.

Next, you’ll want to add another form which, for example, can be a sign-up form to your blog sidebar.

To add a new form on ConvertKit, click on the ‘+ Create Form’ button found on the ‘Forms’ page.

You will be given two choices; Landing Pages and Form. Choose Form.

Next, choose INLINE

Here ConvertKit will give you a choice of several different design styles. I’ve chosen the first one.

Now you can design the form to your preference. Just click anywhere on the form to access the design options that come up on the right-hand side. Changing the text is simple; just type directly onto the form and text away!

Once you’re done, click the preview button to see what your form will look like.

When you’re done, click SAVE and then click the GEAR ICON that’s immediately below the pencil icon. This will help you choose what you want to happen when a visitor signs up to your mail list.

Ignore the CUSTOM DOMAIN tab and scroll down until you get to where it says, ‘When a visitor subscribes to the form:’ Select what you want to happen whether it’s the default that sends a generic success message.

If you want something different, you can change that generic message to say whatever you want it to say. Alternatively, you can opt to have your new subscriber redirected to a page of your choice.

Now you need to choose the EMAIL ICON section. Here you can choose between setting up an incentive email or the auto-confirming option for all subscribers. Okay, this might seem a bit complicated so let me explain a bit more.

The auto-confirming tab automatically subscribes to all visitors. This is not a good idea for one specific reason. You see, any individual can type any email address into that box without verification and be automatically added to your mailing list. Not only is this illegal in many countries, but it could also put a damper on the success of your marketing campaigns because you end up with a bunch of spam subscribers.

So, in other words, always choose the incentive email and ensure that you set it up correctly. You’ll also need this email if you want to send your subscribers an opt-in offer.

To set up and edit your incentive email, click on the button that says EDIT EMAIL CONTENTS. The following screen will pop up...

Now, select the correct ‘from’ email address from the drop-down menu and edit the subject line to something compelling.

You must be as straightforward as possible about what occurs when your subscribers click on the button. There are legal implications such as compliance with the General Data Protection Regulations of the EU. It’s also important because your new subscribers might feel tricked if they don’t know what their actions will result in.

You can put a disclaimer that alerts your new subscribers that clicking the button will automatically add them to your subscription list.

ConvertKit has a very convenient feature that allows you to offer your new subscribers a freebie when they sign up to be part of your mailing list. This double-opt option is incredible if you want a simplified sign-up process for your subscribers.

Again always let your subscribers know that by clicking the link for the freebie, they will be confirming their email address and allowing you to contact them as part of your mailing list.

If you don’t have an incentive no need to worry. ConvertKit allows you to add a URL you want people to go to when they click on the link. This link could be to your homepage, but most professional companies create a confirmation page on their website.

Once you’re done with the incentive email, click the cross in the top right-hand corner to return to the main menu.

Step 3: Adding the form to your website

The next thing you need to do is to add the form to your website. So you’ll have to grab the code to embed this form into your website. Click on the tab that says EMBED in the top right.

You have two options; you can grab the code and paste it into your blog post. Depending on the plugin tools you have, you can select the text editor if you use the classic editor plugin or the custom HTML block if you use Gutenberg.

An alternative is to paste the code into a widget space. You can also share the form as a link using the SHARE option. This link can be used on social media.

If you’re using WordPress, the easiest thing is to install the ConvertKit plugin. Once you activate it, set it up with the API key that you’ll find in your account settings. Now, go to the page where you want to add your form. Use the form shortcode to embed it where you want it to go.

Now your form will be live on your website, and you can start receiving new subscribers.

Step 4: How to create a broadcast (newsletter) in ConvertKit and send your first email

In ConvertKit, a Broadcast refers to a once-off email, for example, your newsletter. This is not to be confused with a Sequence that refers to a series of emails such as your welcome series. (We’ll discuss how to create a Sequence a bit later.)

To create a broadcast, click on the BROADCASTS tap at the top of your screen and choose NEW BROADCAST on the right-hand side.

Here you’ll get a 3 step process that you’ll need to go through:

1. RECIPIENTS

If you’re still starting out, it’s best to leave this tab alone for the meantime. Once you’ve found your feet and can navigate your way around all the features of ConvertKit, you can choose who gets your broadcast from a whole range of options.

However, suppose. You,, click you want to send an email to everyone on your mailing list, you can leave this section in the default ALL SUBSCRIBERS setting and click on the NEXT STEP button.

2. CONTENT

The next screen that’ll pop up will look identical to a blank email.

Here you can write your newsletter the same way you would any normal email. ConvertKit allows you to insert images, files, buttons, videos, etc., just simply click on the plus symbol on the left-hand side of the page.

The platform also gives you an option to preview what your email will look like on the right-hand side. The BROWSER tab will open up a preview in a new window on your internet browser.

The EMAIL tab will send the preview email to your email account for you to check. When you are satisfied with the text, select the NEXT STEP option in the bottom right.

3. PREVIEW

In this section, you will see a preview of your email, as well as several options about how you want to send it. You can choose to send the email immediately or click SCHEDULE to schedule the email to be sent in the future. Alternatively, you can also click SAVE DRAFT to save it and come back to it later.

A protip: If you realize you need to edit a broadcast before it’s sent, you have to un-schedule it first, and then you can edit it.

And that’s it!

Step 5: How to create a sequence in ConvertKit

When you’re starting out, creating a sequence can be confusing. However, ConvertKit makes it easy because the process is the same regardless of the kind of sequence you want to make.

You can easily create a sequence that welcomes new subscribers to your email list. For example when you have a specific email course or a sales funnel.

To create a sequence first click on SEQUENCES in the top menu, then click NEW SEQUENCE on the right-hand side.

To help identify your sequences, it’s best to give each of your sequences a name. For example, you can create a welcome sequence for new subscribers or a re-engagement sequence for an abandoned shopping cart. Click on the CREATE SEQUENCE button.

You should get a screen that looks like this…

Now write your first email usually but ensure that you change the WHEN TO SEND option to IMMEDIATELY. This makes sure that your new subscribers will get your welcome series as soon as they sign up.

Next, set the status to PUBLISHED once you’ve finished.

If you need to add more emails to the sequence, keep clicking on the ADD EMAIL button on the left-hand side.

For the following sequence of emails, you can set the WHEN TO SEND option to 1 DAY or any number of days after the first email. Remember to save your sequence.
Step 6: How to create automation in ConvertKit

ConvertKit has one of the best visual automation editors. This feature allows you to set up visual rules and pathways which determine precisely who gets which emails and when. The fact that the editor is visual makes it extremely easy to understand.

To start, simply click on AUTOMATONS in the top menu and then choose the NEW AUTOMATION option over on the right-hand side.

The next step is to give your automation a name and then click CREATE AUTOMATION.

If we use our welcome series example, you’ll want to click the JOIN A FORM option and then pick the form you created in step 2 from the drop-down list. Then hit ADD EVENT.

Now click the plus sign found immediately below your form. Pick the ‘add a subscriber to… EMAIL SEQUENCE’ option and choose the sequence you created in step 4 from the drop- down list and ADD ACTION.

The last step is to move the toggle on the top right hand corner from PAUSED to LIVE, and your email sequence will now go out to everyone who has subscribed using that form.

Now the next thing you need to avoid is to send a welcome sequence to all your subscribers over and over again. Luckily ConvertKit has a feature that allows you to exclude existing subscribers from receiving specific sequences.

Step 7: Excluding/ Tagging subscribers from email sequence in ConvertKit (creating segments)

Assigning tags or labels to your subscribers will help you keep track of individual actions. For example, suppose you have a specific new event where several but not all your subscribers have signed up. In that case, you can tag those particular individuals only.

Tagging or segmenting your subscribers also gives you an option to send out an email to everyone BUT people with this tag.

Additionally, you can create interest-based tags that are interest-based. Suppose you run an e-commerce store that offers different categories of products on your site. In that case, you’ll want to track who’s interested in what. And tailor-make your marketing campaigns.

Segments of this kind are also great if you want to create a group of emails for people who signed up through different forms or have tags that you want to combine. For example, you could have tags for all the different events you’ve done or products you’ve sold. Now you can create a segment for all your former event attendees or buyers.

To simplify, try to use tags for single actions and segments for groups of actions.

To do this, simply choose SUBSCRIBERS from the top menu. You’ll see the tags section on the right. Next, click the CREATE A TAG button and give your name a tag. For example, you can say something like ‘EXISTING SUBSCRIBER.’

If you check on the left, you’ll see small check-boxes next to each subscriber’s name. Click the checkbox at the top, and it will select all the subscribers on that page. It will also give you an option to select ALL your subscribers.

If that’s what you intend to do, then select that option and then click on the BULK ACTIONS => TAG. Now choose that tag you just created, and all your existing subscribers will now be tagged.

Next, go back to SEQUENCES and pick that sequence you made in Step 5. Select SETTINGS and scroll down to the ‘Exclude subscribers from this sequence.’

Now click TAGS and select the tag you just created and save. And that’s it! All your existing subscribers are now excluded from your new welcome series.

Conclusion
Pat yourself on the back for getting this far. You now know how to successfully create a form and start collecting new subscribers. You’ve also learned how to send a newsletter and a welcome sequence, create visual automation, tag a subscriber, and how to exclude certain subscribers from a sequence.

Hopefully, now you’ve got a sense of just how awesome ConvertKit is and all the wonderful features at your disposal. ConvertKit is extremely easy to use. I hope you’ll give it a try!

Top Project Management Communication Tools

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Sun, 01 Aug 2021 20:00:05 GMT

No business can survive without effective communication ; that is a well-known fact. However, getting the right mix of effective communication tools has been a challenge.

Communication flexibility is not an easy thing to manage. This is especially true when dealing with the entrenched organizational bureaucracy that seems hell-bent on sticking to the status quo. This Waterfall project management methodology focuses on heavy and detailed documentation and tonnes of emails to communicate everything.

This communication style has its merits, no doubt, but effective communication has to encompass a lot more in today's world. Agility or flexibility using a variation of face-to-face meetings, video conferences, phone calls, and several collaboration tools has proven to be more effective.

Still skeptical? Let’s look at some numbers.

According to this report by Expert Market:
Organizations with effective communication have a 20-25% increase in productivity.
28% of employees credit poor communication as a reason for poor delivery.
Miscommunication costs companies with 100 employees an average of $420,000 annually.
86% of corporate executives and employees cite ineffective communication and poor collaboration as reasons for workplace failures.

Additionally, a Gartner webinar found that companies with effective communication:
Are 20% more likely to reduce low turnover rates.
Experience a 57% increase in shareholder returns.
Report a 19% higher market premium.
Are almost five times more likely (4.5x) to have high employee engagement.

As you can see, effective communication directly impacts the health and survival of organizations in the modern world. However, it can be challenging to pick the right mix of communication tools.

And with the ongoing pandemic, the face of workplace communication has changed completely. What is needed is a high-breed communication style that factors in the constant variables brought on by the new work from home reality that is likely to continue for some time. Simply sending out emails won't work in every scenario.

So here’s a look at some of the business communication tools every business should have in its arsenal. Bear in mind that some may work better than others.

Getting the right mix of communication tools
Communicating in the modern world is much more complicated than it was a few decades ago. The options you had available to you were either a phone call, fax, or a handwritten letter. Pretty straightforward, right?

Well, today, businesses have all these tools and so much more. Just when organizations were beginning to get a grip on their communication, the pandemic added an additional layer to the challenges of finding effective communication.

Video conferencing emerged as the dominating communication tool in 2020. A recent study found that 75% of employees were more likely to watch a video than read a similar message in written form. Does that mean emailing and other communication tools are no longer effective? Not necessarily.

While the traditional Waterfall communication style has been disregarded as inferior because it relies heavily on email and lots of documentation, modern schools of thought argue that Agile teams have to communicate using other ‘quick’ means.

But why can’t we use both methods in small doses? Especially when the Waterfall style of communication makes sense? Understandably there will be times when an in-person meeting is all that is required. The trick to striking a balance is to assess each event separately and figure out which method works best.

For example; If there's been a form of change in the company, such as new management, most people would jump to sending a quick email to inform employees. While this gets the message across, it might not be the most effective way to communicate the change.

New leadership in an organization always makes employees anxious and uncertain about their future at the company, their role, and the direction the new management will take. Posting a quick message on the intranet does nothing to assuage these feelings. A better approach would be to focus on conveying the same message while equipping employees with the tools and information needed to deal with the leadership change.

So in this particular case, effectively communicating this change might involve several approaches such as sending out an email throughout the whole company, hosting a video conference, and posting on the company intranet.

Choosing the right mix of effective communication tools requires flexibility and adaptability. While daunting at first, it is quite possible to achieve this balance. The following five sections of this article will discuss in detail the primary forms of communication. We will analyze each tool and give you scenarios where they would work best. We hope that this comprehensive guide will enlighten you on the wide range of the communication tools at your disposal.

Email: Effective for updating large groups and sending files
Email communication has many advantages in project management; however, there is always the danger of misinterpretation. The key to using email as an effective communication tool is to leave no room for your intention to be misunderstood or to come across as callous when discussing a sensitive issue.

For example, imagine a coworker you've worked side by side with for years announcing their departure via email. Not only will you perceive it as rude, but it will also certainly leave you feeling slighted and even hurt.

Another factor to consider when it comes to using email as a communication tool is email clutter. Some information is better off being communicated in person or via video conferencing. Let’s break it down for you a bit more.

If you have an issue that you need to discuss among several team members, hosting a quick meeting or using other collaborative tools will be better for your sanity. No one likes to sift through a long thread of emails for an issue that could have been better discussed in other ways. Not to mention someone on the team might miss an essential piece of information while they are trying to catch up on the dozens of messages.

When to use emails:
When updating a large group of people on an issue that impacts everyone in the company but won't require any response or feedback.
Delivering information or documents to third parties who are not part of your file-sharing tool.
Directing people to other communication channels via calendar events or invitations.

When not to use emails:
When you need an urgent response.
When you have a sensitive issue to discuss, such as a performance review.
When you’ll need an extensive follow-up conversation.

How to pair emails with other tools for effective communication
Emails work well when used in conjunction with video conferencing or an intranet post to clarify and expand on the contents of the email. An excellent example of this mix is when the company is making changes to its health care policy. This kind of event affects all employees. To reach everyone, you send out a company-wide email making the announcement and then follow up with a video conference.

Video conference: Effective for face-to-face with remote or dispersed teams
Video conferencing has been around since the early '60s. This method of communicating is perfect for scenarios that require face-to-face meetings without the added costs of traveling. It's also ideal for situations where in-person meetings are hindered by certain factors.

Video conferencing has recently become the preferred way of communicating with online platforms like Zoom and Microsoft Teams seeing significant uptake from the business world. Like any method, it has its merits and drawbacks. To maximize its effectiveness, you have to ensure you understand how to use all the collaborative tools such as screen-sharing and so on.

A pro tip for mastering video conferencing is setting up and practicing at least 15 minutes before your scheduled meeting. Ensure that everything works as it should. This includes the audio and video features.

When to use video conferencing:
If you're planning meetings between decision-makers and team leaders in different locations.
Sensitive discussions between managers and employees can't be in-person due to factors like travel costs.
Planning and brainstorming between dispersed team members on a project with tight deadlines.

When not to use it:
When you want to follow up with an individual or a small group.
When you’re giving out information that requires no follow-up.
When you have specific questions for a collaborator.

How to pair video conferencing with other tools for effective communication
Video conferencing works well when collaborating with a colleague on a specific project, and you need help navigating a particular feature. It's also a great tool if you need to resolve conflicts or conflicting ideas.

Collaboration tools: Effective for informal back-and-forth conversations
The era of technology has brought about great collaboration tools for project management teams that are Agile. Information that used to be communicated via an unnecessary thread of emails can now easily be dispensed using modern collaboration tools.

These tools have a whole host of perks, including less time spent in endless meetings for quick or routine Monday morning updates.

When to use collaborative tools:
An informal discussion within your team.
Brainstorming for future events.
Requests for shared information.

When not to use collaborative tools:
When you have sensitive information to discuss, such as a performance evaluation.
One-on-one conversations that everyone can read.
Brainstorming ideas that need extensive participation from team members.

How to pair collaboration tools with other tools for effective communication

Let's say you're discussing a specific topic or issue over email, and the conversation starts to move away from the original subject. Once you recognize this, it's time to switch over to your collaboration tool to continue the discussion. Spare yourself the agony of reading threads of emails that have nothing to do with the subject at hand.

In-person/standup meetings: Effective for quick round tables
In-person conversations are seen as the gold standard of effective communication. The face-to-face setting does not leave room for misinterpretation. People can easily read verbal and non-verbal cues, the tone is not misunderstood, and you can get immediate feedback.

Surprisingly, however, face-to-face communication scores low on the efficiency scale, especially in project management, because of one fatal flaw. Face-to-face communication has a tendency to veer off the main topic. Raise your hand if you've ever had a 30-minute meeting turned into a 2-hour meeting?

To avoid this from occurring, answer these five questions before you schedule an in-person meeting:
Why are we having this meeting?
Could this meeting be an email?
Can these meetings be consolidated?
Who needs to be part of this meeting?
How long does this meeting need to be?

When to use it:
If you have all team members in the same location.
When you have a clear goal in mind, you're confident it can be resolved by a face-to-face meeting within the specified time frame.
When you have a sensitive issue to discuss.

When not to use it:
When key people in the team are not able to attend the meeting.
When you have no clear goal in mind. Schedule a coffee date or use collaborative tools if you need to catch up with your team members.
When the meeting could be an email.

Phone calls: Effective for urgent matters and conference calls
Who doesn't love the telephone? While our mobile devices nowadays are so much more than just a means to get a call, the basic principle of the telephone still stands. Phone calls are for emergencies.

When you've tried and failed to get a response from a colleague, vendor, or supplier using other communication tools, it's time to break out the good-old phone call.

When to use it:
When there is an emergency or urgent matter such as rescheduling a meeting or conveying some critical information that needs immediate action.
When you need to get everyone together, but some dispersed team members have no access to video conferencing.

When not to use it:
After hours, on weekends and holidays unless essential.
When an email or text will suffice.
When video conferencing is more appropriate.

15 Characteristics Every Entrepreneur Should Have

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Mon, 19 Jul 2021 18:17:16 GMT

What is an entrepreneur?

Just a couple of decades ago, the business landscape was filled with many job seekers and very few entrepreneurs. The rise of successful startups like Facebook, Amazon, and Airbnb has birthed a new generation of entrepreneurs and romanticized the rags to riches story.

But we all know that the journey is far from easy, and there are more failed entrepreneurs and startups than successful ones. So how do you ensure your success as an entrepreneur?

Well, for starters, there are specific skills you need to master. While it's true that certain characteristics come naturally to others, you can learn and develop these qualities through consistent practice.

Entrepreneurship is a beautiful and often lucrative path, especially if you cultivate the right skills. So let's go through some of the characteristics you'll need to survive and thrive in this cutthroat world.
What is an entrepreneur?

The word entrepreneur has been coined repeatedly all over the internet and the media, but what does it mean? And who can be classified as an entrepreneur?

Simply put, an entrepreneur is anyone who creates and manages their own business. Everyday examples of an entrepreneur include:

Inventors: Create products, services, formulas, or machinery that are different from anything currently available. They turn these new ideas into viable businesses. These types of entrepreneurs are incredibly passionate about their vision, and their motivation comes from the uniqueness of their business.

Online business owners: Create a new business that is sorely run online. This includes bloggers and e-commerce businesses.

Small business owners: Run and manage small businesses with no intention of making large-scale profits. Usually, they make enough to support their family and a modest lifestyle. Examples of this type of business are your local grocery shops, beauty salons, and plumbers.

Large-scale/Startup: These entrepreneurs are in the business of making money and lots of it. They often create new services and products based on consumer preferences to meet market demand. Examples include Disney, Nike, Ikea, and Google.

Each category of entrepreneurs starts a business out of a new idea and works hard through all challenges. As we’ve mentioned before, the success of these businesses is based on harnessing there natural and learned skills.

Entrepreneur characteristics you should master

Below are 15 characteristics you can work on to become a successful entrepreneur:

Networking
No business can survive without a strong network. As an entrepreneur, one of the most critical skills you need to develop is networking and negotiating. Creating long-lasting relationships is an invaluable skill.

Access to new business opportunities and resources is heavily dependent on who you know. Networking with the right people can make or break your business. It allows you to learn from others in the industry. You can also promote your business through your network.

The key to successful networking is to treat it like you're building a new personal relationship. It should be genuine, and you should approach people to have a friend in the business. The relationship should benefit them as much as it benefits you.

Risk-taking
Being averse to risk as an entrepreneur is a recipe for disaster. While we aren't encouraging you to walk blindly and take every risk, you should also not run away from it. It's a balancing exercise that you'll need to master with practice.

Understanding that taking risks can have either effect is crucial. You'll need to become comfortable with some failures . It's just a part of the journey. When you do make a mistake, it's essential to keep your goal in mind and try again.

Risk-taking is a powerful tool that can set you apart from your competitors. You'll just need to practice how to manage it to your benefit. Learn to become comfortable with challenging yourself.

Creativity
Without creativity, there is no innovation. To become an entrepreneur, you have to start with an idea. Entrepreneurs can see opportunities where no one else does.

If you struggle with creativity , the best way to harness this superpower is to develop habits that support your creative side. Try to figure out things that get your creative juices going. Take a hike, go on holiday, meet new people or read a book. You’ll be amazed at the number of places you can find inspiration. Once you get an idea, ensure that you write it down so you won't forget.

Money Management
One of the biggest reasons why entrepreneurs fail is terrible money management. Running out of cash before the product is launched, making losses during operations, negative cash flows, and a lousy business model is very common.

After all, you are running a business, so you have to understand the financial situation of your business. Even if you hire professionals to help you manage your finances, it's still imperative that you know what is going on. After all, the ultimate decision lies with you. Blindly following advice is usually not a good idea.

If you need to, take financial management lessons or invest in training programs. It is an investment you will not regret.

Adaptability

Adapt or die. It's that simple. Today's business climate is harsh, competitive, and ever-changing. Policy changes have a ripple effect worldwide, and given the current pandemic, nothing is certain. We are in a new era, and entrepreneurs have to master adaptability .

Keep up with new trends in your target market, try new operating methods, and always keep an open mind. One thing that has made Amazon as successful as it is today is the principle that it's always day 1 at Amazon. This is a brilliant mindset to have because it allows you to be flexible.

Passion
You obviously love what you do, and harnessing that passion for investing time and energy in your business is an important skill. The world of business has so many ups and downs, and at times, passion is all you have.

It is one of your biggest assets and gives you the push you need to keep going when everything seems to be falling apart. Having a passion for your business means you can keep working on your product without getting bored. Passion also gives you the desire to improve every aspect of your business continuously and keeps you focused on your goal.

Vision
Successful entrepreneurs are capable of keeping an eye on the big picture. Vision is all about strategic planning. Can you see beyond the current state of affairs in the industry? Can you objectively identify the challenges you’re facing in your business? Are you capable of handling your daily tasks without losing focus on your long-term goals?

All these pertinent questions are essential to ask because they help you keep your mind centered on your vision. Your vision sets your business apart. It's what identifies who you are as a business.

Product or Service Research and Knowledge
How well do you know your product or service? As an entrepreneur, you need to know what you are selling at all times. Ensure that you define clearly what your business is offering, and the best way to figure that out is to define your value proposition.

What value is your business to your target market? What makes you different from your competitors? This knowledge comes through researching and knowing your product or service inside-out. You also need to understand the market that you are operating in. This means knowing what challenges you are likely to encounter.

An excellent way to master this skill is to have client feedback. Regardless of how positive or negative it is, try to look at it objectively to improve your business.

Motivation
Adopting a mindset hell-bent on succeeding regardless of the odds is extremely important. We often talk about motivation when discussing challenges. Still, your inspiration will take you places and keep you going even when things are going well. Motivation stops you from becoming complacent.

When things start to feel lethargic, you can increase your motivation by setting small attainable goals. Celebrate these minor achievements even as you're working towards the bigger goals. To succeed as an entrepreneur, you'll need to be motivated at all times.

Optimism
There are so many seminars, books, and articles about the power of a positive mind. For some people, this comes easy, but for others, optimism is hard to achieve. If you're a glass-half-empty person, you might need to work extra hard at keeping a positive mind.

Optimism boosts creativity and helps you to find new ideas for your business. Try not to dwell on past mistakes and keep your goal in mind.

Goal mindset
We've spoken about this before, but it's essential to reiterate how a goal-oriented mindset is crucial to success as an entrepreneur. Being determined is vital for your survival as an entrepreneur. Set your goals, work towards them, and refuse to give up.

Self-confidence
No one can believe in your dream more than you. In fact, you are likely to face resistance and, at times, ridicule. Still, the most successful entrepreneurs can move past this because they have a healthy amount of self-confidence in their idea.

The presence of self-confidence is not the absence of doubt. It's pretty common to have second thoughts often. Still, entrepreneurs exhibit the ability to persevere because they are incredibly confident in solving the problem.

Self-confidence makes you feel better about your decision-making, allowing you to take calculated risks and contribute to the overall success of your business. If you're struggling with self-confidence, try to practice words of affirmation every day and celebrate your wins. These small techniques will do wonders for you.

Decision-making
How decisive are you under pressure? When you're an entrepreneur, you have very little room to procrastinate. Some decisions need you to be quick and on your feet. To improve your decision-making skills, try to get as much information as you can about your market. Assess the impact of your decision and give yourself time to decide.

Invest in some lessons, speak to experts who can help you figure out your decision-making process.

Persuasiveness
The skill of persuasiveness is crucial for an entrepreneur. It enables you to have the power to talk and convince other people that your business is worth their time and money.

Learn to be a good listener so you can objectively accept the feedback you'll receive from your customers. This information will help you adapt your persuasive skills to meet your customer's needs. This creates brand loyalty because people will feel heard.

Tenacity
The last characteristic of a successful entrepreneur is tenacity. There is no doubt you will face significant challenges in your business. What sets you apart is your tenacity. How willing you are to keep going despite the obstacles in your way.

Giving up is never an option, and successful business owners all over the world have this characteristic.

A stagnant business is a dying business, and entrepreneurship is not without risks. However, rather than stunting the growth of bright ideas, it is up to you to harness and nurture the skills we have discussed today if you want to be successful.

Printable Daily Planner

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Fri, 25 Jun 2021 18:29:31 GMT

Free Printable Day Planner PDF

As cliché as it might sound, the way you think determines the quality of your life. Good and optimistic thoughts lead to happy emotions that help you feel centered and more focused. Negative thoughts, on the other hand, always have the opposite effect.

Changing the way you think is not an effortless task, in fact, retraining the mind is one of the hardest things to do. However, once you get the hang of it, you will see tangible changes in your life. A positive mindset is a definite game changer. It forms the foundation of all the choices you make about your career, relationships, family, finances and your body.

If you feel stuck in any aspect of your life, evaluating your thinking patterns is a good place to start. In order to achieve your goals, your thinking process needs to mirror your aspirations. For many people, this is an ongoing lifelong process.

So, how do you begin the process?

Well, in this article we’ve pulled together 7 practical steps you can use to change your life for the better.

1. Write it down on a day planner and then act

One of the first things you can do to prepare your mindset for a total shift is to write stuff down. Countless research shows that people who write down things tend to remember them more.

Got a goal that you’ve been struggling to achieve? Write it down. Buy a day planner and take some time every morning (or whenever it’s convenient for you) to write down all your big and small goals.

This practice will re-engage your mind so that you can physically visualize what you need to complete in a day, week, or month. Not only will this save you time, but it will also help you to organize your life a bit better.

This will give you more time for things you might otherwise forget or ignore, such as going to the gym or taking on a new hobby. You will find it easier to focus when you have a clear plan about what needs to be done that day or that week.

The second step after you’ve written down your goals is to act. Feelings come and go, but your goals still need to be achieved, regardless of what you feel. Train your mind to ignore the feelings that usually hold you back.

If you’ve committed to completing a task by a certain time, try to do it regardless of how uninspired, tired or scared you are. Sometimes these feelings are just an excuse and if you practice ignoring these negative emotions frequently, you will find it easier to have the discipline for the things you want to achieve.

2. Get out of your comfort zone

Nothing grows in the comfort zone, it’s safe and warm but there is no development or expansion that you can expect in that place.

Change is scary in any form and the older you get the more likely you’ll become afraid of anything that seems unfamiliar or challenging. But in order to get the best experiences in life, you’ll need to be willing to step out of that comfort zone as often as you can in every area of your life.

Your imagination and aspirations are only as big as what you expose them to. Allow yourself to be exposed to new experiences, people, and things. This will open up the horizon a lot more and give you the, and confidence to tackle just about anything in your life.

A good way to keep this golden tidbit at the forefront of your mind is to use your day planner to draw inspiration. Alongside your to-do list and your schedule, have a space in your day planner where you write down the things in your life that make you happy.

Jot down the things that you’d like to do to add more happiness to your life. Include stuff you’re trying to get rid of or new things you’d like to try. And, every day as you’re browsing through your to-do list you can be reminded of the risks you want to take or the habits you want to get rid of.

Your journey on this earth is a continuous learning process, and stepping out of your comfort zone is one of the hardest things to do. But the payoff is worth it. You’ll live a happier, more fulfilled life in the long run. Some of the best experiences in life can come from places you never thought you’d be in.

3. Look for an anchor

Whether or not you see yourself as religious, every human being needs something to anchor them. There are many belief systems in the world, and regardless of what religion you practice, one thing is clear; life sometimes sucks.

It is in these tough moments that most of us tend to give up on our goals. This reaction is understandable, especially if something horrific or unfair happens. One way to channel your thoughts in the right direction is to find an anchor that you can hold on to when things go wrong.

So many things can weigh you down in this life and you need all the positive influences you can get. An anchor helps you find balance and gives you hope when you need it the most. It helps you to develop faith and trust that the darkness will not last forever.

This is a great tool to have in your arsenal because negative thoughts are very destructive. If you’ve been struggling to cope with external or internal factors, try to find a positive anchor that will counteract those negative thoughts. It is very important to have an anchor if you want to change your mindset.

4. Start with small goals

We’ve all been there, New Year rolls by and we make big proclamations about what we are going to achieve that year. However, by the end of February, you’ve probably settled back into your usual routine.

According to Statistic Brain, 27% of people abandon their New Year goals by the first week. At the two-week mark, 31% of people have quit and very few people make it to the end of the year.

The solution? Start with small goals. It is tempting to set huge goals when the year is starting, but this method is usually overwhelming. It’s better to set goals that are manageable, that way when you accomplish one thing it boosts your confidence.
Confidence is extremely important when you want to change your mindset. It tricks your mind into becoming more focused and gives you the energy to keep going. That ‘feel-good’ feeling you get from crushing your small goals is a great motivator.

So, avoid setting yourself up for failure and take small steps before you tackle the big goals. This method can work for anything in your life, whether it's business or personal.

5. Choose your words wisely

We’ve already mentioned how powerful your thoughts are, but have you ever considered the power your words hold?

How many times have you felt completely crushed by words that someone spoke to you? The same principle applies when it comes to words that come out of your mouth about your life. Many studies have shown just how much the words we speak to ourselves affect our behavior. Printable Daily Planner

To ensure that every aspect of your life aligns with your goals and aspirations, guard your words carefully. Avoid speaking things that do not reflect who you want to be, where you want to go, and what you want to accomplish.

A practical way to incorporate this into your life is to speak affirming words to yourself as often as you can. Sure, words cannot magically make everything right in your life, but they do change the way your mind processes the world around you.

Simply put, you need to try to be a glass-half-full type of person all the time. Always look for the positive in any situation.

6. Incorporate personal and family time into your day planner

Taking care of yourself and spending time with your family is extremely important for your mental well-being. Human beings are social creatures and we thrive when we are in constant communication with other people.

Don't believe us? Think about how frustrating it felt last year when the entire world shut down and we couldn’t physically touch or see each other? 2020 was a pretty crazy year and a lot of people suffered from isolation.

When we spend a lot of time working or away from the people that we love or enjoy being around, it can have negative consequences. One way to live a better life is to always carve out time for personal relationships. This includes your relationship with yourself.

Depression, stress, and anxiety are a by-product of the world we live in. Self-care is an important tool that you should use to balance off these negatives. A healthy work-life balance has to be your top priority.

Slow down and focus on the good things you have going on from time to time because we tend to live our lives on auto-pilot. Life can get monotonous, so take time to smell the roses. Stop by your local coffee shop and just savor the atmosphere, you’ll be amazed at the things you see that you’d normally overlook.

Take a walk during your lunch break or schedule a staycation at home. This downtime will certainly do wonders for your soul and for your mind. We all need a recharge as often as possible.

7. Get rid of excuses and hold yourself accountable

This is probably the hardest step to take on our list. No one likes to hold themselves accountable . It’s uncomfortable and can sometimes have a negative effect on your mental well-being.

Excuses have helped no one to achieve greatness. You’ll need to train your mind to become accustomed to addressing uncomfortable truths about what is really holding you back. Excuses act as a barrier between you and the person you want to become. The longer you hold on to these excuses, the more frustrated and stuck you’ll feel.

If, for example, you’ve been struggling financially for a while now, you’ll need to evaluate and be accountable for your money habits. Your finances are a big part of your life, you cannot afford to be reckless. Use a day planner to track your expenses and your income, and to set your financial goals. For many people, money is a big problem in their lives. You need to stop the excuses and hold yourself accountable.

Try to identify the excuses you make in whichever area of your life you are struggling with. That is the first step in figuring out how you can combat these excuses. Are you spending too much time on social media? Do you watch too much TV? Whatever your weakness is, you’ll need to commit yourself to fight it. Printable Day Planner

The great thing is that once you find a way to get your mind over this roadblock, you’ll feel like a brand new person.

Final Thoughts

Changing the way you think is hard work, it’s never going to be an easy road for anyone. Surround yourself with people with whom you feel comfortable sharing your struggles. Also, look for people whose mindset you admire and spend as much time as you can with them. You’ll notice that your outlook on life will change immensely.

Everyone is striving for a better life but achieving better for yourself will take a lot of inward work. Think of it as a journey and not an ultimate destination because no individual can ever say they don't experience failure or negative thoughts and emotions.

The experience is about getting to know who you are intimately and creating oneness with all parts of yourself. This will help you navigate past the bad thoughts that hold you back from becoming a better version of yourself.

5 Reasons Why Start-ups Fail

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Tue, 08 Jun 2021 15:42:40 GMT

The word start-up has become synonymous with success. Amazon, Uber, Airbnb are all outstanding examples of mega-successful start-ups. But what about those that fail to make it? Why did these start-ups fail to do what they set out to do?

The startling reality is that most start-ups don't do well. In fact, over two-thirds of start-ups never turn a profit. Starting a successful business requires much more than just a great idea. All the pieces need to come together at the right time. Rarely does this happen without effort. If you are planning on starting a start-up, here are five pitfalls you should know about.

The first reason: Market Problems

One of the first reasons why most start-ups don’t do well is that they cannot read the market properly . Sure the idea could be great but if there is very little to no market market adoption of the product, the company will run into problems quickly.

So how do you recognize this problem? The following symptoms are prominent indicators of this issue:

Lackluster value proposition

Every successful start-up has either had a compelling value proposition or event that prompted customers to commit to buying what they were selling.

A start-up that cannot get this right will not do well. Selling in today’s business market is tough. There are so many options available and customers are more demanding. In fact, sales reps experts have a specific metaphor for this. For a product to sell you’ll have to find a customer segment that either has their “hair on fire” or is in “excruciating pain” and needs immediate relief. In other words, you are either selling a vitamin or a painkiller.

Bad timing

As with anything in life, timing is everything. Some start-ups fail to realize that they are ahead of their market by several years. While the value proposition could be sound, the size of the market will not be able to sustain the growth of the company. Simply put, not enough people will have the money or see the need to purchase the product.

A good example of this is the 1998 Pets.com start-up. Meant to be an ‘Amazon’ for pet owners, the idea failed for several reasons. The business model was unsustainable and expectations of growth were inflated. But aside from these reasons, Pets.com overestimated the number of online customers it could rope in.

The second reason: Business Model Failure

An unrealistic business model will always spell failure for any company. A common reason for start-up failure is the assumption that customers will flock to them because they have an awesome product or service.

While this may happen especially with the first few customers, most start-ups will realize that a lot more effort is required to maintain a steady stream of customers. It is likely to become very expensive to attract and win over customers. The cost of acquiring the customer (CAC) is most likely to be higher than the lifetime value (LTV) that individual customers will bring.

Most companies do not set realistic cost projections when they are considering how to acquire customers. Often, the figure is under forecasted and at times even ignored. This is a grave mistake. A business plan that does not consider this crucial step will not work.

So what should start-ups do to counteract this oversight?

The fundamentals of a successful business model

To avoid this from occurring, the start-up will have to figure out a way to generate more money over the lifetime of their relationship with the customer compared to how much the company spent attracting them.

A great tip to consolidating a successful business model is to focus on these two questions:

Can you find an expandable method of acquiring customers?
Are you able to monetize those customers at a higher figure than what you spent acquiring them?

Simplifying the process when developing your business model will make a world of difference. In addition to this, you can use the following guidelines to assist you in the practical thinking process that you have to engage in.

The CAC / LTV rule and ratio

As we have outlined previously, your CAC has to be lower than the LTV. There is no escaping this rule. The best way to figure out if you’re doing it correctly is to calculate your LTV/CAC ratio. Ideally, this ratio should be 3:1, i.e. the value the customer brings to the business should be at least three times more than what it cost to acquire them. If the ratio is too close, you are pouring out too much money and if it’s too wide e.g. 5:1 you are spending too little and probably losing business in the process.

To figure out this ratio, you’ll need to have accurate numbers for both CAC and LTV.

How to calculate CAC

To calculate CAC, every start-up needs to factor in their total cost of sales and marketing expenditure. This includes expenses like salaries, marketing campaigns, lead generation, and conversion methods as well as travel expenses, among other things.

Once you have these numbers, divide them by the number of new customers gained in a certain period. This is especially easy if the sales cycle is short and you can tie the marketing and sales costs with new customers in the same time frame. If the sales cycle is longer, the best way to get accurate results is to stagger the costs, and the acquired customers to get accurate numbers.

So CAC= sales and marketing costs ➗ new customers.

A good example is, if you spent $1 million in sales and marketing in a given period and acquired 1000 customers, your average CAC will be $1000.

How to calculate LTV

The LTV measures how long an average customer sticks around before they stop buying your service or product. The longer your customer retention, the more valuable they are. To calculate LTV, you will need to account for the gross margin percentage associated with every individual customer.

This is the percentage of profit that is left after you factor in the total cost of operation, support and installation expenses. This is straightforward if the business model is centered on one-time fees. If the start-up has a recurring subscription revenue model, then this figure is calculated by dividing the monthly recurring revenue by the monthly churn rate (monthly number of people who cancel their subscription.)

Capital Efficiency “Rule”

In an ideal world, getting this process right is easy as long as you follow the CAC/LTV rule. The reality that most start-ups face, however, is that certain business functions such as general and admin expenses, product development, and other expenses have to be factored in so that the business becomes profitable.

After considering all these expenses, every start-up that wants to do well needs to utilize capital efficiently. The general rule of thumb is to recover CAC in less than 12 months.

Knowing these numbers goes beyond ensuring capital efficiency. You need to understand the drivers of your business so you can know which levers you can manipulate for growth.

The third reason: Poor Management Team

Problems arise for most start-ups when the management team is either weak or has poor decision-making capabilities. A good management team knows how to avoid business model failure, running out of cash, and delivering a poor product.

Several symptoms often plague a weak management team:

Weak strategy
Poor product research and development. Usually evidenced by bad product adoption by the market.
Bad execution that leads to the product being built incorrectly or missing important launch deadlines. Go-to-market execution is also poorly implemented.

Weak team-building capabilities. The wrong people are put in key positions and the whole organization is wrought with people who don’t know what they are doing.

The fourth reason: Running out of money

This is a rampant problem in the start-up community. Running out of cash was one of the causes of the dot.com bubble burst in the late 1990s. Most start-ups fail because they are not generating enough revenue (either via revenue streams or funding) to sustain and grow their business.

A good business strategy to avoid this problem is to understand how much money is left and whether that cash can carry the company to the next successful financing round or to a positive cash flow.

Milestones that every start-up should reach

Understanding that a constant increase in valuation for many start-ups is not possible. If you manage to raise a certain amount of money from a funding round in January, it does not guarantee that your start-up will automatically be worth more at the end of the year.

Valuation increase is rarely linear. Certain key steps have to be achieved. We’ve narrowed down what these milestones would look like for a software start-up.

Development after the first seed round valuation should be focused on removing as much risk as possible. This could be as simple as hiring a key staff member, building a prototype and testing it out on customers, or overcoming a technical obstacle.

Acquire customer validation. If the product is still in the beta stages, acquiring customer validation early on is a significant step towards increasing valuation. If you have a finished product with no customer validation, it is unlikely that you will see an increase in valuation.

The product is finished and already shipping. Paying customers who are giving positive reviews will likely aid in increasing valuation.

All the first release product or market issues have been ironed out and there are no hiccups. This is a good indicator that the business is starting to gain momentum.

You’ve figured out the CAC/LTV ratio. Once it’s proven that the business model can be monetized and that it can realistically make profit, the road to increased valuation is clearer.

The start-up has expanded well, but additional funding is needed to grow further. This capital might be used for different reasons, such as expanding internationally or injecting more funds into working capital.

How start-ups fail to reach these milestones

What often happens is that the company management fails to achieve the next milestone before they run out of money. While it may still be possible to raise more money, valuation is likely to be lower.

So how should start-ups walk this tightrope?

It’s simple. The most important tool that management has to have is the ability to know when to pause and when to dive in full steam ahead. During the early stages of development, when the business is going through refining the business model, the pace needs to be slow. The focus should be on preserving as much money as they can.

For example, it is counterintuitive to hire a full-service marketing or sales department when the product or service is still being developed. This is a significant waste of precious resources because at this point you have no need for full-blown marketing or sales staff.

Knowing when to release the purse strings can also be a challenge even for seasoned CEOs because you need to start investing more than what your current revenue income is. If the timing is off it can set you back quite significantly.

Usually, most start-ups need to start investing in certain aspects, like marketing, when the business model has been proven. In other words, you have the green light once it’s been established that the cost to acquire a customer is lower than the lifetime value of the customer.

The fifth reason: Product Issues

The last reason why start-ups fail is that they totally miss the mark when they are developing a product. Failure to identify what the market requires is a big mistake. Other times the product could be great but the execution is mishandled.

It’s fairly common to find that the first product a start-up introduces will not appeal to the market. At best the product will require a bit of tweaking. A good example of this is Uber. When Uber launched it was called Ubercab, the target market was urban city professionals who wouldn’t mind paying extra for the convenience of a black cab. The idea then morphed several years later with the introduction of the cheaper sedan cars that catered to the average person.

Sometimes a complete overhaul of the product is needed. When this happens, it’s evidence that the management did not conduct proper due diligence and completely misread the market.

What is an ecommerce privacy policy?

admin@sltcreative.com (Salt Creative) — Thu, 10 Sep 2020 23:29:08 GMT

Why generate an eCommerce privacy policy?

Writing and implementing a privacy policy is no easy task, but the tips below will help you understand exactly what an eCommerce privacy policy is, why you need one, what your privacy policy should include , what data to collect, and how to comply with international guidelines.

The words “privacy policy” probably bring up images of grayed-out, minuscule links at the bottom of a website. The truth is: the privacy policy is a legal document that’s crucial for any website, although probably ignored by most site visitors. Also known as a “privacy statement”or “privacy declaration,” a privacy policy is a statement explaining how the personal, and often sensitive, customer information will be collected, handled, stored, shared, and protected through interacting with a company's website.

The privacy policy is not just important for websites, it's especially important for an eCommerce store. The privacy policy reassures customers that their private data will be protected, but also helps your business meet regulatory requirements.

Since the privacy policy is a legal document, it can be difficult to understand. As a restaurant, business, or retailer, it can be confusing to write by yourself. First, you need to determine how your business will treat customer data. Second, you will make sure that your policy states how you will manage the data, and that your policy is in line with government regulations. Third, you will need to communicate your policy clearly and transparently to your customers in a way they understand.

Why create a privacy policy?

Before we cover how to craft a privacy policy, we'll first cover why you need one. Here are the top reasons why you need a privacy policy for eCommerce businesses.

#1 - It gives you legal protection

A privacy policy serves as protection from potential lawsuits from customers as well as other businesses. If your e-commerce site is sued, you can document that you have set in place a publicly stated privacy policy that clearly declares what you do with the sensitive customer information collected.

In addition, you need a privacy policy to use certain apps or services. Not only is a privacy policy critical to ensuring that you gain customer trust and that legal requirements are met, but many third-party apps and services also require it, such as Google.

In order to access certain services and tools like AdSense, Google Analytics, etc., Google requires that you have an up-to-date, comprehensive privacy policy in place on your website.

According to the Google Analytics terms of use:

“You must post a Privacy Policy and that Privacy Policy must provide notice of Your use of cookies that are used to collect traffic data, and You must not circumvent any privacy features (e.g., an opt-out) that are part of the Service.”

#2 - It builds trust with customers

As an e-commerce store, you will undoubtedly be collecting personal information from customers and visitors to your site such as name, age, address, email and credit card details. For obvious reasons, many will want to know that this information is in safe hands, so an accessible privacy policy on the website will demonstrate your commitment to security while helping to build confidence in your website and business.

#3 - It’s required by law

First and foremost, a privacy policy is legally required by law in the United States, Canada, the European Union, Australia, and other jurisdictions around the world — which is further explained below. All of that data is personal data, and should be disclosed in your e-commerce store privacy policy. In addition, e-commerce store owners need to both limit their risk as well as manage the expectations of their customers to avoid any misunderstandings.

#4 - What your privacy policy should include

When deciding what to include, start by making a list. While this will be individual to each merchant, there are general guidelines that every policy should follow, most of which are required by law.

The details of your policy will depend on things like the way you advertise, the products you sell, who your customers are, how you collect payment information, and how payment processors and other third parties are involved with your site and your data.

For example, Gap.com’s checkout page requires unregistered “guest” shoppers to enter just an email address, but when they get to the checkout page, it requires they disclose a great deal of personally identifiable information.

What to include in your privacy policy?

An effective privacy policy will clearly identify the types of data collected through your store, how and why it’s collected, and how it’s recorded, stored and deleted. Other unique factors relating to your e-commerce store also determine specific privacy protections needed for your policy.

1. Cookie policies

If data may be left on a user’s computer, this should be specified. An example includes cookies, which are often used to track the viewing habits of visitors, making it easier for returning customers to log in and remembers what products were added to the shopping cart. If you offer an opt-out from cookies, inform customers of this feature and the possible impacts for selecting this option.

2. Type of information collected

Specify the types of information collected from site visitors and customers. It is also important to share why you’re collecting that data and how users’ information is being used. For example, if you’re collecting email addresses, your privacy policy should explicitly mention that email addresses are required for communication purposes.

3. Users’ ability to view or modify personal information

Your privacy policy should contain a section detailing how customers can review the information a website has collected from them, as well as how they are able to change or delete that information. It should give consumers a chance to change, edit, or delete their own personal data, as well as the choice to opt out of sharing their data with you.

4. Circumstances when data may be released

On certain occasions, you may have to comply with lawful requests to hand over user data. Your privacy policy must address types of situations where customer data may be released.

Example: Walmart's privacy policy communicates that they may share users’ personal information in special circumstances, and lists some examples of situations in which they may share user data.

5. Who to contact regarding privacy concerns

Your policy should provide contact information for the people responsible for upholding your privacy procedures. Consider creating a unique email address for this purpose.

6. The policy’s effective date and most recent update

Be sure to keep your privacy policy updated. Log any changes that you’ve made and always display when the last update took place.

7. How, if any, of the collected information, is shared or sold

If user data is sold or shared to third parties, your privacy policy should include an opt-out option for those customers who don’t want their information disclosed to others.

Also, if you allow third parties to monitor the activities of your customers — for example, Google Analytics, AdSense, AdRoll, YouTube — your privacy policy has to include a clause that identifies those third parties and how they collect and use your customers’ data.

8. Describe a “Business Transfer” clause

Include a section detailing what will occur if you sell or merge your business with another company. Known as a “Business Transfer” provision. This clause should discuss what would take place if the ownership of the business changes, and the steps that your company will take to transfer the ownership of user data.

9. List any age requirements

If you’re selling adult or sensitive products, you may need to have a clause specifying the minimum age gropu for users to view your website.

How to create your privacy policy:

Once you’ve created a list of what you will include in your privacy policy, it’s time to create it. There are a couple of options when it comes to the actual creation of the policy, including:

1) Use an online privacy policy generator

There are a variety of online options to generate a policy for your specific needs. However, you must be certain that the services offered provide custom options backed by verifiable legal expertise. For a flat fee, a LegalZoom Business Legal Plan lawyer will draft your documents for you. Pricing starts at $399 for basic information for websites. E-commerce website privacy policies can cost more.

Example:

A great example of privacy policy generator is from TermsFeed. All you need to do is start the generator tool, enter the information about your website and app, then answer a few questions about your business. The Privacy Policy Generator creates a custom document that you can download as both as HTML or text files.

2) Hire a lawyer

If you have the budget, hire a legal expert or lawyer to help draft your privacy policy. Make sure the lawyer is experienced in international data protection law and check that they’re up-to-date with the legal requirements for your business.

If you’re on a tight budget, consider using a service such as LegalZoom , which enables you to schedule a consultation with an attorney.

3) DIY template

Most countries have privacy legislation that require businesses to have a privacy policy in place, but some have stricter rules than others. While the laws vary, one thing is consistent: if you operate a website anywhere in the world, a privacy policy that adheres to the laws in the regions where you operate and where your website users live, is essential.

Other Resources: TermsFeed provides a downloadable PDF file or MS Word, Google document.

Four e-commerce privacy policy best practices:

Aside from having relevant and accurate information in your privacy policy, presenting your policies clearly to allow customers to easily review is also important. Here are 4 best practice tips to consider when writing your privacy policy:

Best Practice #1 - Keep it updated

As consumer privacy and protection laws change, your policies should evolve as well. Set up a process to review your policy each year and when new laws are enacted. It will be important to state when your policy was last updated.

Best Practice #2 - Keep it simple

A privacy policy should be written in straightforward language and be simply presented. Consider Nordstrom Rack’s privacy policy, which uses plain language when explaining its terms. The page contains jump links to quickly navigate to various sections of the document they are interested in reviewing.

Best Practice #3 - Make your privacy policy easy to find

Ensure visitors can easily locate your privacy policy no matter where they are on your site. Follow the common practice of adding a privacy policy link in the footer of your site, so that it’s visible from any page.

Best Practice #4 - The bottom line

A privacy policy is a critical part of any website’s legal framework and should be made a top priority. Not only should it be written clearly, compliant, easily accessible, it is meant to protect your business from misunderstandings and potential lawsuits. The privacy policy also acts as an effective means of communication to customers regarding the sensitive data you collect. Open communication helps build trust with your customers and visitors to your site.

About Salt Creative:

Salt Creative is a full-scale web design agency offering modern, mobile-optimized websites, a wide range of marketing and graphic design services for businesses of all types and sizes. Whether a well-seasoned, established business in Boise, and in need of a website overhaul, adding eCommerce solutions, upgrading for mobile, or starting something new, we can help with affordable solutions. Our Boise web design team develops great-looking websites to establish an effective online presence.

Better Inbound Marketing Strategies

Tue, 14 Jan 2020 23:44:00 GMT

Accomplish Your Revenue Goals

As industry experts, we are aware of the multiple, complex factors impacting Google ranking, and how ranking directly impacts new client lead generation. Additionally, Google continues to maintain 85+% market share . That results in page one, position one Google search results getting 33%+ more clicks and 95% of all clicks go to the top 10 positions (essentially the 1st page). Results beyond page two of Google are virtually non-existent. That boils down to the need for better ranking, ideally top of page one ranking, in order to be found by people searching.

With Google's complex algorithms changing now more than ever, the result is an even more arduous process navigating SEO and inbound marketing strategies, yet the process is a must for any relevant business.

That's why we know just how vital it is to implement best efforts and practices in order to maximize inbound marketing efforts to accomplish top web ranking goals. Teamed up with over 20 years’ industry experience with technical and data-driven solutions, we have established the right formulas at the right time. We feel confident they will get the results you need. Read on for a few ranking tips:

How-To Rank Better on Google

Assess competition and best strategies in your market
Conduct keyword analysis - determine most relevant and important keywords for each market, demographic, those with the highest search volume
Assess website structure and design including headings, copy, links, and images
Assess website copy for depth, accuracy, and relevancy
Assess website results such as speed, navigation for both desktop and mobile platforms
Assess consistency between desktop and mobile versions of website
Determine ads and pay-per-click campaigns. How are they working for you?

WHO WE ARE

Salt Creative is an industry leader in SEO and inbound marketing strategies, along with our web and design services. At Salt Creative, we partner with clients to optimize their SEO and inbound marketing strategies during peak and off-peak seasons. How?

We have over 5 years’ specialized experience creating customized campaigns for our clients. From curating online content in the form of creative articles, running social media campaigns and strategies, or watching your site's round-the-clock, time and time again, we boost online presence, while leveraging solutions for maximum results.

We work autonomously as a team managing your web design , SEO, inbound, and social marketing efforts, or in partnership with in-house creative staff and website managers to enhance current marketing efforts and campaigns.

We understand that in this new era of competing interests for customers, and the high-demand among the competition, relevant content is a vital element connected to strong web ranking are vital. We take on the challenge and get the job done.

How? With a system of high-quality content generation that creates experiences your audiences crave. We will continue to elevate on-page brand messaging, capture attention and communicate experience.

The overall result is added value, loyalty and lead generation.

How have we done so far?

In terms of inbound marketing results, we don't shy away from confidence. We boldly declare how great our web ranking results are. In the past 5 years, we have earned each and every client site top ranking position in their industry. That = Top Positions, First Page Google Ranking. That's a feat worthy of declaring! And, we don't intend to stop getting these results.

Let's connect to uncover your best inbound strategies to accomplish revenue goals!

SALT CREATIVE INBOUND MARKETING SERVICES

Blog Creation & Management
Google Analytics
Copywriting
Content Creation
Social Media Campaigns
Contests
Loyalty Programs
Reviews
Surveys
Special Offers

8 Genius Examples of Empathetic Content Marketing in Action

Sat, 14 Dec 2019 02:45:00 GMT

Successful content marketing is about creating a connection between your audience and your brand. This doesn’t mean just throwing content at your audience. It means truly valued creating content -- content that serves needs and addresses the biggest pain points. And this type of content is much easier to create when it's informed and driven by empathy.

As Dr. Brené Brown notes , “Empathy is feeling with people.”

Not sure what that looks like? Let's walk through nine brands that nail empathetic content marketing across various media.

8 Clever Examples of Empathetic Content Marketing in Action

1) LUSH

Content Type: Video

With the tagline, “Fresh, handmade cosmetics,” LUSH is a beauty brand that is all about natural products. As such, we see its radical transparency showcased in the " How It’s Made " video series, where LUSH goes behind-the-scenes of some of their most popular products.

Each episode features actual LUSH employees in the “kitchen,” narrating the step-by-step process of how the products are made. Lush visuals (pun intended) showcase just how natural the ingredients are. You see mounds of fresh lemons, tea infusions, and salt swirled together to become the product you know and love. It’s equal parts interesting and educational.

How it shows empathy:

LUSH customers want to buy beauty products that are truly natural. They care about using fresh, organic, and ethically sourced ingredients -- hence why the videos feature colorful, close-up shots of those organic lemons and sea salt to drive that point home. Taking customers inside the factory and showing them every part of the process -- with a human face -- assures them that they can consume these products with peace of mind.

2) LinkedIn

Content Type: Ebook

LinkedIn Marketing Solutions is all about mobilizing marketers to grow their audience, create more effective content, and, ultimately, achieve their goals. Naturally, LinkedIn wants its audience to leverage this service to achieve those goals. While it produces plenty of content related to the benefits of LinkedIn, the team has made a significant push into content that educates all levels of marketer on a variety of topics (as you can see on its blog ).

This ebook, The Secret Sauce: Learn how LinkedIn uses LinkedIn for marketing , provides a ton of insider information about how LinkedIn itself uses the platform to achieve its marketing goals.

How it shows empathy:

One immensely effective empathy marketing tactic is education. LinkedIn wants to empower its audience to do work better (and use its product to do so), and this ebook is the single tool they need to understand and confidently use LinkedIn like the pros -- even the pros at LinkedIn headquarters.

Through offerings like this, customers learn that they can rely on LinkedIn as a trusted source to guide them in the right direction, and LinkedIn can continue to provide solutions through its product offerings. It’s a win-win all around.

3) The Home Depot

Content Type: Infographic

The Home Depot is a home and garden supply store that caters to all types of builders and DIY-ers -- whether you're a construction worker building a gazebo or a homemaker experimenting with gardening. In other words, their content must cater to various demographics.

As Home Depot is all about the DIY, its marketing focuses on what its supplies can help you do -- not just what the supplies are. This " Grow a Living Salad Bowl " infographic teaches consumers to grow their own salads, offering information on how to do it, which vegetables grow best, and what supplies they need -- all with minimal branding.

How it shows empathy:

The Home Depot's customers dream of being skilled DIY-ers, but need a bit of help working through the unknown, as well as some encouragement. This infographic delivers on these, and inspires customers to take action.

4) Extra

Content Type: Interactive Site

We’ve seen just about every twist on gum marketing possible: sexy encounters, romantic trysts, and more. Extra is pushing past that narrative. The brand realizes that gum is an everyday part of life, a seemingly mundane product, but its omnipresence means it’s there for many of life’s little moments. Hence, the #givextragetextra campaign is all about celebrating those moments -- the awesome fishing trip, the road trip with friends, the engagement -- by turning them into art.

The interactive site and social campaign encourage you to submit photos of those everyday moments to be turned into sketches, some of which appear on the inside flap of Extra packaging. At the site, you can see the images, watch a video of the artist’s sketches, peruse the gallery, and search to see if your submission has been turned into art.

How it shows empathy:

In many ways, gum is a product meant to enhance intimacy, making your breath fresh for more closeness. In our techno-connected world, those everyday moments of intimacy are often overlooked. This campaign helps customers become more aware and celebratory of those moments. By encouraging them to capture and share those memories -- and honoring them through the gum-wrapper art -- Extra is helping customers live a more full and present life.

5) Microsoft

Content Type: Interactive Infographic

Microsoft’s security solutions are all about keeping consumers’ data safe. The brand's goal, then, is to educate and explain why its products are important. That said, data security is not the sexiest topic -- not to mention plenty has been said about it.

To give it a new twist, Microsoft created the Anatomy of a Data Breach interactive site, which explains the issue of data security through a relevant lens: the data heist.

The site puts consumers in a hacker’s shoes, guiding them through the stages of a data breach and showing, in detail, exactly how the data is stolen. Coupled with statistics about data security, the messaging is clear.

How it shows empathy:

Consumers know data breaches are a problem, but they don’t know exactly how they happen (seriously, how do these keep on happening? Asking for a friend.) By making an engaging story and using real consumer survey data, Microsoft brings the problem to life in a genuine and accessible way. Through the interactive, customers truly see their vulnerabilities and better understand how to protect themselves.

6) Michael’s

Content Type: Blog

In a world where Pinterest dominates, Michael’s chain of craft stores is making a play to capture its own audience on its own properties. The brand has long provided the standard craft tutorials and product features on its site, but with The Glue String blog, Michael's is inserting itself into its readers’ lifestyles with a variety of content.

Posts like “Marker 101: How to Choose a Tip” may sound a little silly, but for avid crafters, these are the exact types of posts that are relevant to their lives. The beautiful layout and high-impact visuals only help to bring these stories to life.

How it shows empathy:

Crafting is an exciting hobby, but not without its own frustrations. Providing useful tips and hacks on how to do things better via a free publication helps readers do more of what they love with fewer headaches. Additionally, fans get to share their enthusiasm through social, helping Michael’s extend its reach while helping their audience show their interests off.

7) JetBlue

Content Type: Video

JetBlue is a brand known for superb customer service and humor. At this point, we know where it flies and we know its hook, so its marketing needs to extend beyond the services provided. As such, JetBlue's content is focusing more on the world of flying and the experiences we all have.

The Flight Etiquette videos are funny PSAs that spotlight some of the most pervasive problems we encounter while traveling: overzealous flight boarding, chatty seatmates, etc. By giving it the sarcastic “How NOT to” twist, JetBlue showcases its humor and brand voice.

How it shows empathy:

There are specific instances that make the flying experience suck for all of us. These videos attempt to remedy these troubles by commiserating with and educating the public.

8) J.Crew

Content Type: Visual How-Tos

J.Crew is a sophisticated clothing brand that has always marketed toward lifestyle, framing its clothes within that context. While it has a devoted following, it's always searching for ways to more deeply connect with its audience.

The company's blog is a fantastic outlet for that. Naturally, as design is a core part of its business, it is a major component of publishing. Its clean design superbly showcases J.Crew products, tips, and tricks. And, it consistently uses on-brand visuals to enhance the content. For example, " How to Get (and Dress For) the Job You Want " includes interviews, expert advice, and vibrant visuals to tie together the discussion with some ideas of exact outfits to buy.

How it shows empathy:

Many J.Crew customers go shopping to find a great interview outfit to make the perfect first impression. Giving customers more options to express themselves -- and be successful --- through clothing helps them achieve that.

Ready to Try It?

Approaching the content that you seek to create as a brand from a perspective that puts others and their wants, needs, and dreams before your own is the smartest way to grow an audience. That's because, in doing so, you’re showing people that you care about them as humans, first and foremost. And people want to work with (B2B) or support (B2C) people that they like, and companies that they believe “get" them.

You can always talk about your brand and what you’re peddling once there’s a connection and a relationship established. But if you doing things right, people will be drawn to you and you won’t ever have to toot your own horn.

How content creation can help your business.

Tue, 03 Dec 2019 21:15:00 GMT

“Targeted content creation forms connections with customers seamlessly and organically."

WHAT IS INBOUND MARKETING

Inbound marketing is a method of attracting, engaging, and delighting people to grow a business that provides value and builds trust. Inbound marketing is a business methodology that attracts customers by creating valuable content and experiences tailored to them. Creating new, frequent and insightful content is a healthy and necessary practice of business in any industry (Agrawl, 2016, Forbes). Experts, specializing in establishing a solid inbound marketing strategy, create content aligned to an overall business’ marketing and sales strategy.

HOW DOES INBOUND MARKETING VARY FROM OUTBOUND MARKETING?

Inbound marketing tactics, such as targeted content creation, exposes a business to a broader audience in a natural way, unlike advertisements. Where advertisements push a message, content creation forms natural connections. By offering people valuable content, often related to topics they are interested in and already searching for online, a business becomes a valuable resource.

While outbound marketing interrupts audiences with content customers don't want, inbound marketing connects offers content they're already looking for, also offering solutions or resources, for problems they already have.

FORM NATURAL CONNECTIONS WITH POTENTIAL CUSTOMERS

To effectively draw in potential customers and drive inbound website traffic, it is essential to curate content by utilizing identified phrases and topics relevant to the primary customer base. By making a natural connection with potential customers through relevant content, organic engagement and trust is developed, prior to forming an official relationship.

WHAT ARE THE BENEFITS OF INBOUND MARKETING?

Establish trust with helpful content

Connect to new customer in a relevant way

Helps improve website SEO

Boost revenue potential by attracting new visits to website

EFFECTIVE INBOUND MARKETING IS RELEVANT

Creating effective inbound marketing strategy specific to a businesses’ primary customer base, relies upon content that is relevant. Relevant content builds trust and credibility, while earning new business. In order to curate relevant content, it is essential to understand your customer, and what they find useful.

WHAT IS TARGETED CONTENT?

We refer to this natural connection as a “soft sell” vs. “strong” sales approach. The right content informs, solves problems, answers questions, offers entertainment, makes us smile, guides decision making, offers useful advice, and more. The right content helps attract more prospective customers, by attracting new visitors to the website naturally, which ultimately generates more revenue potential.

Targeted content creates seamless connections that would likely otherwise not occur introducing a whole new audience and draw in potential new patients customers.

INBOUND CAMPAIGNS

An inbound campaign may include a series of content articles aligned to the primary customer demographic. Inbound content that is curated to topics aligned to the primary customer demographic and may also include phrases and keywords embedded in each separate inbound article. Content curated for the primary customers should focus on topics relevant to them. Keep in mind, this content may not exactly fit to the business. Rather, content is meant to align to the customer.

HOW TO SELECT THE RIGHT INBOUND STRATEGY

Hiring an inbound marketing specialist is recommended. Experts will conduct significant research and SEO strategy to outline a specific plan related to overall business goals. How does inbound strategy boost SEO goals? Effective inbound strategy will work to boost overall website traffic and drive overall website traffic.

Curate Content - a series of articles is a great inbound marketing strategy. The focus of each article should include strategy aligned to organic search ranking results with phrases, prior to running any pay-per-click (PPC) promotions. The focus of each inbound article should align to the research conducted on the customer base such as: age, hobbies, personal interests, lifestyle, etc. The articles then should undergo backend work. Backend work should include link-building.

Establish Website Ranking - establishing strong website ranking includes accomplishing Organic Google search ranking. This takes a lot of time and work. Along with strategic content creation, link building and other related inbound strategies should be implemented to boost overall site ranking.

Drive Website Traffic - the overall goal of inbound marketing strategy is to drive website traffic in a relevant, organic way. All other marketing efforts should support the inbound strategy.

WHY IS GOOGLE RANKING IMPORTANT?

The first organic search position gets more clicks, brings in new customers and increases lead conversion. What does this equate to? More business. The key factors impacting website ranking are complex and also constantly changing. The constantly changing complexities make it more important to stay on top of inbound marketing strategy. In order to get found by potential customers, you will need to spend time on your website ranking. Inbound marketing will support this ranking over time. Research and experience identifies website ranking and the bottom line.

The following statistics reveal the importance of where you rank:

Top position, page one of Google get 33% more clicks

The top 10 positions, page one of Google (essentially the 1st page) receive 95% of all clicks
Customers rarely take time to search past page one
Any ranking results past page 2 of Google is irrelevant and a waste of time

Studies reveal that as Google maintains 85+% market share, it’s vital for businesses to invest in, and actively work at, Google ranking. If page one of Google is so important, how do you achieve top ranking? The goal is not only to rank on page one of Google, but to rank at the top of page one.

Many factors impact website ranking. Additionally, these factors are always changing based upon Google’s complex algorithms.

Recommended Video:

Why We're Starting a New Podcast That Has (Almost) Nothing To Do With Our Company

Fri, 15 Nov 2019 12:00:00 GMT

There are more podcasts available today than anyone could possibly consume.

More than 10 billion episodes were downloaded on Apple devices alone in the last year. These days it seems the only thing as plentiful as podcasts are podcast producers complaining about how hard it is to get theirs discovered. And yes, that includes us.

We launched The Growth Show a couple of years ago and have grown a sizable loyal audience since then, but that audience growth -- it took work -- or more like werrrk, with an e and three rs. So why on earth would we launch a second podcast?

Simple. We found a story worth telling.

A little further in the post, I’m going to tell you all about that story, plus the uniquely enthralling host who was under our noses the whole time, and the delightfully weird guests who have made up our first collection of episodes. But first, a few more words on that initial question:

Why would you launch a new podcast when there are so many already?

Time travel with me for a moment. It’s 2006. There are already 57 million blogs on the internet, but readership can’t possibly keep up. In fact, analysts start calling it a day. Ars Technica runs the following headline :

Gartner says blogs will level off because "most people who would ever use blogs already have, while others who may have been attracted to the growing trend initially have gotten bored and moved on."

It’s 2006, Do you launch a blog?

This idea that content formats can reach a saturation point has bubbled up with every rising trend in the history of communications. How can you ever watch more than 20 TV stations? Who has the time for browsing the internet when there’s so much media already? Why would I watch Youtube or Facebook streaming when I already have Netflix?

It’s malarkey, and we know it.

That said, jumping on a trend for the sake of checking a box is worse than ineffective, it’s tantamount to pollution. The internet awards you no points and may god have mercy on your soul. Badly conceived and produced podcasts are as annoying to listeners as content farms are to readers.

We believed that firmly when we launched The Growth Show and invested heavily in the quality of it. With the release of a second show we asked ourselves the same questions. Can we do this right, with a unique concept, a strong host and meticulous production team?

Once we felt confident that the answer to all of those was yes, we returned to that all important question: Do we have a good story to tell?

Oh, do we ever.

Let’s Get Weird

We call the new podcast Weird Work and -- true to its name -- it’s about people who make living in really unusual ways. As an industry we are obsessed with start-ups. We glorify their founders. We even use fancy words like entrepreneur to describe them. And we should. Starting a company is really freaking hard. But all too often these entrepreneurs follow an overplayed formula. Become the Uber for X, the Tinder for Y, the Amazon for…well, there’s really nothing left that amazon doesn’t cover. You get the idea.

We wanted to talk to people who went completely off-the-beaten path with their business ideas. People who found a profitable niche at the end of their passions. Weird Work is a celebration of those founders who live life outside of the 9-to-5, doing jobs you’ve probably never heard about.

Like what? Well:

At first glance, it looks like this show doesn’t have much to do with marketing, sales, and customer success. But we think otherwise.

Weird Work is the natural extension of our obsession with how people work, and why. Make no mistake, these aren’t hobbies. They’re businesses. While they may seem peculiar, each offers insights about product-development, strategy and marketing.

Don’t underestimate these founders. Because one thing we’ve realized in making this show is that unusual perspectives can be just the influence you need to break out of incremental thinking.

Weird Work is hosted by Sam Balter, a 30-year-old HubSpotter who has had his share of odd-jobs. While he’s been a liquor-auditor and a road-side sign holder, Sam is the first to admit he’s not a household name. (Actually, “Sam Balter” is a household name, just not our Sam Balter .) At least not yet.

Each week beginning September 28, 2017, Sam will dig into the stories and personalities behind some of the weirdest businesses out there. I had Sam on the Growth Show to talk a bit about Weird Work and the one simple word he (pretty inconveniently) can’t pronounce.

Here’s a trailer of what you can expect from the show

If you want to hear more, please subscribe to Weird Work on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher, RadioPublic, or ask Alexa, “Play the Weird Work podcast”. You can also subscribe to The Growth Show there to hear more from me on topics like the rise of bots, building an introvert-friendly office, and innovating in a crowded space.

And yeah, I’m going to do it, I’m going to ask you to give us a review and share the podcast if you like it. Because in a format short on discoverability tools, word-of-mouth really matters to fledgling shows. So, if you help us take off, Sam will help you find some truly original perspectives in a world chock full of knock-off ideas.

7 Examples of Email Signatures That Drive Conversions

Wed, 23 Oct 2019 12:00:00 GMT

Email is still the workhorse of digital marketing.

In fact, the number of emails sent and received per day total over 205 billion, according to The Radicati Group Email Statistics Report .

There are no other marketing channels as effective and efficient as email -- but there still might be a use for email your team is overlooking: employee email. Your employees interact with prospective customers, current customers, job candidates, partners, vendors, and industry influencers daily on a personal, one-on-one basis -- and they already have valuable, authentic relationships with these important contacts.

Employee email is an often overlooked owned channel marketers can take advantage of to distribute content (both externally and internally) and drive conversions. But how? Through the employee email signature.

It seems simple, but by pairing an on-brand signature with a clickable call-to-action banner in every employee email signature, teams can use email signature marketing to help fuel their broader company goals.

Let's take a look at a few examples of conversion-optimized email signatures, so you can get started on creating your own.

7 Email Signatures That Drive Conversions

1) Promote an Upcoming Event or Conference

Email signature marketing can help event marketers drive more registrations, increase live stream attendance, and improve post-event follow up.

Whether it be a conference hosted by your company, third-party event, or even a dinner, a registration CTA in all employee email signatures can result in additional views, clicks, and registrations.

We all know how much time and energy it takes to put on a world-class event, why not use employee email to get the right people there?

2) Share a New Ebook or Industry Report

The easiest way to provide consistent and meaningful value to a prospect or customer is to pass along helpful content. Each email interaction is an opportunity to do just this -- and sharing thought leadership content helps build trust and establish credibility.

But how can you ensure everyone on the team is sharing your newest ebook or industry report in all of their sent emails without forcing it into the conversation? Include a bright and beautiful call-to-action under their email signature.

3) Get the Word Out About a Case Study

Your employees (most likely the sales team) are also emailing qualified prospects that are far into the sales cycle. These email recipients should learn how others are seeing ROI from your product or service.

To keep them engaged in your sales pipeline, share a case study, specific use case or testimonial and feature a customer the prospect can relate to or identify as a credible brand.

4) Drive More Registrations to Your Next Webinar

Need a new way to drive registrations and attendance to your upcoming webinar? Including a subtle call-to-action in every sent email is a fast and easy way to get the word out. After the webinar airs, you can even switch the CTA to read “watch the recording” and link to the video.

5) Let Customers Know About Product Offerings or Discounts

Your client success and service teams send thousands of emails to customers every year. They have the undivided attention of your most important audience, so use it as a way to promote an upcoming sale or can’t-miss discount. Don’t forget about new service offerings and pricing packages too.

6) Convert Qualified Leads to Demos or Opportunities

How is your sales development team following up with marketing qualified leads? Beyond a few triggered emails and/or phone calls, 1:1 email is the most popular option.

Personalization is important in these emails, and including a CTA for the “next step” is even more crucial. Be helpful, educate your audience, and provide a way to lead them to the next stage.

7) Incorporate Video to Engage With Your Audience

An average employee sends and receives 122 emails per day. Yet, some of these emails can be impersonal. How does your email differentiate from the 121 others?

We all know video is the most powerful form of content when it comes to building personal 1:1 connections, so why not use it in every email you send? Establishing a real human connection through typed words on a screen is difficult. However, if they’re able to see your face and maybe learn about your interests, you have a better chance of gaining their trust.

How to Market Your Business Online

Wed, 09 Oct 2019 22:45:00 GMT

Modern Business Strategies

All business owners have come to understand the challenges that come with running a business, especially early on. Learning about their consumer’s wants and needs and how to best serve these needs, while meeting their own business demands, takes time. In addition to navigating the day-to-day decision-making, other potential threats pose challenges to every business.

Today’s business environment requires that all business owners understand what potential threats may limit their business success, including the importance of strong online presence.

What is strong online presence?

Online presence has to do with getting the business effectively presented online in order to be seen by the greatest number of potential customers.

Why is it important to get your business seen online?

Even if customers plan to buy local, they often turn to the internet first, before product shopping.

Many customers spend time researching products and services online, and reading reviews in order to learn from other customer experiences.

A report conducted by, The ROBO Economy (Research Online Buy Offline), reveals 82% of smartphone users consult their phones on purchases they are about to make in-store and 45% read reviews before making a purchase. As customers turn to the internet to search for products and services in your industry, it is vital that your business shows up on page one of Google.

The truth is: getting your business seen by customers online isn’t easy.

Why is getting your business seen by more customers online is increasingly difficult? In today’s market, multiple barriers exist. Unless understood well, these barriers may prevent your business from getting found by potential customers online.

The most significant barriers include: online competition and poor website ranking.

At Salt Creative , we work with our clients to help overcome these barriers. We spend time working with clients to optimize their online presence. We teach our clients to learn how to attract and engage customers with a holistic approach to marketing online. In addition, we teach how to rank high in Google, the best way to optimize your online presence, how SEO (search engine optimization ) is changing, and more.

In this article, we cover a few barriers we identify as potential threats to getting your business seen by potential customers online.

#1 Competition

For businesses today, simply having a website is no longer just a priority. In today’s market, the businesses that invest in modern websites that outrank the competition succeed above the competition. When customers turn to the internet to search for products and services, the websites ranked strongest in Google, rise to the top and get seen by customers. A good website allows a company to connect directly with its customers, providing an easy method of communication and source of information and, for many businesses, a primary sales portal (2019, Expert Panel, Forbes Agency Council). Having a modern website that also ranks well, in order to stand out among the competition, is vital. It is no longer considered relevant to have a great looking website if it doesn’t get found by potential customers. A great looking website that isn’t seen by potential customers doesn’t help your marketing efforts. Your site may benefit current customers by providing information. Your website will not help you attract new business. Those customers searching your business URL directly will follow the link. Other customers will likely not find the website by a basic Google search.

When considering your online presence, it's important to benchmark your progress against your competitors. Why? Because there is a very good chance that your competition is. Stronger online presence results in more customers. As consumers search online, they will either find your website or your competitors website. This equates to click through traffic going to either your site or your competitors. Why does this happen? Your competitors websites are outranking you.

Websites ranking on page two or further, is considered a waste of resources from any marketing perspective. Websites ranked number one received an average click-through rate (CTR) of 36.4 % (Goodwin, 2018).

This leads to the second potential barrier: Google Ranking.

#2 Google Ranking

If you want your business, book, or nonprofit to get found by potential customers or clients, you will need to get your website ranking among the competition. The goal is to get your website ranking on page one of Google. Data reveals ranking on Google is a vital element to your website ranking. In terms of where to rank, the number one position is the ideal place to be. First position on page 1 has a dramatic advantage in reaching the first two to three positions on the Google. As a general rule, the top positions garner the most web traffic. A comprehensive study conducted by Chitika (2013), sampling 300 million U.S. and Canadian impressions, (measuring page views vs. unique visitors) found the top position contributes to 33% more website traffics. Second position traffic dropped significantly to 18%. The study’s findings identify search results from top of page one generate 92% of all traffic from an average search. When moving from page one to page two the traffic dropped by 95%. Data revealed in this study identifies 91.5% of Google traffic to page 1. 4.8% of Google traffic to page 2, 1.1% of traffic to page 3 and .4% to page 4.

The bottom line: work on your business’ online presence and take steps to get to the first page, and as close to the top of page one as possible! Finding the Best Search Terms for Your Business: 10 Tools and Tips

SOURCES:

https://www.forbes.com/sites/forbesagencycouncil/2019/04/18/12-leading-reasons-your-business-website-traffic-is-dropping/#4e5e3e806daa

(2013) Chitika Insights: The Value of Google Result Positioning, A publication of Chitika.

Goodwin, 2018

The 14 Coolest Beer Label Designs You've Ever Seen

Thu, 26 Sep 2019 12:00:00 GMT

While it's certainly important for a beer to taste good, there's no denying that packaging has a big influence on people's buying decisions. Ten years ago, a lot of breweries found they could get away with soliciting a friend to design their beer packaging. Not anymore.

With so many beers competing for attention on the shelves, standout beer labels have become a critical part of any brewery's marketing strategy.

So which breweries have come up with those really standout designs? Here's a list:

Let's take a look at the 14 labels that set themselves apart.

ABOUT SALT CREATIVE:

Salt Creative is a boutique web design firm that has been serving clients in multiple industries for over a decade. Our talented and creative team has been crafting beautiful and responsive websites, graphic design, PR and marketing to support local businesses, startups, and non-profits. We take pride in coming alongside the local business community to help them shine.

14 of the Best Beer Labels Designs We Love

1) 21st Amendment Brewery

Source: Origlio

Didn't think some of the best beer label designs would be on a can, did you? For 21st Amendment Brewery, the decision to use cans -- and only cans -- was entirely intentional.

"Back in 2005, I was out at the Great American Beer Festival ... and I really saw the future of craft beer," Co-Founder Shaun Sullivan told Cool Material . "Back then no one was putting craft beer in cans. But, it’s portable, easy to recycle, and perfect for the outdoors. It was also interesting for marketing and telling the story as the can is 360 degrees of space, unlike doing a beer label on a bottle. Coupled with the box the cans come in, we really have a great canvas to get our story across."

Based in San Francisco, Sullivan and his business partner work closely with TBD Advertising in Oregon to come up with a design for each new beer that comes on the shelf. Designing and creating new beers is his favorite thing about making beer, he says.

2) Evil Twin Brewing

You might think a brewery with such creative names and crazy cool, fractal-like designs has a whole design team behind them. But that's not the case. The beer-naming and label-designing at Evil Twin Brewing are divided between its two co-founders, Jeppe Jarnit-Bjergsø and Martin Justesen.

Jarnit-Bjergsø is responsible for coming up with the beer names (although he admits his wife, who's a copywriter by trade, comes up with most of them), while Justessen designs all the labels.

"I’ll often start doing sketches when I hear the name of the beer," says Justesen . "The look of an Evil Twin label is quite geometrical and graphical. Every label is built up by triangular shapes. I like for the labels to work on two levels, the first to grab your attention by standing out, and the second by containing details you later discover when you sit down and look at it close up."

As for naming the beer? Some of our favorites include "Even More Jesus," "Bikini Beer," and "Before, During, and After Christmas."

"Our philosophy behind beer names is that we aren’t weird just to be weird," says Jarnit-Bjergsø . "That said, I do like the idea of having names that don’t make sense -- it means that if you see the name, you have to think about it, you have to consider what it is. If a beer is called 'Brown Ale,' you forget it a second later, because everyone knows what a brown ale is, and has seen that name 100 times before. But if you see a name that’s more interesting, you’re automatically like, 'I wonder what that is?' And that way you just remember it better."

3) Kiuchi Brewery

Kiuchi's been making sake since 1823 -- way before they began brewing beer in 1996. And with distribution routes in over 30 countries and a gold medal at the Brewing Industry International Awards under its belt, it's clear they're darn good at it.

The packaging of their series of Hitachino Nest beers features a distinctive red owl and the brewery's name in gold lettering. The same cartoon-like red owl appears on every rendition of the Hitachino Nest series, making it easy to pick out from the crowd. You'll notice the names of the beers -- and their ingredients -- are also distinctly Japanese: The "Red Rice Ale" uses red rice, a type of ancient Japanese rice; "Nipponia" uses a barley malt and hop from Japan; "Ginger Ale" uses wild-bred mandarin grown near the brewery. The brewery's president Toshiyuki Kuichi says these names and ingredients help attract foreigners' curiosity.

4) Oregon Brewing Company

Oregon Brewing Company's line of Rogue ales is another example of great beer names paired with beautiful label designs. From "Chipotle Ale" to "Yellow Snow Ale" to "Voodoo Doughnut" (a bacon maple ale that comes in a bright pink bottle), the names -- and flavors -- certainly coincide with the brewery's bold personality. The illustrations on many of the labels feature a person either holding up his or her left fist, or holding a beer and offering a "cheers" to the drinker.

Source: Brewers Journal

Other Rogue beers playfully mock popular culture, like the "Sriracha Hot Stout Beer" pictured below. The beer is made from Huy Fong original hot chili sauce and, according to Rogue Brewing President Bretty Joyce , it became a record-selling product for the brewery within only a few days of its debut -- even though many people find its distinctively spicy taste questionable.

New England Brewing Company

The label on the "Imperial Stout Trooper" from New England Brewing Company is nothing short of amazing -- and the story behind it is pretty funny, too.

Source : Beer Street Journal

Each year, the brewery creates a special release beer, which is why they first brewed the Imperial Stout Trooper in 2007. It was an instant hit and the first batch initially sold out, and the beer itself quickly became something of a Star Wars fan cult item.

When it was first released, its label featured an undisguised Stormtrooper's face. But in 2010, they were forced to change the label due to copyright infringements ... which is why the Stormtrooper on the label now wears a Groucho Marx disguise. The label change made the already rare Star Wars-themed beer even more sought after than it already was.

Uinta Brewing Company

Salt Lake City-based Uinta Brewing first hired The Tenfold Collective , a small design firm based in Colorado, in 2010. Since then, the firm has created plenty of beer labels for the brewery and launched its beautiful new website . The bright color schemes and attention to detail make these labels fun to take a closer look at. Plus, they look a heckuva lot like vintage ski posters, reminiscent of their Utah/Colorado origin.

Source: DrinkedIn

On their blog, the folks at Uinta describe the "classic Uinta feel" as one that "reflects an appreciation for the outdoors and the timeless beauty of the mountain west." After all, the company's namesake is Utah's tallest mountain range, the Uinta Mountains.

7) Huyghe Brewery

Source: Jan Baca

You probably recognize this one thanks to the iconic pink elephant ... it's Belgium-based Huyghe Brewery's famous Delirium beers. Although the Delirium beers' names are famous now, the folks at Huyghe actually had some trouble getting them on the shelves for a while because of the name. For example, Delerium tremens refers to the shakes that alcoholics get when suffering from withdrawal, which are often accompanied by visions (like pink elephants).

Despite the controversy in the name, this beer managed to become one of the most well-known brands in the world. The name is written in what looks like the Kilkenny font , the pink elephant has become an icon, and the white bottle -- which contrasts interestingly with the dark beer within -- is easily recognizable on a shelf.

8) Anheuser-Busch

While most beer labels limit the design to what's printed on the label itself, the folks at Anheuser-Busch let the shape of the label do some of the talking. The brewery's marketing team positions their tequila-inspired Oculto beer around mystery and spontaneous nights out with friends, which is reflected in its packaging.

The Oculto label features a white skull with the eyes cut out. When the bottle is cold, the logo turns fluorescent and the skull's empty eyes glow green thanks to temperature-responsive, thermochromic ink, according to Packaging Digest.

Source: 303 Magazine

Check out the Instagram post below, which shows the cool effect of being able to see the beer and flickering candlelight through the label.

Stone Brewing Company

The graphics and colors on Stone Brewing Company's beers are bold -- and so is their copywriting. The gargoyle is there to protect beer lovers from the "fizzy yellow" beer.

Source: Behance

The description of their Arrogant Bastard Ale reads , "Brought forth upon an unsuspecting public in 1997, Arrogant Bastard Ale openly challenged the tyrannical overlords who were brazenly attempting to keep Americans chained in the shackles of poor taste."

10) Magic Hat

Magic Hat is proud of its deep connections with the arts community in its home city of Burlington, Vermont -- even their brewery's bar and shop is called The Artifactory -- so it's no surprise that its packaging is an artistic masterpiece itself. Each beer's label features colorful, trippy, and super detailed illustrations.

Source: Behance

Where does the brewery draw its design inspiration? Concert posters, according to their blog . Several years ago, the folks at Magic Hat teamed up with printmaker Jim Pollock -- the same Jim Pollock who became famous for creating many of Phish's most memorable concert posters. For the most part, though, the brewery sources design work in-house .

But the company doesn't just pair up with famous designers to design their beer labels. Every few years, they hold a "Labels for Libations" design contest to raise money for the local art scene, in which they solicit local artists to compete to design a label for a beer that'll be released the following year. Here was the 2014 contest's winning label:

Source: Magic Hat Brewing Co.

Finally, let's not forget the copy on the inside of the beer caps of Magic Hat's best-selling beer, #9. Someone's even dedicated an entire Tumblr blog to Magic Hat beer cap "wisdom." (I put wisdom in quotes because, well ... you'll see.)

A few of our favorites? "Remember the Dinosaurs"; "Why Don't They Call 'Em Bottle Hats?"; "Don't Cook Bacon Naked."

Source : bigblueapothecary Etsy shop

Cisco Brewers

There's something so refreshing about simplicity in design. That's what Cisco Brewers accomplishes with its beer labels, all of which are clean and minimalistic. Each has a single-color design that looks old-timey -- almost like a woodcut from the 19th century. The simple approach they take with their brand is reminiscent of Nantucket Island -- where the brewery is located -- and its untouched, clean look and feel.

Source: Brookston Beer Bulletin

"Most of the original labels were just our logo -- the name of the beer on different colored paper to designate the different styles," Jay Harman, one of Cisco Brewers' three founders, told me. "As time went on we started to work on more wood cut branded pieces that would allow customers to relive their island experience wherever they were consuming our beer."

The labels themselves were designed by a combination of the brewers' founders and some local artists from Nantucket. Local artist George Murphy created the "Whale's Tale Pale Ale" logo, Cisco co-founder Randy Hudson did the "Sankaty Light" label and the "Indie Pale Ale" label; Wendy Hudson, Cisco's other co-founder, did the "The Grey Lady" label; and local graphic artist Malcolm Brooks did the "Summer of Lager" logo.

Not only are Cisco's traditional labels cool, but so is their recent collaboration with Marine Research Group OCEARCH . Last fall, Cisco released a brand new beer called the "Shark Tracker Light Lager" to benefit research and education about the ocean's predators -- and to inspire fascination, rather than fear. Scan a can with the lab's mobile app and you can access all kinds of information about their research on sharks, watch videos, and so on. It's a very cool, interactive touch.

Source: Brewbound

Finally, we couldn't very well leave out Cisco's tap handle designs. When you're in a crowded bar wondering which beer to order, where do you look to figure out what the place has on draught? The beer taps, of course. That's why it's so important for them to stand out. For many breweries, the tap handle becomes a calling card.

"Off-island, tap markers designate the real estate behind the bar, so it's important for customers to know what's being poured," says Harman.

Cisco's designed big, carved-wood tap handles for its four most popular beers that really stand out. Here's the tap handle for its Grey Lady beer:

Source: beertaps.blogspot.com

12) Newburgh Brewing Co.

With so many beers on the market these days, it can be really hard to stand out on the shelf. This is what drove Newburgh Brewing Company to solicit a busy and colorful label design for their Cream Ale, according to their COO and president Paul Halayko .

The label features the company mascot Betsy the Cow along with icons from around Newburgh, New York. You can see imagery of the brewery's building, the Hudson Valley, and phrases showing they're proud to be local like "This beer was born here" and "Our interpretation of a New York original". D esigned by Philadelphia-based design firm Modern Good , it beat 64 brands to win CNBC's best-loved beer label for 2015.

Source: CNBC

13) Flying Dog

Back in 2012, Flying Dog Brewery rolled out new packaging with the goal of better reflecting the "insanely chaotic, yet intricately detailed" Ralph Steadman art on their labels. Steadman, a prolific artist who's produced thousands of iconic illustrations, has been creating all the original art for Flying Dog's beer labels in 1995. His designs are splatter art illustrations, often featuring mythical creatures.

Source: BOA Beer Blog

On Steadman's official art collection website , his art for Flying Dog is described like this: "Steadman's illustrations have caused outrage in some, been banned by some states, but have beer drinkers of the world over rejoicing. The perfect marriage of taste and rage, poetry for the senses and an orgy for the imagination."

14) Lagunitas

Lagunitas' highly recognizable beer labels are characterized by an old-school white background and large, all-caps letters. But because their labels are so simple by design, they've experienced some trademarking trouble in the past. Right now, the brewery has four federally registered trademarks and two pending trademarks all relating to their most popular beer, Lagunitas IPA, against Sierra Nevada Hop Hunter IPA.

SourceL Behance

Below, you'll see the similarities between Lagunitas' IPA label (right) and Sierra Nevada's (left):

Source: The Press Democrat

Does the label even matter?

Here's the thing, though. There are plenty of beers out there doing just fine with totally generic labeling. Take Russian River's "Pliny the Elder," for example. It's widely regarded as one of the best beers in the world, and it's been named America's best beer for seven years straight . And yet, its label is as basic as it gets.

If a beer crosses a certain taste threshold, does the label just not matter anymore? Or is beautiful packaging a new brewery's best bet at getting their beer noticed on crowded shelves?

Whatever it is -- we'll drink to that.

Are Micro-Influencers Or Macro-Influencers More Effective? [Infographic]

Fri, 13 Sep 2019 10:00:00 GMT

Chances are, if you spend time on Instagram, you've come across influencer posts on the platform. You know the kind I'm talking about -- featuring a product or service, usually with the hashtag #sponsored or #ad in the caption.

Chances are, if you spend time on Instagram, you've come across influencer posts on the platform.

You know the kind I'm talking about -- featuring a product or service, usually with the hashtag #sponsored or #ad in the caption.

These influencers typically have hundreds of thousands of followers -- or, in the case of people like Kendall Jenner and David Beckham -- millions of followers. These macro-influencers undoubtedly have tremendous reach on Instagram to get brands in front of the eyes of their fans -- but in some cases, less is actually more.

Micro-influencer marketing has also taken hold on Instagram, where users with smaller numbers of more engaged users are activated to promote brands on a smaller scale. These influencers cost less to work with, but the jury's still out on if their impact is lesser, too.

Mediakix , an influencer marketing agency, analyzed hundreds of Instagram posts from top brands to try to uncover, once and for all, if bigger is truly better. Check out the infographic below to dig into their findings.

Finding the Best Search Terms for Your Business: 10 Tools and Tips

Fri, 21 Jun 2019 10:47:00 GMT

Despite the ever-present advice that long-tail keywords are king, many businesses still struggle to strategically use them to get content to the top of organic and paid search results. The truth is, tackling these long-tail keywords feels hard when you know you're up against the giants. I know. I worked with many startups before I joined HubSpot, and scouring Google Keyword Planner every day for keywords to fuel my blog posts drove me close to insanity.

But -- it worked. When I skipped the keyword research, convinced that my blog post was just THAT epic, THAT viral … I was wrong. I was chasing an immeasurable goal (virality) with an unaccountable metric (my gut). That kind of strategy is really only a luxury restricted to those with pre-existing ample website traffic, sizable social media following, copious brand advocates, and a list of high-profile customers.

So if you're one of those companies without those luxuries, listen up. I'm going to show you how to uncover new keywords to target and assess if you're already targeting high-value phrases.

How to Find New Keywords

If you want to generate more organic traffic, it’s necessary to find the sweet spot between easy-to-target keywords and keywords relevant to your business.

A great (and familiar) place to start is to simply type some phrases into Google’s search bar, and watch how it pre-populates the rest of what you are typing.

Google’s search bar algorithm is built around a searcher’s intent. Beware, though: What is suggested is not just based on popularity or relevance, but it's also personalized to the searcher . This exercise is simply to get you started with some ideas for keywords to target, and is by no means sufficient step on its own to do comprehensive keyword research.

Below, we'll dive into the following search term and keyword research tools:

Top Keyword Research Tools to Try

1) Moz Keyword Explorer

This keyword explorer is one of the best free SEO Tools available, providing an all-in-one tool to both discover and prioritize the search terms you'll want to target.

2) Google AdWords Keyword Planner Tool

Like many of the other tools on here, the Google AdWords Keyword Planner provides a great way to discover new keyword ideas, especially for paid search campaigns. Criteria can be based on your product or service, as well as your target customers.

3) Google Trends

Google Trends , if nothing else, an incredibly cool resource for trending search data. Not only does it provide information on search trends, but it also provides great visualizations that represent the data in a highly consumable way. You can also narrow the information by location.

4) Wordtracker’s Free Basic Keyword Demand

One of the best things about Wordtracker is that it helps users conduct keyword research across a variety of platforms. In addition to Google, for example, it helps marketers discover search term data for YouTube and Amazon, as well.

5) keywordtool.io

Keywordtool.io is, as the name depicts, a keyword research tool. What’s awesome about this tool is that it includes not only Google.com, but also all Google localized search languages, as well as YouTube, Bing, and the App Store. Sweet! Type in the ideas you recorded from the previous step, and expand your list.

As you go, make sure to remove keywords you know deep down cannot be relevant to your website. This will save you time and money in the long run, and result in a far better experience for the web searcher. Trickery is a fool’s game!

6) Keyword.io

Keyword.io has the disadvantage of only using Google data, but it's handy in that it not only does keywords, but also looks at Google Trends information and lists the pages you have to beat for that keyword.

7) Infinite Suggest

You’ll need to have a long long list of keywords in order to boil it down to the golden nuggets. This tool will help you generate lots of terms (as it claims, “infinite”), and it's up to you to pick out the best ones.

How to Evaluate Your Existing Search Terms and Keywords

Not only do you need to explore new keywords for your future content, but you also need to pay attention to your current keywords. When deciding on prioritizing your phrases and pages you must consider three things:

To find out how to answer these questions, we spoke with Dan Petrovic , one of Australia’s best-known name in SEO and the director of DEJAN marketing. Here's what he recommends:

1) How many extra clicks will I get on a keyword or phrase if I move up in Google’s results?

Export your keywords and work out your CTR averages.

This exercise is about predicting how many extra clicks an increase in rank would bring for a particular keyword. You may have seen clickthrough rate (CTR) studies such as this one in the past, but they’re anecdotal at best because every website is different.

We recommend you start by defining averages specific to your own website before working out click scenarios in different ranking positions. Once you know what your averages are for search queries, CTR, and position, you can start creating ranking scenarios for each keyword (e.g., if I move from position 10 to position 9 I will receive 12 extra clicks based on site CTR averages?). Be mindful though: If a keyword over- or under-performs compared to the site CTR average, you may need to adjust the expectation for its growth accordingly.

Here is how you can export your keywords and uncover these key metrics:

1) Log in to Google’s Search Console , navigate to the "Search Analytics" page under the "Search Traffic" header, and select the widest date range available on your website. This is typically 90 days.

2) If your website targets a specific geographic region, ensure you’ve got it selected before you export data:

3) It’s also wise to filter out any branded terms from the export. Branded terms tend to have very high CTR, which is not useful when calculating averages for non-branded keywords:

4) At the end of the report, click "Download" and select CSV. Now you have a file that contains:

Once you have these averages in hand, you can calculate which phrases will result in sufficiently more clicks for the effort put into moving up the rankings for that keyphrase.

2) How much money will I make if I move up in the rankings?

Add conversion rate and value to your CTR calculation.

The data gleaned from your keyword export can be enriched with your company's financial information, such as the average value of a conversion and the average conversion rate. That way, you can project how much of a bottom-line impact your rankings changes could have (e.g. if an order value is $200 and conversion rate is 3%, how much more money will I get if I get 100 extra clicks from moving to a top spot in Google?).

You can now prioritize the keywords that drive the highest potential revenue on your website.

3) How strong is the page I’m trying to outrank?

Find results above you and look up their strength metrics.

Finally, once you have growth potentials calculated, it’s recommended that you balance them out with a difficulty metric. I personally use Flow Metrics from Majestic, but you can also use Moz’s Page Authority or similar values. These providers provide API access, too, so you can automate your research as well.

Advanced users can also map all keywords to their corresponding URLs, sum up potential scores from all keywords that lead to a URL, and end up with a list of priority pages to work on.

I use this exact methodology for my own research, and if you’re curious as to how it works, you can check it out.

Always Be Keyword-ing

Getting your keyword strategy right is the recipe for a long-term return on investment in digital marketing. Unlike other types of promotions, organic traffic is the gift that keeps on giving . Even when you're not actively publishing new promotions, you're still receiving traffic to your website.

Remember: SEO is about serving the searcher with the best possible result. There are people out there searching for your very business, and you need to get in front of them. As your authority grows based on less-searched long-tail keywords, you’ll be able to tackle the giants as good as anyone.

How to Hire the Best-Fit Freelancer for Your Next Project

Wed, 24 Apr 2019 10:00:00 GMT

So you're ready to start looking for a skilled freelancer to help your project (and productivity) take off?

Whether you’re engaging a freelancer for a small project or looking to bring them on for a longer engagement, here's what you need to consider to find and hire the best freelancer for your project.

How to Hire the Best-Fit Freelancer for Your Next Project

1) A well-laid plan for your project has to come first.

If you don’t have a clear idea about what you need done, don’t hire a freelancer -- at least not yet. Why? Before you can successfully source the best freelancer for your project, you need to know as much as possible about what you’re engaging them to do. Be sure to provide a project brief with deliverables, timeline, and payment schedule. This is important for both sides:

This raises another question: Exactly how much do you need to know about your project? You’ll definitely need to have an “eagle view” -- the high-level goals you’re looking to accomplish with freelance help -- but you should also consider a “mouse view” -- the nuts and bolts of what you’re comfortable delegating, who they’ll need to be introduced to on the team, what systems and documents they need access to, and how the work will be coordinated internally.

2) With that information nailed down, write an awesome job post that appeals to the cream of the crop.

It’s important to remember that you’re competing for the best freelancers. Your job post should stand out in the crowd. The more detail you can provide about your project (say, niche tools or specific areas of expertise), the easier it is for freelancers to submit accurate proposals.

For example, say you need a mobile developer to help you build out your mobile app idea. Will it be native, hybrid, or cross-platform? What technology do they need to know to build the app? Then, what next-level features might the app include that the programmer should have experience building? Details like these will enable a potential freelancer to check off all the ways they’re a good fit for your project.

A great job post follows a certain formula:

3) Post a job and let proposals come to you, or proactively seek out the freelancers who have the skills you need.

If you know where (and how) to look, reviewing freelancer profiles online can yield some excellent prospects. Certain platforms make life easier by narrowing the search with filters for specific skills, languages, locations, and rates.

Keep an eye out for performance ratings, testimonials from past clients, and examples of prior work. Look for other signs that they’re top talent: Upwork, the largest online freelancing platform, includes profile badges like the Top Rated badge, Rising Talent badge, and a Hubspot badge to indicate a freelancer is also a thought leader in his or her field.

Don’t stop at posted profiles. Often, experienced freelancers will share their expertise and take the time to engage in online communities and discussions. Searching for a developer? See if they’ve contributed to a tech-related discussion on a site like Quora or StackOverflow.

4) Let freelancers in different timezones work to your advantage.

When you’re reviewing freelancer profiles, don’t let a different timezone be a disqualifier. If you’re able to work out a system for communication during overlapping hours, having the increased coverage of someone working in part of the world when you’re sleeping can boost productivity.

Ben Young, head of Nudge who frequently hires freelancers, says “the great benefit of having remote freelancers is suddenly you can have 16-hour a day coverage, 6 days a week. That incremental difference means your product iterates faster, bugs are handled quicker, and over a few years, suddenly you have a significant competitive advantage.”

5) Don’t be cheap.

“A mistake many people make is to be too cheap when paying a few bucks more will get you access to top-tier talent,” Ben adds. “Paying a higher rate means you’re getting the best out of tens of thousands of freelancers, many of whom have rates that they’ve worked hard to establish.”

That doesn’t mean they won’t be willing to negotiate on a per-project basis, though, particularly if there’s the prospect of more work down the line. A good rule of thumb is to gauge the complexity of your project and look for the appropriate level of skill. Know what you’re willing to spend, and keep in mind that in many cases, higher rates mean higher quality.

6) Be as clear about your deadline as you can.

Timing is especially important because it can often be an immovable thing for both parties.

Have a tight turnaround? Include this in your job post, and discuss it with potential freelancers. They may or may not have other clients or projects going on that conflict or dial back their availability. Be sure to ask if your timeline is realistic and how confident they are about meeting your deadline. Also, a freelancer can help you estimate timing of a project if you’re not sure how long it should take.

7) Consider how you’ll protect your intellectual property (IP).

Protecting intellectual property is a common concern among clients. You might have grabbed a freelancer’s attention with your job post but been intentionally vague -- so when it’s time to provide more detail, discussing your ideas can be tricky. There’s no copyrighting ideas, but you can opt to have your freelancer sign a non-disclosure agreement (NDA). Or, hire a freelancer through Upwork, which offers a terms of service agreement with a confidentiality clause.

This will allow you to have an open, productive conversation with your freelancer about the project without worrying about your IP.

8) Conduct a remote interview -- preferably over video.

Once you have questions lined up, it’s time to set up an interview. Video interviews are a great way to meet a freelancer and chat with them “face-to-face.” You’ll likely be communicating via email in the future, so take the opportunity to ask specific questions and leave room for more off-the-cuff questions.

This is your chance to really “get a feel” for the freelancer. What would it be like working with them? Are they passionate about their work? Do they have additional ideas or suggestions? Are they looking to take on more responsibilities beyond this project?

A good fit is important, even with remote workers. Communication and collaboration are important and can really contribute to the success of your project. Source people who aren’t just a good fit but who also align with your business. Having someone you feel comfortable with could be the difference between good and great work.

9) Vet potential freelancers with a quick test project before finalizing your choice.

Found a few candidates and need to narrow the field before you commit? Try a smaller project to see how things go.

Ben Young also suggested “Hire a few individuals on a test brief, see who works the best, then bring them onboard. We do this quite a bit, often using new people on test or experimental projects.”

Having candidates tackle a small piece of the project lets you see how they work, adhere to timelines, and communicate, leaving you with a clearer choice, and a bonus: Your project will be that much further along.

10) Seal the deal with an offer and a thorough contract that works for both of you.

Once you’ve found that perfect freelancer, it’s time to make an offer and work up a contract based on what you and the freelancer have discussed. Don’t forget to take compliance considerations into account -- hiring a freelancer is different than hiring an employee and has its own ins and outs to keep in mind -- from legal and payment to communications -- that you might not be aware of.

In the contract, lay out terms:

What precisely is the work that the freelancer will deliver and when?
Is the project fixed-price or hourly?
If hourly, what is the hourly rate?
When and how will payment be made?
If fixed price, will you set up milestones during the project?
What milestones are there, and when should they be met?

All of the above tips should get you started off on the right foot working with a freelancer, and ensure you’re both satisfied with the terms of your agreement. With that, you’ll be able to start getting great work done, faster.

How to Write Catchy Email Subject Lines: 17 Tips

Fri, 22 Mar 2019 12:00:00 GMT

No matter what they say, people do judge emails by their subject lines. In fact, 47% of email recipients decide whether or not to open an email based on subject line alone. That's why it's so important to craft subject lines that are compelling enough to get people to click through.

Do you want your email content opened, read, and clicked? It all starts with the subject line. Here are 17 tips to help jazz them up and boost engagement.

What Makes a Great Email Subject Line

Before we get to our more detailed best, let's go over some fundamentals of what makes a great subject line. Regardless of your goals, these are the essential elements that your subject line should possess:

How to Write Clickable Email Subject Lines

1) Keep it short and sweet.

Email subject lines will get cut off if they’re too long, particularly on mobile devices. And with 67% of email opens taking place on mobile, we recommend using subject lines with fewer than 50 characters to make sure the people scanning your emails read the entire subject line.

If you're struggling to keep your subject lines short, think about which words matter less and where you can remove a frivolous detail. For example, if you’re sending an order confirmation, doesn’t “Your order is being processed” look better than “Order #9435893458358 is being processed"? Same goes for your regular emails: Do you really have to include the word "update" or "newsletter" in there? (Actually, a study from Adestra found that emails including the word "newsletter" in the subject line saw an 18.7% decrease in open rates.)

2) Use a familiar sender name.

That name recognition we mentioned earlier doesn't just apply to the famous -- it applies to the familiar.

"If the "from" name doesn’t sound like it’s from someone you want to hear from, it doesn’t matter what the subject line is," explains Copy Hacker 's Joanna Wiebe .

Thanks to the amount of spam email people get these days, most people hesitate to open email from unfamiliar senders. No one likes talking to a robot. Think about when you call a company and can’t get a hold of an actual person. It’s frustrating, right? This goes for email, as well.

Never use "noreply@company.com." I repeat: Never use this email address. Not only does it make it look less personable, it also stops people from adding your email to their address book.

3) Use personalization tokens.

Remember the personalization we mentioned earlier? Using personalization tokens -- like name or location -- in the subject line adds a feeling of rapport, especially when it's a name. Everyone loves the sound of their own name. Plus, it increases clickthrough rate: In fact, research has shown that emails that included the first name of the recipient in their subject line had higher click-through rates than emails that did not .

One example of how brands affix this information to subject lines is when dog walking company Wag! does so with dog names. Here's one such email that HubSpot's Amanda Zantal-Wiener received:

That's great personalization and great timing.

Another personalization tactic that works is to tailor subject lines to the recipient's location -- things like lists of their respective cities' best outdoor bars and restaurants.

Just don't go overboard with the personalization here. That can be a little creepy. But little personalized touches here and there show that you know more about your recipients than just their email address. However, if you can't (or don’t want to) use personalization tokens in the subject line, use "you" or "your" so it still sounds like you’re addressing them directly.

4) Segment your lists.

While email blasts that go out to your entire list might be relevant and helpful to some people, it won't be to others -- and could cause confusion or frustration. Why is this restaurant sending me a list of the best local steakhouses when I'm a vegetarian? Why is this company sending me case studies when I just signed up for its email list yesterday?

Personalize the experience using information from the actions your customers have already taken -- from which forms they've filled out, to which industries they're in, to what their personal preferences are. In email marketing, you can personalize your recipients' experience using a little thing called list segmentation.

5) Don't make false promises.

Your email subject line is making a promise to your reader about what you will deliver in your message. Make sure that you make good on that commitment -- and do not try to get your email opened by making false promises. This will irk your audience, and they'll learn not to trust your subject lines, resulting in a lower open rate and a higher unsubscribe rate.

6) Do tell them what's inside.

Speaking of making promises, if your visitor has downloaded an offer and you’re delivering it via email, it’s a great idea to use a subject line that says something like, “Your new ebook inside!” or, “Your guide awaits!” This works better than a simple “thank you” in the subject line because it makes it clear that something is waiting inside the email.

7) Time it right.

Sending an email at the right time with the right subject line can make a huge difference in open and clickthrough rate. A prime example? When food publication Eater sends at 6:45 P.M. on a Wednesday evening that said, "Where to Drink Beer Right Now" -- just in time for happy hour. Nailed it.

Another favorite example of mine is a classic email from Warby Parker with the subject line, "Uh-oh, your prescription is expiring." It was sent two weeks before the recipient needed to renew his prescription. By sending an email at the right time, Warby Parker increased the chances of their email getting opened -- and included a relevant call-to-action about getting a glasses upgrade, too.

8) Use concise language.

Keep in mind that people scan their inboxes very quickly -- so the more clear and concise your subject line is, the better. It's usually a lot better to be concise than it is to use complex and flowery language -- unless you’re going for an elusive subject tone to entice your recipients.

When you're going for a concise subject line, think first about how your email will benefit your recipients. You'll want to make that benefit very clear. For example, "Increase your open rates by 50% today” is more appealing than "How to increase open rates."

9) Start with action-oriented verbs.

Subject lines are similar to calls-to-action, in that you want the language to inspire people to click. Subject lines that begin with action verbs tend to be a lot more enticing, and your emails could be drastically more clickable by adding a vibrant verb at the beginning.

Actionable subject lines will inspire people to click on your email by instilling urgency and excitement. For example, in an email inviting people to a hockey legend dinner, the email subject line might read, “Dine with Bruins legend Bobby Orr,” rather than a more generic (and less actionable) “Local Boston Sports Legend Meal." The former email uses “Dine” to help the reader envision themselves at a dinner table.

10) Make people feel special.

The psychology of exclusivity is a powerful thing. When people feel like they're on the inside, it gives them a sense of belonging that could build loyalty and compel them to convert better on your emails.

The right phrasing can make your recipients feel special -- and the effect can be magical. A few ideas for phrasing include:

11) Create a sense of importance.

There's a phrase that, for many of us, is reminiscent of classic infomercials: "Act now!"

And while we wouldn't encourage using that exact language in your content, we do agree that communicating urgency and scarcity in an email subject line can help compel readers to click (or act) -- when phrased creatively and strategically.

But because you don't want to be known as "the brand that cried wolf," use these subject lines sparingly, and try to limit them to when the occasion genuinely calls for immediate action.

12) Use numbers.

A lot of businesses send emails with vague statements in their subject lines -- which is why using data and numbers is a great way to get your emails noticed, demonstrate a clear and straightforward message about your offer, and set the right expectations.

Just like with blog titles, using numbers in your subject line is an effective email marketing best practice. You might use numbers to refer to the title of your listicle, the page length of the offer you're sending, a specific discount, or the numerical benefit of a particular resource you're providing -- like "Join more than 750 others at this event!"

13) Pose a compelling question.

Asking a question in your subject line can also draw readers in -- especially if you're asking a question you know is relevant to your recipients' buyer persona. This is just one way to pique that curiosity we mentioned earlier. For example, you might try the following: “Are you making these SEO mistakes?” or “Do you know what your website is doing wrong?"

Zillow once sent an email with the subject line, "What Can You Afford?" that linked to a website showing apartments for rent. A subject line like this is both encouraging and a touch competitive: While it gives hope that there are apartments out there that'll fit within your budget, it also pits your cash against what the market offers.

Another example comes from DocuSign. They sent an email late in the lead nurturing process, with the subject line, "What are your customers saying?" The body of the email contained a bunch of case studies that were meant to help the recipient move closer to actually purchasing DocuSign. This was a smart move: Folks who are further down the funnel are likely more receptive to hearing customer testimonials.

14) Don't be afraid to get punny.

Most people love a good pun. It's a great way to delight your recipients and spice up your emails. Some of the best punny email subject lines come from JetBlue, with subject lines like "Land wander-

Some of the best punny email subject lines come from JetBlue, with subject lines like, "Land wander-ful low fares now!"

Quirky -- a community-led invention platform -- worded one of its email subject lines like this: "Abra-cord-abra! Yeah, we said it." That second part is conversational and self-referential -- and exactly what most people would say after making a really cheesy joke in real life.

If you're the least bit punny, think about small ways you can slip them into your emails when it's appropriate. Just don't overdo it. And remember the rule: When in doubt, ask a coworker.

15) DON'T USE ALL CAPS or overuse exclamation points!!!

A subject line that says, “OPEN NOW AND RECEIVE A FREE TRIAL” or, "50% off coupon today only!!!!!!!!" isn’t going to get you an email open. In fact, it’ll probably get your email ignored.

Why? People don't like to be yelled at, and using all caps and/or a lot of exclamation points can really rub people the wrong way. In fact, according to a study by the Radicati Group, more than 85% of respondents prefer an all-lowercase subject line to one in all caps.

Not only are these tactics disruptive, but they look spammy. So instead of using disruptive tactics like these to stand out in people's inboxes, try personalizing your emails, establishing relevancy, and using catchy and delightful language.

16) Use engaging preview text.

While preview text isn't technically part of your subject line, it does appear right near the subject line -- and it certainly deserves your attention.

Preview text provides recipients with a peek at the content inside your email, which email clients like the iPhone Mail app, Gmail, and Outlook will display alongside the subject line. (The exact amount of text shown depends on the email client and user settings.)

When you don't set the preview text yourself, the email client will automatically pull from the body of your email. That can look messy depending on your email content, and it's also a wasted opportunity to engage your audience. (HubSpot customers: Click here to learn how to set the preview text of your emails.)

17) A/B test your subject lines.

Although these tips and best practices are a great place to start, what works best for some companies may not work as well for others. It's all about figuring out what works best for your specific audience. That's where A/B testing comes in.

While it can be tempting to use your intuition to predict what subject line language will make people click on your emails, you should always A/B test your highest-stakes subject lines, and tweak the wording according to your results. What works best for your audience: Long or short subject lines? Including numbers or not including numbers? Questions or statements?

At the end of the day, if your emails aren’t getting opened, they’re not getting seen. You have great content to share -- now, you have to prove it in your subject line.

Good luck!

Brand and Grow Your Business on a Budget

Tue, 12 Mar 2019 23:22:59 GMT

In marketing, it seems like the word "brand" is used a lot -- the leading brand, off-brand, personal brand ... you get the picture. But there's often confusion around its meaning in business. What does it entail? Do I need to hire an expert? Branding is expensive, right?

To that very last point, it doesn't have to be. As it turns out, there are some pretty creative ways to brand your business without a ton of cash. And while it can require an investment of time, the ROI won't go unnoticed -- in some cases, it can actually help you save money, while also growing your business.

Building your brand is a crucial part of developing your business. As you'll see below, it's the foundation of giving your organization a voice, identity, value, and awareness among consumers. And, thanks to the plentiful number of resources, tools, and platforms available today -- a brand build might not be as burdensome (or costly) as you think.

So read on, and see how you can use the following six steps as a guide for your brand build.

The 6-Step Brand Build to Grow Your Business on a Budget

1) Know your personas.

It’s no coincidence that 82% of companies with better value propositions also use buyer personas -- the semi-fictional “characters” that encompass the qualities of who you’re trying to reach.

The needs, goals, and behavior of your potential customers dictate how you convey your product or service. Understanding those things helps you determine what kind of media your personas are consuming, what motivates them, and where they “live” online. You can see why having that information helps develop a compelling, effective brand -- it helps you reach the right people.

Figuring that out doesn’t have to come at a price. A great way to get started is with our free Make My Persona tool , which guides you through a series of questions about the ideal person you want to reach. Take your time with it. The questions are meant to get you thinking about how you want to be perceived and by whom -- and that shouldn't be a quick process.

2) Develop an identity and a voice.

Once you’ve identified your buyer personas, your brand can start to take shape. That involves creating a brand identity -- the things that make people aware of what your brand is -- and its voice, which is the tone you use in any copy or public communication.

As a writer, I'm particularly interested in the voice aspect -- but what does that like for you? Figuring that out follows a process not unlike the one that’s used to determine your personas. But instead of answering questions about your target audience, you’re answering questions that are a bit more introspective to your brand. What are its values? What does it represent? How do you want people to talk about you?

Even if you’re not starting from scratch, establishing a strong(er) brand voice can be valuable. Just take the instance of the Zoological Wildlife Foundation -- during its recent rebrand, finding its voice was a top priority. The results? Its overall online presence increased by 343%, with website traffic alone seeing a 63% boost .

3) Have a consistent social media presence.

So, we know who your personas are. And now, we know what to say to them -- and how to say it. But where are they?

Since you might have a clear picture of the different pieces of your audience, it’s important to figure out where they’re spending the most time, especially on social media. We’ve talked before how effective it is to reach people where they're already present -- that includes their online behavior, too.

We recommend checking out Pew Research Center’s Demographics of Social Media Users, which profiles the users of five major social media platforms -- Facebook, Pinterest, Instagram, LinkedIn, and Twitter.

Pay attention close attention to the data. Maybe the majority of your personas spend most of their time on one network. While that doesn’t mean you should ignore the others, it does give you an idea of where to dedicate the most resources.

And once you do establish that presence, maintain it. How many times have you gone to a brand’s Facebook Page only to find that nothing has been posted in the past three months? Chances are, it didn't have a positive impact on your perception.

That can be avoided by diligently planning and scheduling social media posts like you would with any other marketing calendar. Something like our free Social Media Content Calendar can help, and get you thinking about things like the seasonality of what you post. That’s a huge part of staying relevant to your audience -- by sharing content that pertains to what they’re likely thinking about at a given time of year.

4) Blog.

In fact, blogging might be the most fundamental step of inbound marketing. It helps you reach qualified customers, like your personas, by creating the informative content that matches the information they’re searching for. That’s why it’s so important to make it relevant to this audience -- when you’re writing, make sure the content is optimized for those searches.

Believe us -- your personas are definitely looking for the information that you’re able to provide -- if you write about it. After friends and family, blogs are the third most trusted source of information . Plus, that content will also serve as material to populate your social media networks, and we’ve already covered what a crucial part that plays in branding on a budget.

While blogging is fiscally inexpensive, one of the biggest struggles we hear about is the cost of spending time on it. For that, we reference the joke about a doctor asking his patient, “Would you rather work out one hour per day, or be dead 24 hours per day?” The inbound marketing version of that question would ask, "Would you rather blog for one hour each day, or always have insufficient content to draw in visitors?"

Like planning your social media presence, having an editorial calendar for your blog can be helpful in maintaining consistent timing and fresh content. That’s why we put together a free blog editorial calendar template , complete with instructions and content management tips.

5) Make customer service a priority.

When we hear the name “Zappos,” most of us immediately think, “unparalleled customer service.” The online apparel retailer built this level of service into its core approach to doing business -- and into its core values.

Why is that so important? For Zappos, making excellent customer service the cornerstone of its brand actually saved money on marketing and advertising . That’s because it created word-of-mouth among existing and potential customers, which is what we call earned media -- the recognition that your brand has earned , not paid for, from people talking about something remarkable you did. (Psst -- U.S. businesses, as a whole, lose about $41 billion dollars each year because of bad customer service .)

Whether you’re serving customers or clients, the goal is to create a delightful, sharable experience. And when the client or customer experience is a priority, it shouldn’t cost you much for them to talk about it -- remember, your work earned it.

But that revisits the importance of your identity and voice. As you go through these brand-building steps, think about the values that you want to be resonated in those things. Is excellent service one of them? Those values are what shape the brand’s culture, and that influences the voice you project to an audience.

6) Take advantage of co-branding.

I’ll never forget what my colleague, Lisa Toner , told me when I asked her about negotiating co-branding agreements.

"Larger companies may have a large reach,” she said, “but what do they not have?"

When you’re just starting to build a brand, you might not have the reach that Toner’s talking about. You can take the steps to build it, like we’ve described so far, but that takes time. Until then, one way to get your name in front of a broader audience is to partner with a brand that has one.

But don’t just pick any old brand to work with. Make sure it’s one that’s aligned with yours -- the partnership has to make sense in the minds of your audience. Here’s what we recommend in seeking a co-brand:

Get Branding

Building a brand might seem like a huge undertaking, especially when resources are limited. But as we’ve seen, there are plenty of economical ways to not only get started, but to continue the momentum you start with these efforts.

And please, have fun with the process. Of course, there has to be a degree of strategy and logic involved -- that’s why we’ve built the tools to help you determine what the different pieces of your brand will be. But it’s a creative exercise, so keep that in mind if you get bogged down in technicalities.

7 Essentials for Strong Company Branding

Tue, 12 Mar 2019 23:21:05 GMT

Let's say you've come to the difficult realization that quite frankly your brand -- if you can even call it that -- is all over the place. Or perhaps worse, you have a defined brand, but you're noticing that it just doesn't seem to mesh with who you really are and what you really do. Don't panic.

What is Brand Strategy?

Brand strategy is a plan that encompasses specific, long-term goals that can be achieved with the evolution of a successful brand -- the combined components of your company's character that make it identifiable.

(We'll get into that more in a bit.)

A well-defined and executed brand strategy affects all aspects of a business and is directly connected to consumer needs, emotions, and competitive environments.

First, let's clear up the biggest misconception about brand strategy: Your brand is not your product, your logo, your website, or your name.

In fact, your brand is much more than that -- it's the stuff that feels intangible. But it's that hard-to-pin-down feeling that separates powerhouse and mediocre brands from each other.

So to help you rein in what many marketers consider more of an art and less of a science, we've broken down seven essential components of a comprehensive brand strategy that will help keep your company around for ages.

7 Components for a Comprehensive Branding Strategy?

1) Purpose

"Every brand makes a promise. But in a marketplace in which consumer confidence is low and budgetary vigilance is high, it’s not just making a promise that separates one brand from another, but having a defining purpose," explains Allen Adamson , chairman of the

North America region of brand consulting and design firm Landor Associates.

While understanding what your business promises is necessary when defining your brand positioning, knowing why you wake up every day and go to work carries more weight. In other words, your purpose is more specific, in that it serves as a differentiator between you and your competitors.

How can you define your business' purpose? According to Business Strategy Insider , purpose can be viewed in two ways:

Functional: This concept focuses on the evaluations of success in terms of immediate and commercial reasons -- i.e. the purpose of the business is to make money.
Intentional: This concept focuses on success as it relates to the ability to make money and do good in the world.

While making money is important to almost every business, we admire brands that emphasize their willingness to achieve more than just profitability, like IKEA:

IKEA's vision isn't just to sell furniture, but rather, to "create a better everyday life." This approach is appealing to potential customers, as it demonstrates their commitment to providing value beyond the point of sale.

When defining your business' purpose, keep this example in mind. While making money is a priority, operating under that notion alone does little to set your brand apart from others in your industry.

Our advice? Dig a little deeper. If you need inspiration, check out the brands you admire, and see how they frame their mission and vision statements.

2) Consistency

The key to consistency is to avoid talking about things that don’t relate to or enhance your brand. Added a new photo to your business' Facebook Page ? What does it mean for your company? Does it align with your message, or was it just something funny that would, quite frankly, confuse your audience?

In an effort to give your brand a platform to stand on, you need to be sure that all of your messaging is cohesive. Ultimately, consistency contributes to brand recognition, which fuels customer loyalty. (No pressure, right?)

To see a great example of consistency, let's look at Coca-Cola . As a result of its commitment to consistency, every element of the brand's marketing works harmoniously together. This has helped it become one of the most recognizable brands in the world .

Even on the surface of its social media accounts, for example, the seamlessness of its brand is very apparent:

To avoid leaving potential customers struggling to put the disconnected pieces of your business together, consider the benefits of creating a style guide. A style guide can encompass everything from the tone of voice you'll use to the color scheme you'll employ to the way you'll position certain products or services.

By taking the time to define and agree upon these considerations, your brand will benefit as a whole.

2) Consistency

Customers aren't always rational.

How else do you explain the person who paid thousands of dollars more for a Harley rather than buying another cheaper, equally well-made bike? There was an emotional voice in there somewhere, whispering: “Buy a Harley.”

But why?

Harley Davidson uses emotional branding by creating a community around its brand. It began HOG -- Harley Owners Group -- to connect their customers with their brand (and each other).

By providing customers with an opportunity to feel like they're part of a larger group that's more tight-knit than just a bunch of motorcycle riders, Harley Davidson is able to position themselves as an obvious choice for someone looking to purchase a bike.

Why? People have an innate desire to build relationships. Research from psychologists Roy Baumeister and Mark Leary best describes this need in their " belongingness hypothesis ," which states: "People have a basic psychological need to feel closely connected to others, and that caring, affectionate bonds from close relationships are a major part of human behavior."

Not to mention, belongingness -- the need for love, affection, and being part of groups -- falls directly in the middle of Maslow's hierarchy of needs, which aims to categorize different human needs.

T he lesson to be learned? Find a way to connect with your customers on a deeper, more emotional level. Do you give them peace of mind? Make them feel like part of the family? Do you make life easier? Use emotional triggers like these to strengthen your relationship and foster loyalty.

4) Flexibility

In this fast-changing world, marketers must remain flexible to stay relevant. On the plus side, this frees you to be creative with your campaigns.

You may be thinking, "Wait a minute, how am I supposed to remain consistent while also being flexible?"

Good question. While consistency aims to set the standard for your brand, flexibility enables you to make adjustments that build interest and distinguish your approach from that of your competition.

In other words, "effective identity programs require enough consistency to be identifiable, but enough variation to keep things fresh and human," explains president of Peopledesign , Kevin Budelmann.

A great example of this type of strategic balance comes from Old Spice . These days, Old Spice is one of the best examples of successful marketing across the board. However, up until recently, wearing Old Spice was pretty much an unspoken requirement for dads everywhere. Today, it's one of the most popular brands for men of all ages.

The secret? Flexibility.

Aware that it needed to do something to secure its place in the market, Old Spice teamed up with Wieden+Kennedy to position their brand for a new customer base.

Between new commercials, a new website, new packaging, and new product names, Old Spice managed to attract the attention of a new, younger generation by making strategic enhancements to its already strong brand.

So if your old tactics aren’t working anymore, don’t be afraid to change. Just because it worked in the past doesn't mean it's working now.

Take the opportunity to engage your followers in fresh, new ways. Are there some out-of-the-box partnerships your brand can make? Are there attributes about your product you never highlighted? Use those to connect with new customers and remind your old ones why they love you.

5) Employee Involvement

If your brand is playful and bubbly through Twitter engagements, then it wouldn't make sense if a customer called in and was connected with a grumpy, monotone representative, right?

To avoid this type of mismatched experience, take note of Zappos' approach.

If you've ever been on the line with a customer service representative from Zappos, you know what I'm talking about. If you haven't, check out this SlideShare which details some of its most inspiring customer support stories.

Zappos is so committed to ensuring that not only its brand, but all brands, remain consistent across digital and human interactions that they've dedicated an entire department to the cause called Zappos Insights .

6) Loyalty

If you already have people that love you, your company, and your brand, don’t just sit there. Reward them for that love.

These customers have gone out their way to write about you, to tell their friends about you, and to act as your brand ambassadors.

Cultivating loyalty from these people early on will yield more returning customers -- and more profit for your business.

Sometimes, just a thank you is all that's needed. Other times, it's better to go above and beyond. Write them a personalized letter. Sent them some special swag. Ask them to write a review, and feature them prominently on your website. (Or all of the above!)

And while it may have seemed a little out of the ordinary to some folks, for those who know our brand, the gesture made perfect sense.

Loyalty is a critical part of every brand strategy, especially if you're looking to support your sales organization. At the end of the day, highlighting a positive relationship between you and your existing customers sets the tone for what potential customers can expect if they choose to do business with you.

6) Loyalty

If you already have people that love you, your company, and your brand, don’t just sit there. Reward them for that love.

These customers have gone out their way to write about you, to tell their friends about you, and to act as your brand ambassadors.

Cultivating loyalty from these people early on will yield more returning customers -- and more profit for your business.

And while it may have seemed a little out of the ordinary to some folks, for those who know our brand, the gesture made perfect sense.

7) Competitive Awareness

Take the competition as a challenge to improve your own strategy and create greater value in your overall brand. You are in the same business and going after the same customers, right? So watch what they do.

Do some of their tactics succeed? Do some fail? Tailor your brand positioning based on their experience to better your company.

A great example of how to improve your brand by learning from your competitors comes from Pizza Hut :

When a pizza lover posed this question to his Twitter following, Pizza Hut didn't miss a beat, and playfully responded in minutes, before Domino's had a chance to speak up.

If Domino's is keeping an eye on the competitors, they'll know to act fast the next time a situation like this arises.

And while staying in tune with your competitor's strategies is important if you want to enhance your brand, don't let them dictate each and every move you make.

Sure, you probably sell a similar product or service as many other companies, but you're in business because your brand is unique. By harping on every move your competitor makes, you lose that differentiation.

First Step in Starting a Business

Tue, 12 Mar 2019 23:19:29 GMT

BUSINESS STRUCTURE

The first step to starting a small business is determining the right business structure. Determining business structure is an important decision as structure will influence several factors in how the business is run. Structure determines how taxes will be managed, levels of business formality, and liability for owners. To help determine the business structure, the following four steps provide a guide:

FOUR STEPS TO DETERMINE BUSINESS STRUCTURE

STEP ONE - Answer the following questions to help determine whether the structure will be nonprofit or corporation :

Question one: will partners be involved in the business?

Question two: if partners will be involved, to what degree will they be involved, in day-to-day decision-making?

Question three: will the business be involved in raising money ?

If you answered yes to raising money, we suggest reviewing the ‘filing a nonprofit structure.’

See description below.

If you plan to add partners in decision-making, establishing a corporation is recommended.

See corporation description below .

STEP TWO - Determine how much personal liability you intend to have for the business .

Will you be looking to minimize personal risk?

If you answered yes to this question, you will want to keep the business structure simple with yourself and limited partners managing the business. For a simple structure, we suggest reviewing the LLC, which is the most popular form of business structure. The LLC structure protects owner's personal assets from liability if something goes wrong.

See LLC description below.

STEP THREE - Determine how you plan to handle tax on business profits.

Business structure determines how taxes will be paid. If you plan to become a public serving entity, we recommend reviewing the nonprofit structure, which offers tax exemption by filing 501(c)(3) status (federal tax exemption).

See nonprofit section below.

STEP FOUR - Determine how easy is it to set up and maintain compliance with your state.

Most business structures are relatively easy to set up and maintain. If you are considering a corporation or nonprofit organization, these structures involve more complex factors, and may require advice from an expert or attorney.

To recap, the four most popular business structures include: LLC, corporation, nonprofit, and sole-proprietorships.

LLC - LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY

The Limited Liability Company (LLC) is the most popular business structure for entrepreneurs and startups. They are also relatively easy to set up. If you are looking for a simple structure, seek to minimize risk, and are not looking to go public in the future, or offer company shares, we recommend the LLC.

BENEFIT OF LLC STRUCTURES

Liability Protection offer LLC's significantly more protection than Sole Proprietorship’s without having to involve partners; LLC status adds another layer of protection with a corporate veil, which separates you and any existing or potential partners from liability.

What does this mean? The LLC protects owner's personal assets such as homes, cars, cash and property from being subject in a lawsuit (as long as these assets are not tied to your business).

Tax Options - an LLC also offers options and flexibility with filing taxes. The LLC offers a corporate veil, a pass-through tax entity, which means you only getting taxed on money that you personally take out from the LLC (your personal income).

Simple Filing - simple filing offers less extensive paperwork in order to establish and maintain.

Single Membership - most states also allow ‘single member LLC’ status, requiring no partners.

SOLE PROPRIETOR

If you do not intend to have business partners, are providing a product or service to customers, and have not established a legal entity for your business, then your business structure will automatically be ‘ Sole Proprietor .’

A Sole Proprietorship is the simplest form of a business structure. In fact, if you intend to maintain a Sole Proprietorship, you will not have to file any forms to set it up as there are no forms to file.

Keep in mind after filing your Sole Proprietorship, you will need to maintain IRS requirements for LLC and review guidelines for your specific state requirements to maintain compliant.

CORPORATION

A corporation is a more complicated business structure. Setting up the a corporation involves substantial guidelines and parameters, which involve shareholders, a board of directors and corporate officers.

Unlike LLCs, corporations are required to pay corporate taxes, unless they’re granted S-Corp status by the IRS. If you are considering a corporation business structure, we recommend hiring an attorney to help establish your unique needs to ensure everything gets set up correctly.

NONPROFIT ORGANIZATION

Filing a nonprofit structure is much more complex than filing a sole proprietorship, LLC, or corporation. The IRS recognizes nonprofits as viable business entities, therefore, there are complexities involved. The process of setting up a nonprofit typically takes several weeks, if not months, to complete.

To establish a nonprofit organization, completion and submission of the correct forms to both state agencies and the IRS will be required. To attain 501(c)(3) status, or federal tax exemption, nonprofits are required to meet specific criteria and maintain these guidelines over time.

As many nonprofit organizations become established to support complex causes, and to accomplish initiatives on behalf of causes, such as adoption, child services, education, healthcare, environmental protection, learning initiatives or religious purposes, managing the structure can be complex.

Four Primary Nonprofit Corporation Structures

Member Serving Nonprofit - to be considered a member serving nonprofit organizational structure the organization must be formed as a co-op, trade union, credit union, mutual society, industry associations, or sports club, to benefit a specific group of people.

Community Serving Nonprofit - To be considered a Community Serving Nonprofit, the sole purpose of the organization must be to serve medical research, human service programs, education, health services, and other resources specific to a certain community or geographic area.

Private Foundations - to be considered a private foundation, this structure must derive primary financial support from contributions of individuals, a family, or a corporation. Foundations are subject to more restrictive governing rules and operational guidelines.

Public Charity - to be considered a public charity, an organization must receive at least 1/3 of its annual income from a public entity, unit of government, or organization formed specifically to raise funds for schools, hospitals, governmental units or publicly supported charities.

OTHER KEY TERMS:

DBA (Doing Business As) - the DBA isn’t a business structure, as it offers the ability to legally conduct business under an alternative name. Established LLCs and corporations may file multiple DBAs, offering the ability to remain relevant by rebranding to reach a new markets.

*This article is meant to be informational and not meant to provide legal advice on establishing a business structure. For legal advice, we recommend contacting a business attorney in your state. For further information, review your state’s SBA, the IRS website and other business resources specific to your state.

How to Get More Done by Doing Less

Thu, 21 Feb 2019 11:00:00 GMT

Productivity is generally thought of in terms of, “How do I get more done?”

If we’re lucky, we work in teams and environments where that perspective is at least softened by combining it with a measure of efficiency or impact, but even then we don’t fully escape the rat-race-like pursuit of more .

In fact, we usually answer “How are you?” with “I’ve been very busy.” And we wear our 80-hour work weeks like a badge of honor.

Speaking on his upcoming book, The Calm Company , Basecamp cofounder Jason Fried digs into the dangers of this troubling trend:

This was similar to the mindspace that I too occupied when I stumbled into mindfulness and meditation 18 months ago.

At the time, I had been working on my own startups for about nine hours a day, and even though I had the flexibility to work in any way that I wanted, I was in the mindset of doing more , working longer hours. I was chasing my own tail, and a proposal to sit still to meditate for 15 minutes a day, provoked a simple reaction: “Who has time for that?”

If you've heard or read anything on meditation and mindfulness, that shouldn't sound too unfamiliar. But in this article I’d like to reveal a couple of tactics where I optimized for less , only to get an exponential more on the other side. These tactics span different areas of my life, and each has their individual, contextual goals -- but they are all intertwined and focused ultimately on my experience as I pursue various projects, goals and dreams in life.

I literally stumbled into mindfulness and meditation via a prompt from my therapist who had intervened as my monkey mind was running havoc and jeopardizing most good things in my life. I still work towards mindfulness today because I have experienced significant changes in my life and work as a result of my practice.

So here's how I have managed to gain more in my life as a result of pursuing less in some situations.

Plan Slower Mornings

Waking early in the mornings has always been one of the easier things for me to do. In fact, I used to believe that I personally needed very little sleep -- until I learned about the real effects of sleep debt over time.

In the past, I would use an early morning start as a way to get a headstart on the day ahead. I can remember during my time at WooThemes, I was at the office before 7am on most days. The rest of the team only arrived from 9am onwards, and most of our remote team would only sign on much later. Those first two hours were glorious though: I could just hack away at my to-do list for two hours straight without anyone or any notifications interrupting my flow.

And then I had kids.

For any parent reading this, you’ll know that babies and toddlers operate on their own schedule, which means that none of my mornings were as predictable or within my control as before. Initially, I completely resisted this change and tried to stick to my previously focused and productive morning routine. I also tried various iterations to this routine, from waking up even earlier to trying to get work done while giving Adii junior his morning bottle.

Suffice to say, by trying to multitask, I wasn’t being a great dad and I wasn’t doing great work either -- everyone was getting a compromised result.

Fast-forward to today, and my morning routine looks something like this: I wake up at 5am on weekdays. I immediately get a cup coffee and breakfast (the same every morning to avoid having to make a decision). The next hour or so I spend reading, and I then meditate for 15 to 20 minutes. Then from about 6am onwards, I get my two boys ready for school. This means on most mornings I only get to my desk (and work) at 8am.

With the benefit of hindsight and comparison, I can now see how singular and rushed my old morning routine was. Because my goal was to get to work as quickly and efficiently as possible, it meant that any friction or obstacles along the way had a major negative impact on my experience. And a crappy morning would eventually turn into an even crappier day on most occasions.

These days, by the time I get to work I have a sense of space and calm. No rush to do anything specific. No existential fear about not answering yesterday’s emails quickly enough.

Instead I find that I’m more aware of the whole day and week’s landscape, which has helped me prioritize the things I need to work on (versus the things I can delegate or allow to drop off my radar).

Curiously I have also found that the first hour or so in the morning has not become less productive at all, and I still often manage to do some of my best work in that time (especially when I manage to also prioritize the most important task for the day during this time). For example, it's currently just after 9am as I’m writing this article, and I find the words flowing easily.

In the past, I used to run out of steam later in the day due to being so rushed. This inevitably meant that I either felt that I hadn’t accomplished enough on that day, or that I would try working until late in the evening to make up for lost time. We should however all agree that our brains do get tired , and if we continue to push ourselves beyond the point of exhaustion, we end up merely sitting in front of our computers, not getting anything done.

Disconnect from Interruptions

Software makers use often use gamification, notifications, and a combination of instant gratification and FOMO to keep us as engaged with their products as possible.

I'd never given much thought to how the programs and apps I use on a daily basis impact my productivity -- until I read Cal Newport’s book “ Deep Work: Rules for focused success in a distracted world ” earlier this year and was introduced to the concept of attention residue.

To explain what attention residue is and how it impacts us, Newport references a 2009 paper titled Why Is It So Hard to Do My Work?” from Sophie Leroy, a business school professor at the University of Minnesota. As Leroy explains in the paper:

I finished the book in a single sitting, and it prompted me to really investigate my work behaviors. I would like to tell you here that it has helped me to do more deep work, yet I don’t think I have a consistent workflow to do deep work often enough (even though, my awareness of pursuing deep work is more developed).

The book did however prompt me to do something more radical: I almost entirely switched off my phone without entirely switching it off. My iPhone is now permanently on silent, and has the “Do Not Disturb” feature switched on at all times.

I also disabled all notifications -- badges on my icons, popup notifications or notifications on my lock screen. The only notifications that makes it to my lock screen are from WhatsApp, which I only use for family and close friends. And yes -- I also disabled Slack notifications, which is the primary communication tool we use for Conversio, a team of 14 remote team members.

This has turned my phone into less of an attention-demanding force. I don’t get interrupted or distracted as often as I used to. This helped me read 22 books in about ten weeks because I picked up a book when I was bored instead of fiddling on my phone.

I also started writing more, which helped me get more thoughts out of my mind. And most importantly, limiting my phone time has without a doubt helped me sleep better (I have always struggled to fall asleep because I struggle to switch off my thinking mind).

The flipside of this is also true: whenever I now pick up my phone, I can pay attention to the possible interactions that it presents. If an old friend sent me a message on Facebook, I can invest in replying purposefully instead of both reading and replying in a fleeting moment (when the notification of the message popped up).

I don’t have any scientific evidence to determine how these decisions have impacted my attention residue. What I do know is that by allowing less external sources to demand my attention, I have been more purposeful to prioritise the most important things to me -- in a way that also brings more clarity to my life.

Change Your Reading Habits

Consider for a moment that much of your daily communication consists of reading emails, Slack messages, texts, tweets, or comments on your latest Instagram photo.

A big part of our communication is in written form, which means that we need to read in order to respond and interact. Beyond that you are likely reading articles (blog posts) like these, short rants your dad has posted on Facebook, or a firehose of 140 character opinions on Twitter.

Even if you aren't reading books everyday, you are reading a lot.

A couple of months ago, I hit a wall. I was consuming a lot of content, but not much of it really resonated with me. To link this back to my previous point about distractions, there was a particularly relevant quote from Cal Newport’s book that best represented my reading habits at the time:

So I made a simple change: I de-prioritized most shorter-form content, and started dedicating my reading time to full-length books. Mostly classic fiction -- nothing that had a direct tie back to work.

I have now read 40 books this year already. I’ve worked my way through older classics from authors like Viktor Frankl, Kurt Vonnegut, Truman Capote, Herman Hesse, Marcus Aurelius, and Alain de Botton. By consuming less modern day content, I give my mind a much needed break from the usual written content I consume online.

Tackle a Big Non-Work Goal

On New Year’s day 2016, I set one goal: I wanted to complete my first marathon (and do it under four hours.)

When I started my training a month later, I also stumbled into mindfulness. The combination of these two things soon had an unexpected impact on the way I led our company.

Since my primary goal was not about work, it meant that the first priority each week was planning my daily runs. Work started to fill the spaces around these more rigid blocks. As a result, I starting giving myself more mental space from my work than ever before. Even catching up on work in the evening -- a usual habit of mine -- wasn’t an option after a three-hour long run -- I was just too tired to work.

Working less wasn't part of my plan or intention, but it had a profound impact on our journey at Conversio. For the first time in my entrepreneurial journey, it felt like I wasn’t tumbling up and down constantly on the proverbial rollercoaster anymore. And since I felt more grounded in my day-to-day, my leadership style started to reflect this attitude. As a result, the team was doing great work in a stable, safe environment.

The results in 2016 spoke for itself: we 3x’ed our revenue, reached profitability and celebrated with a major rebrand and product update. This was clearly a consequence of the team feeling more stable.

I then stepped into 2017 with the aim of applying all of my ambition towards really growing our business. I started pushing and pulling wherever I saw a gap. I started conversations that proposed new ideas that questioned previous decisions, and recommend brand new directions.

During the first quarter of 2017, I was focused on the wrong things, which made my behaviour erratic and meant that I lumped a lot of stress on our team. The team was confused, felt less secure, and wasn't collaborating at our previous levels.

As these things go, the team eventually managed to pierce my stubborn drive forward and I received the message: things were not as great as they were before.

Pretty much as soon as I started unraveling my own motivations underpinning my behaviour (primarily, seeking more and faster growth), the team got back to a calmer, more efficient collaborative flow once again. We once again found alignment on both our core values, as well as shared goals, which meant we were making progress again. For the first four months of the year, our revenue only increased by 8% and in the four months since we’re up 24%. (Naturally the change in our growth rate was a result of many different things, but this change was at the core of many of those.)

When I was working towards a goal outside of work that was just for myself, it gave me more clarity in our mission and helped me be a better leader.

Embrace Not Having All the Answers Right Now

I have an annoying tendency to feel like I need to answer every question in a group setting, simply because I'm the leader.

In many situations, this isn't an inherently bad attitude to have. Afterall, I am the leader, and in many situations I have the context, knowledge and experience to give a valuable answer.

But there's a downside. Many times individual team members will just ask me directly for the answer, which means not involving the team and possibly excluding different perspectives and opinions. Once I've addressed a question, I sometimes shut the conversation down because my answer is deemed as authoritative or final (even when that is not the intention). That's not great for inclusion and collaboration.

In recent months, I have been trying to avoid being the first to answer questions in meetings. Not only has this alleviated some of the demands on my time, but more importantly it means that the team is coming to more collaborative, creative answers on their own.

Get More Done By Doing Less

The truth -- even for startups -- is that most of the time it doesn’t really matter whether you finish something today or tomorrow, reach a goal this week or next month, or grow by 5% instead of 10%.

Yes, there are some exceptions to this. But for everything else, you can probably pursue the less obvious choice and route, while not compromising on your goal at all. In fact, you might be surprised that doing less actually helps you exceed your goals and expectations.

Your Content Strategy Needs More Consistency

Thu, 28 Sep 2017 12:00:00 GMT

If I told you that content creation is a vital part of every company’s marketing strategy, your response would probably be a sarcastic “Well, duh. Thanks for that cutting-edge insight, John.”

But how you address that might depend on what your goals are for your content and who your audience is. But there’s one rule that holds true no matter what: Content consistency is key.

Why Focus on Consistency?

If you’re not consistent, you’re not taking advantage of all the opportunities you have to connect with your audience. Creating a few pieces of content here and there might help someone understand a topic better, but they won’t help you hit all of those touch points between your brand and your audience -- and they won’t help you build a meaningful relationship with it. To do that, you need to be a consistent content creator. It’s that simple.

What’s not so simple is breaking down the nuances within your audience and your processes to deliver not just any old content consistently, but content that meets its needs in a way that attracts it to your brand.

Think of it this way: Picture your favorite actor. This person is probably in a few of your favorite movies, consistently delivering amazing performances, and you might find yourself interested in the projects he or she stars in, simply because you know and love his or her previous work. That’s powerful.

With consistent, engaging content, you can hit touch points on your audience members’ online journeys, build connections with them, and position your brand to be top-of-mind when they think of their most trusted and liked resources. (This approach to branding and relationship-building is one I go into in much more depth in my business book, Top of Mind .)

But if you want to get started creating effective content consistently now, here are five essential tips.

How to Create a Strategy That Works

1) Document an actionable content strategy.

While 89% of B2B organizations are actually utilizing content marketing, only 37% have put together a documented strategy around that content’s creation and distribution.

Creating this kind of strategy is similar to setting goals for yourself: You’re more likely to achieve them if you write them down and break them into actionable steps to hold yourself accountable than if you decide to wing it and hope for the best. The same applies to content -- you need to write down what you want to achieve and how you want to get there.

That last part -- how you want to get there -- is particularly important. You can spend all the time in the world documenting your strategy, but if it isn’t set up to make consistent execution feasible, it won’t help you very much. So set goals, like your overall mission, audience personas, content mix, and promotion tactics. Then, make them actionable by laying the foundation for your process that makes consistency simpler right in your document.

2) Make use of a knowledge bank.

One of the biggest challenges inherent in creating loads of content is keeping track of it all, and organizing all the insights you’ve learned about your customers and your industry -- and leveraging them to create more than just one piece of content.

Enter the knowledge bank , which allows you to store and organize key information about your company, your content, and your customers. It makes creating multiple pieces and types of content that speak directly to your audience’s wants and needs much easier -- not to mention, it helps with consistency, because the more seamless the process of creating, finding, and managing your content, the easier it will be to do so in a quicker and more consistent manner.

3) Build the best team you can find.

With an actionable strategy in place and a system for leveraging your company’s expertise, it’s time to start actually creating content — and for that, you’ll need a talented team.

Sure, you could possibly write and promote all your content yourself -- if you really wanted to that -- but it’s difficult to scale this way. You’re busy with dozens of other tasks on your plate, so you’ll likely end up sacrificing either quality, or consistency.

That's where a great content marketing team and a network of freelance writers come into play. My team at Influence & Co. has found a lot of success with this process, which starts with a thought leader’s expertise, a freelancer’s skills at turning that insight into a written piece, and our team’s ability to strategize, edit, publish, and promote that content. When every person focuses on his or her strengths, your content will shine, and you’ll find yourself publishing more consistently than if you tried to do it all yourself.

4) Get comfortable with your editorial calendar.

An editorial calendar can do so much more than set the schedule for your upcoming posts -- it can also be a place to brainstorm ideas, plan your social media campaigns, and organize everything you’ve got coming down the pike.

That can help streamline the entire content process because everything is in one place, allowing you to see where you have gaps, and where you have excess content. Once you settle into your schedule and process, you can get even more efficient, giving yourself more time to focus on creating content, rather than organizing it.

A content calendar can also help track your successes and shortcomings, so you can make more informed decisions in the future. If, for example, you find that content posted at a certain time of day -- or a particular day of the week -- tends to outperform the rest, you can make changes accordingly. That way, you’re consistently on schedule and maximizing your impact.

5) Make distribution a priority, not an afterthought.

Each of these steps will help you create content consistently, but you can’t stop there. If you’re not also distributing and amplifying your content consistently and strategically, then all you’ve really accomplished is improving your content production -- not your content marketing.

Don’t wait until an article is published, for example, before you start thinking about how you’ll use it as a tool to connect with your audience. Your content distribution plan should take as much priority as your content development process -- content that you sit on or passively distribute won’t accomplish much.

Content creation can be a chore -- if you don’t know where to start when it comes to developing or distributing your work. But it’s an essential component of your company’s marketing strategy. Consistent content is key to keeping your audience engaged, your brand top-of-mind, and your content investment worthwhile. With these five simple tactics, your path to consistency will become much clearer.